BLOG

13 JANUARY, 2023

TATA POWER TO INVEST AROUND RS 70,000 CRORE TO COME UP WITH A 10 GIGAWATT SOLAR AND WIND UNITS IN TAMIL NADU OVER A PERIOD OF FIVE TO SEVEN YEARS. 

 

12 JANUARY, 2023

WONDERLA HAS LAND BANK OF AROUND 220 ACRES. 

 

11 JANUARY, 2023

GOVERNMENT OF UTTAR PRADESH, MADHYA PRADESH AND PUNJAB ARE VERY KEEN TO HAVE WONDERLA AS TOURISM DESTINATION IN THEIR RESPECTIVE STATES. 

 

10 JANUARY, 2023

WONDERLA KOCHI PARK WAS LAUNCHED WITH TICKET PRICE OF RS 100 AND BANGALORE PARK WAS LAUNCHED WITH TICKET PRICE OF RS 250. TODAY TICKET PRICE OF KOCHI PARK IS RS 1,000 AND FOR BANGALORE PARK IS RS 1,200. COMPANY INCREASED ITS TICKET BY 10% ANNUALLY. 

 

9 JANUARY, 2023

WONDERLA HAS COMMENCED CONSTRUCTION OF ITS FOURTH THEME PARK IN ODISHA. LAND AREA OF THIS PARK IS AROUND 50 ACRES AND ITS LEASED TO COMPANY BY GOVERNMENT OF ODISHA. 

 

8 JANUARY, 2023

WONDERLA HAS C APACITY OF 12,000 GUEST DAILY BUT CURRENT FOOTFALL IN ITS PARKS IS AROUND 4000-5000. 

 

7 JANUARY, 2023

INDIA’S WEDDING INDUSTRY IS VALUED AT AROUND $160.5 BILLION IN 2020 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH $414.2 BILLION BY 2030. WONDERLA HAS HALL IN ITS BANGALORE PARK WHICH COMPANY GIVES OUT FOR WEDDING. IT HAS CAPACITY OF AROUND 800 PEOPLE. 

 

6 JANUARY, 2023

WONDERLA HAS ALREADY ACQUIRER LAND FOR ITS UPCOMING PARK IN CHENNAI AND CONSTRUCTION WORK HAS BEEN STARTED. COMPANY WILL INVEST AROUND RS 300 CR IN THIS NEW PARK IN CHENNAI. AND THEY HAVE LEASED 50.63 ACRE LAND FOR 90 YEARS IN THE VILLAGE OF KUMARBASTA, KHORDA DISTRICT IN BHUBANESHWAR, ODISHA. COMPANY WILL INVEST AROUND RS 115 CR IN NEW PARK IN ODISHA. THE NEW PARK WILL BE ON ASSET LIGHT BUSINESS MODEL. 

 

5 JANUARY, 2023

WONDERLA INTRODUCES ONE NEW RIDE IN EVERY TWO YEARS. 

 

4 JANUARY, 2023

AMUSEMENT THEME PARKS IN FOREIGN COUNTRIES ARE TURNING TO DYNAMIC TICKET PRICING, WHICH CHARGES PARK GOERS MORE WHEN DEMAND IS HIGH AND THUS SPREAD CROWDS OUT MORE EVENLY THROUGHOUT THE YEAR, AS THEY IMPLEMENT BIGGER, COSTLIER AND MORE IMMERSIVE ATTRACTION. COMPARED TO THIS WONDERLA KOCHI PARK WAS LAUNCHED WITH TICKET PRICE OF RS 100 AND BANGALORE PARK WAS LAUNCHED WITH TICKET PRICE OF RS 250. TODAY TICKET PRICE OF KOCHI PARK IS RS 1,000 AND FOR BANGALORE PARK IS RS 1,200. COMPANY INCREASES ITS TICKET BY 10% ANNUALLY. 

 

3 JANUARY, 2023

WONDERLA IS THE ONLY AMUSEMENT PARK IN INDIA WHICH SELLS ALL PACKAGED FOODS, AERATED DRINKS IN PARKS AT MRP. NO OTHER AMUSEMENT THEME PARK COMPANIES IN INDIA SELLS PACKAGED FOODS AND DRINKS AT MRP. 

 

2 JANUARY, 2023

INDIAN AMUSEMENT THEME PARK MARKET WAS VALUED AT AROUND $500 MILLION IN 2022 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH $885 MILLION BY 2028 GROWING AT A CAGR OF 10%. AND GLOBAL AMUSEMENT THEME PARK MARKET WAS VALUED AT $48.26 BILLION IN 2022 AND IS EXPECTED TO BE AROUND $50.97 BILLION IN 2023 AND WILL GROW TO $84.08 BY 2030 GROWING AT A CAGR OF 7.18%. AT PRESENT INDIAN AMUSEMENT THEME PARK MARKET IS JUST 1% OF THE TOTAL GLOBAL AMUSEMENT THEME PARK INDUSTRY. IT SHOWS INDIAN INDIAN AMUSEMENT THEME PARK MARKET IS HIGHLY UNDERVALUED. 

 

1 JANUARY, 2023

AMUSEMENT PARKS IN INDIA CONTRIBUTES 40% OF AMUSEMENT THEM PARK IN CHENNAI. 

 

31 DECEMBER, 2023

AMUSEMENT PARKS IN INDIA RECEIVES REVENUES OF 75-80% FROM ENTRY FEES, FOOD AND BEVERAGES 18-23%, RESORTS AND RENTAL 2%, COMPARED TO GLOBAL AMUSEMENT THEME PARKS RECEIVES REVENUES OF 31-35% FROM ENTRY FEES, 32-35% FROM FOOD AND BEVERAGES AND 35-37% FROM RESORTS AND RENTALS. 

 

30 DECEMBER, 2023

WONDERLA HAS AN IN HOUSE RIDE MANUFACTURING FACILITY IN KOCHI. THE BENEFIT OF MANUFACTURING THE RIDES IN HOUSE IS THAT THE COST IS 1/3RD THE COST IT WOULD HAVE TO PAY IF IT PROCURE THE RIDES FROM EXTERNAL VENDORS. OTHER AMUSEMENT PARK COMPANIES SPEND LOT OF MONEY IN BUYING NEW RIDES FROM VENDORS. 

 

29 DECEMBER, 2023

WONDERLA WILL OPEN ONE NEW AMUSEMENT THEME PARK IN EVERY THREE YEAR BU THIS WONDERLA WILL BE ABLE TO CREATE A MONOPOLY IN AMUSEMENT THEME PARK INDUSTRY IN INDIA. 

 

28 DECEMBER, 2023

PER CAPITA SPENDING ON AMUSEMENT THEME PARKS IN INDIA IS JUST $0.35 COMPARED TO $2,900 IN U.S AND $3.5 IN CHINA. I KNOW THERE IS HUGE DIFFERENCE IN PER CAPITA INCOME OF U.S AMD INDIA BUT THE MAIN THING TO COMPARE IS THAT THE AMUSEMENT THEME PARK CONCEPT HAS NOT EVEN STARTED IN INDIA. IN COMING YEARS WE MIGHT SEE THE CONCEPT OF AMUSEMENT THEME PARKS IN INDIA. 

 

27 DECEMBER, 2023

ONLY 2.14% OF INDIAN POPULATION VISITED AMUSEMENT THEME PARKS IN INDIA COMPARED TO 44% POPULATION VISITED AMUSEMENT THEME PARKS IN U.S AND 24% IN CHINA. GLOBALLY 68% OF POPULATION OF DEVELOPED COUNTRIES VISITED AMUSEMENT THEME PARKS. 

 

26 DECEMBER, 2023

ONLY 30 MILLION PEOPLE VISITED AMUSEMENT THEME PARKS IN INDIA IN 2022 COMPARED TO 140.5 MILLION PEOPLE IN U.S AND 82 MILLION PEOPLE IN CHINA. 

 

25 DECEMBER, 2023

INDIA IS THE ONLY COUNTRY WHICH HAS MARKET SIZE OF AMUSEMENT THEME PARKS IN MILLION IT IS AT $500 MILLION COMPARED TO $24.1 BILLION IN U.S, $5.3 BILLION IN CHINA, $1.6 BILLION IN AUSTRALIA. THIS SHOWS INDIAN AMUSEMENT THEME PARK SECTOR IS HIGHLY UNDERVALUED. 

 

24 DECEMBER, 2023

INDIA HAS LOWEST NUMBER OF AMUSEMENT THEME PARKS WHICH IS JUST 25 AS COMPARED TO FRANCE 1348, U.S 620, CHINA 160, ITALY 107, U.K 523, SPAIN 134, IRELAND 102. THIS SHOWS INDIAN AMUSEMENT THEME PARK SECTOR HAS NOT EVEN STARTED IT IS HIGHLY UNDERVALUED AND IT IS AT INITIAL STAGE. 

 

23 DECEMBER, 2023

WONDERLA HAS LAND BANK OF AROUND 220 ACRES. 

 

22 DECEMBER, 2023

WONDERLA HAVE COMMENCED CONSTRUCTION OF ITS FOURTH THEME PARK IN ODISHA. LAND AREA OF THIS PARK IS AROUND 50 ACRES AND ITS LEASED TO COMPANY BY GOVERNMENT OF ODISHA. 

 

21 DECEMBER, 2023

WONDERLA HAS STARTED BUSINESS OF AMUSEMENT THEME PARKS IN YEAR 2000. COMPANY HAS 3 AMUSEMENT PARKS, 1 HOTEL RESORT, 10 BANQUET HALLS, 162 TOTAL RIDES, 110 ACRES LAND AREA COVERED, 33 LAKH FOOTFALL IN FY23 AND 39 MILLION VISITORS SINCE YEAR 2000. 

 

20 DECEMBER, 2023

THERE ARE ONLY 3 LISTED PLAYERS IN AMUSEMENT THEME PARKS SECTOR IN INDIA. SALES OF WONDERLA INCREASES FROM RS 282 CR IN 2019 TO RS 429 CR IN 2023. ITS NET PROFIT INCREASES FROM RS 55 CR IN 2019 TO RS 148 CR IN 2023. ITS EPS INCREASED FROM RS 9.81 IN 2019 TO RS 26.33 IN 2023. BY SEEING THE FINANCIALS EVEN NICCO PARKS LOOKS GOOD. ITS SALES INCREASED FROM RS 55 CR IN 2019 TO RS 76 CR IN 2023. ITS NET PROFIT INCREASED FROM RS 8 CR IN 2019 TO RS 19 CR IN 2023. ITS EPS INCREASED FROM RS 2 CR IN 2019 TO RS 4.82. 

 

19 DECEMBER, 2023

TELEVISION VIEWING IN U.S FELL BELOW 50% FOR FIRST TIME. 

 

18 DECEMBER, 2023

U.S LOST MILLIONAIRES IN 2022. ABOUT 1.7 MILLION U.S ADULTS ARE NO LONGER MILLIONAIRES. 

 

17 DECEMBER, 2023

GOVERNMENT APPROVES RS 63,000 CR FUND FOR E-BUSES. ONLY OLECTRA GREENTECH.

 

16 DECEMBER, 2023

U.S HAS 620 AMUSEMENT THEME PARKS AND BHARAT HAS ONLY 25 AMUSEMENT THEME PARKS. THIS SHOWS AMUSEMENT THEME PARK SECTOR IN INDIA HAS NOT EVEN STARTED OR WE CAN SAY IT ON VERY INITIAL STAGES. I THINK EARLIER THERE WAS NOT CULTURE TO SPEND ON LEISURE IN INDIA DUE TO LOW CAPITA INCOME. BUT NOW DUE TO INCREASE IN PER CAPITA INCOME WE CAN SEE SPENDING ON LEISURE IN INDIA IN COMING YEARS. 

 

15 DECEMBER, 2023

LATEST UPDATES ON JAY JALARAM TECHNOLOGIES :1) COMPANY ENTERED INTO ADVERTISING AGREEMENT WITH ITW CATALYST PVT LTD FOR IRELAND’S MEN’S CRICKET JERSEY LEADING SPONSORSHIP RIGHTS AND CERTAIN OTHER ADVERTISING RIGHTS IN RELATION TO THE INDIAN TOUR OF IRELAND CRICKET T20 SERIES, 2) COMPANY OPENED 20 NEW STORES ACROSS BHARAT FROM 1ST APRIL 2023 TO 30TH JUNE 2023. 3) COMPANY ENTERED INTO AGREEMENT WITH M/S ABSOLUTE SOFT SYSTEM PVT LTD FOR THE PURCHASE OF MOBILE SOFTWARE WHICH WILL BE INSTALLED BY THE COMPANY IN THE MOBILE PHONES THAT THE COMPANY WILL SELL ON THE EMI BASIS. 4) COMPANY HAS MORE THAN 110 STORES ACROSS INDIA AND 10 STORES ACROSS UP. 5) COMPANY PLANS TO OPEN NEW STORES IN DIFFERENT STATES AND UNION TERRITORIES OF INDIA. COMPANY HAS ACQUIRED 59% STAKE IN HEAR MORE TECHLIFE WHICH SELLS WIRELESS HEADPHONES, WIRELESS EARPODS, SMARTWATCHES, CABLES, CHARGER, NECK BANDS ETC. 6) FINANCIALS: COMPANY’S NET SALES WAS RS 249 CR UP 36% FROM FY22. ITS NET PROFIT IS RS 2 CR UP 196% FROM FY22. ITS EPS IS RS 2.55. ITS DEBT TO EQUITY IS 0.85. 

 

14 DECEMBER, 2023

PENETRATION RATE OF SMART TV’S IN THE OVERALL TV SEGMENT IN INDIA IS 93%. 

 

13 DECEMBER, 2023

INDIA’S SMART TV MARKET SIZE WAS AROUND $9.88 BILLION IN 2022 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH $11.7 BILLION IN 2023 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH $32.57 BILLION BY 2030 GROWING AT A CAGR OF 16.7%. 

 

12 DECEMBER, 2023

INDIA’S CONSUMER DURABLE MARKET WAS VALUED AT $9.84 BILLION IN 2022 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH $21.18 BILLION IN 2026. 

 

11 DECEMBER, 2023

INDIAN ELECTRIC TWO WHEELER MARKET IS EXPECTED TO REACH 17.60 MILLION BY 2030 FROM 0.75 MILLION IN 2022. 

 

10 DECEMBER, 2023

INDIAN ELECTRIC TWO WHEELER MARKET IS EXPECTED TO BE OVER 80% OF THE OVERALL TWO WHEELER MARKET BY 2030. 

 

9 DECEMBER, 2023

GLOBAL EV TWO WHEELER MARKET WAS VALUED ATN $108.58 BILLION IN 2022 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH $181.11 BILLION BY 2030. 

 

8 DECEMBER, 2023

WHEN WE LOOK AROUND THE PEOPLE FROM AGE GROUP OF 18-50 YEARS ALMOST MAJORITY OF THEM USES EARPODS AND SMARTWATCHES. IN COLLEGES ALMOST EVERY STUDENT AND EVERY MILLENNIAL AND GEN Z NOW A DAYS USES WIRELESS EARPODS AND SMARTWATCHES. THEY FEEL THAT USING WIRELESS EARPODS AND SMARTWATCHES MAKE THEM LOOK COOL. IN SMARTWATCHES PEOPLE CHANGES THE BELT OF SMARTWATCHES ACCORDING TO THEIR CLOTHES TO MATCH IT. PLUS USING IT AS FASHION IT ALSO HELPS THEM TO CHECK THEIR HEALTH IN SMARTWATCH. THE DEMAND OF WEARABLE DEVICES REMAIN UNAFFECTED BY INFLATION BECAUSE CONSUMER TEND TO TREAT THESE PRODUCT AS FASHION LIFESTYLE PRODUCTS. ACTUALLY EARLIER WEARABLE DEVICES WERE USED AS A NECESSITY BUT NOW IT HAS TURNED INTO FASHION CATEGORY. SO NOW THE TERM OR NAME WEARABLE DEVICE IS CHANGED OR TRANSFORM INTO FASHION ELECTRONICS ACCESSORIES. THIS TRANSFORMATION OF WEARABLE DEVICES INTO FASHION ELECTRONICS ACCESSORIES WILL BOOST THE DEMAND OF WEARABLE DEVICES.  

 

7 DECEMBER, 2023

OUT OF THE TOTAL 504.1 MILLION UNITS OF WEARABLE DEVICES FORECAST TO BE SHIPPED WORLDWIDE THIS YEAR, INDIA IS EXPECTED TO ACCOUNT FOR 130-135 MILLION OR AROUND 26%. LAST YEAR INDIA SHIPPED AROUND 100 MILLION WEARABLE DEVICE UNITS. GLOBAL WEARABLE DEVICE MARKET WILL REACH 629.4 MILLION UNITS BY 2027. IN INDIA AVERAGE SELLING PRICE OF WEARABLE DEVICE IS JUST $23 WHICH IS LOWEST AS COMPARED TO OTHER COUNTRIES. IN 2022 40% OF TOTAL SHIPMENTS OF WEARABLE DEVICE IN INDIA WERE PRICED UNDER RS 2,000. WIRELESS EARPHONES AND HEADPHONES CONTRIBUTED 60% OF INDIAN WEARABLE DEVICES SHIPMENTS. 

 

6 DECEMBER, 2023

THE SMARTWATCH SHARE IN INDIA AMONG WEARABLES NEARLY DOUBLED TO 41.4%  IN 2022 FROM 26.8% IN 2021. SMARTWATCHES SEGMENT IN INDIA WILL CROSS 50 MILLION IN 2023 UNITS UP FROM 30.7 MILLION IN 2022. 

 

5 DECEMBER, 2023

PER PERSON VOLUME OF WIRELESS HEADPHONES AND EARPHONES IN INDIA IS JUST 0.07 PIECE. THIS SHOWS WIRELESS HEADPHONES AND EARPHONES MARKET IS HIGHLY UNDERVALUED. 

 

4 DECEMBER, 2023

PER PERSON REVENUE GENERATED FROM WIRELESS HEADPHONES AND EARPHONES IN INDIA IS LOWEST WHICH IS JUST $0.53 COMPARED TO $7.07 IN U.S, $8.32 IN CANADA AND $2.71 IN CHINA. 

 

3 DECEMBER, 2023

INDIAN WIRELESS EARPHONES AND HEADPHONES MARKET WAS VALUED AT $0.75 BILLION IN 2022 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH $0.85 BILLION BY 2027 GROWING AT A CAGR OF 3.11%. 

 

2 DECEMBER, 2023

THE GLOBAL WIRELESS EARPHONES AND HEADPHONES MARKET WAS VALUED AR AROUND $22.3 BILLION IN 2022 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH $35.2 BILLION BY 2028 GROWING AT A CAGR OF 7.9%

 

1 DECEMBER, 2023

INDIAN MOBILE PHONE ACCESSORIES MARKET WAS AROUND $2.23 BILLION IN 2022 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH $4.56 BILLION BY 2030 GROWING AT A CAGR OF 9.72%. 

 

30 NOVEMBER, 2023

INDIA’S SMARTPHONE PENETRATION WILL INCREASE TO 96% BY 2040 FROM 71% AT PRESENT. 

 

29 NOVEMBER, 2023

IN INDIA PENETRATION OF SMARTPHONE IN RURAL AREAS HAS INCREASED RAPIDLY. IN JHARKHAND 61.7% OF RURAL POPULATION HAS SMARTPHONE IN 2023 COMPARED TO 17.6% IN 2018. IN ODISHA 64.1% OF RURAL POPULATION HAS SMARTPHONES IN 2023 COMPARED TO 21.9% IN 2018. IN WEST BENGAL 65.7% OF RURAL POPULATION HAS SMARTPHONE IN 2023 COMPARED TO 27.7% IN 2018. IN TRIPURA 68.8% OF RURAL POPULATION HAD SMARTPHONES. UTTAR PRADESH 67.8% OF RURAL POPULATION HAD SMARTPHONES. BIHAR 64.1% OF RURAL POPULATION HAS SMARTPHONES, GUJARAT 96% OF RURAL POPULATION HAD SMARTPHONES, HIMACHAL PRADESH 95% OF RURAL POPULATION HAD SMARTPHONES, MANIPUR 91.9% OF RURAL POPULATION HAD SMARTPHONES, KERALA 97.6% OF RURAL POPULATION HAD SMARTPHONES, MIZORAM 94.9% OF RURAL POPULATION HAD SMARTPHONES, PUNJAB 91.2% OF RURAL POPULATION HAD SMARTPHONE AND SIKKIM 93.7% OF RURAL POPULATION HAD SMARTPHONES. 

 

28 NOVEMBER, 2023

AT PRESENT GLOBALLY THERE ARE OVER 11.70 BILLION MOBILE IOT CONNECTIONS TODAY, WHICH SURPASSES THE CURRENT WORLD POPULATION OF 8.03 BILLION. 

 

27 NOVEMBER, 2023

THERE ARE TOTAL 7.33 BILLION PEOPLE USING MOBILE PHONE. MEANS AROUND 91.21% OF WORLD’S POPULATION IS USING MOBILE AT PRESENT. 

 

26 NOVEMBER, 2023

THERE ARE TOTAL 6.92 BILLION SMARTPHONE USERS IN THE WORLD TODAY. MEANS 86.11% OF WORLD’S POPULATION HAVE SMARTPHONES TODAY. 

 

25 NOVEMBER, 2023

GLOBAL PHONE ACCESSORIES MARKET WAS VALUED AT $275.54 BILLION IN 2022 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH $426.78 BILLION BY 2030 GROWING AT A CAGR OF 5%. 

 

24 NOVEMBER, 2023

GLOBAL SMART PHONE MARKET WAS VALUED AT AROUND $520 BILLION IN 2022 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH $978 BILLION BY 2030 GROWING AT A CAGR OF 6.8%

 

23 NOVEMBER, 2023

OTHER BUSINESS VERTICAL OF JAY JALARAM TECHNOLOGIES INCLUDES EXCLUSIVE DEALERSHIP OF ELECTRIC BIKES, ITS SPARE PARTS AND ACCESSORIES UNDER THE BRAND NAME REVOLT FOR AHMEDABAD AND RAJKOT REGIONS. PRESENTLY, COMPANY ARE SELLING ELECTRIC BIKES THROUGH 5 RETAIL OUTLETS SITUATED AT ASHRAM ROAD AHMEDABAD, NANA CHILODA AHMEDABAD, RAJKOT, NOIDA AND FARIDABAD IN HARYANA. 

 

22 NOVEMBER, 2023

SOME OF THE STORES OF JAY JALARAM TECHNOLOGIES ARE COMPANY OWNED AND SOME ARE FRANCHISE OPERATED STORES AND SOME ARE FRANCHISE OWNED AND COMPANY OPERATED BRAND RETAIL STORES. 

 

21 NOVEMBER, 2023

JAY JALARAM TECHNOLOGIES HAS MORE THAN 110 STORES ACROSS GUJARAT AND MORE THAN 10 STORES ACROSS UTTAR PRADESH. 

 

20 NOVEMBER, 2023

JAY JALARAM TECHNOLOGIES SELLS SMART PHONES, MOBILE ACCESSORIES AND ELECTRONIC CONSUMER GOODS FROM ITS RETAIL STORE BRAND NAME KORE AND EROK. 

 

19 NOVEMBER, 2023

JAY JALARAM TECHNOLOGIES IS ALSO ENGAGED IN MULTI BRAND RETAIL SELLING OF CONSUMER DURABLE ELECTRONICS GOODS LIKE SMART TVs ,AC, FRIDGES, COOLERS ETC FROM BRANDS LIKE TCL, HAIER, DAIKIN, VOLTAS, MI, REALME, ONE PLUS, XIOMI, SKYTRON. 

 

18 NOVEMBER, 2023

JAY JALARAM TECHNOLOGIES GOT LISTED ON 8TH SEPTEMBER 2022. COMPANY IS ENGAGED IN SELLING OF MOBILE HANDSETS, MOBILE ACCESSORIES AND MOBILE RELATED PRODUCTS TO ELECTRIC VEHICLES. COMPANY IS ENGAGED IN MULTI BRAND RETAIL SELLING OF SMART PHONES AND ALLIED ACCESSORIES FROM MANUFACTURERS LIKE APPLE, SAMSUNG, OPPO, NOKIA, VIVO, XIAOMI, TECHNO AND ONE PLUS. 

 

17 NOVEMBER, 2023

JAY JALARAM TECHNOLOGIES ACQUIRED 59% STAKE IN HEAR MORE TECH LIFE FEW MONTHS BACK WHICH PRODUCES WEARABLE PRODUCTS LIKE SMART WATCHES, SMART BLUETOOTH BASED WIRELESS EARPODS, NECKBANDS, EARPHONES, CHARGES AND CABLES. 

 

16 NOVEMBER, 2023

FINANCIALS: WELSPUN ENTERPRISES NET SALES INCREASED FROM RS 1,786 CR IN 2019 TO RS 2,758 CR IN 2023. NET PROFIT INCREASED FROM RS 141 CR IN 2019 TO RS 726 CR IN 2023. ITS EPS INCREASED FROM RS 8.58 IN 2019 TO RS 48.19 IN 2023. ROE INCREASED FROM 8.71 IN 2019 TO 40.35 IN 2023. 

 

15 NOVEMBER, 2023

WELSPUN ENTERPRISE IS BETTING BIG ON WATER AND WASTE WATER TREATMENT MANAGEMENT. WATER IS ONE OF THE BIGGEST BUSINESS SEGMENT OF COMPANY. COMPANY’S ORDER BOOK IN WATER SEGMENT IS AROUND RS 6,000 CR AND EXPECTS IT TO REACH RS 15,000 CR IN NEXT THREE YEARS. COMPANY HAS IDENTIFIED PROJECTS WORTH RS 67,000 ACROSS WATER AND ROAD PROJECTS. BUT COMPANY WILL MAINLY FOCUS ON WATER PROJECTS . FOR NEXT PHASE OF GROWTH WELSPUN ENTERPRISES IS LOOKING TO ESTABLISH A THIRD BUSINESS VERTICAL WHICH WILL BE OF RENEWABLE ENERGY AND GREEN HYDROGEN. FOR THUS COMPANY HAS MADE 100% OWNED SUBSIDIARY CALLED WELSPUN NEW ENERGY LTD. 

 

14 NOVEMBER, 2023

GLOBAL HYDROGEN DEMAND MAINLY IN REFINING AND INDUSTRIAL APPLICATION LIKE STEEL, CEMENT, FERTILISERS WILL REACH 115 MT BY 2030. THE PRODUCTION OF GREEN HYDROGEN WILL REACH 16-25 MT PER YEAR BY 2030. 62% OF TOTAL GLOBAL HEAVY INDUSTRIES COMPANIES ARE LOOKING TO REPLACE CARBON INTENSIVE SYSTEM WITH GREEN HYDROGEN.

 

13 NOVEMBER, 2023

COCHIN SHIPYARD HAS BUILD INDIA’S FIRST HYDROGEN POWERED YATCH FOR 100 PASSENGERS. HYDROGEN POWERED BUSES WILL TAKE VISITORS FROM VADODARA TO STATUE OF UNITY. NTPC PLANS TO OPERATE 5 HYDROGEN POWERED BUSES IN LEH, INDIAN RAILWAYS PLANS TO RUN 35 HYDROGEN POWERED TRAINS AT A COST OF RS 80 CR PER TRAIN ON VARIOUS HERITAGE AND HILL ROUTES. THE FIRST FLEET OF HYDROGEN TRAIN IS ALREADY RUNNING IN GERMANY. CHINA IS LAUNCHING ASIA’S FIRST HYDROGEN POWERED TRAINS THAT WILL RUN AT 160 KM PER HOUR. UK BASED ZERO AVIA IS PLANNING TO START HYDROGEN POWERED COMMERCIAL FLIGHTS BY 2027. RECENTLY IT FLEW A 19 SEATER PLANE FOR 10 MINUTES USING HYDROGEN. 

 

12 NOVEMBER, 2023

WELSPUN ENTERPRISE IS BUILDING AN ECOSYSTEM. PRODUCTION OF GREEN HYDROGEN DEPENDS ON AVAILABILITY OF GREEN POWER AND WATER. INDIA IS WORLD’S LARGEST USER OF GROUND WATER AND WITH GROWING POPULATION AND ECONOMY, DEMAND OF WATER WILL INCREASE. INDIA DEPENDS ON RAIN FOR WATER SINCE GROUND WATER IS DEPLETING DAY BY DAY. TO MEET HUGE DEMAND OF GREEN HYDROGEN WATER IS REQUIRE. INDIA NEEDS TO INVEST IN SUSTAINABLE DESALINATION OF WATER AND WATER MANAGEMENT AND PROCESSING TECHNOLOGY. WELSPUN ENTERPRISES IS ALREADY IN WATER TREATMENT AND MANAGEMENT SECTOR PLUS COMPANY HAS MADE 100% OWNED SUBSIDIARY WELSPUN NEW ENERGY LTD WHICH WILL PRODUCE GREEN HYDROGEN AND RENEWABLE ENERGY. WELSPUN NEW ENERGY PLANS TO BE A GLOBAL SUPPLIER OF GREEN HYDROGEN AND RENEWABLE ENERGY. 

 

11 NOVEMBER, 2023

INDIAN GOVERNMENT AIMS TO RUN TWO SHIPS OF ITS LARGEST SHIP OPERATOR SHIPPING CORP OF INDIA ON GREEN HYDROGEN BASED FUELS BY 2027. ALL INDIAN STATE RUN OIL AND GAS COMPANIES THAT CHARTER 40 VESSELS FOR FUEL TRANSPORT WILL ALSO HAVE TO HIRE AT LEAST ONE SHIP POWERED BY GREEN HYDROGEN EACH YEAR FROM 2027 TO 2030. 

 

10 NOVEMBER, 2023

INDIAN GOVERNMENT PLANS TO RUN SHIPS 100% ON GREEN ENERGY THAT MAY INVOLVE HYBRID ENERGY MODEL COMPRISING OF MIX OF SOLAR, SEA WATER, WIND AND HYDROGEN 

 

9 NOVEMBER, 2023

SHIPPING INDUSTRIES PLANS TO BE COMPLETELY CARBON FREE BY 2050. SHIPPING INDUSTRIES IS PLANNING TO USE GREEN HYDROGEN. AROUND 5.5 MILLION TONNES OF GREEN HYDROGEN PER YEAR WILL BE USED IN SHIPPING INDUSTRIES BY 2030. 

 

8 NOVEMBER, 2023

INDIA’S GREEN HYDROGEN INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTION SHOULD REACH 7 MMTPA BY 2040. AND 114 MMTPA BY 2060. CURRENTLY MOST OF INDIA’S 6 MMTPA HYDROGEN PRODUCTION IS GREY, GENERATED USING NATURAL GAS IN REFINERIES AND FERTILISER INDUSTRIES. BY 2030, INDIA’S DEMAND FOR HYDROGEN IS EXPECTED TO BE AROUND 12 MMTPA, IMPLYING THAT GREEN HYDROGEN NEED WILL INCREASE BY 80-100%. 

 

7 NOVEMBER, 2023

INDIAN GOVERNMENT AIMS TO BE GLOBAL HUB FOR PRODUCTION, UTILIZATION AND EXPORT OF GREEN HYDROGEN. 

 

6 NOVEMBER, 2023

INDIAN GOVERNMENT AIMS TO DECARBONISING SECTORS SUCH AS OIL REFINERIES, IRON, STEEL, CEMENT. GLOBAL ELECTROLYSER MANUFACTURING CAPACITY WAS ONLY 8 GW PER YEAR. INDIA AIMS TO MANUFACTURE 60-100 GW OF ELECTROLYSER CAPACITY BY 2030. INDIAN OIL REFINERIES WILL REPLACE 30% OF FUEL USAGE WITH GREEN HYDROGEN BY 2035, FERTILISER PRODUCTION WILL INCLUDE 70% GREEN HYDROGEN BY 2035, URBAN GAS DISTRIBUTION NETWORK WILL REPLACE 15% OF THEIR FUEL VOLUME WITH GREEN HYDROGEN. 30% OF LNG WILL REPLACE BY HYDROGEN BY 2030. INDIA CONSUMED 63.91 BILLION CUBIC METERS OF NATURAL GAS. IN TERMS OF CALORIFIC VALUE, HYDROGEN HAS ALMOST MORE THAN 2.5 TIMES THE ENERGY PER TONNE COMPARED TO NATURAL GAS, WHICH MEAN 5 MILLION TONNES OF HYDROGEN CAN REPLACE ALMOST 18 BILLION CUBIC METERS OF NATURAL GAS. INDIA WILL BLEND 20% OF HYDROGEN WITH PNG. 

 

5 NOVEMBER, 2023

INDIA EXPECTS INVESTMENTS OF $96 BILLION IN GREEN HYDROGEN SECTOR BY 2030.

 

4 NOVEMBER, 2023

INDIA AIMS TO PRODUCE 5 MILLION METRIC TONNES OF GREEN HYDROGEN BY 2030. 

 

3 NOVEMBER, 2023

INDIA’S GREEN HYDROGEN MARKET IS LIKELY TO BE AT $30-35 BILLION BY 2035-2040. AND IT WILL BE AROUND $10 BILLION BY 2028. 

 

2 NOVEMBER, 2023

WELSPUN ENTERPRISE HAS FORMED NEW 100% OWNED SUBSIDIARY WELSPUN NEW ENERGY LTD TO ENTER RENEWABLE ENERGY AND GREEN HYDROGEN SECTOR. 

 

1 NOVEMBER, 2023

WELSPUN ENTERPRISE EVEN HAS JV WITH ADANI FOR OIL AND GAS EXPLORATION. 

 

31 OCTOBER, 2023

INDIAN GOVERNMENT PLANS TO PACE UP THE CONSTRUCTION OF HIGHWAYS TO 40 KMS PER DAY FROM 34 KMS PER DAY AT PRESENT AND PLANS TO BUILD 12,500 KMS OF HIGHWAYS IN CURRENT FINANCIAL YEAR ENDING MARCH 31, 2024. 

 

30 OCTOBER, 2023

INDIA PRODUCES 72,368 MLD PER DAY OF SEWAGE WATER. BUT INDIA HAS ONLY 31,841 MLD OF INSTALLED CAPACITY OF THE SEWAGE TREATMENT FACILITY. BUT ONLY 20,235 MLD OF SEWAGE WATER IS TREATED AT PRESENT. MEANS ONLY 28% OF SEWAGE WATER IS TREATED AND REST 72% OF WATER IS RELEASED UNTREATED. THERE ARE NO SEWAGE TREATMENT FACILITIES IN ARUNACHAL PRADESH, ANDAMAN AND NICOBAR, MANIPUR, MEGHALAYA, NAGALAND. BIHAR HAS LOW CAPACITY OF SEWAGE TREATMENT FACILITIES. BIHAR PRODUCES 2,276 MLD OF SEWAGE WATER AND CURRENT INSTALLED CAPACITY FOR SEWAGE WATER TREATMENT IN BIHAR IS JUST 10 MLD. THIS SHOWS THERE IS HUGE OPPORTUNITY FOR WATER TREATMENT AND MANAGEMENT COMPANIES IN INDIA. 

 

29 OCTOBER, 2023

GLOBALLY 2 BILLION PEOPLE LACK ACCESS TO SAFE AND ACCESSIBLE WATER. OUT OF THEM 1.2 BILLION PEOPLE PEOPLE HAVE ACCESS TO AN IMPROVE WATER SOURCE 30 MINUTES AWAY FROM THEIR LOCATION. 282 MILLION PEOPLE HAVE LIMITED ACCESS TO AN IMPROVED WATER SOURCE MORE THAN 30 MINUTES AWAY FROM THEIR LOCATION. 368 MILLION PEOPLE CONSUME WATER FROM UNSAFE WELLS AND SPRINGS. 122 MILLION PEOPLE COLLECT WATER FROM UNSAFE SOURCE SUCH AS LAKES AND RIVERS. WATER RELATED DISEASES ACCOUNT FOR 80% OF ALL ILLNESSES AND DEATH WORLD WIDE WHICH IS UNFORTUNATE GIVEN THAT THEY ARE EASILY PREVENTABLE. IN EVERY EIGHT SECONDS A CHILD DIES FROM WATER RELATED DISEASE, RESULTING 10,800 DEATHS PER YEAR. WATER TREATMENT AND MANAGEMENT IS THE ONLY SOLUTION FOR THIS. 

 

28 OCTOBER, 2023

DESPITE INDIA BEING HOME TO 17% OF WORLD’S POPULATION, INDIA HAS ONLY 4% OF WORLD’S FRESHWATER RESOURCES. JUST IMAGINE THE DEMAND OF WATER MANAGEMENT AND TREATMENT IN COMING YEARS. 

 

27 OCTOBER, 2023

WELSPUN ENTERPRISE EVEN BUILDS HIGHWAYS. BUT COMPANY’S MAIN AIMS IS ON WATER INFRA. BECAUSE 60% OF COMPANY’S REVENUE COMES FROM WATER INFRA. RECENTLY COMPANY SOLD HIGHWAY ASSETS FOR RS 6,000 CR. 

 

26 OCTOBER, 2023

80% OF WASTE WATER GENERATED IN INDIA HAS THE POTENTIAL TO BE TREATED AND REUSED FOR NON POTABLE PURPOSE. 

 

25 OCTOBER, 2023

INDIA WILL PRODUCE AROUND 1,20,000 MLD OF SEWAGE WATER PER DAY BY 2037-2040 FROM 72,368 MLD PER DAY AT PRESENT. BUT INDIA HAS ONLY 31,841 MLD OF INSTALLED CAPACITY OF THE SEWAGE WATER TREATMENT FACILITY. HUGE SCOPE FOR WATER MANAGEMENT AND TREATMENT COMPANIES. 

 

24 OCTOBER, 2023

GLOBALLY AROUND 359.4 BILLION CUBIC METERS OF WASTE WATER IS PRODUCED EACH YEAR OF WHICH 62% MEANS 225 BILLION CUBIC METER IS COLLECTED AND 52% MEANS 188 BILLION CUBIC METER OF WASTE WATER IS TREATED REST 48% MEANS 172 CUBIC METERS OF WASTE WATER IS CURRENTLY RELEASED UNTREATED. 

 

23 OCTOBER, 2023

1 IN 3 PEOPLE GLOBALLY DO NOT HAVE ACCESS TO SAFE DRINKING WATER. WATER TREATMENT AND MANAGEMENT ONLY OPTION. 

 

22 OCTOBER, 2023

ABOUT 20-25 YEARS AGO PER CAPITA AVAILABILITY OF WATER IN INDIA WAS 5,000 CUBIC METERS AND NOW IT HAS CAME DOWN TO JUST 1,400 CUBIC METERS DUE TO INCREASE IN POPULATION AND WATER USAGE. 

 

21 OCTOBER, 2023

BY 2035 AROUND 3.2 BILLION PEOPLE WILL LACK ACCESS TO SAFE WATER AND WILL BE LIVING IN SEVERELY WATER SCARE PLACES. 

 

20 OCTOBER, 2023

INDIA WILL INVEST AROUND $240 BILLION IN WATER SECTOR THROUGH GOVERNMENT RESOURCES IN  PARTNERSHIP WITH PRIVATE INNOVATORS, START UPS AND WATER USER ASSOCIATION. 

 

19 OCTOBER, 2023

70% OF INDIA’S WATER IS CONTAMINATED, 54% OF INDIA’S GROUND WATER IS DECLINING RAPIDLY THAN IT IS BEING REPLENISHED. WATER TREATMENT AND MANAGEMENT IS THE ONLY SOLUTION. 

 

18 OCTOBER, 2023

INDIA RECEIVES AROUND 4,000 BCM OF RAINFALL EACH YEAR. OUT OF THIS 1869 BCM REMAINS AFTER EVAPORATION. THE ACTUAL AVAILABILITY OF WATER IS ONLY 1137 BCM. EVEN IN THIS 1137 BCM OF WATER, THERE IS LOT OF TEMPORAL AS WELL AS REGIONAL VARIATIONS IN AVAILABILITY OF WATER. WATER STORAGE CAPACITY IN ALL RESERVOIRS IS LESS THAN 300 BCM. AND AFTER RECHARGE BY ACQUIFER STORAGE CAPACITY OF WATER IN INDIA IS AROUND 400 BCM. MEANS 65%OF WATER INDIA RECEIVES IS WASTED AND NOT SAVED. TOTAL DEMAND OF WATER IN INDIA IS AROUND 1100 BCM AND DEMAND IS EXPECTED TO REACH 1800-1900 BCM BY 2030-2035. THIS CLEARLY SHOWS INDIA HAS ALREADY STARTED TO FACE SHORTAGE OF WATER. BECAUSE DEMAND IS 100 BCM AND RESERVOIRS HAVE STORAGE CAPACITY OF JUST 400 BCM AND DEMAND OF WATER IS INCREASE TO 1800-1900 BCM. WATER TREATMENT AND MANAGEMENT IS THE ONLY OPTION. 

 

17 OCTOBER, 2023

GLOBAL FRESH WATER DEMAND WILL OUTSTRIP SUPPLY BY 40% BY 2030. WORLD WILL MOVE TOWARDS WATER MANAGEMENT AND ITS TREATMENT. 

 

16 OCTOBER, 2023

82 CRORE INDIANS ACROSS COUNTRY HAVE PER CAPITA WATER AVAILABILITY CLOSE TO OR LOWER THAN 1,000M3, THE OFFICIAL THRESHOLD FOR WATER SCARCITY. WATER MANAGEMENT AND TREATMENT IS THE ONLY SOLUTION TO THIS. 

 

15 OCTOBER, 2023

IN INDIA 16 CRORE 20 LAKH PEOPLE DOES NOT HAVE CLEAN WATER CLOSE TO THEIR HOME AND 2 LAKH PEOPLE IN INDIA DIE EVERY YEAR DUE TO INADEQUATE WATER, SANITATION AND HYGIENE. WATER TREATMENT AND MANAGEMENT IS THE ONLY SOLUTION TO THIS. 

 

14 OCTOBER, 2023

INDIA’S DEMAND FOR WATER IS EXPECTED TO BE DOUBLE THE SIZE OF AVAILABLE WATER SUPPLIES. THIS CLEARLY SHOWS THERE IS NO OTHER OPTION OTHER THAN RECYCLING IT. 

 

13 OCTOBER, 2023

INDIAN WATER AND WASTE WATER TREATMENT MARKET WAS VALUED AT AROUND $1.56 BILLION IN 2022 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH $3.03 BILLION BY 2029. GROWING AT A CAGR OF 10%. 

 

12 OCTOBER, 2023

GLOBAL WATER AND WASTE WATER TREATMENT MARKET SIZE WAS $299.93 BILLION IN 2022 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH $497.5 BILLION BY 2030 GROWING AT A CAGR OF 7%. 

 

11 OCTOBER, 2023

IN FY17 ORDER BOOK OF WELSPUN ENTERPRISES WAS 96% OF ROAD HIGHWAYS AND ONLY 4% OF WATER PROJECTS. BUT IN Q4FY23 ORDER BOOK OF WELSPUN ENTERPRISES WAS 60% OF WATER AND WASTE WATER RECYCLING PROJECTS AND 40% OF ROAD HIGHWAYS (ROAD EPC 13%, ROAD BOT 10%, AND ROAD HAM17%) THIS CLEARLY SHOWS THAT COMPANY IS HIGHLY FOCUSED AND AIMS TO GROW ITS WATER AND WASTE WATER TREATMENT BUSINESS. 

 

10 OCTOBER, 2023

WELSPUN ENTERPRISE HAS TOTAL ORDER BOOK OF AROUND RS 10,000 CRORE. OUT OF THIS 60% ORDER BOOK (RS 6,000 CR) IS OF WATER AND WASTE WATER TREATMENT AND REMAINING RS 4,000 CR IS OF ROAD HIGHWAYS. 

 

9 OCTOBER, 2023

WELSPUN ENTERPRISES IS AN INFRA COMPANY WITH FOCUS ON ROAD HIGHWAYS AND WATER & WASTE WATER MANAGEMENT SECTOR. 

 

8 OCTOBER, 2023

ORDER BOOK OF WATER TREATMENT AND MANAGEMENT COMPANIES IN INDIA. VA TECH WABAG: RS 10,400 CR, ION EXCHANGE: RS 3650 CR, WELSPUN ENTERPRISES: RS 5,500 CR, SPML INFRA: RS 2,500 CR. 

 

7 OCTOBER, 2023

FINANCIALS OF LEMON TREE HOTELS: COMPANY’S REVENUE INCREASE FROM RS 549 CR IN 2019 TO RS 874 CR IN 2023. ITS NET PROFIT INCREASED FROM RS 55 CR IN 2019 TO RS 139 CR IN 2023. ITS EPS INCREASED FROM RS 0.67 IN 2019 TO SR 1.45 IN 2023. ITS RETURN ON EQUITY INCREASED FROM 6.04 IN 2019 TO 13.41 IN 2023. WITH THIS I CONCLUDE MY RESEARCH ON HOTEL INDUSTRY AND LEMON TREE. 

 

6 OCTOBER, 2023

GROWTH FACTORS FOR INDIAN HOTEL INDUSTRY :1) INCREASE IN PER CAPITA INCOME: INDIA’S PER CAPITA INCOME WILL INCREASE FROM $2301 IN 2022 TO $3231 IN 2026. THIS WILL INCREASE THE SPENDING POWER OF PEOPLE TO TRY NEW THINGS. 2) INCREASE IN MIDDLE CLASS: BY 2030 INDIA WILL MOVE FROM BEING AN ECONOMY LED BY A BOTTOM OF PYRAMID, TO ONE LED BY MIDDLE CLASS. AROUND 80% OF HOUSEHOLDS IN 2030 WILL BE MIDDLE INCOME UP FROM 50% TODAY. THE MIDDLE CLASS WILL DRIVE 75% OF CONSUMER SPENDING IN 2030. AS 140 MILLION HOUSEHOLDS MOVES INTO MIDDLE CLASS AND ANOTHER 20 MILLION MOVE INTO HIGHER INCOME BRACKET, THEY WILL SPEND 4X MORE ON SERVICES. AROUND 23% OF GLOBAL MIDDLE CLASS WILL BE FROM INDIA BY 2030. THIS IS LED TO INCREASE IN SPENDING POWER ON GOODS AND SERVICES. 3) LOW NUMBER OF HOTEL ROOMS: GLOBALLY PENETRATION OF HOTEL ROOMS PER 1,000 POPULATION IS 2.7 IN CHINA ITS 2.8, IN U.S ITS 16 AND IN INDIA PENETRATION RATE OF HOTEL ROOMS PER 1,000 PEOPLE IS JUST 0.1. 4) SHORTAGE OF ROOMS: DEMAND OF HOTEL ROOMS IS OUTPACING SUPPLY. DEMAND OF HOTEL ROOMS IS INCREASING BY 10-12% BUT SUPPLY IS INCREASING JUST BY 3-5%. 5) LOW NUMBER OF ROOMS COMPARED WITH OTHER COUNTRIES: INDIA ONLY HAS 1,77,449 ROOMS COMPARED WITH U.S HAS 52,90,000 ROOMS, CHINA 11,14,100 ROOMS, GERMANY 10,00,000 ROOMS, JAPAN 17,00,000 ROOMS, RUSSIA 10,00,000 ROOMS ETC. 6) LOW NUMBER OF HOTEL USERS: IN INDIA NUMBER OF HOTEL USERS ARE JUST 61.33 MILLION COMPARED WITH 297.60 MILLION IN CHINA, 160.60 MILLION IN U.S. 7) LOW PENETRATION OF HOTELS: PENETRATION OF HOTELS IN INDIA IS JUST 3.2% COMPARED TO 45.6% IN U.S, 16.54% IN CHINA, 43.6% IN CANADA, 44.3% IN GERMANY, 46% IN SPAIN, 36% IN JAPAN ETC. 8) LOW AVERAGE REVENUE PER USER OF HOTEL :PER AVERAGE REVENUE PER USER OF HOTEL IN INDIA IS JUST $166.50 COMPARED TO $0.66K IN U.S, $323.69 IN CHINA, $0.49K IN GERMANY, $0.36K IN SPAIN, $0.41K IN FRANCE, $275 IN UAE ETC. 9) INCREASE IN DESTINATION WEDDING: INDIA’S DESTINATION WEDDING MARKET WAS VALUED AROUND 47,000 CRORE RS IN 2022 AND WILL REACH RS 1,50,000 BY 2030. THIS WILL INCREASE THE DEMAND OF HOTELS. 10)YOUNG POPULATION: BY 2030 INDIA WILL HAVE WORLD’S YOUNGEST POPULATION (AGE BETWEEN 15-35). YOUNG PEOPLE ARE MORE KEEN TO TRAVEL AND EXPLORE NEW PLACES . 11) MODERNIZATION AND DESIRE TO LIVE GOOD MODERN LIFE :INCREASE IN PER CAPITA INCOME HAS LED PEOPLE TO LIVE A MODERN LIFE. MODERN LIFE IN TERMS OF TRAVELLING, EXPLORING NEW PLACES, EATING OUTSIDE ETC. 12) CHANGE IN CONSUMER BEHAVIOUR: EARLIER PEOPLE USED TO TAKE KIDS TO NANI’S AND RELATIVES PLACES FOR VACATION. BUT NOW THIS ARE CHANGING. PEOPLE GO OUT AT NEW PLACES FOR VACATION, BASICALLY VACATION PLACES HAVE CHANGED FROM NANI’S PLACE TO TOURIST DESTINATION. 13) EARLIER PEOPLE USED TO GO OUT FOR VACATION ONLY ONCE A YEAR. BUT NOW PEOPLE GO OUT FOR VACATION 2-4 TIMES A YEAR. FOR EG THEY GO OUT FOR LONG VACATION IN SUMMER AND FOR SMALL VACATION IN FESTIVALS LIKE DIWALI, HOLY, CHRISTMAS ETC. 

 

5 OCTOBER, 2023

INDIAN GAMERS ARE SPENDING AROUND $250 MILLIONS ANNUALLY ON IN APP PURCHASES OF POPULAR GAMES. THIS SPENDING SURPASSED THE COMBINE REVENUE OF OTT STREAMING PLATFORMS. 

 

4 OCTOBER, 2023

TATA POWER RECEIVES ORDER WORTH RS 1,744 CRORE TO IMPLEMENT SMART METERING PROJECT IN CHHATTISGARH STATE POWER DISTRIBUTION COMPANY. 

 

3 OCTOBER, 2023

CHINA PLANNING TO PUT EXPORT CUT ON TWO RARE METALS USED FOR MAKING SEMICONDUCTOR. TWO METALS ARE GALLIUM AND GERMANIUM. GALLIUM IS USED FOR MAKING INTEGRATED CIRCUITS, LED’S AND PHOTOVOLTAIC PANELS. CHINA PRODUCES 80% OF GLOBAL GALLIUM. GERMANIUM IS USED FOR MAKING FIBRES AND INFRARED CAMERA LENS. AND CHINA PRODUCES 80% OF GLOBAL GERMANIUM. WILL EXPORT CUT IN GALLIUM AND GERMANIUM BY CHINA CREATER SHORTAGE OF SEMI CONDUCTOR ?

 

2 OCTOBER, 2023

ARE PUMA AND NIKE UNDERVALUED ? CMP OF PUMA IS $55.13 AND NIKE IS $110.36. 

 

1 OCTOBER, 2023

AFTER LISTING FLEUR APG’S STAKE WILL COME DOWN TO 41% FROM 42%. AND STAKE OF LEMON TREE WILL BE AT 51%. 

 

30 SEPTEMBER, 2023

HOW LEMON TREE WILL GO ASSET LIGHT MODEL ? AT PRESENT LEMON TREE HAS TWO SUBSIDIARIES 1) FLEUR HOTELS PVT LTD. IN THIS LEMON TREE HOLDS 58.91% STAKE AND FLUER HOTELS IS ASSET HOLDER OF LEMON TREE HOTELS. REMAINING 41% IS WITH APG AS STRATEGIC PARTNER. 2) CARNATION HOTELS PVT LTD: CARNATION HOTELS IS 100% SUBSIDIARY OF LEMON TREE HOTELS. CARNATION IS ASSET MANAGER AND FRANCHISER OF LEMON TREE HOTELS. NOW IN COMING YEARS CARNATION HOTELS WILL MERGE INTO LEMON TREE TRANSFERRING ALSO ASSETS TO FLEUR HOTELS LTD. AFTER THIS MERGER ALL ASSETS WILL BE WITH FLEUR HOTELS (WHICH WILL BECOME MAJORITY SUBSIDIARY OF LEMON TREE MERGER) AND LEMON TREE WILL OPERATE AND FRANCHISE THE HOTELS. AND FLEUR HOTELS WHICH WILL HAVE ALL THE ASSETS OF LEMON TREE WILL LIST VIA IPO OR REIT OR INVIT. AND IN THIS LISTED ENTITY FLEUR, LEMON TREE WILL REMAIN AS MAJORITY SHAREHOLDER. 

 

29 SEPTEMBER, 2023

IN CURRENT FINANCIAL YEAR LEMON TREE WILL RENOVATE AROUND 1,000 ROOMS. 

 

28 SEPTEMBER, 2023

OUT OF THESE 20,000 ROOMS BY 2028 LEMON TREE 70% ROOMS WILL BE MANAGED AND FRANCHISED AND REST WILL BE OWNED ROOM. CURRENTLY 45% OF COMPANY’S ROOM INVENTORY IS MANAGED BY THE FIRM ITSELF AND COMPANY OWNS THE REMAINING 55%. 

 

27 SEPTEMBER, 2023

LEMON TREE PLANS TO BE DEBT FREE BY 2028. 

 

26 SEPTEMBER, 2023

LEMON TREE FROM 8,489 ROOMS AT PRESENT PLANS TO HAVE PORTFOLIO OF 300 HOTELS WITH AROUND 20,000 ROOMS BY 2028. I THINK THIS WILL BE BIGGEST EVER EXPANSION IN HOTEL INDUSTRY. 

 

25 SEPTEMBER, 2023

TO INCREASE THE SPIRITUAL TOURISM GOVERNMENT HAS INTRODUCED PRASAD SCHEME. UNDER PRASAD SCHEME, 41 RELIGIOUS SITES FROM 25 STATES WERE IDENTIFIED FOR DEVELOPMENT IN THE COUNTRY. RENOVATION OF PILGRIMAGE SITES, DEVELOPMENT OF TRANSPORT SYSTEMS, GENERATION OF EMPLOYMENT AND TOURISM TRAFFIC GROWTH ARE THE MAIN OBJECTIVES OF PRASAD SCHEME. THE PROJECTS COMPLETED UNDER PRASAD SCHEME ARE KASHI VISHWANATH, SOMNATH, KEDARNATH AND MAHAKALESHWAR JYOTILING TEMPLES. THE AMBITIOUS RS 20,000 CRORE AYODHYA RAM TEMPLE PROJECT WILL BE COMPLETED BY NEXT YEAR. FOR THE NEXT 5 YEAR SPIRITUAL TOURISM WILL GROW BY 20-30% EVERY YEAR. AND MAJORITY OF RELIGIOUS PLACES DOES NOT HAVE ORGANIZED HOTEL CHAINS. ALL THIS WILL INCREASE THE DEMAND OF ORGANIZED HOTEL CHAINS IN INDIA. 

 

24 SEPTEMBER, 2023

THE CONCEPT OF SPIRITUAL TOURISM IS EVOLVING RAPIDLY AND IS GAINING MOMENTUM NOT ONLY FROM GEN S BUT ALSO FROM YOUNG INDIA’S GEN Z AND MILLENNIALS. MANY SPIRITUAL PLACES HAS OUTDOOR ADVENTURE LIKE RIVER RAFTING, NIGHT TREKKING, BUNGEE JUMPING, SCUBA DIVING, BOATING ETC, SO YOUNG GENERATION THINK WITH DARSHAN THEY WILL EVEN ABLE TO ROAM THE PLACES AND DO ADVENTURE ACTIVITIES. ALL THIS WILL INCREASE THE DEMAND OF HOTELS. 

 

23 SEPTEMBER, 2023

HOTEL DEMAND WILL COME FROM GEN Z: GEN Z ARE BROADLY EXPOSED TO TRAVEL INSPIRATION THROUGH SOCIAL MEDIA. THEY ARE BEING RAISED IN SOCIETY WHERE TRAVEL IS MORE PRIORITIZED THAN IT WAS FOR PAST GENERATION. YET UNLIKE THEY HAVE HIGH PAYING JOBS OR A NEST EGG OF SAVINGS TO TRAVEL. RATHER, THEY ARE FINDING WAYS TO FIT INTO THEIR BUDGET NOW. THEY ARE ALSO WILLING TO CUT OTHER SPENDING TO PAY FOR TRAVEL. 83% YOUNG ADULTS CUT BACK ON NON ESSENTIAL SPENDING SO THAT THEY CAN SPEND MORE ON TRAVELLING. GEN Z AVERAGE SPENDING PER PURCHASE DECREASED BY 7% IN FASHION, 6% IN TECH, 12% ON FOOD WHILE THEIR TRAVEL PURCHASES INCREASED BY 60%. COST OF LIVING CRISIS OR NOT, NOTHING GET IN THE WAY OF GEN Z FOR SPENDING FOR TRAVELLING. ALL THIS INCREASE THE DEMAND OF HOTELS. 

 

22 SEPTEMBER, 2023

MILLENNIALS AND GEN Z REPRESENTS 50% OF WORLD’S POPULATION. 34% OF GEN Z AND MILLENNIALS WILL TAKE LONGER TRIPS THAN THEY DID BEFORE THE PANDEMIC, COMPARED TO 15% OF OLDER GENERATIONS. 56% OF GEN Z AND 51% OF MILLENNIALS WOULD LIKE TO LIVE IN MULTIPLE CITIES THROUGHOUT YEAR COMPARED TO 31% OF OLDER GENERATION. MILLENNIALS AND GEN Z ARE WILLING TO PAY 17% MORE FOR EXTEND STAY OPTIONS, COMPARED TO A GENERAL AVERAGE OF 10%. AVERAGE LENGTH STAY OF MILLENNIALS AND GEN Z IN HOTELS HAS INCREASED TO 4.2 NIGHTS COMPARED TO 2.5 NIGHTS IN 2021. ALL THIS WILL INCREASE THE DEMAND OF HOTELS IN COMING YEARS. 

 

21 SEPTEMBER, 2023

IN INDIA 42% OF MILLENNIALS ARE WILLING TO SPEND RS 2-5 LAKH ON THEIR HOLIDAY, 33% MILLENNIALS ARE WILLING TO SPEND RS 5-10 LAKHS. 31% PREFER TO BOOK LUXURY PROPERTIES, WHILE 27% MILLENNIALS CHOOSE BUDGET PROPERTIES. 

 

20 SEPTEMBER, 2023

GEN Z TRAVELS AN AVERAGE OF 35-40 DAYS PER YEAR. 

 

19 SEPTEMBER, 2023

IN 2023 AROUND 70% OF INDIAN TRAVELLERS ARE SEEKING TO TRY A SPIRITUAL STAY, WHICH INCLUDES MEDITATION AND MINDFULNESS GATEWAYS, WHILE 63% ARE LOOKING AT SILENT RETREATS. 

 

18 SEPTEMBER, 2023

THE PLACES OF RELIGIOUS TOURISM EARNED RS 1,34,543 CRORE IN 2022 COMPARED WITH RS 65,070 CR IN 2021. ALL THIS REVENUE IS GENERATED VIA UNORGANIZED HOTELS AND RESTAURANTS AND ALL. BECAUSE THERE ARE VERY FEW OR NO ORGANIZED HOTEL CHAINS AT RELIGIOUS PLACES. JUST IMAGINE THE REVENUE OF ORGANIZED HOTEL CHAINS WHEN THERE WILL BE SHIFT FROM UNORGANIZED TO ORGANIZED IN HOTEL CHAINS IN COMING YEARS. 

 

17 SEPTEMBER, 2023

MORE THAN 60% OF TOURISM IN INDIA IS ASSOCIATED WITH RELIGIOUS AND SPIRITUAL TOURISM. 

 

16 SEPTEMBER, 2023

INDIA HAS LAUNCHED VISIT INDIA YEAR 2023 PROGRAMME WHICH AIMS TO DEVELOP TOURISM IN MISSION MODE AND TO ACCELERATE INDIA’S RISE TOWARDS WORLD LEADERSHIP IN THE TOURISM SECTOR. INDIA WILL INVITE WORLD TO PARTICIPATE IN INDIA’S FESTIVALS. THE GOVERNMENT ALSO LAUNCHED A BEST TOURISM VILLAGE COMPETITION TO SELECT THE BEST TOURISM VILLAGE ACROSS THE COUNTRY AND ALSO A NEW WEBSITE TO PROMOTE RURAL TOURISM. INDIAN GOVERNMENT HAS ALSO STARTED FROM THIS YEAR TO HAVE GLOBAL TOURISM INVESTMENT SUMMIT IN INDIA EVERY YEAR. ALL THIS WILL BOOST TOURISM IN INDIA. AND INCREASE IN TOURISM WILL INCREASE THE DEMAND OF HOTELS IN INDIA. 

 

15 SEPTEMBER, 2023

GOVERNMENT INITIATIVES LIKE DEKHO APNA DESH, SWADESH DARSHAN SCHEME AND VIBRANT VILLAGES WILL INCREASE THE TOURISM IN INDIA. AND INCREASE IN TOURISM WILL INCREASE THE DEMAND OF HOTELS IN INDIA. 

 

14 SEPTEMBER, 2023

MICE TOURISM HAS BECOME A LEADING ECONOMIC SECTOR BY CONTRIBUTING 9.8% OF GLOBAL GDP. IN INDIA MICE TOURISM IS GROWING BY 6% PER YEAR. INDIA IS EXPECTED TO GROW AND SHINE AS LEADING MICE DESTINATION IN COMING YEARS. MICE TOURISM IS EXPECTED TO GROW 20% PER YEAR IN COMING YEARS IN INDIA. THIS WILL INCREASE THE DEMAND OF HOTELS IN INDIA. 

 

13 SEPTEMBER, 2023

FROM 1,77,449 HOTEL ROOMS AT PRESENT, INDIA WILL HAVE AROUND 2,00,000 ROOMS BY END OF 2027.

 

12 SEPTEMBER, 2023

CRICKET WORLD CUP, G20, IN INDIA THIS YEAR WILL INCREASE THE DEMAND OF HOTELS. 

 

11 SEPTEMBER, 2023

NOW A DAYS IN INDIAN HOTEL INDUSTRY LEISURE IS NOT PURELY LEISURE IT IS BUSINESS WITH LEISURE OR LEISURE WITH BUSINESS OR VICE VERSA. ANOTHER TREND IS PILGRIMAGE TOUR WITH LEISURE OR LEISURE WITH PILGRIMAGE TOUR. OR VICE VERSA. 

 

10 SEPTEMBER, 2023

INVESTMENT IN INDIAN HOTEL SECTOR MAY SURPASS $2.3 BILLION IN NEXT 3-5 YEARS. 

 

9 SEPTEMBER, 2023

INDIA CAN BECOME WORLD’S THIRD LARGEST HOTEL INDUSTRY MARKET IN COMING YEARS. 

 

8 SEPTEMBER, 2023

OUT OF 250 NEW HOTELS SIGNED IN INDIA, 200 HOTELS ARE IN TIER II AND III CITIES. OF THE 20,000 NEW HOTEL ROOMS COMING UP IN INDIA AROUND 17,000 NEW ROOMS WILL COME UP IN TIER II AND III CITIES. 

 

7 SEPTEMBER, 2023

NUMBER OF TOURIST VISITED MATHURA IN 2022 WERE AROUND 6 CRORE, IN VARANASI WERE 7.16 CRORE, IN AYODHYA WERE 2.6 CRORE AND NUMBER OF TOURIST VISITED GOA WERE ONLY AROUND 85 LAKHS. THIS SHOWS PILGRIMAGE TOURISM IS OVERTAKING TOURIST TOURISM. AND MAJORITY OF PILGRIMAGE PLACES DOES NOT HAVE ORGANIZED HOTEL CHAIN, JUST IMAGINE THE GROWTH OF HOTELS FROM PILGRIMAGE PLACES IN NEXT 4-5 YEARS. 

 

6 SEPTEMBER, 2023

IN 2022 OUT OF TOTAL HOTEL ROOMS OPENED IN INDIA, 67% OPENED WERE IN TIER II AND III CITIES. IN TERMS OF NEW FRESH ROOMS COMING UP IN NEXT 2-3 YEARS 75% OF NEW HOTEL ROOMS WILL COME UP IN TIER II AND III CITIES. 

 

5 SEPTEMBER, 2023

HOTEL ROOMS IN TIER II AND III CITIES INCREASED TO 38% IN 2022 FROM 33% IN 2021. IN METRO CITIES HOTEL ROOMS DECREASED TO 19% IN 2022 FROM 30% IN 2021. 

 

4 SEPTEMBER, 2023

INDIA’S OPERATIONAL AIRPORT HAS INCREASED FROM 74 TO 141. AND UNDER UDAN GOVERNMENT PLANS TO ADD AIRPORTS IN ALMOST EVERY TIER II, III AND IV CITIES. MEANS ALL TIER II, III AND IV CITIES WILL BE CONNECTED WITH AIRWAYS. INDIA’S NATIONAL HIGHWAY NETWORK WILL INCREASE BY 37% IN NEXT 2 YEARS. BY 2014 INDIA HAD 96,000 KM OF HIGHWAYS AND INDIA PLANS TO HAVE 2 LAKH KM OF HIGHWAYS BY 2025. BY END OF 2023 INDIA PLANS TO HAVE 75 NEW VANDE BHARAT TRAINS.  INDIA PLANS TO CONNECT EVERY CITY AND TOWN BY RAILWAYS. THIS MEANS THERE WILL BE EASY MOVEMENT OF PEOPLE ON TOURIST PLACE, PILGRIMAGE PLACE, BUSINESS PLACE ETC. THIS WILL INCREASE THE DEMAND OF HOTELS IN INDIA. 

 

3 SEPTEMBER, 2023

TIER II, III AND IV CITIES WILL SEE INCREASE IN DEMAND OF HOTEL ROOMS. 

 

2 SEPTEMBER, 2023

RELIGIOUS TOURISM MARKET SIZE IN INDIA WAS VALUED AT $1,071 MILLION IN 2021 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH $1,704 MILLION BY 2027. AND MAJORITY OF RELIGIOUS PLACES DON’T HAVE ORGANIZED HOTELS. KASHI SAW MORE HOTEL BOOKINGS THAN GOA. UTTARAKHAND AIMS TO DOUBLE THE TOURISTS FOR CHAR DHAM TO 70 MILLION BY 2030. UPCOMING RAM TEMPLE AT AYODHYA WILL SEE LARGE NUMBER OF TOURISTS. AND ALL SUCH RELIGIOUS PLACES DOES NOT HAVE ORGANIZED HOTELS. AND EARLIER PEOPLE USED TO STAY AT DHARAMSHALAS DUE TO LOW PER CAPITA INCOME AND NO INFRASTRUCTURE BUT NOW THINGS ARE CHANGING. PEOPLE WANT HASSLE FREE PILGRIMAGE TOUR. THEY SAY DARSHAN KE SATH GHUMNA BHI HOJAAYEGA. ALL THIS IS BECAUSE OF INCREASE IN PER CAPITA INCOME, INCREASE IN INFRA, PROPER CONNECTIVITY OF ROADS, RAILWAYS AND AIRWAYS AT EVERY RELIGIOUS PLACES. ALL THIS WILL INCREASE THE DEMAND OF HOTELS IN INDIA IN NEXT 5-6 YEARS. 

 

1 SEPTEMBER, 2023

EARLIER ONLY ONE MEMBER OF FAMILY WAS EARNING AND OTHER MEMBERS WERE DEPENDENT ON THAT ONE PERSON. SO ANNUAL FAMILY INCOME WAS LOW. BUT ALMOST ALL MEMBERS OF FAMILY EARN SO ANNUAL FAMILY INCOME INCREASED. DUE TO THIS PEOPLE DESIRE TO SPEND ON TRAVELLING, EATING OUT AND ALL. THIS WILL INCREASE THE DEMAND OF HOTELS. 

 

31 AUGUST, 2023

INDIAN DESTINATION WEDDING MARKET WAS VALUED AT RS 47,000 CR IN 2022 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH RS 1,50,000 CR BY 2030-2031. JUST IMAGINE THE DEMAND OF HOTELS FOR DESTINATION WEDDINGS BY 2030. 

 

30 AUGUST, 2023

INDIA’S WEDDING INDUSTRY WILL REACH RS 38 LAKH CRORE BY 2030. THIS WILL INCREASE THE DESTINATION WEDDINGS. NOW A DAYS COUPLE PREFER DESTINATION WEDDING BECAUSE THE FAMILY WANTS TO ENJOY WEDDING. EARLIER MEMBERS OF FAMILY WERE BUSY IN MANAGEMENT OF WEDDING. BECAUSE THEY THEMSELVES BOOK MULTIPLE AGENCIES LIKE LIGHTING FROM DIFFERENT PERSON, CATERING FROM DIFFERENT PERSON AND SO ON. AND TO MANAGE THIS AGENCIES, MEMBERS OF FAMILY WERE NOT ABLE TO ENJOY THE MARRIAGE. BUT NOW TREND IS CHANGING. PEOPLE WANT TO ENJOY WEDDING SO THEY GIVE CONTRACT TO ONE SINGLE PERSON WHICH MANAGES EVERYTHING. FAMILY MENTALITY HAS CHANGED. THEY SAY WE WILL GIVE MONEY AND THE REST ALL WORK WILL BE MANAGED BY THE WEDDING PLANNING TEAMS SO THAT THE FAMILY CAN ENJOY WEDDING. THIS IS THE MAIN REASON PEOPLE ARE MOVING TOWARDS DESTINATION WEDDING. AND DESTINATION WEDDING WILL INCREASE THE DEMAND OF HOTEL INDUSTRY. 

 

29 AUGUST, 2023

EARLIER PEOPLE USED TO GO OUT FOR VACATIONS ONLY ONCE A YEAR. BUT NOW PEOPLE GO OUT FOR VACATIONS 2-3 TIMES A YEAR. THIS WILL INCREASE THE DEMAND OF HOTELS. 

 

28 AUGUST, 2023

DEMAND FOR HOTEL ROOMS IS OUTPACING SUPPLY IN INDIA. DEMAND OF HOTEL ROOMS IS INCREASING BY 10-12% AND SUPPLY IS INCREASING ONLY BY 3-5%. 

 

27 AUGUST, 2023

INVESTMENTS IN INDIAN HOTEL SECTOR WILL SURPASS $2.3 BILLION IN NEXT 3-4 YEARS. 

 

26 AUGUST, 2023

THERE ARE THREE PARTS OF INDIA IN TERMS OF INCOME. 50% OF INDIA EARNS LESS THAN $500 PER CAPITA. 40% OF INDIA’S POPULATION EARNS $2000 PER CAPITA. THIS PEOPLE SPENDS ON ENTERTAINMENT, LEISURE, RETAIL ETC. AND 10% OF INDIA’S POPULATION EARNS $7,000 PER CAPITA. THIS IS THE REAL CONSUMING POPULATION OF INDIA, ABOUT 40 MILLION HOUSEHOLDS. IF PER CAPITA INCOME GROWS BY 50% IN NEXT 5-7 YEARS THE SIZE OF BIG CONSUMING SEGMENT WILL BE 3X ITS CURRENT SIZE. THIS WILL INCREASE THE DEMAND OF HOTELS. 

 

25 AUGUST, 2023

EARLIER PARENTS USED TO TAKE THEIR CHILDREN AT NANI’S HOUSE OR COUSIN’S HOUSE FOR VACATIONS. BUT NOW PEOPLE GO OUT FOR VACATIONS SO THAT THEY CAN EXPLORE NEW PLACES. THIS WILL INCREASE THE DEMAND OF HOTELS. 

 

24 AUGUST, 2023

INDIAN HOTEL SECTOR IS HIGHLY UNORGANIZED. INDIA HAS 1,77,474 BRANDED ORGANIZED HOTEL ROOMS AND 29 LAKHS UNBRANDED UNORGANIZED HOTEL ROOMS (DHARAMSHALAS AND ALL). PILGRIMAGES PLACES HAS HIGHEST UNORGANIZED ROOMS. IN FACT THERE ARE NO BRANDED HOTELS IN PILGRIMAGES PLACES. THIS IS BECAUSE EARLIER DUE TO LOW PER CAPITA INCOME PEOPLE USE TO GO FOR PILGRIMAGE IN GROUPS (SANGS). THEY USED TO STAY IN DORMITORY ROOMS. BECAUSE EARLIER ONLY OLDER PEOPLE USED TO GO FOR PILGRIMAGE. YOUNGER PEOPLE AVOID GOING BECAUSE OF NO PROPER FACILITY FOR ACCOMMODATION, NO PROPER FACILITY TO EAT, NO MODERNIZATION ETC. BUT NOW THINGS ARE CHANGING. DUE TO INCREASE IN PER CAPITA INCOME AND MODERNIZATION PEOPLE THINK PILGRIMAGE KE SATH GHUMNA BHI HOJAAYEGA. SO THEY THINK TO TAKE PROPER ORGANIZED HOTELS TO STAY SO THAT THEY DON’T GET TIRED AND CAN ENJOY THEIR PILGRIMAGE TOUR IN PROPER LUXURIOUS MANNER. (PROPER FOD TO EAT, PROPER STAY, PROPER VEHICLE FOR TRAVELLING). IN FACT HASSLE FREE JOURNEY. EARLIER THERE WERE NO MAJOR AIRPORTS NEAR PILGRIMAGE PLACES AND NOT ALL PILGRIMAGE PLACES WERE CONNECTED WITH TRAINS. BUT NOW MANY PILGRIMAGE PLACES HAS AIRPORTS AND MAJORITY OF PILGRIMAGE PLACES ARE CONNECTED WITH TRAINS. DUE TO THIS MOVEMENT OF PEOPLE HAS BECOME VERY EASY SO NOW MANY PEOPLE GOES FOR PILGRIMAGE. THIS HAS CREATED THE NEED TO INCREASE IN INFRA (BRANDED HOTELS, ORGANIZED RESTAURANTS) AT PILGRIMAGE PLACES. 

 

23 AUGUST, 2023

GLOBALLY PENETRATION OF HOTEL ROOMS PER 1,000 POPULATION IS 2.7. IN CHINA ITS 2.8, IN U.S ITS 16. AND INDIA PENETRATION OF HOTEL ROOMS PER 1,000 POPULATION IS ONLY 0.1. THIS SHOWS INDIA’S HOTEL INDUSTRY IS HIGHLY UNDERVALUED. 

 

22 AUGUST, 2023

REVENUE OF INDIAN HOTELS SEGMENT IS EXPECTED TO REACH $7.66 BILLION IN 2023 AND WILL INCREASE TO $10.53 BILLION BY 2027. THE NUMBER OF USERS WILL BE AROUND 61.33 MILLION USERS BY 2027. THE USER PENETRATION RATE OF HOTELS IS JUST 3.2% IN 2023 AND IS EXPECTED TO INCREASE TO 4.2% BY 2027. THE AVERAGE PER USER OF HOTEL IS AROUND $166.50. AROUND 59% OF TOTAL REVENUE OF HOTELS IN INDIA WILL BE GENERATED BY ONLINE SALES BY 2027. 

 

21 AUGUST, 2023

GLOBAL HOSPITALITY INDUSTRY WAS VALUED AROUND $3953 BILLION IN 2021 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH $6717.3 BILLION BY 2028 GROWING AT A CAGR OF 10.24%. 

 

20 AUGUST, 2023

THERE ARE AROUND 1,75,000 HOTEL ROOMS GLOBALLY. 

 

19 AUGUST, 2023

LEMON TREE HAS MARKET SHARE OF 12% IN MIDSCALE AND ECONOMY SEGMENT OF HOTELS AND AROUND 7% MARKET SHARE IN UPPER MIDSCALE HOTELS. 

 

18 AUGUST, 2023

LEMON TREE HAS STRONG PRESENCE IN BUSINESS SEGMENT IN BOTH SOUTHERN AND NORTHERN MARKET. COMPANY HAS 40% OF ITS INVENTORY IN BANGALORE, HYDERABAD AND GURUGRAM. 

 

17 AUGUST, 2023

LEMON TREE OPERATES UNDER 7 BRANDS AURIKA HOTELS AND RESORTS, LEMON TREE PREMIER, LEMON TREE HOTELS, RED FOX, KEYS PRIMA, KEYS SELECT AND KEYS LITE. 

 

16 AUGUST, 2023

CURRENTLY LEMON TREE HAS 8,489 ROOMS +2,789 UPCOMING ROOMS SO COMPANY WILL HAVE TOTAL 11,278 ROOMS BY FY 2025. 

 

15 AUGUST, 2023

INDIAN HOTELS HAS HIGHEST ROOMS WITH 31,000+ ROOMS, ITC HAS SECOND HIGHEST ROOMS WITH 10,000+ ROOMS AND LEMON TREE HAS THIRD LARGEST ROOMS WITH 8,400 ROOMS. AFTER LEMON TREE WHICH HAS 8,400 ROOMS, ROYAL ORCHID HAS 5,450 ROOMS. THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN 3RD LARGEST ROOM OPERATOR AND 4TH LARGEST ROOM OPERATOR IS AROUND 3,000 ROOMS WHICH IS A HUGE GAP. 

 

14 AUGUST, 2023

ABOVE RISHIKESH PLACES LIKE AULI, JOSHIMATH, SONPRAYAG, RUDRAPRAYAG, CHOPTA, ALMORA IN FACT ENTIRE UTTARAKHAND ABOVE RISHIKESH DOES NOT HAVE ONE SINGLE ORGANISED HOTEL TO STAY OR NOT A ONE SINGLE ORGANISED RESTAURANT TO EAT. LIKE THIS WAY MANY PILGRIMAGE PLACES IN INDIA DOES NOT HAVE A SINGLE ORGANISED HOTEL TO STAY OR EAT. BUT THIS WILL CHANGE IN FUTURE. JUST IMAGINE THE OPPORTUNITIES IN ORGANISED HOTELS AND QSR SECTOR IN COMING YEARS FROM SUCH PLACES. 

 

13 AUGUST, 2023

HOTEL INDUSTRY AND RESTAURANT: EARLIER WHEN PEOPLE USED TO GO FOR PILGRIMAGE PLACES THEY USE TO STAY IN DHARAMSHALAS BECAUSE OF LOW CAPITA INCOME AND NO PROPER INFRASTRUCTURE. BUT NOW THINGS ARE CHANGING. PEOPLE WANT GOOD HOTELS TO STAY WHEN THEY GO FOR PILGRIMAGE DUE TO INCREASE IN PER CAPITA INCOME, AWARENESS OF GOOD BRANDS WHICH PROVIDES GOOD SERVICES EVEN AT PILGRIMAGE PLACES SO THAT PEOPLE CAN HAVE HASSLE FREE PILGRIM TOUR. THIS WILL ALSO CHANGE RESTAURANT SERVICES IN PILGRIMAGE PLACES. EARLIER PEOPLE USE TO EAT AT DHABA’S WHILE GOING FOR PILGRIMAGE TOURS. BUT NOW THINGS HAVE CHANGE. PEOPLE WANT GOOD RESTAURANTS WHICH ARE SAFE IN HYGIENE. IN FACT THERE IS GREAT CHANGE IN CONSUMER BEHAVIOUR IN PILGRIMAGE TOURISM. PEOPLE WANT GOOD AND LUXURIOUS SERVICE FOR PILGRIMAGE TOURISM. ITS LIKE DARSHAN KE SATH GHUMNA BHI HOJAAYEGA. SO LISTED HOTEL BRANDS AND RESTAURANT CHAINS WILL SEE A HUGE DEMAND OR OPPORTUNITY TO EXPAND THEIR OPERATION AT PILGRIMAGE PLACES. RELIGIOUS TOURISM MARKET SIZE IN INDIA WAS VALUED AT $1,071 MILLION IN 2020 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH $1,704 MILLION BY 2026. 

 

12 AUGUST, 2023

NUMBER OF HOTEL ROOMS UNDER CONSTRUCTION PIPELINE: CHINA 6,75,074, U.S 6,50,626, INDIA 47,539, U.K 43,332, CANADA 35,758. 

 

11 AUGUST, 2023

CHINA HAS AROUND 11,14,100 BRANDED HOTEL ROOMS. INDIA HAS ONLY 1,50,000 BRANDED HOTEL ROOMS. 

 

10 AUGUST, 2023

LATEST UPDATES ON CROMPTON GREAVES CONSUMER: 1) EARLIER COMPANY WAS B2B ORIENTED COMPANY BUT NOW COMPANY HAS STARTED TO SHIFT TO B2C SEGMENT. 2) COMPANY’S MAIN FOCUS IS TO EXPAND DEEP INTO HOUSEHOLD KITCHEN APPLIANCES 3) COMPANY SET UP ITS LARGEST R&D CENTER OF OVER 50,000 SQ FT IN VIKHROLI MUMBAI TO DEVELOP NEW PRODUCTS WITH ADVANCED TECHNOLOGIES LIKE IOT. THE COMPANY HAS ALREADY DEVELOPED  A STRONG LINE UP OF SMART PRODUCTS IN IOT SPACE LIKE IOT LAMPS AND BATTENS, IOT COOLERS AND IOT SMART PLUGS. 4) COMPANY EXPECTS RS 300-400 CRORE REVENUE FROM BUILT IN KITCHEN APPLIANCES AND DOMESTIC HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES AND GAIN A MARKET SHARE OF 10% AND BE AMONGST TOP THREE PLAYER IN BUILT IN KITCHEN APPLIANCES AND SMALL DOMESTIC HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES SEGMENT. 5) COMPANY IS PLANNING TO OPEN 50 EXECUTIVE BRANDED OUTLETS OF BUILT IN KITCHEN AND DOMESTIC HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES SEGMENT. COMPANY IS PLANNING TO ROLL OUT ITS SIGNATURE STUDIOS IN 10 CITIES WHICH INCLUDE METRO CITIES MAJORLY AND STUDIOS ALREADY OPERATIONAL IN 5 OUT THESE 10 CITIES. COMPANY PLANS TO LAUNCHED THESE STUDIO IN TOP 300 CITIES BY END OF DECEMBER  2023. 6) COMPANY ACQUIRED 81% STAKE IN BUTTER GANDHI APPLIANCES AND WILL MERGE BUTTERFLY GANDHI APPLIANCES INTO CG CONSUMER. BUTTERFLY GANDHI IS A HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES COMPANY. 7) FINANCIALS : COMPANY’S REVENUE INCREASED FROM RS 4,478 CR IN FY19 TO RS 6,869 CR IN FY23. ITS NET PROFIT INCREASED FROM RS 401 CR IN FY19 TO RS 476 IN FY23. ITS EPS INCREASED FROM RS 5.17 IN 2018 TO RS 7.29 IN FY23. BY THIS I CONCLUDE MY RESEARCH ON CROMPTON GREAVES CONSUMER AND HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES SECTOR.  

 

9 AUGUST, 2023

AT PRESENT THERE ARE ONLY 13 MILLION SMART HOMES IN INDIA COMPARED TO 60.4 MILLION SMART HOMES IN U.S. PENETRATION OF SMART HOME IN INDIA IS JUST 4.2% IN 2022 AND IS EXPECTED TO INCREASE TO 12.84% BY 2028. THIS WILL INCREASE THE DEMAND OF IOT BASED HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES IN INDIA. 

 

8 AUGUST, 2023

DUE TO INCREASE IN PER CAPITA INCOME NUMBER OF INTERNET USERS IN INDIA WILL INCREASE BY 45% BY 2025 TO TOUCH 900 MILLION FROM AROUND 622 MILLION. DUE TO INCREASE IN INTERNET USERS PEOPLE WANT SMART THINGS LIKE SMART PHONES, SMART WATCHES, SMART CARS AND EVEN SMART HOMES. IN SMART HOMES EVERYTHING IS CONNECTED WITH INTERNET. LIKE ALL HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES CONNECTED WITH INTERNET. EVERY HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES CAN BE CONTROLLED OR OPERATED FROM MOBILE APP WITH HELP OF INTERNET. AS BY 2030 INDIA WILL HAVE HIGHEST WORKING POPULATION SO IOT BASED HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES WILL SEE BOOST. WOMEN BEFORE LEAVING FROM OFFICE CAN START THEIR HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES VIA MOBILE APP SO THAT HALF OF THEIR THINGS ARE DONE WHEN SHE REACHES HOME. SHE DOES NOT NEED TO PHYSICALLY STAY HOME TO DO THINGS DONE. EG WASHING CLOTHES EARLIER WOMEN NEEDED TO MANUALLY OPERATE WASHING MACHINE AND TILL CLOTHES ARE NOT WASHED OFF SHE NEEDED TO PHYSICALLY PRESENT THER. BUT IN IOT BASED WASHING MACHINE ONCE EVERYONE PUTS CLOTHES IN MACHINE ONE CAN START THE WASHING MACHINE FROM MOBILE APP AND MACHINE AUTOMATICALLY GETS SWITCH OFF ONCE CLOTHED ARE WASHED. SON ONE DOES NOT NEED TO PHYSICALLY PRESENT AT HOME. SAME GOES FOR OVEN. IF LADY HAS EARLY MORNING JOB SHE NEEDS TO PREPARE FOOD EARLY IN MORNING. BUT NOW DUE TO IOT BASED MICOWAVES AND OVENS ONE JUST PREPARES HALF THINGS AND KEEP IT OVEN AND ONCE EVERYONE GETS UP IN MORNING FOR BREAKFAST SHE JUST NEED TO SWITCH ON THE OVEN FROM HER MOBILE APP AND EVERYONE GET FRESH FOOD TO IT. OTHERWISE WORKING WOMEN WOULD PREPARE FOOD EARLY IN MORNING AND PEOPLE AT HER HOME USED TO EAT THAT FOOD IN LUNCH. SO IN BETWEEN SOMETIME FOOD GETS SPOIL. SAME GOES FOR IOT BASED COOKER, IOT BASED JUICER, MIXER ETC. IOT BASED HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES ACT AS TIME SAVING THINGS FOR WORKING POPULATION. 

 

7 AUGUST, 2023

WALMART AIMS TO SOURCE INDIAN MADE GOODS OF $10 BILLION BY 2027. 

 

6 AUGUST, 2023

AVERAGE VOLUME PER HOUSEHOLD IN HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES IN INDIA. IT IS NOT EVEN 0.5 PIECES. JUST IMAGINE HOW UNDERVALUED OR UNDER PENETRATED INDIAN HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCE MARKET IS. 

 

5 AUGUST, 2023

BUTTERFLY GANDHI APPLIANCES HAS STRONG PRESENCE IN SOUTH INDIA. TO INCREASE PRESENCE IN SOUTH INDIA CG CONSUMER ACQUIRED BUTTERFLY GANDHI APPLIANCES. 

 

4 AUGUST, 2023

BUTTERFLY GANDHI RANKS TOP 3 IN MIXER, COOKERS AND STOVES IN SOUTH INDIA, COMPANY RANKS NO 1 FOR WET GRINDERS AND LPG STOVES IN SOUTH INDIA, COMPANY’S 80% REVENUE COMES FROM IN HOUSE MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS, COMPANY RANKS NO 1 IN FLIPKART IN MIXER GRINDERS AND NO 1 IN FLIPKART AND AMAZON IN WET GRINDERS AND GAS STOVES. 

 

3 AUGUST, 2023

BUTTERFLY GANDHI HAS MARKET SHARE OF 11% IN MIXER GRINDER, 10% MARKET SHARE IN GAS STOVES, 7% STAKE IN PRESSURE COOKERS, AND 4% STAKE IN ALL OTHER HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES. 

 

2 AUGUST, 2023

CG CONSUMER HAS ACQUIRED 81% STAKE IN BUTTERFLY GANDHI  APPLIANCES WHICH IS ALSO A HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES WHICH COMPANY. NOW CG CONSUMER ANNOUNCES MERGER OF BUTTERFLY GANDHI INTO CG CONSUMER. BUTTERFLY GANDHI SELLS LPG STOVES, MIXER GRINDER, ELECTRIC RICE COOKER, PRESSURE COOKER, WET GRINDERS, CHIMNEY, POWER HOBS, BUILT IN HOBS, HAND BLENDER, HAND MIXER, TOASTER, SANDWICH MAKER, JUICER, VACCUM FLASKS, VEGETABLE CHOPPER, WATER BOTTLES, IRON, AIR COOLER, WASHING MACHINE, TOWER FAN, ELECTRIC KETTLE, EGG BOILER, NON STICK COOKER, PAN, TAWA ETC. 

 

1 AUGUST, 2023

AT PRESENT THERE ARE ONLY 13 MILLION SMART HOMES IN INDIA COMPARED TO 60.4 MILLION SMART HOMES IN U.S. PENETRATION OF SMART HOMES IN INDIA IS JUST 4.2% IN 2022 AND IS EXPECTED TO INCREASE TO 12.84% BY 2028. THIS WILL INCREASE THE DEMAND OF IOT BASED HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES IN INDIA. 

 

31 JULY, 2023

GROWTH FACTORS OF HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES IN INDIA: 1) LOW PENETRATION : PENETRATION OF HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES IN INDIA WILL BE JUST 24.3% BY END OF 2023 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH 38.6% BY 2027. THE AVERAGE VOLUME PER PERSON OF HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES IN INDIA IS JUST 0.3 PIECES. THE AVERAGE REVENUE PER USER HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES IN INDIA IS JUST $13.09 COMPARED TP GLOBAL AVERAGE REVENUE PER USER OF $111.60. 2) INCREASE IN MIDDLE CLASS: BY 2030 INDIA WILL MOVE FROM BEING AN ECONOMY LED BY BOTTOM OF THE PYRAMID, TO ONE LED BY MIDDLE CLASS. AROUND 80% OF HOUSEHOLD IN 2030 WILL BE MIDDLE INCOME, UP FROM ABOUT 50% TODAY. THE MIDDLE CLASS WILL DRIVE 75% OF CONSUMER SPENDING IN 2030. 3) INCREASE IN PER CAPITA INCOME: INDIA’S PER CAPITA INCOME WILL INCREASE TO $3231 IN 2026 FROM $2301 IN 2022. AS 140 MILLION HOUSEHOLDS MOVES INTO MIDDLE CLASS AND ANOTHER 20 MILLION MOVE INTO HIGHER INCOME BRACKET, THEY WILL SPEND 2.5X MORE ON ESSENTIAL THINGS AND 4X MORE ON SERVICE. MIDDLE CLASS AND HIGH INCOME ENTRANTS WILL DRIVE 15-20% INCREASE IN THE OWNERSHIP OF DURABLES. 4) TRANSFORMATION OF RURAL AREAS INTO SMALLER CITIES AND SMALLER CITIES INTO BIGGER CITIES: BY 2030 INDIA WILL HAVE 104 TIER II CITIES, 331 TIER III AND IV CITIES AND ONLY 155 TIER I CITIES. THIS SHOWS SMALLER TOWNS AND AREAS IN INDIA ARE ON ITS WAY TO TRANSFORM INTO SMART CITIES. AFTER 2030 THIS 331 TIER III AND IV CITIES WILL START TRANSFORMING INTO TIER II CITIES AND 104 TIER II CITIES WILL TRANSFORM INTO TIER I CITIES DUE TO INCREASE IN PER CAPITA INCOME AND TO DESIRE TO LIVE MODERN LIFE. 5) INCREASE IN NUMBER OF HOUSEHOLD UNITS: IN INDIA ONLY 3 HOUSES ARE BUILT PER 1,000 YEAR COMPARED WITH REQUIRED CONSTRUCTION RATE OF 5 HOUSES PER 1,000 PEOPLE. THE CURRENT SHORTAGE OF HOUSES IN URBAN URBAN AREAS IS AROUND 10 MILLION . 3,28,000 NEW HOME UNITS WERE LAUNCHED IN INDIA. CREDIA HAS DONE PARTNERSHIP WITH IGBC TO LAUNCH NEW 4,00,000 HOUSE UNITS BY 2030. ALL THIS 7,28,000 NEW HOUSEHOLD UNITS WILL HAVE HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES. 6) INTERNET USERS: ACTIVE INTERNET USERS IN INDIA IS EXPECTED TO INCREASE BY 45% BY 2050 TO TOUCH 900 MILLION FROM AROUND 622 MILLION. INCREASE IN INTERNET USERS WILL DRIVE BY HIGHER ADOPTION IN RURAL INDIA WHICH CLOCKS 14% GROWTH TO 299 MILLION INTERNET USERS FOR 31% OF INDIA RURAL POPULATION. BY 2025-26 THERE WILL BE MORE INTERNET USERS IN RURAL AREAS THAN IN URBAN INDIA. TOTAL URBAN POPULATION IS 485 MILLION OUT OF THIS 323 MILLION USES INTERNET. AND TOTAL RURAL POPULATION IN 949 MILLION. OUT OF THIS ONLY 299 MILLION USES INTERNET. ONLY 13% OF RURAL POPULATION USES INTERNET FOR ONLINE SHOPPING. THIS SHOWS THAT RURAL INDIA PROVIDE WIDE SPACE FOR GROWTH IN TERMS OF CONSUMPTION. THE NUMBER OF INTERNET USERS IN RURAL AREAS WILL NOT REMAIN LOW THROUGHOUT LIFE. THE NUMBER OF USERS WILL GO ON INCREASING BECAUSE OF INCREASE IN INCOME AND MODERNIZATION. AS NUMBER OF INTERNET USERS WILL INCREASE IN RURAL AREAS AND SMALLER TOWNS THE BRAND AWARENESS WILL INCREASE AND THIS WILL HELP TO INCREASE THE SALES OF HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES. 7) A NECESSITY : EARLIER IN RURAL AREAS AND SMALLER TOWNS ELECTRIC HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES WERE USED AS LUXURY PRODUCTS BUT NOW THEY ARE USED AS A BASIC NECESSITY. 8) DESIRE TO LIVE A MODERN LIFE : EARLIER IN RURAL INDIA AND SMALLER TOWNS OF INDIA PEOPLE LIVED A SIMPLE LIFE DUE TO LACK OF EDUCATION SO THEY WERE NOT AWARE OF NEW THINGS. BUT NOW DUE TO INCREASE IN EDUCATION LED TO INCREASE IN PER CAPITA INCOME AND BROUGHT AWARENESS OF ALL TYPES OF PRODUCTS. AND INCREASE IN PER CAPITA INCOME LED TO LIVE MODERN LIFE. 9) RURAL ELECTRIFICATION: PENETRATION OF HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES IS LOW BECAUSE OF NO CONSTANT SUPPLY OF ELECTRICITY IN RURAL AREAS AND SMALLER CITIES. BUT NOW THINGS ARE CHANGING. GOVERNMENT IS PLANNING FOR 24 HOURS CONSTANT ELECTRICITY SUPPLY IN WHOLE INDIA. THIS WILL INCREASE THE SALES OF ELECTRIC HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES. 10) YOUNGEST POPULATION : BY 2030 INDIA WILL HAVE WORLD’S YOUNGEST POPULATION. MEANS INDIA WILL HAVE MOST WORKING POPULATION. WORKING PEOPLE USES ALL ELECTRIC APPLIANCES SINCE THEY WILL GET LESS TIME TO COOK FOOD. THIS WILL INCREASE THE DEMAND OF HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES. 

 

30 JULY, 2023

INDIAN WATER PURIFIER MARKET SIZE WAS VALUED AT AROUND $2,780 MILLION IN 2022 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH $5,002.3 MILLION BY 2028 GROWING AT A CAGR OF 10.42%. 

 

29 JULY, 2023

INDIAN GOVERNMENT HAVE PLANNED TO SOLARISED 33.5 LAKH WATER PUMPS. OUT OF THESE 1.70 LAKH WATER PUMPS HAVE BEEN SOLARISED TILL PRESENT. 

 

28 JULY, 2023

THERE ARE STILL 95 LAKHS FOSSIL FUEL POWERED WATER PUMPS IN INDIA. THIS WILL GET CONVERTED INTO SOLAR WATER PUMPS IN COMING YEAR. 

 

27 JULY, 2023

CG CONSUMER HAS MARKET SHARE OF AROUND 28-30% IN RESIDENTIAL WATER PUMPS SEGMENT. 

 

26 JULY, 2023

INDIAN SOLAR PUMP MARKET IS EXPECTED TO GROW FROM RS 6,000 CR TO RS 10,000 CR IN NEXT 3-4 YEARS. INDIA IS THIRD LARGEST REGIONAL MARKET FOR WATER PUMPS AFTER MEA AND CHINA. 

 

25 JULY, 2023

THE WATER PUMPS MARKET SIZE IN INDIA IS VALUED AT $1.8 BILLION IN 2022 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH $2.4 BILLION BY 2028 GROWING AT A CAGR OF 5.26%. 

 

24 JULY, 2023

EARLIER IN RURAL AREAS AND TIER III AND IV TOWNS PEOPLE USED CFL BULBS IN LIGHTS BUT NOW PEOPLE USE LED LIGHTS TO MAKE THEIR HOME LOOK MODERN. THIS WILL INCREASE THE DEMAND OF LED LIGHTING. 

 

23 JULY, 2023

BY 2030 INDIA WILL HAVE 104 TIER II, 331 TIER III AND IV CITIES AND ONLY 155 TIER I CITIES. THIS SHOWS SMALLER TOWNS AND RURAL AREAS IN INDIA ARE ON ITS WAY TO TRANSFORM INTO SMART CITIES. AFTER 2030 THIS 331 TIER III AND IV CITIES WILL START TRANSFORMING INTO TIER II CITIES AND 104 TIER II CITIES WILL TRANSFORM INTO METRO CITIES. ALL THIS IS BECAUSE OF INCREASE IN PER CAPITA INCOME, TECHNOLOGIES AND DESIRE TO LIVE MODERN LIFE. THIS TRANSFORMATION OF SMALLER TOWNS INTO BIGGER CITIES WILL BRING THE BIGGEST DEMAND OF HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES. 

 

22 JULY, 2023

LI-FI TECHNOLOGY CAN BE GAME CHANGER FOR LED LIGHTING MARKET. LI-FI IS A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY THAT USES THE INFRARED AND VISIBLE LIGHT SPECTRUM FOR HIGH SPEED DATA COMMUNICATION. IN ITS PRESENCE STATE, ONLY LED LIGHTING CAN BE USED FOR THE TRANSMISSION OF VISIBLE LIGHT. ONE OF THE BIGGEST APPLICATIONS OF LI-FI COULD BE IN THE UPCOMING SMART CITIES IN THE COUNTRY, WHERE THE UNDERLYING THEME WILL BE INTERNET OF THINGS FOR MODERN CITY MANAGEMENT AND THE CONNECTIVITY WILL HAPPEN THROUGH LED LIGHTING. LI-FI SPEED CAN TOUCH AS MUCH AS 10 GB PER SECOND OVER A 1 KM RADIUS. 

 

21 JULY, 2023

2 OF EVERY 5 RURAL CONSUMER IN INDIA ARE UNSATISFIED WITH SERVICE FROM STATE RUN POWER UTILITIES AND MILLIONS REMAIN WITHOUT ELECTRICITY DESPITE DECLARATION OF 100% HOUSEHOLD ACCESS. THING IS THEY HAVE ELECTRICITY CONNECTIONS BUT ELECTRICITY SUPPLY IS NOT CONSTANT, STILL 5.8 MILLION HOUSEHOLD ARE WITHOUT CONSTANT ELECTRICITY SUPPLY. BUT IN COMING YEARS THINGS WILL CHANGE. EVERY RURAL AREAS IN INDIA WILL HAVE 24 HRS ELECTRICITY. THIS WILL INCREASE THE DEMAND OF LED LIGHTING AND ELECTRIC HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES. 

 

20 JULY, 2023

ELECTRICITY STILL DOES NOT REACHES EVERY HOUSE OF RURAL INDIA. NEARLY HALF OF THE HOUSEHOLD IN RURAL INDIA ARE STILL FACING PROBLEMS IN GETTING UNINTERRUPTED ELECTRICITY SUPPLY. DUE TO THIS 26% OF RURAL HOUSEHOLD IN INDIA USES KEROSENE AS SOURCE OF LIGHTING. AND AROUND 62% OF INDIAN POPULATION STILL LIVES IN RURAL INDIA. BUT IN COMING YEARS RURAL ELECTRIFICATION WILL PLAY MAJOR ROLE FOR DEMAND OF LED LIGHTING AND ELECTRIC HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES. 

 

19 JULY, 2023

GOVERNMENT HAS DISTRIBUTED AROUND 367 MILLION LED’S ACROSS INDIA WHICH HAS LED TO AN ANNUAL SAVINGS OF 47,785 MILLION KWH ENERGY, APPROXIMATELY 9,567 MW OF PEAK DEMAND, TRANSLATING INTO RS 19,114 CRORE COST REDUCTION AND ESTIMATED GHG EMISSION REDUCTION OF 38.70 MILLION TONNES OF CO2 ANNUALLY. 

 

18 JULY, 2023

ORGANIZED FAN SECTOR IS TRYING TO GAIN MARKET SHARE BY OFFERING BETTER SERVICES AND ALSO ENERGY EFFICIENT PRODUCTS. BEE NEW NORMS SETTING OUT NEW STAR RATING PROGRAMME FOR ELECTRIC FANS MAY HASTEN THIS PROCESS OF TRANSITION. STAR LABELLING DENOTES ENERGY SAVINGS OF MINIMUM 30% FOR 1 STAR RATED FANS TO OVER 50% FOR 5 STAR RATED FANS. UNDER THE NEW MANDATE, NOW MANUFACTURERS WOULD HAVE TO DISPLAY STAR RATINGS BETWEEN 1 TO 5 STARS ON LOWER ELECTRICITY COMPARED TO CONVENTIONAL INDUCTION FANS. THEY ARE ALSO CALLED ENERGY SAVINGS FAN OR BRUSHLESS DC FAN. WITH THE USE OF BLDC MOTOR IN CEILING FAN ONE CAN SAVE UP TO 60% ELECTRICITY IN CEILING FAN. BLDC FAN’S LIFESPAN IS MORE THAN A NORMAL CEILING FAN BECAUSE THERE IS NO HEAT GENERATED IN BLDC MOTOR. HENCE IT INCREASE LIFESPAN OF CEILING FAN BEARING. WITH THE EXPECTED ENHANCEMENT IN ENERGY EFFICIENCY LEVELS FOR FANS, BLDC FANS ARE LIKELY TO OCCUPY THE CENTER STAGE IN COMING YEARS. EARLIER BLDC FANS WERE IMPORT DEPENDENT FOR SOME PARTS WHICH WERE CRITICAL. MAGNET AND MOTOR CONTROL WERE IMPORTED FROM CHINA. HOWEVER, NOW BLDC MOTOR SOURCING ECOSYSTEM IS AVAILABLE IN INDIA. ONLY ORGANIZED FAN PLAYER ARE EQUIPPED WITH BLDC MOTOR MANUFACTURING. THIS WILL HELP THEM TO CAPTURE MORE MARKET SHARE FROM UNORGANIZED FAN PLAYERS. 

 

17 JULY, 2023

RURAL ELECTRIFICATION, INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT, UPGRADATION OF PUBLIC LIGHTING SYSTEMS, CONSTRUCTION OF NEW HOMES ALONG WITH INSTALLATION OF SMART AND CONNECTED ENERGY EFFICIENT LIGHTING ARE GROWTH FACTORS FOR LED LIGHTING IN INDIA. 

 

16 JULY, 2023

LED LIGHTING IS ECO FRIENDLY AND ENERGY EFFICIENCY OF OVER 80% OVER TRADITIONAL LIGHTING. 

 

15 JULY, 2023

INDIA’S LED LIGHTING MARKET WAS VALUED AT $3.4 BILLION IN 2022 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH $11.9 BILLION BY 2028 GROWING AT A CAGR OF 23.22%.

 

14 JULY, 2023

REVENUE FROM INDIAN FAN INDUSTRY WILL CROSS RS 16,000 CRORE BY 2027 FROM RS 10,000 CRORE AT PRESENT. 

 

13 JULY, 2023

UNORGANIZED SECTOR ACCOUNTS FOR MORE THAN 40% IN FAN INDUSTRY. 

 

12 JULY, 2023

FANS ARE PROBABLY ONE OF THE FEW INVENTIONS THAT HAVE NOT GONE OUT OF FASHION EVEN AFTER 125 YEARS OF EXISTENCE. FAN IS THE SECOND MOST WANTED CONSUMER DURABLE IN RURAL INDIA AFTER BICYCLE. 

 

11 JULY, 2023

INDIA’S CEILING FAN MARKET WAS AROUND 41.2 MILLION UNITS IN 2022 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH 47.5 MILLION UNITS BY 2028. 

 

10 JULY, 2023

EARLIER TO USE ELECTRIC HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES WAS TREATED LIKE USING LUXURY PRODUCTS. BUT NOW THINGS HAVE CHANGED. USING ELECTRIC HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES IS NECESSITY NOW. 

 

9 JULY, 2023

3,28,000 NEW HOME UNITS WERE LAUNCHED IN INDIA. AND RECENTLY CREDIA HAS DONE PARTNERSHIP WITH IGBC TO LAUNCH NEW 4,00,000 HOUSE UNITS ACROSS INDIA BY 2030. ALL THIS 7,28,000 UNITS WILL HAVE NEW HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES. 

 

8 JULY, 2023

REVENUE OF HAIR CLIPPER AND TRIMMER IN INDIA IS AROUND $1.56 BILLION. THE MARKET WILL GROW BY 4.65% BY 2028. IN GLOBAL COMPARISON HAIR CLIPPER AND TRIMMER MARKET IN CHINA IS VALUED AT $2,994 MILLION. PER HOUSEHOLD REVENUE SHARE OF HAIR CLIPPER AND TRIPPER IN INDIA IS $4.76. INDIAN HAIR CLIPPER AND TRIMMER MARKET IS EXPECTED TO REACH 41.8 MILLION PIECES BY 2028. THE AVERAGE VOLUME PER HOUSEHOLD FOR HAIR CLIPPER AND TRIMMER IN INDIA IS JUST 0.11 PIECES. 

 

7 JULY, 2023

INDIA SELLS JUST 2 MILLION HOUSEHOLD CHIMNEY PER YEAR. AND THIS WILL INCREASE BY 13-15% EVERY YEAR. 

 

6 JULY, 2023

INDIAN HOUSEHOLD CHIMNEY AND BUILT IN HOBS MARKET WAS VALUED AT RS 19.7 BILLION IN 2022 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH RS 42.7 BILLION BY 2028 GROWING AT A CAGR OF 13.74%. 

 

5 JULY, 2023

REVENUE OF INDIAN TOASTER MARKET WAS JUST AROUND $0.43 BILLION. IN GLOBAL COMPARISON REVENUE OF TOASTER MARKET IN CHINA IS AROUND $840.20 MILLION. PER HOUSEHOLD REVENUE OF TOASTER IN INDIA IS JUST $1.32. VOLUME OF TOASTER IN INDIA IS EXPECTED TO REACH 14.79 MILLION PIECES BY 2028. THE AVERAGE VOLUME PER HOUSEHOLD OF TOASTER IN INDIA IS JUST 0.04 PIECES. 

 

4 JULY, 2023

REVENUE OF INDIAN ELECTRIC KETTLES IS AT AROUND $232.30 MILLION. IN GLOBAL COMPARISON REVENUE OF ELECTRIC KETTLES IN CHINA IS AT $1,119 MILLION. REVENUE OF ELECTRIC KETTLE PER HOUSEHOLD ANNUALLY IN INDIA IS JUST $0.71. VOLUME OF INDIAN ELECTRIC KETTLE MARKET IS EXPECTED TO REACH 11.07 MILLION PIECES BY 2028. THE AVERAGE VOLUME PER HOUSEHOLD IN INDIA OF ELECTRIC KETTLE IS JUST 0.03 PIECES. 

 

3 JULY, 2023

5 MILLION AIR COOLERS ARE SOLD ANNUALLY IN INDIA. 

 

2 JULY, 2023

THE INDIAN AIR COOLER MARKET WAS VALUED AT $339.64 MILLION IN 2022 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH $590 MILLION BY 2028. GROWING AT A CAGR OF 9.04%. AROUND 69.68% OF INDIAN AIR COOLER MARKET IS UNORGANIZED. JUST IMAGINE THE OPPORTUNITY OF ORGANIZED AIR COOLER PLAYERS IN INDIA. 

 

1 JULY, 2023

THE GLOBAL MARKET SIZE OF MIXER GRINDER WAS AROUND $12.70 BILLION AND IS ESTIMATED TO REACH AROUND $18.18 BILLION IN 2023 GROWING AT A CAGR OF 3.7%. THE MARKET SIZE OF INDIAN MIXER GRINDER WAS VALUED AT AROUND $391 MILLION BUT THING IS THAT GROWTH RATE OF INDIAN MIXER GRINDER FOR 2017-2022 WAS 18% WHICH SURPASSES GLOBAL GROWTH RATE. EVEN THE GROWTH RATE OF INDIAN MIXER GRINDER WILL SURPASS THE GLOBAL GROWTH RATE FOR 2023-2030. 

 

30 JUNE, 2023

INDIAN WATER HEATER MARKET WAS VALUED AT $282.34 MILLION IN 2022 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH $422.78 MILLION IN 2028. THE PENETRATION RATE IS LOW BECAUSE EARLIER IN RURAL AREAS AND SMALLER TOWNS THERE WAS NO REGULAR SUPPLY OF ELECTRICITY. SO PEOPLE USE TO HEAT WATER ON WITH HELP OF FIRE WOOD. BUT NOW DUE TO RURAL ELECTRIFICATION DEMAND OF WATER HEATERS WILL INCREASE. 

 

29 JUNE, 2023

REVENUE OF INDIAN MICROWAVE OVENS SEGMENT IS EURO 0.36 BILLION COMPARED TO EURO 1,842.94 MILLION IN U.S. INDIAN MICROWAVE OVEN VOLUME IS EXPECTED TO REACH 3.32 MILLION PIECES BY 2028. THE AVERAGE VOLUME PER HOUSEHOLD IN MICROWAVE OVENS IN INDIA IS JUST 0.01 PIECES. 

 

28 JUNE, 2023

THE GLOBAL ELECTRIC IRON MARKET IS EXPECTED TO REACH 214.10 MILLION PIECES BY 2028. INDIAN ELECTRIC IRON MARKET IS EXPECTED TO REACH 25.50 MILLION PIECES BY 2028. THE AVERAGE VOLUME PER HOUSEHOLD IN ELECTRIC IRON SEGMENT IS JUST 0.07 PIECES IN INDIA. 

 

27 JUNE, 2023

INDIA’S DISHWASHER MARKET IS VALUED JUST AT RS 300 CR AND BY 2027 IT WILL REACH RS 667 CRORE. 

 

26 JUNE, 2023

INDIA’S HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCE MARKET IS VALUED AT $68.75 BILLION AS COMPARED TO $139.50 BILLION OF CHINA. VOLUME OF INDIA’S HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCE MARKET IS EXPECTED TO BE 532 MILLION PIECES BY 2027. THE AVERAGE VOLUME PER PERSON OF HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES IS JUST 0.3 PIECES IN INDIA. PENETRATION OF HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES IN INDIA WILL BE JUST 24.3% BY END OF 2023 AND IS EXPECTED TO EACH 38.6% BY 2027. JUST IMAGINE ONLY 38.6% OF INDIAN POPULATION WILL USE HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES BY 2027. THIS SHOWS HOW UNDERVALUED INDIAN HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES MARKET IS. THE AVERAGE REVENUE PER USER OF HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES IN INDIA IS JUST $13.09 COMPARED TO GLOBAL AVERAGE REVENUE PER USER OF $111.60. 

 

25 JUNE, 2023

THERE ARE 800 MILLION MAIN HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES SHIPMENT WORLDWIDE OF WHICH 24 MILLIONS ARE MADE IN INDIA. 

 

24 JUNE, 2023

INDIA SELLS LESS THAN 1 LAKH DISHWASHER ANNUALLY, COMPARED TO 10 MILLION UNITS IN U.S, 12 MILLION UNITS IN EUROPE, 52% OF U.K HOUSEHOLD HAVE DISHWASHERS. 

 

23 JUNE, 2023

IN INDIA PENETRATION RATE OF HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES LIKE FANS IS 80%. MIXER-GRINDER IS 35%, AIR COOLER IS 17%, MICROWAVE OVEN IS 5%, DISHWASHER IS LESS THAN 1%. 

 

22 JUNE, 2023

RURAL PENETRATION OF CONSUMER DURABLE GOODS IN INDIA IS ONLY 15-20%. THIS IS DUE TO NO ELECTRICITY. BUT RURAL ELECTRIFICATION IN COMING YEARS WILL INCREASE THIS FIGURE TO AROUND 40-45%. BIGGEST DEMAND OF CONSUMER DURABLE GOODS WILL COME FROM RURAL AREAS AND TIER III AND IV TOWNS. 

 

21 JUNE, 2023

WASHING MACHINE UNITS WILL INCREASE TO 126 LAKH UNITS FROM 70 LAKH UNITS IN 2021. 

 

20 JUNE, 2023

INDIA’S REFRIGERATOR MARKET WAS VALUED AT $3.82 BILLION, INDIA’S WASHING MACHINE MARKET WAS VALUED AT $8.43 BILLION AND INDIA’S AIR CONDITION MARKET WAS VALUED AT $3.84 BILLION. MARKET SIZE OF AC IS EXPECTED TO INCREASE TO 165 LAKH UNITS BY 2027 FROM 65 LAKHS UNITS IN 2021. MARKET SIZE OF REFRIGERATOR IS EXPECTED TO INCREASE TO 275 LAKH UNITS IN 2027 FROM 145 LAKH UNITS IN 2021. 

 

19 JUNE, 2023

INDIA’S CONSUMER DURABLE MARKET WAS VALUED AT $9.84 BILLION IN 2022 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH $21.18 BILLION IN 2026. 

 

18 JUNE, 2023

INDIA WILL BECOME FIFTH LARGEST CONSUMER DURABLE MARKET IN WORLD. 

 

17 JUNE, 2023

CG CONSUMER IS MARKET LEADER IN FANS WITH MARKET SHARE OF 27%. IN LED LIGHTING COMPANY IS AT NUMBER THREE POSITION WITH MARKET SHARE OF 8%. COMPANY IS MARKET LEADER IN RESIDENTIAL PUMPS WITH MARKET SHARE OF 16%. IN WATER HEATER COMPANY IS AT NUMBER THREE WITH MARKET SHARE OF 12% AND IN AIR COOLERS COMPANY IS AT NUMBER 4 WITH MARKET SHARE OF 8%. 

 

16 JUNE, 2023

SALES OF PRESSURE PUMPS AND SPECIALITY PUMPS OF CG CONSUMER GREW BY 40% AND 62% RESPECTIVELY. 

 

15 JUNE, 2023

CG CONSUMER HAS 4 MANUFACTURING PLANTS GOA, VADODARA, AHMEDNAGAR AND BADDI. 

 

14 JUNE, 2023

IN INDIA PENETRATION RATE OF REFRIGERATION IS 33%, PENETRATION RATE OF AC IS JUST 4.5% AND PENETRATION RATE OF WASHING MACHINE IS JUST 13%. RURAL ELECTRIFICATION WILL PLAY MAJOR ROLE IN INCREASE IN DEMAND OF HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES. 

 

13 JUNE, 2023

THE RANGE OF AGRICULTURAL SOLAR PUMPS OF CG CONSUMER IS 140-335 LITRES PER MINUTE. 

 

12 JUNE, 2023

IN HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES AND CONSUMER BUSINESS CG CONSUMER PRODUCES FANS, IN FANS IT PRODUCES ALL TYPES OF CEILING FANS, TABLE FANS, WALL MOUNTED FANS, PEDESTAL FANS, EXHAUST FANS, KITCHEN TOWER FANS, IN HOME APPLIANCES COMPANY PRODUCES SMART AIR COOLERS, SMART PLUG, ALL TYPES OF HEATERS, ALL TYPES OF AIR COOLERS, WATER HEATERS AND GEYSERS. IN FOOD PREPARATION SEGMENT COMPANY PRODUCES MIXER GRINDER, JUICER MIXER GRINDER, WET GRINDER, HAND BLENDER, CHOPPER, IT ALSO PRODUCES ELECTRIC IRONS, IN COOKING APPLIANCES COMPANY PRODUCES OTG, AIR FRYERS, INDUCTION COOKTOP, RICE COOKER, SANDWICH MAKER, POP-UP TOASTER, ELECTRIC KETTLE. IN KITCHEN APPLIANCES COMPANY PRODUCES ALL TYPES OF CHIMNEYS, DISHWASHERS, MICROWAVES AND OVENS, TOBS. COMPANY ALSO PRODUCES AGRICULTURAL PUMPS, RESIDENTIAL PUMPS, IN SPECIALITY PUMPS COMPANY PRODUCES DEWATERING PUMPS, SWIMMING POOL PUMPS, SEWAGE PUMPS, MULTISTAGE PUMPS. IN SOLAR PUMPS COMPANY PRODUCES AGRICULTURAL SOLAR PUMPS AND SOLAR PUMPS FOR DRINKING WATER. 

 

11 JUNE, 2023

IN LIGHTING BUSINESS CG CONSUMER PRODUCES ALL TYPES OF INDOOR LIGHTING LIKE BATTENS, LINEAR LIGHTING, DOWNLIGHTER, COB SPOTS, DECORATIVE LUMINARIES, PREMIUM 2X2 TILE LIGHT, EDGE LIT PANEL, LED BATTEN. IN INDUSTRIAL LIGHTING COMPANY PRODUCES LED WELLGLASS, HIGHBAY, UNDER CANOPY LIGHTS, LED TUBES, IN OUTDOOR LIGHTING COMPANY PRODUCES LED STREET LIGHTS, LED FLOOD LIGHTS, LED LANDSCAPE LIGHTING, AND ALL TYPES OF SOLAR LIGHTING. 

 

10 JUNE, 2023

CG CONSUMER HAS TWO BUSINESSES ONE IS LIGHTING AND OTHER IS HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES. 

 

9 JUNE, 2023

CG CONSUMER IS ONE OF THE LEADING HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCE COMPANY IN INDIA. IT IS AN INDEPENDENT COMPANY RUN BY PROFESSIONAL MANAGEMENT. IT HAS 16,000+ SKU’S.

 

8 JUNE, 2023

RURAL ELECTRIFICATION, INCREASE IN PER CAPITA INCOME, DESIRE TO LIVE MODERN LIFE BY USING MODERN THINGS ETC, ARE THE GROWTH FACTORS FOR HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES IN INDIA.

 

7 JUNE, 2023

NEXT SECTOR TO WATCH FOR IS INDIAN HOUSEHOLD SECTOR. 

 

6 JUNE, 2023

INDIA’S HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCE MARKET IS VALUED AT $68.75 BILLION AS COMPARED TO $139.50 BILLION OF CHINA. VOLUME OF INDIA’S HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES MARKET IS EXPECTED TO BE 523 MILLION PIECES BY 2027. THE AVERAGE VOLUME PER PERSON OF HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES IS JUST 0.3 PIECES IN INDIA. 

 

5 JUNE, 2023

UPDATES ON VARUN BEVERAGES IN LAST 6-7 MONTHS : 1) COMPANY ENTERED MANUFACTURING OF KURKURE PUFFCOM FOR PEPSICO IN KOSHI UP. COMPNAY CAN EVEN ENTER MANUFACTURING OF LAYS FOR PEPSICO IN COMING YEARS. 2) COMPANY COMMENCED NEW MANUFACTURING PLANT IN BIHAR WHICH IS RUNNING AT FULL CAPACITY SO COMPANY PLANS TO ADD ANOTHER MANUFACTURING PLANT IN BIHAR. 3) COMPANY PLANS TO ADD 50,000-60,000 VISI COOLERS EVERY YEAR. 4) VBL WILL EXPAND ITS PRODUCTION CAPACITY 30% WITH CAPEX OF RS 1,200. 5) COMPANY PLANS TO DOUBLE THE VOLUME OF JUICES, ENERGY DRINK AND DAIRY PRODUCTS. 6) VBL PLANS TO INCREASE ITS DISTRIBUTION CHANNEL BY 8-10% EVERY YEAR. FINANCIALS: COMPANY’S REVENUE INCREASED FROM RS 5,105 CR IN 2018 TO RS 13,173 CR IN 2022. ITS NET PRODIT INCREASED FROM RS 296 CR IN 2018 TO RS 1,550 CR IN 2022. ITS EPS INCREASED FROM RS 10.69 IN 2018 TO RS 23.05 IN 2022. ITS ROE INCREASES FROM 14.65 IN 2018 TO RS 29.34 IN 2022. ITS DEBT TO EQUITY DECREASED FROM 1.18 IN 2018 TO 0.72 IN 2022. BY ALL THIS I CONCLUDE MY RESEARCH ON VARUN BEVERAGES AND ENTIRE NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES SECTOR. 

 

4 JUNE, 2023

VBL HAS PRESENCE IN 3 MILLION OUTLETS (OUT OF MARKET OF 10-11 MILLION OUTLETS). OUT OF 3 MILLION OUTLETS WHERE VBL HAS PRESENCE, 60% DON’T HAVE VISI COOLERS BECAUSE OF NO ELECTRICITY. BUT NOW DUE TO GOVERNMENT CONCENTRATING ON RURAL ELECTRIFICATION VBL PLANS TO ADD 50,000 VISI COOLERS EVERY YEAR. THIS WILL HELP VBL TO INCREASE ITS SALES. 

 

3 JUNE, 2023

AROUND 67% OF HUMAN POPULATION LIVES IN RURAL AREAS. AND MAJORITY OF THIS RURAL AREAS WAS UNTOUCHED BY NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES DUE TO NON ELECTRICITY, LOW PER CAPITA INCOME, LOW STANDARD OF LIVING ETC. BUT THINGS ARE CHANGING NOW. NEW GENERATION IN RURAL INDIA IS EDUCATED . THIS HAS INCREASED THE PER CAPITA INCOME, EDUCATION MADE THEM AWARE OF LIVING MODERN LIFE, STAYING CONNECTED WITH WORLD, TRYING NEW THINGS AND ALL. PLUS RURAL ELECTRIFICATION. ALL THIS WILL INCREASE THE DEMAND OF NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES IN RURAL AREAS IN COMING YEARS. IN FACT BIGGEST DEMAND OF NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES WILL COME FROM RURAL AREAS BECAUSE 67% OF INDIA IS RURAL AREA AND MAJORITY OF IT IS UNTAPPED BY NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES. AT PRESENT NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES ARE SOLD ONLY IN 33% OF INDIA WHICH IS URBAN AREAS. JUST IMAGINE THE SALES WHEN NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES WILL BE SOLD THROUGH OUT INDIA. 

 

2 JUNE, 2023

VBL WILL EXPAND ITS PRODUCTION CAPACITY BY 30% WITH CAPEX OF RS 1200 CR IN CURRENT YEAR. THE JUICE SEGMENT OF VBL HAS DOUBLED AND CONTRIBUTES ABOUT 10% REVENUE. COMPANY PLANS TO DOUBLE THE VOLUME OF ENERGY DRINK, JUICES AND DAIRY PRODUCTS. VBL PLANS TO IMPROVE ITS DISTRIBUTION NETWORK TO RURAL AREAS WHICH ARE HIGHLY UNDERPENETRATED. VBL PLANS TO ADD MORE PRODUCTION FACILITIES IN BIHAR, AS IT HAS RAN OUT OF CAPACITY IN JUST ONE YEAR OF OPERATION AND EVEN IT WILL ADD FACILITIES IN MADHYA PRADESH, RAJASTHAN AND ANDHRA PRADESH. 

 

1 JUNE, 2023

PEPSICO’S (VBL IS FRANCHISEE OF PEPSICO) MARKET SHARE IN UNDERPENETRATED AREAS OF MADHYA PRADESH, ODHISA, BIHAR, JHARKHAND AND CHATTISGARH IS JUST 15%. JUST IMAGINE THE GROWTH OPPORTUNITY FOR VBL IN SUCH UNDERPENETRATED AREAS. 

 

31 MAY, 2023

VBL’S ENERGY DRINK STING HAS WITNESSED A GROWTH OF 190% AND ITS CONTRIBUTES 8% TO THE OVERALL REVENUE OF VBL. 

 

30 MAY, 2023

VARUN BEVERAGES WILL INCREASE ITS DISTRIBUTION FOOTPRINTS BY 8-10% EVERY YEAR. 

 

29 MAY, 2023

INDIA’S HOUSE CONSUMPTION OF NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES IS JUST 3.08 L PER HOUSEHOLD PER MONTH COMPARED TO 10-14 L PER MONTH IN OTHER DEVELOPED COUNTRIES. 

 

28 MAY, 2023

INDIAN SOFT DRINK VOLUME IS EXPECTED TO REACH 3,85,135 ML BY 2026. 

 

27 MAY, 2023

IN 2026, 44% OF SPENDING AND 14% OF CONSUMPTION OF SOFTDRINKS WILL COME FROM OUT OF HOME CONSUMPTION INDIA . 

 

26 MAY, 2023

BY 2030 INDIA WILL HAVE 104 TIER II, 331 TIER III AND IV CITIES AND ONLY 155 TIER I CITIES. THIS SHOWS SMALLER TOWNS RURAL AREAS IN INDIA ARE ON ITS WAY TO TRANSFORM INTO SMART CITIES. AFTER 2030 THIS 331 TIER III AND IV CITIES START TRANSFORMING INTO TIER II CITIES AND 104 TIER II CITIES WILL TRANSFORM INTO TIER I CITIES DUE TO INCREASE IN PER CAPITA INCOME AND DESIRE OF PEOPLE TO LIVE MODERN LIFE AND TO TRY EVERY NEW THING. THIS WILL BOOST THE DEMAND OF NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES. 

 

25 MAY, 2023

MANY ALCOHOL MANUFACTURING COMPANIES ARE ENTERING NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGE SECTOR. EG HEINEKEN MANUFACTURES NON ALCOHOLIC BEER HEINEKEN 0.0. EVEN BUDWEISER SELLS NON ALCOHOLIC BEER BUDWEISER ZERO. 

 

24 MAY, 2023

IN GENERATION Z AS MANY AS THIRD OF CONSUMERS AGED 18-25 NOW SAYS THAT THEY NEVER CONSUME ALCOHOL. AS RESULT NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES CHOICES ARE FLOODING SHELVES. 8-10% OF ALL BEERS AND SPIRITS LAUNCHED GLOBALLY IN 2022 CONTAINS NON ALCOHOL. AND THIS FIGURE WILL INCREASE IN COMING YEARS. SO BASICALLY IT WILL COME UNDER NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES. 

 

23 MAY, 2023

IN U.K SALES OF ALCOHOL FELL 9% IN 2022 INCLUDING 10% DROP FOR BEER. BUT ON OTHER SIDE SALES OF NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES INCREASED BY 5%. MORE THAN ONE IN THREE U.S GEN ZERS AND MILLENNIALS STOPPED DRINKING. 

 

22 MAY, 2023

GENERATION Z IS DRINKING LESS ALCOHOL THAN THE GEBNERATION BEFORE THEM. PEOPLE IN EARLY 20’S ARE ALREADY DRINKING 20% LESS PER CAPITA THAN MILLENNIALS DID AT THE SAME AGE. AND 64% OF GEN Z SAYS THEY GROW OLDER THEY ARE EXPECTED TO DRINK LESS ALCOHOL FREQUENTLY THAN OLDER GENERATION CURRENTLY DO. 16-22 YEARS OLD PEOPLE JUST DON’T THINK THEY DRINK IS THAT COOL ANYMORE BECAUSE THEY HAVE BECOME HEALTH CONSCIOUS. THIS WILL GIVE BOOST TO NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES. 

 

21 MAY, 2023

MILLENIALS AND GENERATION ZERS ARE NOT DRINKING ALCOHOL AS MUCH AS BOOMERS DID AT THEIR AGE. IN U.K, 56% OF MILLENNIALS CONSIDER THEMSELVES TO BE MINDFUL DRINKERS COMPARED TO 37% OF BABY BOOMERS. IN U.S NUMBER OF COLLEGE STUDENTS AGED 18 TO 22 WHO ABSTAINED FROM DRINKING INCREASES FROM 20% IN 2012 TO 35% IN 2021. IN U.K PERCENTAGE OF AGED BETWEEN 18-25 YEARS INCREASES TO 40% IN 2022 FROM 29% IN 2014. ALL THIS HAS HAPPENED BECAUSE YOUNGER POPULATION HAS BECOME HEALTH CONSCIOUS. AND DUE TO THIS NOW THEY ARE TURNING TOWARDS NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES. 

 

20 MAY, 2023

INTERNET HAS GLOBALIZED THE ASPIRATION OF ALL INDIANS. THE PEOPLE IN SMALLER TOWNS AND RURAL AREAS ARE WELL AWARE OF DEVELOPMENTS ACROSS THE WORLD. DUE TO THIS THEY EXPECT OR DESIRE TO HAVE A GOOD MODERN LIFE. SO THEY WANT TO TRY ALL NEW THINGS WHICH MAKES THEM TO LIVE A MODERN LIFE. THIS WILL BOOST THE DEMAND OF NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES. 

 

19 MAY, 2023

NOW A DAYS COLLEGE GOING PEOPLE HAVE NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES IN HAND JUST TO LOOK COOL. THEY THINK HAVING A GLASS OR BOTTLE OF SOFTDRINK OR MOCKTAIL IN HAND MAKES THEM LOOK MODERN OR LIVING A MODERN CULTURE LIFESTYLE. THIS CAN BOOST DEMAND OF NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES. 

 

18 MAY, 2023

DRINKING ALCOHOL SENSELESSLY IS NO LONGER FASHIONABLE. YOUNG GENERATION ARE MORE HEALTH CONSCIOUS NOW. HABIT OF GETTING DRUNK HAS BECOME A THING OF THE PAST. GENERATION Z (18-22 YEARS OLDS) CONSUME LESS ALCOHOL THAN OLDER GENERATIONS SUCH AS MILLENNIALS. BOTH OLDER (27 TO 39 YEARS) AND YOUNGER (22 TO 28 YEARS) WHILE BAR REMAIN SOCIAL TEMPLES, THERE ARE MORE AND MORE NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES OPTIONS FOR THEM. GENERATION Z CONSUMES LESS ALCOHOL, SO NOW NEW APPEALING NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES ARE APPEARING NOT JUST SOFT DRINK BUT LIKE DE ALCOHOLISED DRINKS AND NON ALCOHOLIC COCKTAILS. ON OTHER HAND THERE IS ANOTHER GROUP OF GENERATION Z WHO DON’T DRINK ALCOHOL BUT WHO DO SO MINDFULLY. MEANS INSTEAD OF REFUSING TO DRINK ALCOHOL OR DRINKING OUT OF CONTROL, THEY DRINK ALCOHOL IN VERY LESS QUANTITY BY ADDING VERY LESS QUANTITY OF ALCOHOLIC DRINK IN NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES. THIS ALLOWS THEM TO ENJOY THEIR FAVOURITE DRINKS WITHOUT COMPROMISING ON THEIR HEALTH OF IMAGE. THIS CHANGE IN CONSUMER BEHAVIOUR WILL BOOST THE DEMAND OF NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES. 

 

17 MAY, 2023

38% INDIAN CONSUMERS WANT TO SHIFT FROM STANDARD BEER CONTENT BEVERAGES TO NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES. 

 

16 MAY, 2023

WHEN I WAS IN SCHOOL OR COLLEGE THERE WERE NOT MANY NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGE LIKE ENERGY DRINK, SPORT DRINKS AND ALL. SO WE WERE NOT USE TO HAVING NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES. BUT NOW SCHOOL GOING KIDS OR COLLEGE GOING PEOPLE HAVE WIDE RANGE OF OPTIONS IN NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES LIKE THERE ARE LOTS OF ENERGY DRINK, SPORTS DRINK, NUTRIENT DRINKS ETC. SO BASICALLY FROM YOUNG AGE THEY ARE HAVING ALL SHORTS OF NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES IS NOTHING NEW TO THEM SO THEY DRINK THEM ON REGULAR BASIS. AND EARLIER NO ONE HAD NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES ON REGULAR BASIS. THIS IS THE CHANGE HAPPENING IN NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES. 

 

15 MAY, 2023

GROWTH FACTORS FOR NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES IN INDIA: 1) DEMOGRAPHIC PROFILE: INDIA WILL HAVE WORLD’S YOUNGEST POPULATION BY 2027-30. THIS WILL PROVIDE INDIA WITH LARGE WORK FORCE TO SUPPORT ECONOMIC GROWTH. YOUNG POPULATION ARE TEND TOWARDS TRYING NEW THINGS AND ACCEPTING NEW CULTURE. EARLIER HAVING NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES WAS NOT DAILY NORMAL THING. BECAUSE ONLY ONE MEMBER OF FAMILY WAS EARNING AND OTHER ALL MEMBER WERE DEPENDENT ON HIM. SO ANNUAL FAMILY INCOME WAS LOW. SO PEOPLE WOULD ONLY BUY THINGS WHICH WERE ACTUALLY REQUIRED BY THEM. BUT NOW THINGS ARE CHANGING. ALMOST ALL MEMBERS IN FAMILY EARN. SO ANNUAL FAMILY INCOME HAVE INCREASE. THIS HAS MADE PEOPLE TO FULFILL ALL THEIR DREAMS IN TERMS OF USING GOOD PRODUCTS, WEARING GOOD CLOTHES, EATING GOOD FOOD, HAVING NEW BEVERAGES. IN SHORT LIVING MODERN LIFE. SO NOW HAVING NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES IS A NORMAL THING. 2) LOW PER CAPITA INCOME: INDIA’S PER CAPITA NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES CONSUMPTION IS JUST AROUND 23 L COMPARED TO PHILIPPINES 114L, VIETNAM 73 L, INDONESIA 132.63 L, BRAZIL 134.94 L, U.S 436.81 L, ETC, 3) GROWING CONSUMER EXPENDITURE : INDIA IS HOME TO ONE OF THE LARGEST AND FASTEST GROWING MIDDLE CLASS POPULATION ANYWHERE IN THE WORLD. THE RISING ASPIRATIONS OF THIS SEGMENT ARE EXPECTED TO BOOST DEMAND FOR NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES IN COMING YEARS TO NEW HIGH. CONSUMER SPENDING IN INDIA WILL GROW FROM $1.5 TRILLION IN 2020 TO $6 TRILLION BY 2030. 4) RISING AFFORDABILITY AND URBANIZATION: WITH MORE THAN 50% OF INDIA’S POPULATION FALLING UNDER THE WORKING AGE CATEGORY THERE HAS BEEN A RISE DISPOSABLE INCOME LEADING TO A SUBSTANTIAL CHANGE IN THE SPENDING PATTERN. ALSO THE INCREASING TREND OF WOMEN WORKFORCE IN INDIA HAS LED TO AN INCREASE IN THE DISPOSABLE INCOMES OF FAMILIES THUS RESULTING IN HIGHER HOUSEHOLD CONSUMPTION. THE CHANGING POPULATION DEMOGRAPHICS, HIGHER SPENDING CAPACITY OF YOUNG CONSUMERS RAPID URBANIZATION AND GROWING RURAL CONSUMPTION ARE EXPECTED TO BOOST CONSUMPTION OF NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES IN INDIA. 5) UPTICK IN RURAL DEMAND AND RURAL ELECTRIFICATION: INDIAN GOVERNMENT PLANS 100% RURAL ELECTRIFICATION IN INDIA WITH 24 HRS SUPPLY OF ELECTRICITY IN RURAL AREAS IN COMING YEARS WILL HELP PENETRATION OF COOLING INFRA IN RURAL AREAS WHICH WILL HELP TO BOOST THE DEMAND OF NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES. 6) LOCATION: MAJORITY OF INDIAN POPULATION RESIDES IN HOT AND DRY CLIMATIC REGIONS. THIS WILL BOOST CONSUMPTION OF NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES IN INDIA. 

 

14 MAY, 2023

NOW A DAYS IN INDIA COLLEGE GOING PEOPLE HAVE NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES IN HAND JUST TO LOOK COOL. THEY THINK HAVING A GLASS OR BOTTLE OF SOFTDRINK OR MOCKTAIL IN HAND MAKES THEM LOOK MODERN OR LIVING MODERN CULTURE LIFESTYLE. THIS CAN BOOST DEMAND OF NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES. 

 

13 MAY, 2023

NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES REVENUE IN COUNTRIES AND ANNUAL REVENUE PER PERSON FROM SALES OF NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES: 1) TOTAL REVENUE: U.S $33.18 BILLION, CHINA $94.40 BILLION, JAPAN $62.64 BILLION, GERMANY $53.03 BILLION, U.K $37.11 BILLION, MEXICO $35.10 BILLION, BRAZIL $31.43 BILLION, INDONESIA $24.64 BILLION, FRANCE $24.38 BILLION, NIGERIA $22.41 BILLION AND INDIA IS JUST AT $12 BILLION. 2) ANNUAL REVENUE PER PERSON FROM SALES OF NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES: U.S $1,060, CHINA $68, JAPAN $496.11, GERMANY $638.25, U.K $551.87, MEXICO $275.20, BRAZIL $148.94, INDONESIA $91.07, FRANCE $362.64, NIGERIA $111.56 AND IN INDIA ANNUAL PER PERSON REVENUE FROM SALES OF NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES IS JUST $9.5. JUST IMAGINE HOW UNDERVALUED INDIAN NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES MARKET IS. 

 

12 MAY, 2023

140 MILLION HOUSEHOLDS IN INDIA ARE EXPECTED TO BE ADDED TO THE ASPIRING AND AFFLUENT SET OF CONSUMERS BY 2030. JUST IMAGINE THE SALES OF NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES BY 2030. 

 

11 MAY, 2023

38% INDIAN CONSUMERS WANT TO SHIFT FROM STANDARD BEER CONTENT BEVERAGES TO NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES. 

 

10 MAY, 2023

GROWTH FACTOR FOR NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES: INDIA WILL HAVE THIRD LARGEST NUMBER OF HIGH INCOME HOUSEHOLDS BY 2030. THE AVERAGE HOUSEHOLD SIZE IN INDIA IS DECREASING FROM 5.5 PERSON TO 4.5 PERSON. ABOUT 55% OF INDIA’S POPULATION COULD BELONG TO THE  CONSUMING CLASS IN 2023 FROM 24% AT PRESENT. 

 

9 MAY, 2023

IN NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES SALES OF ENERGY DRINKS AND SPORT DRINKS IN INDIA INCREASED FROM $5.24 MILLION IN 2011 TO $212 MILLION IN 2020 GROWING AT A CAGR OF 44.78%. 

 

8 MAY, 2023

PER CAPITA CONSUMPTION OF NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES AROUND GLOBE: U.S 436.81 L, MEXICO 400.8 L, GERMANY 341.58 L, SPAIN 283.24 L, U.K 210.83 L, JAPAN 192 L, AUSTRALIA 185.74 L, FRANCE 168.53 L, SOUTH KOREA 160.02 L, BRAZIL 134.94 L, CANADA 133.59 L, INDONESIA 132.63 L, IRAN 125.78 L, CHINA 95.19 L, NIGERIA 91.66 L, PHILIPPINES 114 L, VIETNAM 73 L AND INDIA JUST AT 23 L. JUST IMAGINE HOW HIGHLY UNDERVALUED INDIA’S NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES MARKET IS. RISING PER CAPITA INCOME, RURAL ELECTRIFICATION, INDIA WILL HAVE WORLD’S YOUNGEST POPULATION BY 2027 ETC ALL THIS WILL PLAY MAJOR ROLE IN INCREASING PER CAPITA CONSUMPTION OF NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES IN INDIA. 

 

7 MAY, 2023

INDIA’S ANNUAL REVENUE PER PERSON FROM SALES OF NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES WAS AROUND $9.5 IN 2021 COMPARED TO $1,060 IN U.S , $68 IN CHINA , $148.94 IN BRAZIL AND $275.20 IN MEXICO. 

 

6 MAY, 2023

INDIAN NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES MARKET WAS VALUED AT AROUND RS 67,100 CRORE IN 2020 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH RS 1,47,233 CRORE BY 2030. 

 

5 MAY, 2023

VARUN BEVERAGES HAS 110 DEPOTS, 2,400 DISTRIBUTORS, 2,500 DISTRIBUTION VEHICLES AND 9,25,000 COOLERS. 

 

4 MAY, 2023

PRODUCTS OF VARUN BEVERAGES REACHES OUT TO EVERY SIXTH PERSON IN THE WORLD. 

 

3 MAY, 2023

SEGMENT WISE SALES VOLUME OF VARUN BEVERAGES: 70% FROM CARBONATED SOFT DRINK, 23% FROM PACKAGED DRINKING WATER AND 7% FROM NON CARBONATED DRINKS. 

 

2 MAY, 2023

VARUN BEVERAGES 80% REVENUE COMES FROM INDIA AND 20% FROM EXPORTS. 

 

1 MAY, 2023

VBL LTD IS A KEY PLAYER IN BEVERAGE INDUSTRY AND ONE OF THE LARGEST FRANCHISEE OF PEPSICO IN THE WORLD OUTSIDE USA. COMPANY PRODUCES AND DISTRIBUTES A WIDE RANGE OF CARBONATED SOFT DRINKS AS WELL AS A LARGE SECTION OF NON CARBONATED BEVERAGES INCLUDING PACKAGED DRINKING WATER SOLD UNDER TRADEMARKS OWNED BY PEPSICO. PEPSICO CARBONATED SOFTDRINKS BRAND PRODUCED AND SOLD BY VBL INCLUDE PEPSI, DIET PEPSI, SEVEN UP, MIRINDA ORANGE, MIRINDA LEMON. MOUNTAIN DEW, MOUNTAIN DEW ICE, SEVEN UP, NIMBOOZ MASALA SODA, EVERNESS, STING, GATORADE AND SLICE FIZZY DRINKS. PEPSICO NON CARBONATED BEVERAGES BRAND PRODUCED AND SOLD BY VBL INCLUDE TROPICANA SLICE, TROPICANA JUICES, NIMBOOZ AS WELL AS PACKAGED DRINKING WATER UNDER THE BRAND AQUAFINA. 

 

30 APRIL, 2023

VARUN BEVERAGES SERVES TO 1.4 BILLION CONSUMERS, COMPANY HAS SOLD 802 MILLION UNIT CASES, IT SELLS ITS PRODUCTS THROUGH 3 MILLION RETAIL OUTLETS AND SELLS GOODS IN 6 COUNTRIES. 

 

29 APRIL, 2023

AT PRESENT VARUN BEVERAGES HAS BEEN GRANTED FRANCHISES FOR VARIOUS PEPSICO PRODUCTS ACROSS 27 STATES AND 7 UNION TERRITORIES IN INDIA. VBL HAS 31 MANUFACTURING PLANTS IN INDIA AND 6 MANUFACTURING PLANTS IN INTERNATIONAL GEOGRAPHIES (TWO IN NEPAL AND ONE EACH IN SRI LANKA, MOROCCO, ZAMBIA AND ZIMBABWE). 

 

28 APRIL, 2023

VARUN BEVERAGES SHARE OF PEPSICO BEVERAGE VOLUME SALES INCREASES FROM 26% IN 2011 TO 85% PLUS AT PRESENT. 

 

27 APRIL, 2023

PER CAPITA NON ALCOHOLIC DRINK CONSUMPTION IN INDIA IS ONLY AROUND 23 LITRE COMPARED TO 114 LITRE IN PHILIPPINES AND 73 LITRES IN VIETNAM. AND THESE TWO COUNTRIES ARE ALSO DEVELOPING COUNTRIES. THIS SHOWS INDIA’S NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGE MARKET IS UNDERVALUED. 

 

26 APRIL, 2023

LATEST UPDATES ON SHEETAL COOL PRODUCTS: COMPANY SIGNS MOU WITH INDIAN OIL CORPORATION AND BPCL IN GUJARAT TO OPEN ITS ICE CREAM AND NAMKEEN KIOSKS AT EVERY FUEL PUMPS OF IOCL AND BPCL, COMPANY TO SUPPLY ITS ICE CREAM AND NAMKEEN VARIANTS TO WESTERN RAILWAYS, COMPANY COMMENCED SUPPLY OF ICE CREAM AND NAMKEEN PRODUCTS ON AHMEDABAD RAILWAY STATION, SURENDRANAGAR RAILWAY STATION, VADODARA RAILWAY STATION, GANDHIDHAM RAILWAY STATIONS AND MOSTLY ON ALL RAILWAY STATIONS OF SAURASHTRA. IT ALSO COMMENCE SUPPLY OF ICE CREAM AND NAMKEEN PRODUCTS ON ALMOST ALL BUS STANDS IN GUJARAT. COMPANY IS TRYING TO SUPPLY ICE CREAM AND NAMKEEN PRODUCTS ON ALL RAILWAY STATIONS, BUS STANDS OF INDIA PLUS COMPANY WILL START SUPPLY OF ICE CREAM AND NAMKEEN PRODUCTS TO ALMOST EVERY TIER II, III AND IV TOWNS AND RURAL AREAS OF INDIA. RECENTLY COMPANY LAUNCHED ITS PRODUCTS IN JAMMU KASHMIR AND RAJASTHAN. WITH THIS COMPANY NOW HAS PRESENCE IN GUJARAT, MAHARASHTRA, MADHYA PRADESH AND JAMMU AND KASHMIR. FINANCIALS: COMPANY’S NET SALES INCREASED FROM RS 206 CR IN 2018 TO RS 326 CR IN 2022. ITS NET PROFIT INCREASED FROM RS 4 CR IN 2018 TO RS 18 CR IN 2022. ITS EPS INCREASED FROM RS 3.91 IN 2018 TO RS 17.55 IN 2022. ITS ROE INCREASED FROM 11.15 IN 2018 TO 25.16 IN 2022. ITS DEBT TO EQUITY INCREASED FROM 0.38 IN 2018 TO 1.00 IN 2022. ITS DEBT TO EQUITY INCREASED BECAUSE COMPANY IS SMALL AND ITS ON GROWING STAGE. IT HAS MARKET CAP OF RS 539 CR AND ITS SHARE PRICE IS AROUND RS 513 SO BASICALLY IT HAS AROUND 1 CR 20 LAKH SHARES. OUT OF THIS PROMOTERS HOLD 78 LAKH SHARES. SO LOW EQUITY FLOAT. BY THIS I CONCLUDE MY STUDY ON SHEETAL COOL PRODUCTS AND ICE CREAM, NAMKEEN, READY TO EAT AND FLAVOURED MILK MARKET. 

 

25 APRIL, 2023

THE TOP THREE STRATEGIC OBJECTIVES THAT SHEETAL COOL PRODUCTS IS FOCUSED ON RIGHT NOW ARE: EXPANDING THE DISTRIBUTION NETWORK, SECOND IS INCREASE ITS FRANCHISE OUTLETS AND THIRD IS TO EXPAND THE EXPORT BUSINESS. 

 

24 APRIL, 2023

THE BREAKFAST OCCASION WILL BE AN OPPORTUNITY FOR COMPANIES IN THE DAIRY AND PACKAGED SNACKS INDUSTRY. IN TODAY’S FAST PACED WORLD, PEOPLE DO OT HAVE TIME FOR A SIT DOWN BREAKFAST, AND ARE ON THE LOOKOUT FOR CONVENIENT FOOD AND DRINK OPTIONS THAT KEEP THEM FULL AND NOURISHED WHILE ON MOVE. IN THIS BREAKFAST SEGMENT FLAVOURED MILK IS PERFECT FIT. BECAUSE FLAVOURED MILK ARE VERY LOW IN SUGAR IT CONTAINS ONLY 4% OF SUGAR PLUS HAS VITAMIN A, VITAMIN D, VITAMIN B12, POTASSIUM. SO ITS A PERFECT NUTRIENT THING THAT FITS IN BREAKFAST. 

 

23 APRIL, 2023

CONSUMPTION PATTERN OF FLAVOURED MILK IN INDIA: 30% CONSUMES AS A TREAT, 27% CONSUMES AS A SWEET CRAVINGS, 23% CONSUMES AS A DESSERT. LOOKING FOR CHOICES 14% OF INDIAN REGULAR MILK DRINKERS FEEL THAT THERE ARE NOT ENOUGH VARIETIES OF MILK FLAVOUR IN FLAVOURED MILK. AND FROM NOW FLAVOURED MILK WILL BE START CONSUME AS A NUTRITIONAL PRODUCT. THIS WILL CATER TO MAJOR CONTRIBUTION IN GROWTH OF FLAVOURED MILK SECTOR. 

 

22 APRIL, 2023

IN INDIA FLAVOURED MILK PRODUCTS ACCOUNTED FOR 46% OF DAIRY DRINKS AT PRESENT UP FROM 20% IN 2015 AND IS EXPECTED TO INCREASE UPTO 75% OF THE INDIAN DAIRY DRINK BY 2028. 

 

21 APRIL, 2023

FLAVOURED MILK CONTAINS CALCIUM, VITAMIN A, VITAMIN D, VITAMIN B12, POTASSIUM. AND NOW INDIAN POPULATION HAS STARTED TO FOCUS ON BALANCING THEIR DIET BY TAKING NUTRIENT INTAKE. 

 

20 APRIL, 2023

MAIN GROWTH FACTOR FOR FLAVOURED MILK IN INDIA IS THE INCREASING HEALTH CONSCIOUSNESS AMONG CONSUMERS AND THE GROWING PREFERENCE FOR NUTRITIONAL PRODUCTS. 

 

19 APRIL, 2023

INDIAN FLAVOURED MILK MARKET WAS VALUED AT AROUND RS 41.6 BILLION IN 2022 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH RS 158.6 BILLION BY 2028 GROWING AT A CAGR OF 25.8%. 

 

18 APRIL, 2023

CAN INDIA REPLACE LIGHT MEALS WITH SNACKS ?

 

17 APRIL, 2023

URBAN POPULATION IN INDIA CONSUMES 10 TIMES MORE PACKAGED SNACKS AS COMPARED TO RURAL POPULATION. THIS CLEARLY SHOWS HOW UNTAPPED MARKET IS FOR PACKAGED SNACKS IN RURAL AREAS. THIS GAP BETWEEN TWO WILL REDUCE IN COMING YEARS. 

 

16 APRIL, 2023

EARLIER IN RURAL INDIA OR TIER III AND IV TOWNS HAS ONLY UNPACKAGED TRADITIONAL SNACKS FROM A LOCAL HALWAI OR SNACKS MADE AT HOME. THIS WAS BECAUSE PEOPLE THOUGHT THAT PACKAGED FOOD ARE NOT GOOD IN QUALITY AND HAD FEAR THAT FOOD INSIDE PACKET MUST BE VERY OLD AND HAVE BEEN SPOILED. BUT THINGS ARE NOW CHANGING. DUE TO MODERNIZATION, INCREASE IN PER CAPITA INCOME, AWARENESS THROUGH INTERNET, PEOPLE IN RURAL AREAS AND TIER III, IV HAVE STARTED TO LIVE MODERN LIFE AND DUE TO THIS PEOPLE OF RURAL AREAS AND TIER III, IV TOWNS HAVE STARTED TO EAT OUTSIDE FOOD. THIS WILL INCREASE THE DEMAND OF PACKAGED SNACKS IN RURAL AREAS AND TIER III, IV TOWNS ARE HIGHLY UNTAPPED BY ORGANIZED PACKAGED SNACKS BECAUSE THE ENTIRE AREA WAS UNORGANIZED IN SNACKS SECTOR. 

 

15 APRIL, 2023

SHEETAL COOL PRODUCTS HAS REVENUE OF RS 326 CRORE OUT OF THIS ONLY 8-10% OF REVENUE COMES FROM SNACKS SEGMENTS. COMPANY PLANS TO INCREASE THE REVENUE FROM SNACKS TO 20-25% IN NEXT 2-3 YEARS. 

 

14 APRIL, 2023

IN ORGANIZED INDIAN SNACKS MARKET OF AROUND RS 49,500 CR 26.3% CONSISTS OF ETHNIC NAMKEEN AND SNACKS, 15.4% CONSISTS OF ETHNIC BHUJIA AND REST 58.3% CONSISTS OF WESTERN SNACKS. 

 

13 APRIL, 2023

THE GROWTH FACTOR BEHIND INCREASE IN INDIAN ORGANIZED SNACK MARKET IS THAT EARLIER OUR MOM, GRANDMOTHER, AUNTY THEMSELVES MADE SNACKS AT HOME DURING FESTIVALS AND VACATIONS. BUT NOW DUE TO FEMALE WORKING POPULATION IS INCREASING SO NO ONE HAS TIME TO PREPARE SNACKS AT HOME. PLUS TASTE DIFFERENCE OF SNACKS MADE AT HOME AND SNACKS MADE OUTSIDE IN WESTERN STYLE. USUALLY YOUNG GENERATIONS AT PRESENT DOES NOT LIKE HOME MADE SNACKS. AND INDIA WILL HAVE WORLD’S YOUNGEST POPULATION BY 2030 SO THIS WILL BE THE MAJOR REASON FOR GROWTH OF ORGANIZED SNACKS MARKET IN INDIA. 

 

12 APRIL, 2023

INDIA’S SNACKS MARKET IS VALUED AT AROUND RS 90,000 CR IN 2022 AND OUT OF THIS ONLY 55% OF MARKET IS ORGANIZED. ORGANIZED SNACKS MARKET VALUE IS AROUND RS 49,500 CR AND REST 45% IS UNORGANIZED. VALUE OF UNORGANIZED SNACKS MARKET IS AROUND RS 40,500 CR. OVERALL INDIAN SNACKS MARKET WILL REACH AROUND RS 1,35,000 CR BY 2030. AT THAT TIME AROUND 65% OF INDIA’S SNACKS MARKET WILL BE ORGANIZED. ORGANIZED SNACKS MARKET IN 2030 WILL BE VALUED AT AROUND RS 87,750 CR . AND REST 35% WILL BE UNORGANIZED. MEANS AROUND RS 47,250 CR WORTH OF INDIAN SNACKS MARKET WILL BE UNORGANIZED BY 2030. 

 

11 APRIL, 2023

AT PRESENT IN INDIA WE HAVE ICE CREAM SHOPS BUT IN COMING YEARS LIKE CAFE OF COFFEE CAN WE HAVE ICE CREAM CAFES IN INDIA ?

 

10 APRIL, 2023

SHEETAL COOL PRODUCTS HAVE STRONG HOLD IN RURAL PARTS OF GUJARAT. THE SAME STRATEGY COMPANY IS PLANNING TO EXPAND IN ALL RURAL AREAS OF INDIA. 

 

9 APRIL, 2023

ONLY 10-15% OF ORGANIZED ICE CREAM SALES COMES FROM RURAL AREAS. THIS SHOWS RURAL ICE CREAM MARKET IS HIGHLY UNTAPPED. HUGE OPPORTUNITY TO ORGANIZED ICE CREAM PLAYERS TO EXPAND THEIR OPERATIONS. NEXT HUGE WAVE OF ICE CREAM DEMAND IN INDIA WILL COME FROM RURAL AREAS. 

 

8 APRIL, 2023

IN LAST ONE MONTH WITNESSED IN MY FRIENDS GROUP THAT WE GO DOWN 4-5 DAYS A WEEK AFTER DINNER. AND FROM THAT 4-5 DAYS 3 DAYS WE GO FOR A AROUND AND IN BETWEEN THAT ROUND WE SAY LETS GO FOR A ICE CREAM. NO ONE SAYS LETS GO TO HAVE A MITHAI. AND THIS IS GOING ON FROM LAST ONE YEAR. THIS IS THE CONSUMER BEHAVIOUR CHANGE HAPPENING IN ICE CREAM. IN INDIA YOUTHS HAVE STARTED TAKING ICE CREAM AS A AFTER DINNER DESSERT PLUS ICE CREAM HAS EVEN BECOME REASON FOR GET-TOGETHER. 

 

7 APRIL, 2023

THE SHARE OF MILLENNIALS AND GEN Z IN INDIA’S POPULATION STOOD AT 52%, HIGHER THAN THE GLOBAL AVERAGE OF 47%. AND IN MILLENNIALS AND GEN Z BOTH MALE FEMALE WORKS TO EARN. BY 2026 64.18% OF INDIA’S POPULATION WOULD BE IN THE WORKING AGE OF 15-45 YEARS AND IN THIS WORKING AGE BOTH MALE AND FEMALE WOULD WORK TO EARN. NOT ONLY TO EARN BUT TO SHOW THEIR TALENTS. EARLIER THERE WAS A SICK MENTALITY THAT WOMEN WOULD ONLY DO HOUSEHOLD CHORES AND THIS REASON WOMEN WERE NOT ALLOWED TO EDUCATE. BUT NOW THINGS ARE CHANGING. WOMEN ARE EDUCATING TO BE SELF INDEPENDENT. AND MENTALITY IS CHANGING FROM WOMEN WOULD DO ONLY HOUSEHOLD CHORES TO WOMEN CAN WORK IN ANY FIELD. AND DUE TO THIS WOMEN REPRESENTS 23% OF INDIA’S TOTAL FORMAL AND INFORMAL WORKFORCE. AND THIS FIGURE WOULD INCREASE AROUND 35-40% BY 2028. AND THIS WILL INCREASE THE DEMAND OF FROZEN FOOD BECAUSE AT LEAST ONE TIME A DAY FAMILY WOULD EAT OUTSIDE BECAUSE WOMEN WOULD NOT BE ABLE TO COOK FOOD AT HOME DUE HER JOB OR OTHER PROFESSION. 

 

6 APRIL, 2023

EARLIER IN OLDER GENERATIONS ONLY MALE WOULD WORK IN FAMILY. BUT NOW EVEN FEMALE IN FAMILY WORKS TO EARN. THIS WILL BE THE MAIN REASON THAT WOULD INCREASE THE DEMAND OF FROZEN FOODS IN INDIA. 

 

5 APRIL, 2023

INDIAN FROZEN FOOD MARKET WAS VALUED AT $1.1 BILLION IN 2021 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH $3.4 BILLION BY 2028 GROWING AT A CAGR OF 18.4%. 

 

4 APRIL, 2023

GLOBAL FROZEN FOOD MARKET WAS VALUED AR %265.13 BILLION IN 2022 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH $504.14 BILLION BY 2030 GROWING AT A CAGR OF 8.4%.

 

3 APRIL, 2023

EARLIER IN INDIA IN MARRIAGES SWEETS OR LIQUID SWEETS LIKE BASUNDI (CUSTARD MILK) OR FRUIT SALAD WITH CUSTARD MILF WERE KEPT AS AFTER DINNER OR AFTER LUNCH DESSERT. BUT NOW THINGS ARE CHANGING. IN MARRIAGES PEOPLE KEEP ICE CREAM AS AFTER LUNCH OR AFTER DINNER DESSERT. OVER 70 LAKH WEDDING WORTH RS 13 LAKH CRORES WILL TAKE PLACE BETWEEN JAN TO JUNE 2023. JUST IMAGINE THE SALES OF ICE CREAM IN THAT. 

 

2 APRIL, 2023

INTERNET HAS CREATED BRAND AWARENESS OF ICE CREAMS IN RURAL AREAS AND SMALLER TOWNS OF INDIA. 

 

1 APRIL, 2023

EARLIER DUE TO NO CONSTANT SUPPLY OF ELECTRICITY IN VILLAGES AND SMALLER TOWNS OF INDIA THERE WERE NO ICE CREAM PALOURS OR ICE CREAM OF ORGANIZED PLAYERS IN VILLAGES AND SMALLER TOWNS. BUT NOW DUE TO PROPER SUPPLY OF ELECTRICITY IN VILLAGES AND SMALLER TOWNS OF INDIA ORGANIZED ICE CREAM PLAYERS ARE EXPANDING THEIR ICE CREAM PALOURS OR DIFFERENT TYPES OF ICE CREAMS IN RURAL AND SMALLER TOWNS OF INDIA.  

 

31 MARCH, 2023

EARLIER IN VILLAGES AND SMALL TOWNS OF INDIA THERE WAS NO PROPER OR CONSTANT SUPPLY OF ELECTRICITY. SO ICE CREAM PALOURS CANNOT STORE ICE CREAM IN FRIDGE. OR ONE CANNOT BRING ICE CREAM HOME DUE TO NO PROPER ELECTRICITY IN FRIDGE. DUE TO NO PROPER ELECTRICITY PEOPLE USE TO AVOID BRINGING FRIDGE. SO EARLIER ICE CREAM WAS MAINLY CONSUMED BY PEOPLE LIVING IN BIGGER CITES. BUT THINGS ARE CHANGING NOW. DUE TO PROPER ELECTRICITY IN VILLAGES AND SMALLER TOWNS IN INDIA EVEN VILLAGES AND SMALLER TOWNS IN INDIA ARE HAVING ICE CREAM NOW. AND UPCOMING CONSUMPTION OF ANYTHING IN INDIA WILL COME FROM SMALLER TOWNS OR TIER III AND IV CITIES. 

 

30 MARCH, 2023

THE ANOTHER MYTH OR MISCONCEPT ABOUT ICE CREAM IS THAT ICE CREAM IS RESPONSIBLE FOR SORE THROAT. BUT THE FACT IS THAT ENT DOCTORS ADVICE TO HAVE ICE CREAM AFTER TOOTH EXTRACTION OR TONSIL SURGERIES. THIS MISCONCEPT OF SORE THROAT CAUSED BY ICE CREAM WAS CREATED BY OLDER GENERATION. SO THAT TIME ICE CREAM SALES WERE AFFECTED. BUT YOUNG GENERATION DOES NOT BELIEVE IN THIS MYTH THAT ICE CREAM CAUSES SORE THROAT. THIS CAN INCREASE THE SALES OF ICE CREAM SINCE BY 2027 INDIA WILL HAVE WORLD’S YOUNGEST POPULATION. 

 

29 MARCH, 2023

THERE IS A MYTH OR MISCONCEPT THAT SALES OF ICE CREAM CANNOT GROW IN INDIA BECAUSE ITS A DIABETIC COUNTRY. BUT THE TRUTH IS DESPITE BEING A DIABETIC COUNTRY, TRADITIONAL INDIAN SWEET MARKET IS VALUED AT RS 60,000-65,000 CR OF WHICH ORGANIZED PLAYERS HAVE ONLY 5-7% SHARE. GULAB JAMUN IS THE HIGHEST SELLING SWEET IN INDIA. AND COMPARED TO THIS INDIAN ICE CREAM MARKET IS VALUED JUST AT RS 16,000 CR. THIS IS BECAUSE IN INDIA TRADITIONAL SWEETS ARE USED AS AFTER DINNER DESSERT. BUT IN WESTERN COUNTRIES ICE CREAM IS USED AS AFTER DINNER DESSERT. OLDER GENERATION ATE TRADITIONAL SWEETS AS AFTER DINNER DESSERT BUT BY 2027 INDIA WILL HAVE WORLD’S YOUNGEST POPULATION SO AT THAT TIME CAN YOUNG PEOPLE REPLACE TRADITIONAL SWEETS WITH ICE CREAM AS AFTER DINNER DESSERT ?

 

28 MARCH, 2023

IN MANY WESTERN COUNTRIES THERE IS COLD WEATHER ALMOST WHOLE YEAR BUT THEN TOO ICE CREAM SALES DOES NOT FALL. IN FACT WESTERN COUNTRIES HAS HIGHER PER CAPITA ICE CREAM CONSUMPTION. MEANS PEOPLE THERE EATS ICE CREAM THROUGHOUT THE YEAR. AND HERE IN INDIA IN WINTER ICE CREAM SALES DROPS DOWN. CAN THIS WILL CHANGE IN INDIA IN COMING YEARS ?

 

27 MARCH, 2023

IN WESTERN COUNTRIES ICE CREAM IS USED AS AFTER DINNER DESSERT BUT IN INDIA TRADITIONAL SWEETS IS USED AS AFTER DINNER DESSERT. BUT IN COMING YEARS EVEN WE WILL SEE ICE CREAM AS AFTER DINNER DESSERT IN INDIA. 

 

26 MARCH, 2023

IN EUROPE AND OTHER COUNTRIES AROUND THE WORLD TAKE HOME SALES OF ICE CREAM TO KEEP IT AS STOCK AT HOME IS AROUND 55-60% AND IN INDIA TAKE HOME SALES OF ICE CREAM IS JUST 7-10%.

 

25 MARCH, 2023

IN INDIA ICE CREAM IS STILL CONSIDERED AS LUXURY ITEM. PEOPLE DON’T EAT ICE CREAM EVERYDAY OR DOES NOT STOCK ICE CREAM IN THEIR HOME FREEZER TO EAT IT DAILY. PEOPLE EAT ICE CREAM ONCE A WEEK OR ONCE A MONTH OR THEY BRING ICE CREAM AT HOME WHEN SOME GUEST VISIT THEIR HOMES. ALL THIS IS BECAUSE OF LOW CAPITA INCOME AND OLD AGE POPULATION EARLIER. NUT NOW THINGS ARE CHANGING. EARLIER ONLY ONE PERSON PERSON OF FAMILY WAS EARNING AND OTHER FAMILY MEMBERS WERE DEPENDENT ON HIM. BUT NOW ALL FAMILY MEMBERS WORK SO ANNUAL INCOME OF FAMILY INCREASES AND INCREASE IN ANNUAL INCOME OF FAMILY WILL INCREASE THE CONSUMPTION OF FAMILY. THIS WILL BRING DRASTIC CHANGE. PLUS BY 2027 INDIA WILL HAVE WORLD’S YOUNGEST POPULATION. YOUNG PEOPLE ARE USUALLY ATTRACTED TOWARDS MODERN LIVING SO AT TIME CONSUMER PERCEPTION TOWARDS ICE CREAM WILL CHANGE FROM LUXURY ITEM TO DAILY ITEM .

 

24 MARCH, 2023

GLOBAL ICE CREAM MARKET WAS VALUED AT $86.64 BILLION IN 2021 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH $127.76 BILLION BY 2029 GROWING AT A CAGR OF 4.41%. 

 

23 MARCH, 2023

INDIA’S ICE CREAM MARKET WAS VALUED AT RS 13,000 CR IN 2022 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH RS 43,620 CR IN 2028 GROWING AT A CAGR OF AROUND 18.5%.

 

22 MARCH, 2023

INDIA’S ICE CREAM MARKET IS AROUND RS 13,000 CRORE OUT OF THIS AROUND RS 7,000 CR IS ORGANIZED MARKET AND REST IS UNORGANIZED. MEANS ONLY 55% OF ICE CREAM MARKET IS ORGANIZED. 

 

21 MARCH, 2023

PER CAPITA ICE CREAM CONSUMPTION IN INDIA IS AROUND 360-400 ML COMPARED TO 22 LITRES IN U.S, 19 LITRES IN AUSTRALIA, 28.4 LITRES IN NEW ZEALAND, 7 LITRES IN U.K, 11 LITRES IN CANADA. THIS SHOWS INDIAN ICE CREAM SECTOR IS HIGHLY UNDERVALUED. 

 

20 MARCH, 2022

SHEETAL COOL PRODUCTS EXPORTS TO USA, SWITZERLAND, SINGAPORE, AUSTRALIA, AFRICA, NEPAL ETC. 

 

19 MARCH, 2023

OUT OF THIS REVENUE OF RS 326 CR OF SHEETAL PRODUCTS IN 2022, ICE CREAM AND MILK PRODUCTS CONTRIBUTED RS 298.30 CR AND NAMKEEN AND OTHER PRODUCTS CONTRIBUTED RS 28.46 CR. 

 

18 MARCH, 2023

SHEETAL COOL PRODUCTS AIMS TO ACHIEVE TURNOVER OF RS 1,500 CR BY 2030. COMPANY’S CURRENT SALES IN 2022 WAS RS 326 CR. 

 

17 MARCH, 2023

SHEETAL COOL PRODUCTS PLANS TO OPEN AT LEAST 100 ICE CREAM PARLOUR EVERY YEAR. 

 

16 MARCH, 2023

SHEETAL COOL PRODUCTS SELLS ICE CREAM, IT SELLS PREMIUM ICE CREAM UNDER J’ADORE ICE CREAM, COMPANY ALSO SELLS PROCESSED MILK, FLAVOURED MILK, SHRIKHAND, PANNER, BUTTER MILK IN FOOD COMPANY SELLS NAMKEENS, WAFFERS, COOKIES, FAFDA ETC, IN FROZEN FOOD COMPANY SELLS BURGER, PARATHAS, FRENCH FRIES, PIZZA, SAMOSA ETC IN BAKERY PRODUCTS COMPANY SELLS RUSK, KHARI, CREAM ROLL ETC, IN SWEETS COMPANY SELLS DRY FRUIT CHIKKI, KAJU KATLI, SOAN PAPDI, MOTICHOOR LADOO, RASGULLA, GULAB JAMUN ETC. 

 

15 MARCH, 2023

SHEETAL COOL PRODUCTS WAS STARTED AS A SMALL SHOP CALLED SHEETAL PAN AND COLD DRINKS IN AMRELI, SAURASHTRA GUJARAT IN 1987. OVER THE YEARS SHOP NOW GREW INTO AN INDUSTRIAL UNIT. NOW COMPANY PRODUCES ICE CREAM, FROZEN FOOD, NAMKEENS, MILK PRODUCTS LIKE CURD, BUTTER MILK, ETC. COMPANY HAS REACH OF 35,000+ RETAILERS, OFFERS MORE THAN 100 FLAVOURS OF ICE CREAM AND SELLS OTHER PRODUCTS IN MORE THAN 160 CITIES. 

 

14 MARCH, 2023

SHEETAL COOL PRODUCTS PRODUCES PER DAY 80,000 LITRES OF MILK, 2,00,000 LITRES OF ICE CREAM PER DAY, 17,00,000 CANDIES PER DAY, 11,00,000 ICE CREAM CUPS FILLED PER DAY, 7,00,000 ICE CREAM CONES PER DAY, 20,000 KG OF NAMKEEN PRODUCTION PER DAY, 5,00,000 BISCUIT CONES PER DAY, 7,000 KG LIQUID CHOCOLATE PER DAY. 

 

13 MARCH, 2023

LATEST UPDATES ON GRAVITA INDIA IN LAST 6 MONTHS: COMPANY SIGNS MOU WITH ESTABLISH BATTERY RECYCLING PLANT IN OMAN WITH CAPACITY OF 6,000 MTPA, COMPANY STARTED COMMERCIAL ALUMINIUM RECYCLING PLANT IN TOGO WEST AFRICA, COMMENCED PLASTIC RECYCLING PLANT IN GHANA WITH CAPACITY OF 2,700 MTPA, COMMENCED ALUMINIUM RECYCLING PLANT IN SENEGAL WITH ANNUAL CAPACITY OF 4,000 MTPA, COMMENCED RUBBER RECYCLING PLANT IN GHANA WITH ANNUAL CAPACITY OF 6,000 MTPA. PLUS BY 2025 COMPANY PLANS TO ENTER LITHIUM BATTERY RECYCLING, E-WASTE RECYCLING AND COPPER RECYCLING. FINANCIALS: COMPANY’S REVENUE INCREASED FROM RS 1,017 CR IN 2018 TO RS 2,215 CR IN 2022. ITS NET PROFIT INCREASED FROM RS 47 CR IN 2018 TO RS 148 CR IN 2022. ITS EPS INCREASED FROM RS 6.42 IN 2018 TO RS 20.60 IN 2022, ITS ROE INCREASED FROM 23.24 IN 2018 TO 36.03 IN 2022. ITS DEBT TO EQUITY CAME DOWN FROM 1.19 IN 2018 TO 1.00 IN 2022. BY THIS I CONCLUDE MY RESEARCH ON GRAVITA AND ENTIRE RECYCLING SECTOR. 

 

12 MARCH, 2023

IN INDIA AVAILABLE SIZE OF RECYCLING LITHIUM BATTERIES WILL HIT 50,000 TONNES BY END OF 2023 WHICH IS MORE THAN DOUBLE FROM 23,000 TONNES LAST YEAR. EV SHARE IN TOTAL LITHIUM RECYCLING LAST YEAR WAS 10%, THIS YEAR IT IS EXPECTED TO REACH 50%. FOR RECYCLING, LITHIUM CAN BE FOUND IN END OF LIFE LITHIUM ION BATTERIES USED IN EV,S, ELECTRONICS AND TELECOM TOWERS. SO FAR ELECTRONICS WAS THE LARGEST GENERATOR OF LITHIUM RECYCLING IN INDIA, BUT THIS IS NOW CHANGING. EV SHARE IN TOTAL LITHIUM RECYCLING WILL TOUCH 30% THIS YEAR AND 80% IN NEXT 5 YEARS. INDIAN TOTAL SIZE OF LITHIUM RECYCLING MARKET WILL CROSS 2 LAKH TONNES BY 2030. ELECTRONIC WASTE BRINGS 60% OF LITHIUM RECYCLING AT PRESENT BUT IT WILL FALL TO 5% IN NEXT 3-4 YEARS. REMAINING 95% OF LITHIUM RECYCLING WILL BE SOURCED FROM EV BATTERIES. OUT OF INDIA’S CURRENT AVAILABLE SIZE OF RECYCLING CAPACITY OF LITHIUM BATTERIES OF AROUND 50,000 METRIC TONNES, INDUSTRY JUST HAS CAPACITY TO RECYCLE 20,000 METRIC TONNES, REMAINING 30,000 METRIC TONNES OF BATTERIES ARE DUMPED. 

 

11 MARCH, 2023

RECYCLED BATTERIES COULD MEET MORE THAN 20% OF INDIA’S LITHIUM ION BATTERY NEEDS BY 2030.

 

10 MARCH, 2023

IN INDIA NEW BATTERIES WOULD CREATE A RECYCLING VOLUME OF 128 GWH BY 2030 AROUND 46% OF THIS WILL COME FROM EVs. TO TREAT THIS VOLUME, INDIA’S LITHIUM BATTERY RECYCLING CAPACITY WOULD HAVE TO INCREASE BY 60 TIMES OVER THE NEXT 8 YEARS FROM AROUND 2GWH AT PRESENT. 

 

9 MARCH, 2023

INDIA’S BATTERY STORAGE CAPACITY WILL INCREASE TO 600 GWH BY 2030. OUT OF THIS TWO THIRD CAPACITY WILL COME FROM EVs. INDIA’S LOW LITHIUM BATTERY MANUFACTURING CAPACITY WILL LEAD TO INCREASE IN IMPORTS. A CIRCULAR ECONOMY FOR BATTERIES WILL BE IMPORTANT TO ACHIEVE ENERGY INDEPENDENCE. 

 

8 MARCH, 2023

EUROPE PLANS TO RECYCLE 65% OF TOTAL LITHIUM BATTERIES IN EUROPE BY 2025 AND 70% BY 2030 TO RECOVER 90% COBALT, NICKEL, COPPER AND 35% OF LITHIUM BY 2025. BY 2030 EUROPE PLANS TO RECOVER 95% OF NICKEL, COPPER, COBALT AND 70% OF LITHIUM BY RECYCLING BATTERIES .

 

7 MARCH, 2023

BY 2030 RECYCLING FACILITIES OF LITHIUM BATTERIES CAN RECOVER 1,25,000 TONNES OF LITHIUM, 35,000 TONNES OF COBALT AND 86,000 TONNES OF NICKEL BY RECYCLING BATTERIES AND THIS WOULD ADD UP TO $6 BILLION MARKET BY 2030. AND AROUND 4,00,000 AND 1 MILLION TONNES OF PRODUCTION SCRAP COULD BE RECOVERED.

 

6 MARCH, 2023

EV BATTERIES HAVE LIFE SPAN OF 6-8 YEARS AND THERE ARE ABOUT 3,000 BATTERY CELLS PER VEHICLE DEPENDING ON THE MODEL. THERE ARE CURRENTLY ABOUT 10 BILLION OR ABOUT 4,65,000 TONNES OF USED EV BATTERIES IN NEED OF RECYCLING AND THIS NUMBER OF NEED OF RECYCLING EV BATTERIES WILL INCREASE TO 29 BILLION BY 2029. 

 

5 MARCH, 2023

GLOBALLY INVESTMENT OF AROUND $23 BILLION IS REQUIRED EVERY YEAR FOR THE NEXT 30 YEARS WHICH IS 64% HIGHER THAN THE ANNUAL SPENDING DURING LAST THREE DECADES TO DEVELOP AND EXPAND THE DEMAND OF COPPER TO MEET THE UPCOMING DEMAND OF COPPER. RECYCLING OF COPPER WILL PLAY MAJOR ROLE. 

 

4 MARCH, 2023

GOVERNMENTS OF EVERY COUNTRY AROUND THE WORLD WILL BRING POLICIES TO RECYCLE BATTERIES. 

 

3 MARCH, 2023

THE U.S DEPARTMENT OF ENERGY PASSES LOAN OF $375 MILLION FO LI-CYCLE HOLDING TO RECYCLE LITHIUM ION BATTERIES. THE U.S DEPARTMENT OF ENERGY IS PUTTING MORE MONEY BEHIND THE U.S LITHIUM ION BATTERY RECYCLING INDUSTRY. 

 

2 MARCH, 2023

GLOBALLY THE INSTALLED CAPACITY OF LITHIUM ION BATTERIES IN 2030 WILL INCREASE TO 10.5 TWH WITH 8.1 TWH OR 77% INSTALLED IN EVs. BY 2030 AROUND 145GWH OR AROUND 7,99,000 TONNES OF LITHIUM ION BATTERIES WILL GO TO REUSE AND 170 GWH OR AROUND 11,00,000 TONNES OF LITHIUM BATTERIES WILL GO FOR RECYCLING.

 

1 MARCH, 2023

11 MILLION METRIC TONNES OF LITHIUM ION BATTERIES ARE EXPECTED TO REACH END OF THEIR SERVICE LIVES BETWEEN 2022 TO 2031. 

 

28 FEBRUARY, 2023

U.S ALONE WILL RECYCLE 12 MILLION TONNES OF LITHIUM ION BATTERIES BY 2036 OBTAINING AROUND $60 BILLION IN VALUABLE METAL.

 

27 FEBRUARY, 2023

AROUND 50-60% OF COBALT, LITHIUM AND NICKEL IN NEW BATTERIES WILL COME FROM RECYCLED BATTERIES BY 2035.

 

26 FEBRUARY, 2023

GLOBALLY AT PRESENT ONLY 5% OF LITHIUM ION BATTERIES ARE RECYCLED. THIS SHOWS THE SECTOR IS AT VERY INITIAL STAGE AND HIGHLY UNDERVALUED. 

 

25 FEBRUARY, 2023

GLOBAL LITHIUM ION BATTERY RECYCLING MARKET WAS VALUED AT $1.33 BILLION IN 2021 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH $38.21 BILLION BY 2031 GROWING AT A CAGR OF 36%.

 

24 FEBRUARY, 2023

INDIA NEEDS TO INVEST $10 BILLION IN LITHIUM ION BATTERIES BY 2030. 

 

23 FEBRUARY, 2023

INDIA’S ANNUAL LITHIUM ION BATTERY MARKET WILL GROW FROM 2.6 GWh IN 2021 TO 116 GWh BY 2030. 

 

22 FEBRUARY, 2023

THE PROJECTED 40 MILLION EV CARS WILL NOT BE PRODUCED WORLDWIDE, BUT ONLY 25 MILLION WILL BE PRODUCED DUE TO SHORTAGE OF LITHIUM. THERE WILL BE SHORTAGE OF AROUND 2,50,000-3,00,000 TONNES OF LITHIUM PER YEAR FROM 2030. RECYCLING WILL BE THE ONLY SOLUTION. 

 

21 FEBRUARY, 2023

BY 2032 SUPPLY OF LITHIUM WILL BE 24% LOWER THAN DEMAND. RECYCLING OF LITHIUM WILL PLAY MAJOR ROLE TO END DEMAND SUPPLY GAP OF LITHIUM. 

 

20 FEBRUARY, 2023

GLOBALLY IN 2020 AROUND 0.41 MILLION METRIC TONNES OF LITHIUM WAS PRODUCED, IN 2021 PRODUCTION INCREASED TO 0.54 MILLION METRIC TONNES AN INCREASE OF 32%. DEMAND OF LITHIUM WILL BE 3.5 MILLION METRIC TONNES GROWING AT 25% CAGR. DUE TO SHORT TIME AND INCREASE IN DEMAND OF LITHIUM WILL INCREASE SHORTAGE OF LITHIUM. BY 2030 THE SUPPLY OF LITHIUM WILL BE ONLY 2.4 MILLION METRIC TONNES. DUE TO THIS SHORTAGE THE PRICE OF LITHIUM CARBONATE HAS PASSED $75,000 PER METRIC TON COMPARED WITH FIVE YEAR AVERAGE OF AROUND $14,000 PER METRIC TON. THE ONLY SOLUTION TO THIS DEMAND SUPPLY MISMATCH OF LITHIUM AND RISING PRICE OF LITHIUM IS TO RECYCLE LITHIUM ION BATTERIES. 

 

19 FEBRUARY, 2023

THE GLOBAL EV MARKET SIZE WAS $205.58 BILLION IN 2022 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH $1,716 BILLION BY 2032 GROWING AT A CAGR OF 23.1%. JUST IMAGINE THE DEMAND OF LITHIUM ION BATTERIES AND DEMAND OF RECYCLING LITHIUM ION BATTERIES BY 2032.

 

18 FEBRUARY, 2023

LITHIUM ION BATTERIES ARE MAJORLY USED IN EVs. GLOBAL LITHIUM ION BATTERY MARKET SIZE WAS $52.5 BILLION AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH $254.5 BILLION IN 2032 GROWING AT A CAGR OF 16.5%.

 

17 FEBRUARY, 2023

GLOBALLY INVESTMENTS OF AROUND $23 BILLION IS REQUIRED EVERY YEAR FOR NEXT 30 YEARS WHICH IS 64% HIGHER THAN THE ANNUAL SPENDING DURING THE LAST THREE DECADES TO DEVELOP AND EXPAND THE MINING OF COPPER TO MEET THE UPCOMING DEMAND OF COPPER. RECYCLING OF COPPER WILL PLAY MAJOR ROLE.

 

16 FEBRUARY, 2023

KEEP EYE ON GLOBAL CASINO SECTOR. CAN MGM RESORTS INTERNATIONAL BE TURNAROUND FROM CMP OF $44.75.

 

15 FEBRUARY, 2023

NORTH AMERICA RECYCLED ONLY 45% OF ALUMINIUM BEVERAGE CANS IN 2021. THEY PLAN TO INCREASE RECYCLING OF ALUMINIUM BEVERAGE CANS TO 100%. 

 

14 FEBRUARY, 2023

AT PRESENT ONLY 12% OF ALUMINIUM MATERIALS USED IN EUROPE COMES FROM RECYCLING. 

 

13 FEBRUARY, 2023

EUROPEAN PACKAGING INDUSTRY LAUNCHED ROADMAP TO ACHIEVE 100% ALUMINIUM CAN RECYCLING BY 2030. 

 

12 FEBRUARY, 2023

CHINA AIMS TO HAVE CARBON EMISSION PEAK BY 2030 AND PLANS TO CAP PRIMARY ALUMINIUM SMELTING CAPACITY AT AROUND 45 MILLION TONNES, VERSUS OUTPUT OF JUST OVER 37 MILLION TONNES IN 2020. ALUMINIUM ACCOUNTS FOR 18% OF TOTAL EMISSION FROM CHINA’S METAL INDUSTRY. HOWEVER CARBON EMISSION FROM ALUMINIUM IS ONLY 0.2 TONNES PER TONNE OF ALUMINIUM VERSUS 12.5 MILLION TONNES FOR PRIMARY ALUMINIUM. RECYCLING IS THE EASIEST AND FASTEST WAY TO DECARBONIZE CHINESE AND GLOBAL METAL INDUSTRY. PRODUCTION OF CHINA’S RECYCLED ALUMINIUM WILL GROW FROM 7.6 MILLION TONNES IN 2021 TO 20 MILLION TONNES BY 2030. AROUND 6.5 MILLION TONNES OF THE TOTAL CHINA’S ALUMINIUM WILL COME FROM SOUTHERN GUANGXI REGION. 

 

11 FEBRUARY, 2023

AROUND $300 BILLION WILL BE INVESTED IN INDIA FOR EV TRANSFORMATION. JUST IMAGINE THE OPPORTUNITY OF RECYCLING BATTERIES FOR EVs.

 

10 FEBRUARY, 2023

50% OF WORLD’S ALUMINIUM DEMAND WILL BE MEET BY RECYCLED ALUMINIUM BY 2040.

 

9 FEBRUARY, 2023

AROUND 7 MILLION MT OF ALUMINIUM IS NOT RECYCLED ANNUALLY DUE TO COLLECTION AND PROCESSING LOSSES OF END OF LIFE PRODUCTS. THIS FIGURE WILL INCREASE TO 17 MILLION MT PER YEAR BY 2050.

 

8 FEBRUARY, 2023

THE GLOBAL ALUMINIUM RECYCLING MARKET WAS AROUND $95.16 BILLION IN 2021 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH $129.37 BILLION BY 2028 GROWING AT A CAGR OF 5.17%.

 

7 FEBRUARY, 2023

SODIUM-ALUMINIUM BATTERIES JUST COST $7.02 PER KWH WHICH IS MUCH CHEAPER THAN LITHIUM BATTERIES. THE COST OF SODIUM ALUMINIUM BATTERIES WILL STILL COME DOWN AS AND WHEN TECHNOLOGY FURTHER DEVELOPS. THIS PROMISING NEW SODIUM ALUMINIUM BATTERY SYSTEM WHICH IS LOW COST, GRID SCALE STORAGE TECHNOLOGY COULD ENABLE INTERMITTENT RENEWABLES LIKE SOLAR AND WIND TO CONTRIBUTE MORE DYNAMICALLY TO WORLD’S ELECTRICAL GRIDS. 

 

6 FEBRUARY, 2023

METALLIC ALUMINIUM IS WIDELY USED IN PROPELLANTS, ENERGY CONTAINING MATERIALS AND BATTERIES DUE TO ITS HIGH ENERGY DENSITY. IN ADDITION TO BURNING IN AIR, ALUMINIUM CAN REACT WITH WATER TO GENERATE HYDROGEN. HYDROGEN AND HEAT ARE GENERATED DURING THE REACTION OF ALUMINIUM WITH WATER. HYDROGEN WILL BE FREQUENTLY USED AS FUEL FOR ENGINES. ALUMINIUM HAS A HIGH CHEMICAL EQUIVALENT VALUE 2.98AH G-1, SECOND ONLY TO LITHIUM. ALUMINIUM WATER REACTION CAN OCCURS IN BOTH HIGH AND LOW TEMPERATURES. IN ALUMINIUM FUEL BASED ENERGY CONVERSION SYSTEM, CLEAN ENERGY IS CONVERTED INTO CHEMICAL ENERGY IN ALUMINIUM. 

 

5 FEBRUARY, 2023

GLOBAL ALUMINIUM MARKET WAS VALUED AT $169 BILLION IN 2021 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH $277.5 BILLION BY 2030 GROWING AT A CAGR OF 5.61%.

 

4 FEBRUARY, 2023

ALUMINIUM IS THE ONLY METAL THAT IS BOTH HIGH IMPACT AND CROSS CUTTING IN ALL POTENTIAL CLEAN POWER TECHNOLOGIES. ALUMINIUM CAN BE THE GREEN METAL OF THE FUTURE.

 

3 FEBRUARY, 2023

ALUMINIUM WILL REPLACE COPPER IN MANY INDUSTRIES. FOR EXAMPLE EARLIER SYSTEM MANUFACTURER USED COPPER FOR AUTOMOTIVE HEAT TRANSFER TUBING UNTIL THEY UNDERSTOOD ALUMINIUM WAS SUPERIOR METAL. THE CONVERSION OF COPPER TUBING TO ALUMINIUM TUBING IN THE AUTOMOTIVE INDUSTRY WAS COMPLETED DECADES AGO. SAME IS HAPPENING IN AC INDUSTRY AT PRESENT. ALL MAJOR AC COMPANIES ARE REPLACING COPPER TUBES BY ALUMINIUM TUBES BECAUSE ALUMINIUM IS LESS EXPENSIVE THAN COPPER, ALUMINIUM IS FAR MORE ABUNDANT THAN COPPER, IT IS LIGHTER THAN COPPER AND ALUMINIUM IS 100% RECYCLABLE. EVEN MANY CONSUMER ELECTRONICS COMPANIES ARE REPLACING COPPER BY ALUMINIUM. CAN WE SEE A HUGE JUMP IN DEMAND OF ALUMINIUM IN COMING YEARS ?

 

2 FEBRUARY, 2023

SOLAR PANELS WILL PROVIDE ROUGHLY THIRD OF WORLD’S TOTAL ELECTRICITY DEMAND BY 2050. WORLD WILL NEED AROUND 85 TIMES MORE SOLAR ENERGY THAN WE CURRENTLY PRODUCE TO LIMIT GLOBAL WARMING. THE SURGING DEMAND OF SOLAR WILL LED TO 60% OF WORLD’S CURRENT ALUMINIUM PRODUCTION WILL BE REQUIRED IN SOLAR PANELS. MAKING ALUMINIUM IS AN EXTRACTIVE AND ENERGY INTENSIVE PROCESS WITH MOST OF THE EMISSION COMING FROM ELECTRICITY USED TO POWER ITS PRODUCTION. BUT ALUMINIUM IS ONE OF THE MOST RECYCLED AND MOST RECYCLABLE METAL. IN FACT NEARLY 80% OF ALL ALUMINIUM PRODUCED IS STILL IN REUSE. RECYCLING ALUMINIUM USES VERY LITTLE ENERGY. GRAVITA INDIA IS INTO RECYCLING OF ALUMINIUM. 

 

1 FEBRUARY, 2023

THREAD ON ALUMINIUM BATTERIES: ALUMINIUM AIR BATTERIES. THIS BATTERIES WORKS BY TAPPING ELECTRICITY GENERATED WHEN ALUMINIUM PLATES REACTS WITH OXYGEN IN AIR. IT HAS ONE OF THE HIGHEST ENERGY DENSITIES FOR A BATTERY. IT IS STABLE, DOES NOT POSE FIRE HAZARD AND IS ENVIRONMENT FRIENDLY. IT ALSO PROVIDES MUCH LONGER RANGE OF AROUND 1,500 KMS. WHILE THESE BATTERIES CANNOT BE CHARGED. BUT THESE BATTERIES CAN BE RECYCLED TO PRODUCE NEW BATTERIES. TO MAKE THIS TECHNOLOGY COMMERCIALLY VIABLE, GOVERNMENT WILL DEVELOP BATTERY SWAPPING INFRASTRUCTURE. SECOND IS ALUMINIUM ION BATTERIES. ALUMINIUM ION BATTERIES ARE BUILT ALONG THE SAME LINES OF LITHIUM ION BATTERIES. ALUMINIUM ION BATTERIES CAN BE CHARGED 60X FASTER THAN LITHIUM ION BATTERIES AND PROVIDES MUCH LONGER RANGE. THIRD ALUMINIUM FOIL IS USED AS A CURRENT COLLECTOR FOR CATHODE MATERIALS COATING IN LITHIUM ION BATTERIES. IT IS ALSO USED IN CELL TABS AND CONTAINERS. MANY MANUFACTURERS USE BATTERY BOXES MADE FROM ALUMINIUM ALLOYS. MANY EV USES ALUMINIUM IN ROLLED OR EXTRUDED FORMS TO DESIGN BATTERY ENCLOSURES. 

 

31 JANUARY, 2023

MOST PEOPLE SEEK IMMEDIATE GRATIFICATION IN ALMOST EVERYTHING THEY DO INCLUDING INVESTING. WHEN MOST INVESTORS BUY A STOCK, THEY EXPECT IT TO GO UP IMMEDIATELY. IF IT DOESN’T THEY SELL IT AND BUY SOMETHING ELSE. 

 

30 JANUARY, 2023

TATA POWER HAS LARGE SOLAR EPC ORDER BOOK OF RS 15,440 CRORE. ITS SOLAR PUMPS REVENUE WAS RS 205 CRORE IN Q3FY22 VS RS 86 CRORE IN Q3FY22 AND RS 111 CRORE IN Q2 FY23. 

 

29 JANUARY, 2023

FACED WITH HIGH DEPENDENCE ON CHINA INDIAN GOVERNMENT PLANS TO BRING POLICY AND TIME BOUND ACTION PLAN TO RECYCLE CRITICAL MINERALS LIKE COPPER, NICKEL, COBALT, LITHIUM, ALUMINIUM ETC WHICH ARE USED FOR CLEAN ENERGY TECHNOLOGIES PRODUCTION FROM WIND TURBINES, SOLAR PV CELLS, ELECTRIC BATTERY VEHICLES ETC. 

 

28 JANUARY, 2023

INDIA AIMS TO ACHIEVE ELECTRONICS MANUFACTURING WORTH $300 BILLION BY 2026. MORE PRODUCTION OF ELECTRONICS WILL LED TO MORE E-WASTE. SO RECYCLING OF E-WASTE IS MUST WATCH SECTOR TO CREATE WEALTH. 

 

27 JANUARY, 2023

THE ANNUAL BATTERY RECYCLING MARKET OF INDIA IS EXPECTED TO BE AROUND 22-25 GWH BY 2030 WHICH IS A $1,000 MILLION OPPORTUNITY. BATTERY RECYCLING IN INDIA IS AT INITIAL STAGE AT PRESENT. MANUFACTURING, REUSE AND RECYCLING OF BATTERIES WOULD LED TO CIRCULAR ECONOMY IN COMING YEARS.

 

26 JANUARY, 2023

THE GLOBAL ALUMINIUM MARKET WILL GROW FROM $245.7 BILLION IN 2021 TO $498.5 BILLION BY 2030 AT A CAGR OF 5.8%.

 

25 JANUARY, 2023

ALUMINIUM INVENTORIES IN CHINA’S EIGHT MAJOR CITIES STOOD AT 9,29,000 MT AS ON 23 JANUARY WHICH IS AN INCREASE OF 1,85,000 MT FROM PRE-CHINESE NEW YEAR LEVEL FROM A YEAR AGO AND 61,000 MT MORE THAN THE LEVEL ON 7 FEB 2022. SO BASICALLY CHINA’S ALUMINIUM INVENTORIES RISE BY 24.9%. BUT ON OTHER SIDE CHINA RAISED EXPORT TAX ON ALUMINIUM FROM 15% TO 30% WITH EFFECT FROM 1 JAN 2023. THIS MEANS CHINA IS BULLISH ON ALUMINIUM DEMAND COMING UP FROM EV, AND SOLAR PANELS. 

 

24 JANUARY, 2023

NELCO AVAILABLE AT DISCOUNT. 

 

23 JANUARY, 2023

ADVANCED LEAD ACID BATTERIES WILL PLAY A MAJOR ROLE IN INDIA FOR ENERGY STORAGE FOR RENEWABLE ENERGY AND AS A POWER BACKUP FOR DATA CENTRES. 

 

22 JANUARY, 2023

INDIA’S LEAD CONSUMPTION REACHED 1.11 MT IN 2022 AND ITS PRODUCTION REACH 1.14 MT OF WHICH 0.23 MT WAS PRIMARY AND 0.9 WAS SECONDARY PRODUCTION IN 2022. 

 

21 JANUARY, 2023

SEA CABLES SECTOR CAN SEE A HUGE DEMAND IN COMING YEARS. WORLD WILL BE FORCED TO SHARE ENERGY IN COMING YEARS. 

 

20 JANUARY, 2023

ADANI HOLDS AROUND 70-75% STAKE IN ALL HIS GROUP COMPANIES. SO BASICALLY LOW FREE FLOAT. I THINK HINDENBURG WILL FACE BAD SITUATION IF THEY ARE SHORT ON IT. 

 

19 JANUARY, 2023

THE COMMERCE MINISTRY HAS RECOMMENDED IMPOSITION OF ANTI DUMPING DUTY ON VINYL TILES COMING FROM CHINA AND TAIWAN. BIG BOOST FOR INDIAN TILE SECTOR. 

 

18 JANUARY, 2023

SONY IS MOVING AWAY FROM MOVIES OR CINEMA TO GAMING. THE GLOBAL GAMING MARKET WAS WORTH $184 BILLION IN 2022. AROUND HALF OF THAT IS MOBILE GAMES BUT EVEN CONSOLE GAMING ALSO CREATED $52 BILLION IN 2022 WHICH IS BIGGER THAN THE GLOBAL CINEMA MARKET WHICH HAD REVENUE OF ONLY $43 BILLION BEFORE PANDEMIC. 

 

17 JANUARY, 2023

BEST AIMS TO EARN RS 45 CRORE PER YEAR BY REPLACING 10,000 BUSES WITH ELECTRIC VERSIONS BY 2026. 

 

16 JANUARY, 2023

ECONOMY OF CHINA IN COMING YEARS DOES NOT LOOK GOOD DUE TO AGING POPULATION. 

 

15 JANUARY, 2023

LEAD IS ALSO USED IN BATTERIES FOR ALL TYPES OF ELECTRONICS LIKE HOME APPLIANCES (GRINDER, MIXTURE, OVEN, TRIMMER, GEYSER, FAN ETC).

 

14 JANUARY, 2023

LEAD ACID BATTERIES ARE ALSO EMPLOYED TO POWER THE ELECTRIC MOTORS IN DIESEL-ELECTRIC SUBMARINES WHEN SUBMERGED.

 

13 JANUARY, 2023

FLORIDA FAMOUS FOR ORANGE FARMING IS FACING PROBLEMS DUE TO BAD WEATHER AND CITRUS DISEASE. DUE TO BAD WEATHER AND CITRUS DISEASE IN ORANGES, PRODUCTION OF ORANGES IS HALF THAT OF LAST YEAR AND 93% DOWN FROM THE PEAK OF 1998. AND FLORIDA EXPORTS ORANGES TO OTHER PARTS OF U.S BUT DUE TO BAD WEATHER AND CITRUS DISEASE U.S IS DEPENDENT ON FROZEN CONCENTRATED ORANGE JUICE FROM DIFFERENT PARTS OF WORLD.

 

12 JANUARY, 2023

FROM NET IMPORTER OF REFINED LEAD CHINA HAS BECOME NET EXPORTER OF REFINED LEAD FROM SEPTEMBER 2022.

 

11 JANUARY, 2023

SUBWAY OWNERS ARE PLANNING TO SELL CONTROLLING STAKE.

 

10 JANUARY, 2023

WILL NOT BE SURPRISED IF BOEING SETS UP PRODUCTION FACILITY IN INDIA.

 

9 JANUARY, 2023

GRAVITA INDIA HAS SCRAP COLLECTION NETWORK OF 1,10,000 MT FROM ASIA, 50,000+ MT FROM AFRICA, 13,000+MT FROM AMERICA AND 7,000+ MT FROM EUROPE.

 

8 JANUARY, 2023

CAN GE HEALTHCARE TECHNOLOGIES BE A TURNAROUND STORY ? CMP IS $58.10.

 

7 JANUARY, 2023

THREAD ON ALUMINIUM RECYCLING: INDIA’S ALUMINIUM PRODUCTION IS AROUND 3.7 MMT AND IS THE THIRD LARGEST ALUMINIUM PRODUCER IN THE WORLD. CONSUMPTION OF ALUMINIUM IN INDIA IS AROUND 2 MMT WHICH COMES AROUND 2.5 KG PER CAPITA CONSUMPTION AGAINST GLOBAL AVERAGE OF 11 KG PER CAPITA CONSUMPTION. INDIA MOVES TO ACHIEVE GLOBAL AVERAGE OF 11 KG PER CAPITA CONSUMPTION OF ALUMINIUM, INDIA ANNUAL ALUMINIUM CONSUMPTION WILL REACH AROUND 16 MMT. TO ACHIEVE THIS INDIA WILL NEED STRONG INDUSTRIAL BASE FOR ALUMINIUM RECYCLING. ALUMINIUM DOES NOT EXIST IN FREE STATE IN NATURE. IT IS PRODUCED FROM MINING OF BAUXITE ORE. IT TAKES AROUND 5-6 TONNES OF BAUXITE ORE TO PRODUCE 2 TONNES OF ALUMINIUM. ON OTHER SIDE IT TALES 2 TONNES OF ALUMINIUM SCRAP TO PRODUCE 1 TONNE OF PURE ALUMINIUM. TYPICALLY ABOUT 4-5 TONNES OF HAZARDOUS RED MUD WASTE IS DISCARDED PER 1 TONNE OF ALUMINIUM METAL PRODUCED. ABOUT 8-10 MT OF SOLID WASTE AND MORE THAN 3,000 KT OF CO2 IS GENERATED FOR EVERY 1 MT PRODUCTION OF PRIMARY ALUMINIUM. THIS PRODUCTION PROCESS ACCOUNTS FOR ABOUT 65-67% OF GLOBAL PRODUCTION AND 70% OF TOTAL ALUMINIUM PRODUCTION IN INDIA. ON OTHER SIDE CONVERTING 1 MT OF ALUMINIUM SCARP INTO ALUMINIUM PRODUCTS RESULTS IN SAVINGS OF SEVERAL TONNES OF BAUXITE, 14,000 kWH OF ENERGY, 6,300 LITRES OF FOSSIL FUELS, 7.6 CUBIC METERS OF LANDFILL AND VALUABLE LAND FOR OTHER USES SUCH AS HOUSING, INDUSTRIES ETC. THIS PROCESS ACCOUNTS FOR ONLY ABOUT 33-35% OF GLOBAL ALUMINIUM PRODUCTION. SO THIS CLEARLY SHOWS WORLD WILL DEFINITELY SHIFT TOWARDS PRODUCTION OF ALUMINIUM FROM ALUMINIUM SCRAP. BASICALLY RECYCLING OF ALUMINIUM WILL SEE A HUGE DEMAND.

 

6 JANUARY, 2023

GLOBAL LEAD ACID BATTERY MARKET IS VALUED AT $40 BILLION OF WHICH 66% COMPRISES AUTOMOTIVE DEMAND AND 29% COMPRISES INDUSTRIAL DEMAND. INDIAN LEAD ACID BATTERY MARKET SIZE IS AT AROUND RS 37,000 CRORE.

 

5 JANUARY, 2023

RECYCLED LEAD PRODUCTION TAKES ONLY 35-40% OF THE ENERGY NEEDED TO PRODUCE PRIMARY LEAD FROM ORE. 

 

4 JANUARY, 2023

LEAD ACID BATTERIES CAN PLAY A MAJOR ROLE FOR ENERGY STORAGE IN COMING YEARS SINCE INDIA PLANS TO GENERATE 430GW OF RENEWABLE ENERGY.

 

3 JANUARY, 2023

GRAVITA INDIA IS PLANNING TO BECOME MAJOR PLAYER OF PLASTIC RECYCLING . AT PRESENT GRAVITA PRODUCES 750 MT OF PET FLAKES AND 1,000 MT OF PP GRANULES IN A MONTH FROM PLASTIC SCRAP. 

 

2 JANUARY, 2023

TESLA DELIVERED AROUND 7,10,000 CHINA MADE EV CARS AND BYD DELIVERED AROUND 9,11,000 EV CARS IN 2022.

 

1 JANUARY, 2023

HAPPY NEW YEAR. 

 

31 DECEMBER, 2022

PGIM MUTUAL FUND BOUGHT 3,07,000 SHARES OF SOMANY CERAMICS. 

 

30 DECEMBER, 2022

IN NEXT 2-4 YEARS WE MIGHT SEE GST COLLECTION OF AROUND RS 3.5-4 LAKH CRORE MONTHLY. 

 

29 DECEMBER, 2022

IN INVESTING RELY ON THE ORDINARY VIRTUES THAT INTELLIGENT, BALANCED HUMAN BEINGS HAVE RELIED ON FOR CENTURIES: COMMON SENSE, THRIFT, REALISTIC EXPECTATIONS, PATIENCE AND PERSEVERANCE. 

 

28 DECEMBER, 2022

GRAVITA INDIA RECYCLES LEAD, ALUMINIUM, PLASTICS AND RUBBER. COMPANY TILL PRESENT DAY HAS COLLECTED SCRAP OF AROUND 1,80,000 MT. OUT OF THIS COMPANY HAS RECYCLED 1,35,617 MT AND AROUND 1,33,037 MT OF RECYCLED PRODUCTS ARE DELIVERED BY GRAVITA INDIA. 

 

27 DECEMBER, 2022

EUROPE IS BURNING MORE COAL THAN IT BURNED IN PAST MANY YEARS FOR ELECTRICITY.

 

26 DECEMBER, 2022

MORE THAN 50% OF LEAD USED IN THE PRODUCTION OF NEW LEAD PRODUCTS AROUND THE WORLD IS SOURCED FROM RECYCLED LEAD.

 

25 DECEMBER, 2022

ALL LEAD PRODUCED IN U.S AND AS MUCH AS 74% LEAD PRODUCED IN EUROPE COMES FROM RECYCLED LEAD.

 

24 DECEMBER, 2022

JSW PAINTS PLANS TO DOUBLE ITS REVENUE TO RS 2,000 CRORE.

 

23 DECEMBER, 2022

THERE ARE NO BAD DAYS IN MARKET. WHEN THE MARKET IS DOWN, WE HAVE GOT BARGAINS AND ITS LOVELY TO THINK OF WHAT WE ARE BUYING AT LOWER PRICES. WHEN THE MARKET IS UP THE BARGAINS HAVE GONE, BUT WE ARE RICH. 

 

22 DECEMBER, 2022

WORLD CURRENTLY GENERATED 53.6 MILLION METRIC TONNES OF E-WASTE AND BY 2030 WORLD WILL GENERATE 75 MILLION METRIC TONNES OF E-WASTE. BUT ONLY 18% OF WORLD’S E-WASTE IS RECYCLED AT PRESENT. INDIA IS WORLD’S THIRD LARGEST E-WASTE GENERATOR. INDIA GENERATE 3.23 MILLION METRIC TONNES OF E-WASTE BUT ITS RECYCLING CAPACITY IS JUST TO TREAT ONLY ONE FOURTH OF ITS WASTE. THIS SHOWS HUGE DEMAND WILL BE GENERATED TO RECYCLE E-WASTE. MANY COUNTRIES WILL BRING POLICIES TO RECYCLE E-WASTE SO THAT THEY CAN PROTECT THEIR ENVIRONMENT. GRAVITA INDIA TO START ITS E-WASTE RECYCLING PLANT BY 2026.

 

21 DECEMBER, 2022

SHIPPING INDUSTRY WILL RUN SHIPS ON METHANOL.

 

20 DECEMBER, 2022

LODHA BUYS LAND IN MUMBAI TO EXPAND ITS WAREHOUSE BUSINESS.

 

19 DECEMBER, 2022

FRANCE RESTARTS FIVE NUCLEAR REACTORS. IN NORMAL WINTER FRANCE FLEET OF NUCLEAR REACTOR WOULD GENERATE MORE THAN 50,000 MEGA WATTS OF POWER, AROUND 70% OF FRANCE’S TOTAL ELECTRICITY CONSUMPTION. MINISTRY OF FRANCE SAYS FRANCE WILL NOT SUFFER POWER CUTS DUE TO NUCLEAR ENERGY. 

 

18 DECEMBER, 2022

E-COMMERCE MARKET SHARE OF TIER III CITIES GREW FROM 34.2% IN 2021 TO 41.5% IN 2022. IN TIER II CITIES IT GREW FROM 19.4% TO 21.4% IN 2022. MARKET OF TIER IDROPPED FROM 46.4% IN 2021 TO 37.1% IN 2022. ORDERS FROM TIER III TOWNS ROSE BY 65%. MORE THAN 6 OUT OF 10 ORDERS SHIPPED IN 2022 WERE OF BUYERS IN TIER II AND BEYOND CITIES. TIER II AND III CITIES ACCOUNTED FOR 63% OF TOTAL ORDERS.

 

17 DECEMBER, 2022

EARLIER WHEN PEOPLE USED TO GO FOR LEISURE THEY WOULD TELL THE NAME OF PLACE OR CITY IN WHICH THEY WOULD GO. BUT NOW WHEN PEOPLE GO FOR LEISURE THEY SAY THE NAME OF HOTEL. FOR EG, EARLIER IF PEOPLE GOING TO UDAIPUR THEY WOULD SAY GOING TO UDAIPUR NOW PEOPLE SAY GOING TO RADISSON UDAIPUR, RAMADA UDAIPUR, TRIDENT UDAIPUR. IN SHORT NOW PEOPLE SAY THE NAME OF HOTEL FIRST AND THEN THE NAME OF PLACE. THIS IS THE BIGGEST HUMAN BEHAVIOUR CHANGE FOR HOTEL INDUSTRY. A SHIFT FROM VISITING PLACE FOR LEISURE TO STAYING IN GOOD HOTELS FOR LEISURE.

 

16 DECEMBER, 2022

GOVERNMENT BRINGS ANTI DUMPING DUTY ON SEAMLESS PIPES IMPORTED FROM CHINA.

 

15 DECEMBER, 2022

REVENUE OF GRAVITA INDIA INCREASED FROM RS 399.58 CRORE IN 2013 TO RS 2,215.87 CRORE IN 2022. ITS NET PROFIT INCREASED FROM RS 23.50 CRORE IN 2013 TO RS 148.45 CRORE IN 2022. GRAVITA INDIA HAS NOT POSTED A LOSS FOR A SINGLE YEAR BETWEEN 2013 TO 2022.

 

14 DECEMBER, 2022

DEFENCE MINISTRY GIVES GO AHEAD FOR RS 84,000 CRORE PROJECTS. ALL THE PRODUCTS WILL BE MADE IN INDIA.

 

13 DECEMBER, 2022

EUROPE IS BURNING MORE COAL THAN IT BURNED IN PAST YEARS FOR ELECTRICITY.

 

12 DECEMBER, 2022

IN COMING YEARS WE CAN SEE MICROSOFT AS A GAMING COMPANY AND NOT AS A SOFTWARE COMPANY. 

 

11 DECEMBER, 2022

MSRTC TO DEPLOY 100 OLECTRA GREENTECH BUSES FOR MUMBAU PUNE ROUTE. FINALLY E-BUSES FOR INTERCITY HAVE STARTED. INTERCITY E-BUS WILL HAVE HUGE SCOPE THAN CITY BUSES.

 

10 DECEMBER, 2022

INDIA WILL BE FIRST TO HOLD SATELLITE SPECTRUM AUCTION. FINALLY THINGS ARE GOING IN RIGHT DIRECT. NELCO.

 

9 DECEMBER, 2022

IN INDIA, IN RURAL AREAS ABOUT 55% OF HOUSEHOLDS DONOT BRUSH DAILY, AND IN URBAN AREAS ONLY 20% OF HOUSEHOLD BRUSH TWICE A DAY. IN URBAN AREAS, BRUSHES ARE REPLACED ONCE EVERY SIX MONTHS AND IN RURAL AREAS BRUSHES ARE REPLACED EVERY 15 MONTHS. THIS SHOWS INDIAN ORAL HYGIENE MARKET IS HIGHLY UNDERVALUED.

 

8 DECEMBER, 2022

E-COMMERCE MARKET SHARE OF TIER III GREW FROM 34.2% IN 2021 TO 41.5% IN 2022. IN TIER II IT GREW FROM 19.4% IN 2021 TO 21.4% IN 2022. MARKET OF TIER I DROPPED FROM 46.4% IN 2021 TO 37.1% IN 2022. ORDERS FROM TIER III TOWNS ROSE BY 65%. MORE THAN 6 OUT OF 10 ORDERS SHIPPED IN 2022 WERE FOR BUYERS IN TIER II AND BEYOND CITIES. TIER II AND III CITIES ACCOUNTED FOR 63% OF TOTAL ORDERS.

 

7 DECEMBER, 2022

U.S IS MOVING AT GREAT SPEED TO PRODUCE ENERGY FROM BIOGAS.

 

6 DECEMBER, 2022

IN U.S INVESTORS ARE RUSHING TO PULL OUT FUNDS FROM REAL ESTATE FUNDS DUE TO FEAR OF RECESSION. THIS HAS CREATED PANIC BECAUSE BIG COMPANIES MANAGING FUNDS DOES NOT HAVE LIQUIDITY AT HAND SINCE THEY HAVE INVESTED MONEY IN REAL ESTATE. DOES THIS RUSHING TO PULL OUT FUND FROM REAL ESTATE FUNDS WILL FORCE FUND MANAGERS TO SELL THEIR STAKES IN REAL ESTATE PROPERTIES AT DISCOUNTED RATES ? U.S FACING RECESSION WHICH HAS CAUSED SLOW DOWN. PLUS HIGH INTEREST RATES. ARE THEIR ENOUGH NEW PROPERTY BUYERS IN U.S NOW ? PROPERTY SALES IN U.S HAVE DECLINED. WILL FUND MANAGERS BE ABLE TO SELL THEIR STAKES IN REAL ESTATE PROPERTIES TO PAY BACK TO INVESTORS ? BLACKSTONE AND STARWOOD CAPITAL HAVE RESTRICTED TO WITHDRAW FUNDS FROM THEIR REAL ESTATE FUNDS.

 

5 DECEMBER, 2022

IN U.S SALES OF RETAILS STORES OVER THANKSGIVING WEEKENED WERE BELOW PRE PANDEMIC LEVELS.

 

4 DECEMBER, 2022

CHINA BOUGHT 32 TONS OF GOLD.

 

3 DECEMBER, 2022

DESPITE SLOWDOWN IN CHINA AUTO SECTOR, TESLA SHANGHAI FACTORY HAS RECORD MONTHLY SALES IN NOVEMBER OF 1,00,000 EV CARS. TESLA SOLD 1,00,000 EV CARS IN CHINA IN NOVEMBER.

 

2 DECEMBER, 2022

HIGHEST AUTOMOBILES SALES IN NOVEMBER. IT IS HIGHEST SALES IN HISTORY OF AUTOMOBILE INDUSTRY. THIS MEANS TYRE SALES WILL ALSO BE GOOD AND TYRE SALES WILL BE GOOD MEANS RUBBER CHEMICAL SALES WILL ALSO BE GOOD. BENEFIT TO NOCIL. NOCIL ENJOYS MONOPOLY IN RUBBER CHEMICALS.

 

1 DECEMBER, 2022

AIR INDIA TO BUY 150 BOEING 737 MAX PLANES. AIRBUS IS NOT IN POSITION TO DELIVER NARROW BODY PLANES BEFORE 2025 DUE TO PARTS SHORTAGES. THE ORDER MAY GO UP TO 400 NARROW BODY PLANES 737 MAX. BULLISH ON BOEING.

 

30 NOVEMBER, 2022

COTTON PRICES ARE NOW DOWN BY 47% FROM THEIR PEAK.

 

29 NOVEMBER, 2022

THE KEY TO MAKE MONEY IN STOCKS IS NOT TO GET SCARED OUT OF THEM, GOOD INFORMATION IS USELESS WITHOUT THE WILL POWER.

 

28 NOVEMBER, 2022

NELCO SEEKS LICENSE TO OFFER SATCOM SERVICES.

 

27 NOVEMBER, 2022

SANITARY WARE: PERCEPTION OF INDIVIDUALS ON BATHROOMS HAVE CHANGE DRASTICALLY. EARLIER BATHROOM WAS PERCEIVED AS A NECESSITY. BUT AT PRESENT BATHROOM HAS EVOLVED AS A STYLE STATEMENT OR LUXURY STATEMENT. PEOPLE ARE OPTING FOR BIGGER AND BETTER BATHROOMS AS A SIGN OF STATUS AND LUXURY. PEOPLE ARE MOVING FROM PEDESTAL BASIN TO OVER THE COUNTER BASIN. PEOPLE EVEN IN RURAL AREAS ARE SHIFTING FROM TRADITIONAL CLOSETS TO WALL MOUNTED CLOSETS. THE GROWTH OF TECHNOLOGIES HAVE GIVEN BIRTH TO TOUCHLESS BATHROOM. EG, FAUCETS WORKING ON SENSORS, SHOWERS WORKING ON SENSORS, FAUCETS SHOWING TEMPERATURE OF WATER SO THAT PEOPLE CAN CHANGE THE TEMPERATURE OF WATER. SO BASICALLY BATHROOMS ARE CONVERTING INTO SMART BATHROOMS. INCREASE IN PER CAPITA INCOME, MODERNISATION, DESIRE TO HAVE EVERYTHING UPGRADED BY MILLENNIALS ARE THE MAJOR FACTORS OF GROWTH WHICH LED TO INCREASE IN ADAPTATION OF SMART BATHROOMS. ADAPTION OF SMART BATHROOMS WILL LED TO INCREASE IN SALES OF SANITARY WARE.

 

26 NOVEMBER, 2022

ONLY 43% OF INDIAN SANITARY WARE MARKET IS ORGANIZED. 

 

25 NOVEMBER, 2022

U.S IS SUFFERING FROM MAJOR SHORTAGE OF SOLAR PANELS DUE TO BAN ON IMPORTS FROM XINHIANG REGION OF CHINA WHICH PRODUCES HALF OF WORLD’S SOLAR GRADE SILICON. AROUND 4,000 CONTAINERS ARE STUCK AT U.S PORTS CARRYING SOLAR PANELS OR SOLAR GRADE SILICON. MANY SOLAR COMPANIES IN U.S HAVE HALTED SOLAR PROJECTS BECAUSE THEY DON’T HAVE SOLAR PANELS. DUE TO THEIR SOLAR COMPANIES IN U.S HAS LAID OFF LAKHS OF WORKERS.

 

24 NOVEMBER, 2022

FALLING WIND SPEED IN U.K AND EUROPE HAS CREATED PROBLEMS IN PRODUCING WIND ENERGY. WIND SPEED FELL TO 5 A SECOND METERS OR 11 MILES AN HOUR. SPEED OF 15 METERS A SECOND OR 33 MPH IS REQUIRED TO PRODUCE MAXIMUM POWER GENERATION. POWER PRICE IN GERMANY WAS EURO 361 A MEGAWATT-HOUR UP FROM EURO 108 IN MIDDLE OF LAST MONTH.

 

23 NOVEMBER, 2022

GOVERNMENT MIGHT BRING PLI SCHEME FOR FOOTWEAR INDUSTRY.

 

22 NOVEMBER, 2022

THE SECRET TO SUCCESS IN SAFE AND CHEAP INVESTING IS NOT TO OBTAIN SUPERIOR OR EARLIER INFORMATION, BUT RATHER TO USE THE AVAILABLE INFORMATION IN A SUPERIOR MANNER. WE BELIEVE THAT NO FINANCIAL MARKET CAN APPROACH INSTANTANEOUS EFFICIENCY.

 

21 NOVEMBER, 2022

IN THE LONG RUN, IT’S NOT JUST HOW MUCH MONEY WE MAKE THAT WILL DETERMINE OUR FUTURE PROSPERITY. IT’S HOW MUCH OF THAT MONEY WE PUT TO WORK BY SAVING IT AND INVESTING IT.

 

20 NOVEMBER, 2022

INDIAN HOME IMPROVEMENT OR BEAUTIFICATION MARKET REVENUE IS EXPECTED TO INCREASE FROM $800 MILLION IN 2019 TO $1.5 BILLION BY 2025. HOME IMPROVEMENT PRODUCTS COMPROMISE GOODS SUCH AS TILES, LAMINATES, SANITARY WARE, PAINTS AND FURNITURE. TODAY CONSUMERS YEARN FOR A UNIQUE EXPERIENCE AND ARE GETTING VOCAL ABOUT BRANDS AND DESIGNS THAT DON THEIR HOUSES. REAL ESTATE DEVELOPERS ARE ALSO GOING BY THIS TREND THATS WHY THEY ARE USING QUALITY MARBLE FLOORING AND LUXURY BRANDED SANITARY WARE. DUE TO GROWING MODERNIZATION AND INCREASE IN PER CAPITA INCOME PEOPLE WANT TO USE BETTER HOME INTERIORS.

 

19 NOVEMBER, 2022

GOVERNMENT PLANNING TO BRING PLI SCHEME FOR PETROCHEMICALS. BOOST FOR DEEPAK FERTILISERS. 

 

18 NOVEMBER, 2022

CHINA IS WORLD’S LARGEST PRODUCER OF SANITARY WARE WITH ANNUAL CAPACITY OF AROUND 230 MILLION PIECES. AND INDIA IS WORLD’S SECOND LARGEST MANUFACTURER OF SANITARY WARE WITH ANNUAL CAPACITY OF JUST 40 MILLION PIECES. GAP IS TOO LARGE. THIS SHOWS INDIA’S SANITARY WARE MARKET IS UNDERVALUED.

 

17 NOVEMBER, 2022

CHINA IS WORLD’S LARGEST EXPORTER OF SANITARY WARE PRODUCTS WITH VOLUME OF AROUND 105 MILLION PIECES. IT EXPORTS AROUND 49% OF ITS TOTAL PRODUCTION. 

 

16 NOVEMBER, 2022

INDIA’S SANITARY WARE PRODUCTION IS EXPECTED TO REACH 80 MILLION PIECES BY 2030 FROM 40 MILLION PIECES AT PRESENT.

 

15 NOVEMBER, 2022

INDIA’S SANITARY WARE MARKET IS EXPECTED TO GROW FROM $1,060 MILLION IN 2021 TO $1,651.9 MILLION BY 2027.

 

15 NOVEMBER, 2022

HALF OF OUR RETURN IS DETERMINED BY OUR INVESTMENTS, THE OTHER HALF BY WHAT KIND OF PERSON WE ARE.

 

14 NOVEMBER, 2022

ALL OF US WOULD BE BETTER INVESTORS IF WE JUST MADE FEWER DECISIONS.

 

13 NOVEMBER, 2022

BIRLA (ULTRATECH) HAS ONE OF THE BEST DISTRIBUTION CHANNEL IN CEMENT SECTOR. TAKING ADVANTAGE OF BEST DISTRIBUTION CHANNEL IT ENTERED PAINT BUSINESS SINCE GROUP DOES NOT HAVE TO MAKE NEW DISTRIBUTION CHANNEL FOR PAINT BUSINESS. PLUS IN REAL ESTATE SECTOR THOSE WHO WILL BUY CEMENT WILL DEFINITELY BUY PAINT. AFTER VENTURING INTO PAINT BUSINESS NOW PEOPLE CAN BUY CEMENT AND PAINT FROM ONE SINGLE SHOP OR DISTRIBUTOR BUT TO PURCHASE TILES WHICH IS ALSO THE PART OF HOUSING SECTOR PEOPLE NEED TO GO AT OTHER SHOPS. SINCE THE USE OF CEMENT, PAINTS AND TILES COMES UNDER ONE ROOF CAN BIRLA ENTER TILE SECTOR BY LEVERAGING ITS MIND BLOWING CEMENT AND PAINT DISTRIBUTION CHANNEL FOR TILES IN COMING YEARS ?

 

12 NOVEMBER, 2022

BIRLA SAYS THEY WILL BECOME INDIA’S SECOND LARGEST PAINT PLAYER AND JSW SAYS THEY WILL BECOME INDIA’S THIRD LARGEST PAINT PLAYER.

 

11 NOVEMBER, 2022

INDIA WILL NEED TO INVEST $840 BILLION IN NEXT 15 YEARS TO UPGRADE ITS URBAN INFRA. BOOST FOR TILE SECTOR.

 

10 NOVEMBER, 2022

BLINKIT (GROFERS) POSTED REVENUE OF RS 236 CRORE AND LOSS OF RS 1,019 CRORE IN FY 22. THE GAME OF VALUATION IS VERY DANGER. AT THE END IT WILL BE OLD IS GOLD.

 

9 NOVEMBER, 2022

TO CUT MANUFACTURING COST MANY EV PLAYERS HAVE STARTED USING LITHIUM IRON PHOSPHATE BATTERIES INSTEAD OF LITHIUM ION BATTERIES WHICH HAS COBALT AND NICKEL. PRICE OF LITHIUM IRON PHOSPHATE BATTERY CELLS ARE 30% LESS AS COMPARED TO LITHIUM ION BATTERIES WHICH HAS COBALT AND NICKEL BUT RANGE OF LITHIUM IRON PHOSPHATE BATTERY IS SHORTER THAN RANGE OF LITHIUM ION BATTERIES WHICH HAS COBALT AND NICKEL.

 

8 NOVEMBER, 2022

BY 2030 INDIA WILL HAVE 104 TIER II, 331 TIER III AND IV CITIES AND ONLY 155 TIER I CITIES. THIS SHOWS SMALLER TOWNS AND RURAL AREAS IN INDIA ARE ON ITS WAY TO TRANSFORM INTO SMART CITIES. AFTER 2030 THIS 331 TIER III AND IV CITIES WILL START TRANSFORMING INTO TIER II CITIES AND 104 TIER II CITIES WILL TRANSFORM INTO TIER I CITIES DUE TO INCREASE IN PER CAPITA INCOME AND TECHNOLOGIES. THIS CLEARLY SHOWS TILE SECTOR WILL SEE ONE OF THE BIGGEST BOOM.

 

7 NOVEMBER, 2022

TATA GROUP IS PLANNING TO OPEN AT LEAST 20 BEAUTY TECH STORES WHERE IT WILL USE TO VIRTUAL MAKEUP KIOSKS AND DIGITAL SKIN TESTS TO GET YOUNG, AFFLUENT SHOPPERS TO BUY PREMIUM COSMETIC PRODUCTS. TATA IS IN TALKS IN MORE THAN TWO DOZEN COMPANIES TO SUPPLY EXCLUSIVE BEAUTY PRODUCTS TO THE NEW STORES.

 

6 NOVEMBER, 2022

BOEING WILL REORGANIZED ITS DEFENCE AND SPACE BUSINESS INTO FOUR UNITS, VERTICAL LIFT, MOBILITY, SURVEILLANCE AND BOMBERS, AIR DOMINANCE WHICH INCLUDES ITS F-15 JET FIGHTERS AND MQ 25 DRONES AND SPACE, INTELLIGENCE AND WEAPONS.

 

5 NOVEMBER, 2022

WAS IN TRAIN. SUDDENLY MY EYES WENT ON DOORS OF TRAIN. IT WAS WRITTEN MANUFACTURED BY JBM INDUSTRIES. THEN I RESEARCHED ABOUT IT GOT TO KNEW THAT JBM GROUP PRODUCES ALL DOORS OF LHB COACHES. IT HAS MONTHLY CAPACITY OF 875 DOORS. EARLIER I WAS NOT AWARE THAT JBM GROUP PRODUCES DOORS OF INDIAN RAILWAYS. LIKE THIS WAY THERE ARE MANY SUCH THINGS AROUND US WHICH WE SEE EVERYDAY BUT WE ARE NOT AWARE THAT WHO MANUFACTURERS IT AND IS IT LISTED OR NOT. INDIAN GOVERNMENT IS FOCUSING ON RAILWAYS BY INTRODUCING NEW TYPES OF TRAINS AND MODERNISING IT. ALL NEW TRAINS WILL REQUIRED DOORS. IS IT AN OPPORTUNITY FOR JBM INDUSTRIES ?

 

4 NOVEMBER, 2022

INDIA’S TILE PRODUCTION WILL REACH AROUND 2 BILLION SQ METERS BY 2025 FROM 1,320 MILLION SQ METERS IN 2021. ALMOST HALF OF THE INDIA’S TILE PRODUCTION WILL BE EXPORTED SO BY 2025 INDIA WILL BECOME WORLD’S LARGEST TILE EXPORTER.

 

3 NOVEMBER, 2022

BY 2030 INDIA WILL HAVE 77 NEW CITIES. THIS WILL BE THE MAIN GROWTH FACTOR FOR TILE SECTOR.

 

2 NOVEMBER, 2022

GLOBAL CENTRAL BANKS BOUGHT 400 METRIC TONS OF GOLD IN THIRD QUARTER. CENTRAL BANKS HAVE BOUGHT MORE GOLD IN 2022 THAN IN ANY YEAR SINCE 1967.

 

1 NOVEMBER, 2022

I AM SEEING A HUGE DECENTRALIZATION (DECREASE IN USE OF DOLLAR FOR TRADE) OF DOLLAR IN COMING 7-10 YEARS. DECENTRALIZATION OF DOLLAR HAVE JUST STARTED.

 

31 OCTOBER, 2022

AROUND 89% OF TOTAL REVENUE OF SOMANY CERAMICS COMES FROM TILES.

 

30 OCTOBER, 2022

SOMANY CERAMICS REVENUE FROM TIER II, III AND IV CITIES AND TOWNS INCREASED BY 40%.

 

29 OCTOBER, 2022

LIVE EXPERIENCED THAT EACH AND EVERY ICE CREAM SHOP IN SAURASHTRA HAS PRODUCTS OF SHEETAL COOL PRODUCTS. PLUS COMPANY HAS THEIR OWN RETAIL OUTLETS. COMPANY EVEN HAS THEIR OUTLETS ON RAILWAY STATIONS AND BUS STANDS OF SAURASHTRA. DUE TO THIS PRODUCTS OF VADILAL AND HAVMORE ICE CREAM ARE NOT VISIBLE IN SAURASHTRA. THIS SHOWS COMPANY’S PURE AIM IS TO CAPTURE TIER II, III AND IV TOWNS AND SMALL RURAL AREAS. NEXT GROWTH OF CONSUMPTION IN INDIA WILL COME FROM SMALLER CITIES AND TOWNS. IF SHEETAL COOL PRODUCTS USES THEIR SAME DISTRIBUTION CHANNEL WHICH THEY USES IN SUARASHTRA TO WHOLE PAN INDIA THEN DEFINITELY GREAT WEALTH CAN BE GENERATED IN IT. 

 

28 OCTOBER, 2022

ASIA CONSTITUTES 74% OF GLOBAL TILE PRODUCTION. TILE PRODUCTION IN ASIA GREW BY 2.8% TO 11.9 BILLION SQ METERS.

 

27 OCTOBER, 2022

WORLD’S TILE PRODUCTION IS EXPECTED TO REACH 20 BILLION SQ METERS BY 2026 FROM AROUND 17 BILLION SQ METERS AT PRESENT.

 

26 OCTOBER, 2022

BATTERY RECYCLING COMPANY ATTERO RECYCLING COMPANY PLANS IPO IN 2025. COMPANY PLANS TO INCREASE ITS ANNUAL REVENUE TO $2 BILLION. COMPANY PLANS TO BUILD A 15,000 METRIC TONNE LITHIUM ION BATTERY RECYCLING PLANT IN TELANGANA WITH AN INVESTMENT OF RS 600 CRORE. ITS CURRENT CAPACITY IS 4,500 METRIC TONNE. COMPANY IS PUTTING TOGETHER AROUND 3,00,000 TONNE PER ANNUM CAPACITY FOR LITHIUM BATTERIES IN NEXT 5 YEARS. AROUND 35% OF IT IS BEING SET UP IN EUROPE, 35% IN U.S, 20% IN INDIA AND 10% IN ASIA. FOR THIS TOTAL INVESTMENT IS AROUND RS 7,500 CR OF WHICH INDIAN CAPACITY IS SUPPOSED TO BE 60,000 TONNE. ITS EUROPEAN FACILITY WILL BE FUNCTIONAL IN CURRENT QUARTER AND ITS FACILITY IN U.S WILL BE FUNCTIONAL IN THIRD QUARTER OF NEXT FINANCIAL YEAR.

 

25 OCTOBER, 2022

OLECTRA GREENTECH BUSES HAS RAN 8.5 CRORE KM TILL TODAY. TATA AND ASHOKLEYLAND BUSES COMBINED HAVE NOT EVEN RUN HALF THE KILOMETERS WHICH HAVE BEEN RUN BY OLECTRA E-BUSES.

 

24 OCTOBER, 2022

HAPPY DIWALI.

 

23 OCTOBER, 2022

CHINA IS WORLD’S LARGEST TILE MANUFACTURER. IT CONTRIBUTES 49% OF WORLD’S TILE PRODUCTION. INDIA IS SECOND LARGEST TILE MANUFACTURER. BUT THEN TOO IT CONTRIBUTES ONLY 8.2% OF WORLD’S TILE PRODUCTION. THIS SHOWS HOW HIGHLY UNDERVALUED INDIA IS IN TILE PRODUCTION. I AM SEEING INDIA’S CONTRIBUTION TO WORLD’S TILE PRODUCTION GOING UP FROM 8.2% AT PRESENT TO 25-30% IN COMING 5-6 YEARS.

 

22 OCTOBER, 2022

THIS WINTER EUROPE WILL FACE SHORTAGE OF 270 TERAWATTS AN HOUR WORTH OF NATURAL GAS.

 

21 OCTOBER, 2022

ROYAL CARIBBEAN SAID IN 2023 CRUISE BOOKING MADE FROM JULY THROUGH SEPTEMBER DOUBLED FROM PRIOR QUARTER.

 

20 OCTOBER, 2022

AROUND 80% OF TOTAL NEW DISTRIBUTORS OF SOMANY CERAMICS WILL BE IN TIER II, III AND IV CITIES IN COMING YEARS.

 

19 OCTOBER, 2022

IN U.S THERE IS DEMAND SUPPLY MISS MATCH IN WAREHOUSE SPACE. WAREHOUSE SPACES HAVE EXCEED THE DEMAND. THAT’S WHY WE MAY SEE FALL IN SOME WAREHOUSE OR LOGISTICS RELATED STOCKS IN U.S .

 

18 OCTOBER, 2022

BIGGEST WEALTH IN DEFENCE SECTOR WILL BE MADE IN SMALLER COMPANIES SUPPLYING RAW MATERIALS OR SUPPLYING SMALLER PARTS REQUIRED IN DEFENCE TO BIGGER DEFENCE PLAYER. 

 

17 OCTOBER, 2022

WORLD’S BIGGEST DEFENCE COMPANY LOCKHEED MARTIN IS FACING SUPPLY CHAIN ISSUE THAT’S WHY COMPANY WILL NOT HAVE GROWTH FOR NEXT TWO YEARS. IT HAS ORDER BOOK OF AROUND $140 BILLION. INDIA HAS POTENTIAL TO HAVE INDIAN DEFENCE COMPANIES WHICH ARE NEXT OR WILL BE BIGGER THAN LOCKHEED MARTIN IN COMING YEARS.

 

16 OCTOBER, 2022

AVERAGE ANNUAL AMOUNT SPENT PER CHILD ON TOYS: UK $438, U.S : $371, FRANCE: $358, GERMANY: $336, RUSSIA: $300, AND AVERAGE ANNUAL AMOUNT SPENT PER CHILD ON TOYS IN INDIA IS JUST $140.

 

15 OCTOBER, 2022

TATA POWER ANNOUNCED RS 75,000 CR INVESTMENTS FOR RENEWABLE ENERGY IN NEXT FIVE YEARS AND RELIANCE ALSO ANNOUNCED RS 77,000 CR INVESTMENTS FOR RENEWABLE ENERGY IN NEXT THREE YEARS. BUT THEN TOO RELIANCE IS IN FOCUS OR LIMELIGHT AND TATA POWER IS NOT INTO LIMELIGHT. I THINK TATA POWER IS HIGHLY UNDERVALUED COMPANY FOR RENEWABLE ENERGY. PEOPLE ARE TAKING IT VERY LIGHTLY. 

 

14 OCTOBER, 2022

INDIA’S SHARE OF SPENDING BY THOSE EARNING RS ONE MILLION A YEAR OR MORE THAN THAT WILL GROW TO ABOUT HALF OF HOUSEHOLD CONSUMPTION IN 2030 FROM 33% IN 2019. INDIA IS CHANGING FROM UTILITARIAN ECONOMY TO CONSUMPTION ECONOMY. CONSUMPTION WILL BE THE BIGGEST THEME FOR UPCOMING DECADE. 

 

13 OCTOBER, 2022

THERE ARE MANY SMALL REGIONAL CEMENT PLAYERS IN SOUTH INDIA.

 

12 OCTOBER, 2022

WORLD MAY FACE SHORTAGE OF AIRCRAFTS DUE TO PRODUCTION DELAYS.

 

11 OCTOBER, 2022

WORLD WILL REQUIRE AROUND 39,490 NEW PASSENGER AIRCRAFT IN NEXT 15-20 YEARS, OUT OF THESE 31,620 SINGLE AISLE AIRCRAFT AND 7,870 WIDE BODY NEW AIRCRAFTS WILL BE REQUIRED. 2,440 NEW FREIGHT AIRCRAFTS WILL BE REQUIRED. ONLY TWO MANUFACTURERS IN THIS SECTOR. BOEING AND AIRBUS. I WILL GO WITH BOEING. 

 

10 OCTOBER, 2022

PATENTS OF DRUGS WORTH $200 BILLION WILL EXPIRE IN COMING YEARS. CAN WE SEE BOOM IN PHARMA SECTOR ?

 

9 OCTOBER, 2022

BROOKFIELD RENEWABLES AND CAMECO BUYS NUCLEAR POWER SERVICE FROM WESTINGHOUSE ELECTRIC COMPANY. THE DEAL IS VALUED AT $7.88 BILLION. URANIUM IS MUST WATCH FOR THIS SECTOR.

 

8 OCTOBER, 2022

INDIA’S TILE EXPORTS REACHED EURO 1,350 MILLION, EQUIVALENT TO AN AVERAGE SELLING PRICE OF EURO 3.1 PER SQ METERS WHICH IS ONE OF THE LOWEST VALUES AS COMPARED TO OTHER TILE EXPORTING COUNTRIES.

 

7 OCTOBER, 2022

ONLY 52% OF HOUSEHOLDS IN INDIA ARE IN GOOD CONDITIONS REST 48% HOUSEHOLDS ARE LIVING IN SMALLER THAN ONE ROOM HOME. HUGE OPPORTUNITY FOR TILE INDUSTRY. SINCE THIS 48% HOUSEHOLDS LIVING IN SINGLE ROOM HOUSE WILL GET CONVERTED INTO BIGGER HOUSES DUE TO INCREASE IN PER CAPITA INCOME AND DESIRE TO OWN A BEAUTIFUL HOME.

 

6 OCTOBER, 2022

TEXTILE SECTOR IS THE FIRST SECTOR THAT HAS STARTED FACING EFFECTS OF RECESSION BECAUSE TEXTILE EXPORTS FROM INDIA HAS SLOWED DOWN DUE TO SLOW DOWN IN WESTERN COUNTRIES.

 

5 OCTOBER, 2022

RISING GAS PRICES IS THE MAIN REASON FOR LOWER PROFIT MARGINS OF TILE SECTOR. GAS PRICES WILL NOT REMAIN HIGH WHOLE LIFE. ITS JUST MATTER OF TIME. IN FACT ITS AN OPPORTUNITY. WE CAN GET SHARES AT LOWER LEVELS.

 

4 OCTOBER, 2022

CHINA IS DE-GROWING IN TILE SECTOR. CHINA’S TILE MANUFACTURING HAS REDUCED FROM 10,265 MILLION SQ METERS IN 2016 TO 8,474 MILLION SQ METERS IN 2020. AND ON OTHER SIDE INDIA’S TILE MANUFACTURING HAS INCREASED FROM 955 MILLION SQ METERS IN 2016 TO 1,320 MILLION SQ METERS IN 2020. THIS CLEARLY SHOWS INDIA IS TAKING AWAY TILE MANUFACTURING OF CHINA. SHIFTING OF MANUFACTURING OF TILE FROM CHINA TO INDIA HAS JUST STARTED. LONG WAY TO GO. 

 

3 OCTOBER, 2022

CARGO SHIP OWNERS ARE CANCELLING MANY OF SAILINGS DUE TO LOW DEMAND CAUSED BY SLOWDOWN. TRANS PACIFIC SHIPPING RATES HAVE REDUCED BY AROUND 75%. GLOBAL TRANSPORTATION INDUSTRY IS FACING WEAKER DEMAND AS BIG RETAILERS ARE CANCELLING ORDERS WITH VENDORS TO SET UP EFFORT TO REDUCE INVENTORIES. FEDEX SAID IT IS PLANNING TO CANCEL FLIGHTS AND PARK CARGO PLANES BECAUSE OF SHARP DROP IN SHIPPING VOLUMES. NIKE IS SITTING WITH 65% MORE INVENTORIES IN NORTH AMERICA THAN A YEAR EARLIER. CARGO CARRIERS ARE ALSO CANCELLING SHIPS IN KEY ROUTE ASIA TO EUROPE. DAILY FREIGHT RATES HAVE CAME DOWN TO $3,900 FROM $19,000 IN 2021 TO TRANSPORT CONTAINER ACROSS PACIFIC. 

 

2 OCTOBER, 2022

INDIA’S HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCE MARKET IS VALUED AT $68.75 BILLION AS COMPARED TO $139.50 BILLION OF CHINA. VOLUME OF INDIA’S HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCE MARKET IS EXPECTED TO BE 523 MILLION PIECES BY 2027. THE AVERAGE VOLUME PER PERSON OF HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES IS JUST 0.3 PIECES IN INDIA. MAJORITY OF SALES OF HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES COMES FROM URBAN AREAS. BUT THINGS ARE CHANGING NOW. DUE TO INCREASE IN PER CAPITA INCOME AND TECHNOLOGIES PEOPLE IN SMALLER CITIES AND TOWNS HAVE ALSO STARTED TO USE FACILITIES WHICH HELP TO REDUCE TIME CONSUMED IN DAILY ACTIVITIES. SO TIER III, IV CITIES, SMALLER TOWNS AND RURAL AREAS WHICH HAS LARGER POPULATIONS WILL NOW GET PENETRATED WITH HOME APPLIANCES. HUGE OPPORTUNITY TO GROW BECAUSE SMALLER CITIES AND TOWNS ARE VERY LESS OR NOT PENETRATED WITH HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES. BIGGEST SALES OF HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES WILL COME FROM SMALLER CITIES, TOWNS AND RURAL AREAS IN COMING YEARS.

 

1 OCTOBER, 2022

RURAL, TIER II, III, IV AND SMALLER TOWNS CONTRIBUTED OVER 70% OF ASIAN GRANITO SALES. IN COMING DECADE BIGGEST CONSUMPTION WILL COME FROM TIER II, III, IV SMALLER TOWNS AND RURAL AREAS. 

 

30 SEPTEMBER, 2022

INSTACART GENERATED $300 MILLION FROM ADS IN 2020 AND PLANS TO GENERATE $1 BILLION FROM ADS IN NEXT YEAR. BY END OF THIS YEAR INSTACART WILL GENERATE 40% OF ITS REVENUE FROM ADS.

 

29 SEPTEMBER, 2022

PEOPLE AGED 18 YEARS AND ABOVE ACCOUNTED FOR 14% OF TOTAL TOY SALES IN U.S

 

28 SEPTEMBER, 2022

ASIAN GRANITO HAS TOTAL INSTALLED PRODUCTION CAPACITY OF 34.5 MILLION SQUARE METERS PER ANNUM AND ITS HAS DAILY TILE MANUFACTURING CAPACITY OF 93,500 SQUARE METERS.

 

27 SEPTEMBER, 2022

GUJARAT ACCOUNTED FOR 30% OF INDIA’S TOTAL EXPORT IN 2021-22 AT $127 BILLION, FOLLOWED BY MAHARASHTRA AT $73 BILLION AND TAMIL NADU AT $35 BILLION.

 

26 SEPTEMBER, 2022

BYD TO LAUNCH CARS IN EUROPE.

 

25 SEPTEMBER, 2022

AROUND 40% OF COTTON PLANTED AREAS IN U.S WILL NOT BE HARVESTED BECAUSE OF DROUGHT. BUT THAN TOO PRICES OF COTTON DECLINED DUE TO LOW DEMAND FROM APPAREL MANUFACTURER. BUT ON OTHER SIDE CHINA IS SEEING DECREASE IN IMPORTS OF COTTON AND INCREASE IN UNSOLD INVENTORIES. CHINA IMPORTED JUST 1.7 MILLION METRIC TONNES OF RAW COTTON WHICH IS 60% DOWN FROM PREVIOUS YEAR. CHINA HAS AROUND 3 MILLION METRIC TONNES OF UNSOLD INVENTORIES OF COTTON. FLOODS IN PAKISTAN HAS LED TO DECREASE IN COTTON PRODUCTION BY 1 MILLION 480 POUND BALES. DEMAND OF COTTON WILL NOT REMAIN DOWN WHOLE LIFE. WHENEVER THE DEMAND WILL INCREASE, AT THAT TIME THERE WILL BE SHORTAGE OF COTTON DUE TO MISMATCH OF SUPPLY CAUSED BY DROUGHTS IN U.S AND FLOODS IN PAKISTAN.

 

24 SEPTEMBER, 2022

GOVERNMENT OF MAHARASHTRA WILL INSTALL TWO LAKH SOLAR AGRICULTURAL PUMPS. OPPORTUNITY FOR TATA POWER.

 

23 SEPTEMBER, 2022

INDIA’S BATTERY RECYCLING MARKET IS LARGE DRIVEN FROM CONSUMER ELECTRONICS SECTOR WHICH HAS AVERAGE 25,000 TONNES A YEAR. AS VOLUME GROWS IN AUTO SECTOR THE CURRENT DEMAND OF 800 GW PER HR OF BATTERY CAPACITY IS SET TO INCREASE TO 2,500 GW. OPPORTUNITY OF BATTERY RECYCLING WILL GROW BY OVER 60-70 TIMES IN COMING YEAR.

 

22 SEPTEMBER, 2022

FROM 2021 TO 2025, THE WORLD CERAMIC TILE MARKET IS PROJECTED TO GROW AT AN AVERAGE ANNUAL RATE OF 5% IN TERMS OF PRODUCTION, AN ADDITIONAL 4.5 BILLION SQUARE METERS BY 2025. INDIA’S TILE PRODUCTION VOLUME INCREASED FROM 691 MILLION SQ METERS IN 2012 TO 1,320 SQ METERS IN 2020. CHINA IS WORLD’S LARGEST TILE EXPORTER, EXPORTING AROUND 622 MILLION SQ METERS ANNUALLY. INDIA IS WORLD’S SECOND LARGEST TILE EXPORTER, EXPORTING AROUND 437 SQ METERS. CAN INDIA OVERTAKE CHINA TO BECOME WORLD’S LARGEST TILE EXPORTERS ?

 

21 SEPTEMBER, 2022

ELECTRIC BUS MAKER ALL SET TO GET $3.5 BILLION BUSINESS OPPORTUNITY.

 

20 SEPTEMBER, 2022

IN INDIA EARLIER ONLY ONE PERSON IN FAMILY WAS EARNING AND OTHER FAMILY MEMBERS WERE DEPENDENT ON HIM. SO DUE TO THIS EARLIER CONSUMPTION POWER WAS LOW. BUT NOW TREND HAS STARTED TO CHANGE. ALMOST ALL MEMBERS IN FAMILY EARNS EXCEPT 1 OR 2 MEMBER. THIS WILL LED TO TREMENDOUS INCREASE IN CONSUMPTION POWER. INDIA IS CHANGING FROM UTILITARIAN ECONOMY TO CONSUMPTION ECONOMY. LOOK FOR COMPANIES WHICH ARE DIRECTLY RELATED TO CONSUMPTION.

 

19 SEPTEMBER, 2022

GRAVITA INDIA I THINK IS THE ONLY LISTED PLAYER IN BATTERY RECYCLING SPACE. IT HAS MARKET CAP OF JUST RS 2,300 CRORE. ITS PE IS 14.29. ITS SALES INCREASED FROM RS 1,017 CRORE IN 2018 TO RS 2,215 CRORE IN 2022. ITS NET PROFIT INCREASED FROM RS 47 CRORE IN 2018 TO RS 148 CRORE IN 2022. ITS EPS INCREASED FROM 6.42 IN 2018 TO 20.62 IN 2022. ITS ROE INCREASED FROM 23.24 IN 2018 TO 36.03 IN 2022. ITS DEBT TO EQUITY REDUCED FROM 1.19 IN 2018 TO 1 IN 2022.

 

18 SEPTEMBER, 2022

CAN BOEING BE A TURNAROUND STORY ? CMP $145.94.

 

17 SEPTEMBER, 2022

HEAVY RAINFALL IN AUSTRALIA HAS CLOSED MANY COAL MINES. THIS WILL LED TO INCREASE IN PRICE OF COAL GLOBALLY.

 

16 SEPTEMBER, 2022

CURRENT PRICE OF COPPER DOES NOT SUPPORT THE EXPANSION COST OF MINES. THAT’S WHY MANY MINING COMPANIES HAVE CUT THEIR COPPER EXPANSION PLAN. BUT PRICES WILL NOT REMAIN LOW WHOLE LIFE. DEMAND OF COPPER IN BATTERIES WILL GO ON INCREASING. WHEN IT WILL START INCREASING AT RAPID PACE AT THAT TIME COPPER WILL BE IN SHORTAGE SINCE MINING ACTIVITIES HAVE BEEN CLOSED AT PRESENT. SO IN COMING YEARS WE MIGHT SEE DEMAND SUPPLY GAP IN COPPER AND THAT WILL INCREASE THE PRICE OF COPPER. WE MIGHT SEE SHORTAGE OF 10-15 MILLION TONNES OF COPPER IN COMING YEARS.

 

15 SEPTEMBER, 2022

I MAY BE WRONG ALSO, BUT I THINK IN NEXT 5-7 YEARS WHOLESALE OR DISTRIBUTION CHAIN WILL BE OUT FROM BUSINESS CHANNEL OR BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT. IT WILL BE FROM MANUFACTURER TO RETAILER OR FROM RETAILER TO DIRECT CONSUMER.

 

14 SEPTEMBER, 2022

MANY TIER II, III AND IV CITIES WILL GET TRANSFORM OR CONVERT INTO BIGGER CITIES AND RURAL AREAS WILL GET CONVERT INTO TIER III AND IV CITIES IN COMING YEARS BECAUSE OF INCREASE IN PER CAPITA INCOME AND USAGE OF TECHNOLOGY. THIS WILL BE THE MAIN GROWTH FACTOR FOR TILE SECTOR.

 

13 SEPTEMBER, 2022

GUJARAT ACCOUNTED FOR 30% OF INDIA’S TOTAL EXPORT IN 2021-22 AT $127 BILLION, FOLLOWED BY MAHARASHTRA AT $73 BILLION AND TAMIL NADU AT $35 BILLION.

 

12 SEPTEMBER, 2022

RECORD DROUGHT ACROSS THE GLOBE THIS YEAR HAS DRIED UP RIVERS, LAKES AND RESERVOIRS WHICH HAS DESTROYED THE WORLD’S LARGEST RENEWABLE ENERGY HYDROELECTRICITY. THIS HAS LED TO CLOSURE OF MANY FACTORIES AROUND THE WORLD.

 

11 SEPTEMBER, 2022

DUE TO DROUGHT IN MANY PARTS OF U.S RICE PRODUCTION IS LOWEST SINCE 1950 IN U.S

 

10 SEPTEMBER, 2022

PER CAPITA SPENDING OF INDIAN’S ON BEAUTY PRODUCTS AND COSMETIC PRODUCTS IS RS 1,000-1,200 AND ON OTHER SIDE U.S PER CAPITA SPENDING ON BEAUTY AND COSMETIC PRODUCTS IS $2,000. THIS SHOWS INDIA’S BEAUTY AND COSMETIC PRODUCT SECTOR IS HIGHLY UNDERVALUED. IT HAS HUGE HUGE POTENTIAL TO GROW. RECENTLY TATA CLIQ IS PLANNING TO OPEN OFFLINE BEAUTY AND COSMETIC PRODUCT STORES.

 

9 SEPTEMBER, 2022

U.S BANK DEPOSITS FALLS BY $370 BILLION.

 

8 SEPTEMBER, 2022

COFFEE: PER PERSON OF FINLAND DRINKS 4 CUPS OF COFFEE PER DAY, PER PERSON OF NORWAY DRINKS 3 CUPS OF COFFEE PER DAY, IN U.S ITS 3 CUPS PER DAY, IN DENMARK ITS 2 CUPS PER DAY, IN ICELAND ITS 2 CUPS PER DAY, IN NETHERLANDS ITS 1.9 CUPS PER DAY, IN SWEDEN ITS 1.8 CUPS PER DAY, IN SWITZERLAND ITS 1.6 CUPS PER DAY, IN BELGIUM ITS 1.5 CUPS PER DAY, IN LUXEMBOURG ITS 1.4 CUPS PER DAY AND IN INDIA ITS JUST 0.04 CUPS PER DAY. JUST IMAGINE HOW UNDERVALUED IT IS. BY 2030 INDIA WILL HAVE WORLD’S YOUNGEST POPULATION. AND MOSTLY AT THAT TIME TREND WILL CHANGE FROM TEA TO COFFEE. COFFEE CAFES WILL HAVE HUGE OPPORTUNITY TO CREATE WEALTH IN COFFEE SECTOR. AND INVESTORS WILL HAVE HUGE OPPORTUNITY TO CREATE WEALTH BY INVESTING IN IT. 

 

7 SEPTEMBER, 2022

BATTERY RECYCLING BUSINESS WILL BE VERY BIG IN COMING YEARS.

 

6 SEPTEMBER, 2022

CHINA INSTALLED HIGHEST NUMBER OF ROBOTS IN ITS FACTORIES AS COMPARED TO OTHER COUNTRIES. CHINA IS MOVING TOWARDS AUTOMATION.

 

5 SEPTEMBER, 2022

INDIA’S PER CAPITA CEMENT CONSUMPTION IS 242 KG AS COMPARED TO 1,600 KG OF CHINA. 

 

4 SEPTEMBER, 2022

IN INDIA EARLIER ONLY ONE PERSON IN FAMILY WAS EARNING AND OTHER FAMILY MEMBERS WERE DEPENDENT ON HIM. SO SUE TO THIS EARLIER CONSUMPTION POWER WAS LOW. BUT NOW TREND HAS STARTED TO CHANGE. ALMOST ALL MEMBERS IN FAMILY EARNS EXCEPT 1 OR 2 MEMBER. THIS WILL LED TO TREMENDOUS INCREASE IN CONSUMPTION POWER. INDIA IS CHANGING FROM UTILITARIAN ECONOMY TO CONSUMPTION ECONOMY. LOOK FOR COMPANIES WHICH ARE DIRECTLY RELATED TO CONSUMPTION. 

 

3 SEPTEMBER, 2022

CAN INCREASE IN CEMENT PRICE AND INCREASE IN REPO RATES AFFECT HOUSING SECTOR ?

 

2 SEPTEMBER, 2022

WORST MISTAKE WE CAN MAKE IN STOCK MARKET IS TO BUY OR SELL ON BASIS OF CURRENT HEADLINES.

 

1 SEPTEMBER, 2022

WITH A WONDERFUL BUSINESS WE CAN FIGURE OUT WHAT WILL HAPPEN, WE CAN’T FIGURE OUT WHEN IT WILL HAPPEN. WE DON’T WANT TO FOCUS ON WHEN , WE WANT TO FOCUS ON WHAT. IF WE ARE RIGHT ABOUT WHAT, WE DON’T HAVE TO WORRY ABOUT WHEN, 

 

31 AUGUST, 2022

SHIPPING RATES DECLINE BY 60%. 

 

30 AUGUST, 2022

WARREN BUFFETT IS SELLING SHARES OF BYD. 

 

29 AUGUST, 2022

EUROPEAN COUNTRIES PLANS TO MAKE LAW TO USE SINGLE FIBRE IN MANUFACTURING CLOTHES SO THAT THEY CAN BE EASILY RECYCLED. THEY PLAN TO PUT FAST FASHION OUT OF FASHION BY 2030. THEIR MAIN AIM IS TO RECYCLE OLD CLOTHES TO MAKE NEW CLOTHES AND THIS IS POSSIBLE ONLY BY USING SINGLE FIBRE FOR MANUFACTURING CLOTHES. ADIDAS HAS RECENTLY LAUNCHED SINGLE FIBRE CLOTHES, SHOES, T-SHIRTS, COATS AND PANTS UNDER BRAND LABEL MADE TO BE REMADE. CAN THIS MOTIVE OF RECYCLING CLOTHES CAN AFFECT THE GROWTH OF TEXTILE SECTOR IN FUTURE ?

 

28 AUGUST, 2022

INDIA HAS LESS THAN ONE BUS PER EVERY 1,000 CITIZENS. COUNTRIES LIKE BRAZIL, MEXICO, HAS 3 BUS PER 1,000 CITIZENS. INDIA WILL REQUIRE AT LEAST 2 LAKH NEW BUSES TO BRING THE GAP DOWN OF NUMBER OF BUSES PER EVERY 1,000 CITIZEN COMPARED TO OTHER COUNTRIES. AT PRESENT INDIA HAS 2.5 LAKH OLD DIESEL BUSES WHICH WILL GET REPLACED BY E-BUSES. PLUS NEW 2 LAKH BUSES WILL BE REQUIRED THAT WILL ALSO BE E-BUSES. SO TOTAL 4.5 LAKH NEW E-BUSES WILL BE REQUIRED. OPPORTUNITY FOR E-BUS MANUFACTURERS.

 

27 AUGUST, 2022

E-COMMERCE CHANGED THE WHOLE BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT OF B2C SEGMENT. SAME REVOLUTION WILL BE BROUGHT IN B2B SEGMENT BY E-COMMERCE. 

 

26 AUGUST, 2022

VENEZUELA IS PLAYING AN IMPORTANT ROLE TO INDIAN CEMENT COMPANIES BY EXPORTING PET COKE AT DISCOUNTED RATES.

 

25 AUGUST, 2022

TATA POWER AIMS TO INCREASE ITS PROFIT BY 3 TIMES IN NEXT FIVE YEARS. COMPANY AIMS TO INCREASE ITS SOLAR ROOFTOP REVENUE BY MORE THAN 6 TIMES AND SOLAR WATER PUMP REVENUES BY MORE THAN 8 TIMES. 

 

24 AUGUST, 2022

CALIFORNIA BANS SALES OF GASOLINE CARS BY 2035.

 

23 AUGUST, 2022

IN COMING YEARS EV CHARGING COMPANIES WILL GENERATE SECOND SOURCE OF INCOME FROM ADVERTISEMENTS. THERE CAN BE ADVERTISEMENT ON EVERY CHARGING BOARD. ADVERTISEMENT WILL SHARE AROUND 15-25% OF OVERALL REVENUE FOR CHARGING COMPANIES.

 

22 AUGUST, 2022

EUROPE IS FACING SHORTAGE OF TOILET PAPER OR TISSUE PAPER BECAUSE COMPANIES ARE FORCED TO CUT PRODUCTION DUE TO POWER SHORTAGE. OPPORTUNITY FOR INDIAN TISSUE PAPER COMPANIES TO EXPORT IT. ORIENT PAPER HAS 1,00,000 MT PRODUCTION CAPACITY OF TOILET PAPER. IT IS LEADING TISSUE PAPER MANUFACTURER IN INDIA.

 

21 AUGUST, 2022

WILL LA PINO’Z PIZZA GET LISTED IN COMING YEARS ? LA PINO’Z PIZZA CAN BE A COMPETITOR TO JUBILANT FOOD WORKS IN FUTURE.

 

20 AUGUST, 2022

NUVACO IS MERGING ITS CEMENT BRANDS DURAGUARD, DOUBLE BULL, PREMIUM SLAG UNDER ITS SINGLE BRAND. IS NUVACO MERGING ITS BRANDS TO MAKE IT SIMPLE TO SELL ITS CEMENT BUSINESS TO ONE SINGLE PLAYER SO THAT IT REQUIRES LESS LEGAL PERMISSIONS AND MAKE IT SIMPLE FOR THE BUYER ?

 

19 AUGUST, 2022

STREAMING SERVICES OVERTAKE CABLE TV IN U.S

 

18 AUGUST, 2022

HOTEL INDUSTRY AND RESTAURANTS: EARLIER WHEN PEOPLE USED TO GO FOR PILGRIMAGE PLACES THEY USE TO STAY IN DHARAMSHALAS BECAUSE OF LOW CAPITA INCOME AND NO PROPER INFRASTRUCTURE. BUT NOW THINGS ARE CHANGING. PEOPLE WANT GOOD HOTES TO STAY WHEN THEY GO FOR PILGRIMAGE DUE TO INCREASE IN CAPITA INCOME, AWARENESS OF GOOD BRANDS WHICH PROVIDES GOOD SERVICES EVEN AT PILGRIMAGE PLACES SO THAT PEOPLE CAN HAVE HASSLE FREE PILGRIM TOUR. THIS WILL ALSO CHANGE RESTAURANT SERVICES IN PILGRIMAGE PLACES. EARLIER PEOPLE USE TO EAT AT DHABA’S WHILE GOING FOR PILGRIMAGE TOURS. BUT NOW THINGS HAVE CHANGED. PEOPLE WANT GOOD RESTAURANTS WHICH ARE SAFE IN HYGIENE. IN FACT THERE IS GREAT CHANGE IN CONSUMER BEHAVIOUR IN PILGRIMAGE TOURISM. PEOPLE WANT GOOD AND LUXURIOUS SERVICE FOR PILGRIMAGE TOURISM. ITS LIKE DARSHAN KE SATH GHUMNA BHI HOJAAYEGA. SO LISTED HOTEL BRANDS AND RESTAURANT CHAINS WILL SEE A HUGE DEMAND OR OPPORTUNITY TO EXPAND THEIR OPERATIONS AT PILGRIMAGE PLACES. RELIGIOUS TOURISM MARKET SIZE IN INDIA WAS VALUED AT $1,071 MILLION IN 2020 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH $1,704 MILLION BY 2026. 

 

17 AUGUST, 2022

INDIA WILL HAVE 1 BILLION SMARTPHONES BY 2026 WITH RURAL AHEAD DRIVING THE SALES OF SMARTPHONES . THE GROWTH OF SMARTPHONES IN RURAL AREAS WILL GROW AT A CAGR OF 6% COMPARED TO 2.5% IN URBAN AREAS. JUST IMAGINE THE BRAND AWARENESS IN RURAL AREAS BY 2026. THIS WILL LED TO INCREASE IN CONSUMPTION. THIS IS THE MAIN REASON WHY COMPANIES ARE EXPANDING IN SMALLER CITIES AND TOWNS.

 

16 AUGUST, 2022

COTTON PROCUREMENT MAY REMAIN SLOW. CARRY OVER STOCK TO THE NEXT COTTON SEASON MAY BE LOWEST IN MANY YEARS. THIS WILL AFFECT TEXTILE INDUSTRIES.

 

15 AUGUST, 2022

HAPPY INDEPENDENCE DAY.

 

14 AUGUST, 2022

INDIA WILL REACH $10 TRILLION ECONOMY BY 2035. THIS WILL INCREASE PER CAPITA INCOME. JUST IMAGINE THE POWER OF CONSUMPTION FROM $3 TRILLION IN 2022 TO $10 TRILLION IN 2035. DON’T PUT MONEY IN FD OR REAL ESTATE, INVEST IN MARKET BIGGEST MONEY WILL BE MADE. INDIA INDIA INDIA.

 

13 AUGUST, 2022

INDIAN RETAIL MARKET IS EXPECTED TO GROW FROM $705 BILLION IN 2020 TO $1884 BILLION IN 2030. OUT OF THIS LIFESTYLE SEGMENT CONTRIBUTES ONLY 15% OF TOTAL INDIAN RETAIL MARKET.

 

12 AUGUST, 2022

MUSK SELLS 7.9 MILLION SHARES OF TESLA.

 

11 AUGUST, 2022

U.S BRINGS TAX ON COMPANIES FOR BUY BACK.

 

10 AUGUST, 2022

RURAL PER CAPITA CONSUMPTION OF INDIA TO GROW BY 4.5 TIMES COMPARED TO 3.5 TIMES IN URBAN INDIA. BY 2030 370 MILLION GENERATION CONSUMERS BETWEEN AGE GROUP OF 1-25 WILL HAVE GROWN UP IN INDIA WITH INTERNET, SMART PHONES AND DIGITAL MEDIA. DIGITAL INFLUENCE SPENDING IS CURRENTLY BETWEEN $47-50 BILLION A YEAR AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH $560 BILLION BY 2025. THIS WILL ACCOUNT FOR 30-35% OF ALL RETAIL SALES. BY 2026 THE NUMBER OF ONLINE SHOPPERS ARE PROJECTED TO INCREASE FROM CURRENT 15% TO 50% OF TOTAL ONLINE POPULATION. BY 2030 MIDDLE INCOME AND HIGH INCOME  HOUSE HOLD WILL DRIVE NEARLY $4 TRILLION OF INCREMENTAL SPEND. WITH MEDIAN AGE OF 31 BY 2030 VERSUS 42 IN CHINA, 40 IN U.S, INDIA WILL REMAIN ONE OF THE YOUNGEST NATIONS IN WORLD. BY 2030 ACCESS TO INTERNET WILL EXTEND TO ABOUT 1.1 BILLION INDIANS AND 9 OUT OF 10 INDIANS OVER THE AGE OF 15 WILL BE ONLINE. BY 2030 INDIA WILL HAVE NEARLY 90 MILLION NEW HOUSEHOLDS HEADED BY MILENNIALS. INDIA’S CONSUMPTION EXPENDITURE WILL REACH $6 TRILLION BY 2030. CLEAR INDICATION THAT RETAIL SECTOR WILL SEE A HUGE BOOM IN INDIA BECAUSE INDIA IS CHANGING FROM UTILITARIAN ECONOMY TO CONSUMPTION ECONOMY.

 

9 AUGUST, 2022

SOLID OXIDE CELLS ARE MORE EFFICIENT THAN OTHER TYPES OF FUEL CELLS AND ELECTROLYZERS.

 

8 AUGUST, 2022

I THINK RUPA IS IN RESTRUCTURING MODE.

 

7 AUGUST, 2022

ONLINE PLAYERS SAYS AROUND 90% OF NEW CUSTOMERS ARE FROM TIER II CITIES OR FROM BELOW TIER II CITIES. REAL CONSUMPTION IN INDIA WILL COME FROM BELOW TIER II CITIES. HIGHLY UNDERVALUED OR LOW PENETRATION PLACES.

 

6 AUGUST, 2022

MARRIOT HOTEL SAYS ITS GLOBAL OCCUPANCY RATE IS AT 68% WHICH IS JUST 7% BELOW PRE PANDEMIC LEVELS. 

 

5 AUGUST, 2022

INDIA ACCOUNTS FOR ONLY 2% OF TOTAL GLOBAL ATHLEISURE MARKET.

 

4 AUGUST, 2022

ALLSTATE INSURANCE COMPANY REPORTED LOSS OF $1.04 BILLION AS INFLATION DREW UP THE COST OF REPAIR OF CARS AND PEOPLE’S MEDICAL CARE. IT SAYS TOTAL CLAIMS ARE MORE THAN ITS TOTAL INCOME. 

 

3 AUGUST, 2022

RETAIL SALES IN TIER ONE CITIES ARE DECLINING BY 8% BUT SALES IN TIER II, III AND IV CITIES ARE INCREASING BY 10%.

 

2 AUGUST, 2022

DISNEY+ IS PLANNING TO BRING FREE OR LOWER PRICE SUBSCRIPTION MODEL BUT IT WILL BE AD SUPPORTED. DISRUPTION IN OTT SEGMENT IS COMING SOON.

 

1 AUGUST, 2022

M&M RECORDED 1,00,000 BOOKING OF NEW SCORPIO WITHIN THIRTY MINUTES. INDIA IS CHANGING FROM UTILITARIAN ECONOMY TO A CONSUMPTION ECONOMY. 

 

31 JULY, 2022

INDIAN TEXTILE AND APPAREL MARKET WAS VALUED AT $151.2 BILLION IN 2021 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH $344.1 BILLION BY 2027 GROWING AT A CAGR OF 14.8%.

 

30 JULY, 2022

INTENSE HEAT AND DRY WEATHER IN U.S HAS AFFECTED CORN. AROUND 40% OF U.S CORN PRODUCTION IS IN AREA AFFECTED BY DROUGHT. THIS WILL HAVE BAD EFFECT ON ETHANOL PRODUCTION. WILL THESE INCREASE THE PRICES OF ETHANOL ?

 

29 JULY, 2022

DUE TO SUPPLY CUT OF GAS BY GAZPROM, PRODUCTION FOR FERTILISERS AND OTHER CHEMICALS AT GERMANY’S BASF WILL FURTHER DECREASE. BENEFIT TO DEEPAK FERTILISERS. 

 

28 JULY, 2022

INDIA HAS WORLD’S LARGEST POPULATION IN THE AGE GROUP OF 0-14 YEARS WHICH ACCOUNTS FOR 27% OF TOTAL INDIAN POPULATION. THIS SHOWS HUGE OPPORTUNITY FOR KID WEAR SECTOR. INDIAN LIDS WEAR MARKET IS HIGHLY UNORGANIZED. SO UNORGANIZED TO ORGANIZED WILL PLAY WELL IN THIS. 

 

27 JULY, 2022

INDIAN INNER WEAR WAS EARLIER TAKEN INTO CONSIDERATION AS ESSENTIAL COMMODITY BUT FROM LAST 3-4 YEARS IT IS TAKEN AS INTO FASHION STATEMENT.

 

26 JULY, 2022

REVENUE OF SPOTIFY FROM SUBSCRIPTION BASE INCREASED BY 22% TO $2.5 BILLION AND ITS AD REVENUES INCREASES BY 31% TO $360 MILLION.

 

25 JULY, 2022

NESTLE ACQUIRES PET CARE COMPANY CALLED PURINA PET CARE. NESTLE SAYS PET CARE SEGMENT WILL CONTRIBUTING AROUND RS 4,000 CRORE OF REVENUE ANNUALLY IN COMING YEARS. 

 

24 JULY, 2022

CHINESE COMPANIES ARE MINING UP IRON ORE IN GUINEA’S SIMANDOU MOUNTAINS WHICH IS CONSIDERED AS THE WORLD’S LARGEST UNTAPPED DEPOSITS OF IRON ORE.

 

23 JULY, 2022

EARLIER TELECOM COMPANIES EARNED BY ONLY PROVIDING NETWORK. BUT NOE THEY HAVE STARTED GENERATING REVENUES BY ENTERING GAMING SECTOR, DIGITAL PAYMENTS, STREAMING SECTOR AND SO ON. AS THEY ALREADY HAVE SUBSCRIBERS TO THEIR NETWORK SO THEY DON’T HAVE TO SEARCH SUBSCRIBERS FOR GAMING, STREAMING, DIGITAL PAYMENTS AND OTHER RELATED SERVICES. IN FACT BY ENTERING GAMING, STREAMING, DIGITAL PAYMENTS AND OTHER RELATED SERVICES HAVE INCREASE THE INTERNET USAGE OF NETWORK COMPANIES BY THEIR SUBSCRIBERS. SO NOW TELECOM COMPANIES HAS STARTED GENERATING SECOND SOURCE OF INCOME. IN FEW YEARS THE SHARE OF SECOND SOURCE OF INCOME WILL GO ON INCREASING FOR TELECOM COMPANIES AND AT SOME POINT IT CAN GO HEAD TO HEAD AS COMPARED TO REVENUE SHARED BY TELECOM COMPANIES JUST BY PROVIDING NETWORK. 

 

22 JULY, 2022

YESTERDAY WHILE I WAS DISCUSSING RUPA WITH FEW OF MY FRIENDS THEY TOLD KYA YAAR CHADDI KI COMPANY KE PICHE PADA HAI. I TOLD THEM CHADDI ME VALUE HAI.

 

21 JULY, 2022

GAZPROM REVENUE FROM PIPELINE NATURAL GAS EXPORTS INCLUDING THOSE BEYOND EUROPE WILL DOUBLE THIS YEAR TO $100 BILLION. 

 

20 JULY, 2022

AUTOMOBILE COMPANIES PLANNING FOR RS 28,000 CRORE AS CAPEX FOR 2023. MEANS MORE CARS WILL BE PRODUCED. MORE CARS WILL INCREASE THE DEMAND OF TYRES. INCREASE IN DEMAND OF TYRES WILL INCREASE THE DEMAND OF RUBBER CHEMICALS. BENEFIT FOR NOCIL.

 

19 JULY, 2022

SAMSUNG TO INVEST $200 BILLION TO SET UP 11 PLANTS OF SEMICONDUCTOR.

 

18 JULY, 2022

U.S CRUISE COMPANIES ARE WORTH STUDYING. BIG CRUISE COMPANIES CAN SEE TURNAROUND FROM THIS YEAR. CARNIVAL AT $9.26, ROYAL CARIBBEAN AT $34.67, NORWEGIAN CRUISES AT $11.97. CARNIVAL HAS TOTAL FLEET OF 92 SHIPS AND 8 NEW SHIPS WILL BE DELIVERED TO CARNIVAL BY 2025. ROYAL CARIBBEAN HAS TOTAL FLEET OF 24 SHIPS. NORWEGIAN CRUISES HAS FLEET OF 17 SHIPS AND 6 NEW SHIPS WILL BE DELIVERED TO NORWEGIAN SHIPS BY 2027.

 

17 JULY, 2022

CHINA IN CRISIS DUE TO CONSTANT FALL AND RISE OF CASES OF COVID. SO NO CONSTANT ECONOMY GROWTH OR NORMALCY. EUROPE IN CRISES DUE TO NO POWER SUPPLY DUE TO GAS SHORTAGE, U.K HIGHEST INFLATION IN 30 YEARS, U.S HIGHEST INFLATION IN 40 YEARS, JAPAN ECONOMY ALSO NOT GOOD SINCE ECONOMY HAVE NOT RECOVERED FROM COVID. PAKISTAN BANKRUPT, SRI LANKA BANKRUPT. THEN DOSTO BACHA ONLY INDIA IN TERM OF FINANCE. GO LONG TO INDIA. BULLISH ON INDIA.

 

16 JULY, 2022

U.S PASSES DEFENCE BILL OF $850.3 BILLION.

 

15 JULY, 2022

INDIA COUNTS FOR  10% GLOBAL SALE FOR BMW BIKES. MASSIVE

 

14 JULY, 2022

RUPA IS MOSTLY THE ONLY INNER WEAR COMPANY IN INDIA WHICH HAS STRONG PRESENCE IN TIER II AND TIER III CITIES AND IT EVEN HAS STRONG PRESENCE IN SMALLER TOWNS. MANY APPAREL COMPANIES ARE TURNING THEIR ATTENTION TO TIER II AND III CITIES AND SMALLER TOWNS DUE TO BRAND AWARENESS IS INCREASING AMONGST THE PEOPLE LIVING IN SMALLER TOWNS AND TIER II, III AND IV CITIES DUE TO INCREASE OF INTERNET PENETRATION. RUPA CAN LEVERAGE THEIR STRONG DISTRIBUTION CHANNEL IN SMALLER TOWNS AND CITIES TO INCREASE ITS SALES. RUPA’S NET PROFIT GREW FROM RS 86 CRORE IN 2018 TO RS 191 CR IN 2022. COMPANY’S EPS GREW FROM RS 10.84 IN 2018 TO RS 24.12 IN 2022. ITS PE IS 14.47 AND MARKET CAP IS JUST RS 2,716 CRORE. SMALL COMPANY BUT NOT SMALL BRAND.

 

13 JULY, 2022

REAL WEALTH GENERATION AND EXPANSION OF BUSINESSES IN INDIA WILL TAKE PLACE IN TIER II, III, IV CITIES AND SMALLER TOWNS. INTERNET PENETRATION IN SMALLER CITIES AND TOWNS HAVE HELPED A LOT TO TRANSFORM SMALLER CITIES AND TOWNS ECONOMICALLY. PEOPLE OF SMALLER CITIES AND TOWNS ARE GETTING AWARE OF EVERYTHING. OLD GENERATION OF SMALLER CITIES AND TOWNS WERE NOT EDUCATED DUE TO FINANCIAL PROBLEMS AND NOT AWARE ABOUT IMPORTANCE OF EDUCATION. BUT NOW OLDER GENERATIONS ARE COMPROMISING ON THEMSELVES TO EDUCATE THEIR NEW GENERATIONS. THIS NEW GENERATIONS ARE NOTHING BUT MILLENNIALS. EDUCATION AND INTERNET PENETRATION HAVE MADE THEM AWARE OF EVERYTHING LIKE BRAND, TECHNOLOGY ETC. THEY WILL BE THE REAL CONSUMING POWER OF INDIA. INDIA WILL HAVE YOUNGEST POPULATION BY 2030 IN WORLD BY HALF OF INDIA’S POPULATION BELOW AGE OF 30. AND BEST PART OF IT IS THAT MAJORITY OF THEM WILL BE EDUCATED AND AWARE OF EVERYTHING. MEANS HALF OF INDIA’S POPULATION WILL BE EDUCATED. I MAY NOT BE SURPRISED TO SEE SMART VILLAGES IN INDIA IN COMING YEARS.

 

12 JULY, 2022

LEARNING NEW THINGS EVERYDAY IS THE SIGN THAT OUR BRAIN IS NOT DEAD. IF BRAIN DOES NOT WORK OR WE DOES NOT MAKE BRAIN WORK THEN LIFE BECOMES JUST AS SAKE OF LIVING WE ARE ALREADY DEAD FROM INSIDE.

 

11 JULY, 2022

INDIA’S INNER WEAR MARKET IS ESTIMATED AT RS 360 BILLION IN 2021 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH RS 930 BILLION BY 2030 GROWING AT A CAGR OF AROUND 11-12%.

 

10 JULY, 2022

WHILE MANUFACTURING OF MANY ITEMS WAS BANNED IN CHINA THIS HELPED INDIA IN MANY SECTORS LIKE CHEMICALS, PAPER ETC. SO WE CALLED CHINA+ STRATEGY. SAME IS HAPPENING WITH EUROPE. DUE TO NATURAL GAS CUT OFF EUROPE IS FACING POWER CRISIS. THIS HAS CAUSED CLOSURE OF MANY FACTORIES IN EUROPE. CAN WE SEE EUROPE +1 STRATEGY ?

 

9 JULY, 2022

TILE SECTOR: PER CAPITA CONSUMPTION OF TILES IN INDIA IS 0.6 SQ.M AS COMPARED TO 3.4 SQ.M IN BRAZIL AND 4.0 SQ.M IN CHINA.

 

8 JULY, 2022

SOFTBANK INVESTED IN BUY NOW PAY LATER FINTECH COMPANY KLARNA BANK AT A VALUATION OF $45.6 BILLION AND NOW KLARNA BANK IS RAISING CASH AT VALUATION OF JUST $6.5 BILLION.

 

7 JULY, 2022

INDIA IS HIGHLY UNDERVALUED, THE STAGE TO UNLOCK REAL VALUE OF INDIA IS BEING SET.

 

6 JULY, 2022

BILL GATES IS THE BIGGEST OWNER OF FARM LAND. NOW IMAGINE WHY WORLD IS TURNING TOWARDS PLANT BASED MEAT. PLANT BASED MEAT IS NOTHING BUT SOYABEAN. SAME HAPPENED WITH COVID VACCINES. GATES OWN STAKES IN FOUR COVID VACCINE COMPANIES. 

 

5 JULY, 2022

EARLIER IN INDIA ONLY ONE PERSON FROM FAMILY WAS EARNING AND OTHER MEMBERS OF FAMILY WERE AT HOME DEPENDENT ON THE ONE MEMBER WHO WAS EARNING. THIS RESULTED IN LOW PURCHASING POWER. BUT NOW TIME HAS CHANGED. IN ALMOST EVERY HOUSE ALL MEMBERS OF FAMILY EARN. THIS RESULTED IN ANNUAL INCREASE OF FAMILY INCOME AND THIS WILL LEAD TO INCREASE IN PURCHASING POWER. 

 

4 JULY, 2022

THE OVERALL SALES OF E-BUSES IN JUNE 2022 STOOD AT 145 UNITS, WITH MONTH-ON-MONTH FALL OF 8.23% AND A Y-O-Y INCREASE OF 107%. JUNE MONTH’S SALES WERE DRIVEN BY OLECTRA GREENTECH 36%, PMI ELECTRIC MOBILITY 36% AND TATA MOTORS 21%.

 

3 JULY, 2022

GLOBAL ELECTRIC TRUCK MARKET IS EXPECTED TO GROW FROM $2.6O BILLION IN 2021 TO $43.85 BILLION BY 2026 GROWING AT A CAGR OF 42.7%. OPPORTUNITY FOR OLECTRA GREENTECH SINCE IT IS THE ONLY COMPANY WHO HAVE TESTED HEAVY ELECTRIC COMMERCIAL TRUCK.

 

2 JULY, 2022

MINING COMPANIES IN  AUSTRALIA HAS STARTED USING DRIVERLESS TRUCKS TO CARRY IRON ORE, THEY HAVE STARTED TO SUPPLY IRON ORE IN DRIVERLESS TRAINS AND ROBOTS ARE BEEN USED FOR MINING. IT MEANS MINING IN AUSTRALIA IS MOVING TOWARDS AUTOMATION.

 

1 JULY, 2022

IF PATIENCE AS AN INVESTOR WERE EASY, IT WOULDN’T PAY SO WELL.

 

30 JUNE, 2022

TURKEY REPORTS ANNUAL INFLATION OF 78.6% IN JUNE.

 

29 JUNE, 2022

PER CAPITA ICE CREAM CONSUMPTION IN INDIA IS AROUND 360-400 ML COMPARED TO 22 LITRES IN U.S 19 LITRES IN AUSTRALIA, 28.4 LITRES IN NEW ZEALAND, 7 LITRES IN U.K, 11 LITRES IN CANADA. MARKET SHARE OF AMUL IN ICE CREAM IS 38%, SHARE OF KWALITY WALLS IS 16%, SHARE OF VADILAL ICE CREAM IS 12%, SHARE OF CREAM BELL IS 6%, SHARE OF MOTHER DAIRY IS 8%. KWALITY WALLS SPENDS MONEY ON ADS AND ALL IT HAS MARKET SHARE OF 16% AND ON OTHER HAND VADILAL ICE CREAMS DOES NOT SPEND MUCH ON ADS AND MARKETING THAN TOO IT HAS MARKET SHARE OF 12%. DIFFERENT BETWEEN MARKET SHARE OF KWALITY WALLS AND VADILAL ICE CREAMS IS JUST 4%.

 

28 JUNE, 2022

INTEREST RATES IN AROUND THE WORLD ARE RISING. WILL THIS AFFECT THE CALCULATION OF CAPEX OF COMPANIES FOR GROWTH ? BECAUSE THERE MIGHT BE MANY COMPANIES WHO HAVE TAKEN LOANS FOR CAPEX AT LOWER INTEREST RATES AND NOW INTEREST RATES ARE RISING AROUND THE GLOBE SO WILL THIS AFFECT CAPEX OF COMPANIES?

 

27 JUNE, 2022

SPACEX PROVIDES SATELLITE INTERNET THROUGH ITS COMPANY CALLED STARLINK. RECENTLY SATELLITE INTERNET OF SPACEX WAS USED ON TRIAL BY DELTA AIRLINES, AND HAWAII AIRLINES. IN INDIA NELCO PROVIDES SIMILAR SATELLITE INTERNET SERVICES. GLOBAL SATELLITE INTERNET MARKET WAS VALUED AT $2.93 BILLION IN 2020 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH $18.59 BILLION BY 2030 GROWING AT A CAGR OF 20.4%. NOTE: TATA POWER HOLDS AROUND 50% STAKE IN NELCO.

 

26 JUNE, 2022

IN PRINCIPLE, WE NEED THREE TO FOUR GOOD COMPANIES TO INVEST IN OVER TEN YEARS TO THAT THREE TO FOUR COMPANIES WILL TAKE CARE OF US FINANCIAL REST OF OUR LIFE.

 

25 JUNE, 2022

IF WE CAN’T EXPLAIN IT SIMPLY, WE DON’T UNDERSTAND IT WELL ENOUGH.

 

24 JUNE, 2022

WINTER WILL BE DIFFICULT FOR EUROPE AND U.K

 

23 JUNE, 2022

IN U.S DUE TO INCREASE IN PRICE OF GASOLINE THE DEMAND OF GASOLINE HAVE CAME DOWN. PEOPLE ARE AVOIDING TO GO FOR SUMMER VACATION IN THEIR OWN CARS. U.S REFINERIES HAVE REDUCED THEIR CAPACITY BY ABOUT 8,00,000 BARRELS PER DAY.

 

22 JUNE, 2022

THERE CAN BE METAL SHORTAGE AROUND THE WORLD IN COMING YEARS BECAUSE MINING COMPANIES ARE SPENDING ONLY AROUND $40 BILLION FOR MINING AS COMPARED TO $80 BILLION DURING METAL PEAK IN 2012. MINING COMPANIES NEED TO SPEND AROUND $160 BILLION.

 

21 JUNE, 2022

SINCE 2010 U.S FOOD AND BEVERAGE INDUSTRY HAS DONE NEARLY 3,000 ACQUISITIONS WORTH OF $535 BILLION.

 

20 JUNE, 2022

PER CAPITA FOOTWEAR CONSUMPTION IN INDIA IS 1.7 PAIRS COMPARED TO 6 PAIRS IN DEVELOPED COUNTRIES. ANNUAL SALES OF MIRZA INTERNATIONAL HAS GROWN FROM RS 972 CR IN 2018 TO RS 1,678 CR IN 2022. NET PROFIT HAS GROWN FROM RS 78 CR IN 2018 TO RS 112 CR IN 2022. ON OTHER HAND ANNUAL SALES OF BATA HAVE DECLINE FROM RS 2,634 IN 2018 TO RS 2,387 CR IN 2022. NET PROFIT OF BATA HAVE DECLINE FROM RS 220 CR IN 2018 TO RS 102 CR IN 2022. EPS OF MIRZA INTERNATIONAL HAS GROWN FROM 6.52 IN 2018 TO 9.38 IN 2022. EPS OF BATA HAVE CAME DOWN FROM 17.16 IN 2018 TO 8.01 IN 2022.

 

19 JUNE, 2022

APPLE MOVES DEEPER INTO FINANCE SECTOR. APPLE OBTAINED LENDING LICENSE. COMPANY PLANS TO START WITH BUY NOW PAY LATER.

 

18 JUNE, 2022

PROLOGIE THE WORLD’S LARGEST WAREHOUSING OPERATOR AGREES TO BUY RIVAL DUKE REALTY FOR $23 BILLION. THIS IS WORLD’S BIGGEST WAREHOUSING DEAL TILL TODAY.

 

17 JUNE, 2022

APPLE AND MAJOR LEAGUE SOCCER SIGNED A DEAL OF $2.5 BILLION TO BROADCAST FOOT BALL MATCHES ON IPHONE.

 

16 JUNE, 2022

AMERICAN RETAIL SPENDING DECLINE DUE TO RISING INFLATION, RISING INTEREST RATES AND RISING CRUDE PRICE.

 

15 JUNE, 2022

IN U.S PEOPLE OF MANY RURAL AREAS CANNOT DO VIDEO CALL, OR CANNOT SHOP ONLINE, CANNOT SEE MOVIES ONLINE ON STREAMING APP DUE TO LACK OF INTERNET SERVICES. IN SHORT MANY VILLAGES IN U.S ARE CUT OFF FROM MODERN WORLD DUE TO NO INTERNET SERVICES. BUT STILL THEY ARE CALLED DEVELOPED NATION. AND ON OTHER SIDE INDIA HAS ONE OF THE CHEAPEST INTERNET AS COMPARED WITH GLOBE. INDIA’s 1 GB MOBILE DATA IS AT $0.09 (RS 7) AS COMPARED TO $27 PER GB IN OTHER COUNTRIES.

 

14 JUNE, 2022

MORTGAGE RATES IN U.S ARE HIGHEST SINCE 2008 AT 5.78%. HOME BUYERS ARE PAYING FINANCE ABOUT $1,000-1,100 MORE A MONTH TO FINANCE A MEDIAN PRICE HOMES.

 

13 JUNE, 2022

HOME DEMAND IN CHINA IS DOWN BY 34.5%. 

 

12 JUNE, 2022

THERE WILL BE SHORTAGE OF AROUND 5,00,000 BARRELS OF CRUDE PER DAY BY NEXT YEAR.

 

11 JUNE, 2022

PER CAPITA EXPENDITURE OF CLOTHES IN INDIA IS AROUND RS 4,700 AS COMPARED TO PER CAPITA EXPENDITURE OF CLOTHES AROUND RS 45,000 IN U.S. PER CAPITA INCOME OF INDIA WILL RISE. PER CAPITA INCOME OF INDIA WILL NOT REMAIN SUCH LOW THROUGHOUT THE LIFE. JUST IMAGINE CONSUMPTION POWER OF INDIA WHEN ITS PER CAPITA INCOME WILL RISE.

 

10 JUNE, 2022

DUTCH BEER MAKER HEINEKEN HAS CREATED THE WORLD’S FIRST VIRTUAL BEER CALLED HEINEKEN SILVER.

 

9 JUNE, 2022

E-COMMERCE MARKET IN INDIA IS GOING TO TOUCH AROUND $110 BILLION BY 2025. IN TODAY’S E-COMMERCE INDUSTRY GOOD SERVICE IS MAIN POINT TO ATTRACT CUSTOMERS. GOOD SERVICE IN E-COMMERCE MEANS FAST DELIVERY. THE COMPANY WHICH DELIVERS THE GOODS FASTEST WILL GET MORE ORDERS FROM CUSTOMERS. FOR DELIVERING GOODS FASTER DRONES ARE THE PERFECT EXAMPLE. WITH DRONE TECHNOLOGY PRODUCT DELIVERIES CAN HAPPEN IN LESS THAN 30 MINS IN URBAN REGIONS. WITH MULTIPLE WAREHOUSES IN METROS, E-COMMERCE COMPANIES CAN COVER EVERY INCH OF THE CITY AND CAN OFFER 30 MIN DELIVERIES FOR MOST OF ITS PRODUCTS. THIS WOULD BE SPECIALLY HELPFUL DURING FESTIVE SEASONS AND BIG SALE DAYS.

 

8 JUNE, 2022

SONY IS PLANNING TO BUILD EV CARS WITH ENTERTAINMENT FEATURES LIKE MOVIES AND VIDEO GAMES. ITS CARS WILL BE FULLY AUTOMATIC.

 

7 JUNE, 2022

INDIA MIGHT SLOWLY STOP IMPORT OF OIL FROM GULF. RUSSIA WILL PLAY MAJOR ROLE FOR INDIA. ARTIC REGION WILL PLAY MOST IMPORTANT ROLE FOR INDIA AND RUSSIA.

 

6 JUNE, 2022

MICROSOFT IS ROLLING OUT A NETFLIX LIKE APP ON SAMSUNG SMART TV THAT WILL ALLOW USERS TO PLAY XBOX GAMES WITHOUT A CONSOLE.

 

5 JUNE, 2022

GUCCI IS PLANNING TO GROW ITS CONSUMER BASE WHICH ARE UNDER 30 YEARS OF AGE.

 

4 JUNE, 2022

AVERAGE ANNUAL SPENDING ON PET IN USA BY ONE FAMILY IS AROUND $1800 (RS 1,35,000) AND AVERAGE ANNUAL EXPENDITURE ON PET IN INDIA IS AROUND $640 (RS 48,000).

 

3 JUNE, 2022

INFLATION HAS HIT ALL SECTOR EXCEPT PET AND PET PRODUCT SECTOR. IN U.S INFLATION ADJUSTED SPENDING ON PETS AND PET RELATED PRODUCTS IS 28% HIGHER THAN IN APRIL 2019 COMPARED WITH 9.6% GROWTH FOR GROCERIES OVER THE SAME PERIOD. SPENDING ON PETS AND PET RELATED PRODUCTS GREW TO $123 BILLION. PET PRODUCT RETAIL SECTOR WILL GROW AT A CAGR OF 15-18% TILL 2026. PET OWNERS ARE OPTING FOR MORE PREMIUM AND FRESH FOOD FOR THEIR PETS.

 

2 JUNE, 2022

INVESTMENT DATA ARE AVAILABLE MORE CONVENIENTLY AND FASTER TODAY. BUT THE BEHAVIOUR OF INVESTORS WILL NOT BE MORE INTELLIGENT THAN IN PAST, DESPITE ALL THIS. HOW PEOPLE REACT WILL NOT CHANGE THEIR PSYCHOLOGICAL MAKEUP STAYS CONSTANT.

 

1 JUNE, 2022

THE BIGGEST INVESTING ERRORS COMES NOT FROM FACTORS THAT ARE INFORMATIONAL OR ANALYTICAL BUT FROM THOSE THAT ARE PSYCHOLOGICAL.

 

31 MAY, 2022

CESL PLANS TO ISSUE TENDER FOR 50,000 E-BUSES FOR NEXT FIVE YEAR. BULLISH ON OLECTRA GREENTECH.

 

30 MAY, 2022

GLOBAL DRONE MARKET MIGHT BE THE FASTEST GROWING SECTOR IN COMING YEARS. IT WILL GROW AT A CAGR OF 57.5%. USE OF DRONES IN DELIVERY AND LOGISTICS SEGMENT IS ANTICIPATED TO EXHIBIT THE HIGHEST CAGR OF AROUND 60% FROM 2022 TO 2028.

 

29 MAY, 2022

GENERAL MOTORS PLANS TO CONVERT ITS BUICK’S BRAND IN ALL ELECTRIC BY END OF 2030 TARGETING A FRESH START FOR ITS 119 YEAR OLD BRAND.

 

28 MAY, 2022

INDIA’S DRONE MARKET IS NOT JUST A SECTOR BUT IT CAN BE A WHOLE ECOSYSTEM.

 

27 MAY, 2022

DAIMLER SAYS SHORTAGE OF SEMICONDUCTOR IS EASING OUT. SO NOW CAR SALES WILL IMPROVE. WATCH RUBBER CHEMICAL COMPANY NOCIL AND COMPANIES MANUFACTURING TYRE CORD OR TYRE FABRIC (DCM SHRIRAM INDUSTRIES).

 

26 MAY, 2022

DURING 1980’S U.S HAS GONE INTO RECESSION FOUR OUT OF SIX TIMES WHEN FED HAS INCREASED INTEREST RATES.

 

25 MAY, 2022

TOTAL PRODUCTION IS AROUND 34 MILLION TONNES, SURPLUS STOCK IS AROUND 8 MILLION TONNES, DOMESTIC CONSUMPTION IS AROUND 28 MILLION TONNES, PLUS EXPORTS AT AROUND 8-9 MILLION TONNES. SO NO NEED TO WORRY ABOUT EXPORT CURB ON SUGAR.

 

24 MAY, 2022

EGYPTIANS EATS MORE BREAD THAN MOST PEOPLE AROUND THE WORLD. AVERAGE PER CAPITA CONSUMPTION OF BREAD IN EGYPT IS 330 POUNDS WHICH IS THREE TIMES MORE AS COMPARED TO GLOBAL FIGURES.

 

23 MAY, 2022

MANY TEXTILE COMPANIES WHICH MAKES YARN FROM COTTON HAS TEMPORARY CLOSED THEIR FACTORIES BECAUSE THEY WERE NOT ABLE TO PASS ON HIGHER COTTON PRICES TO THEIR CUSTOMERS.

 

22 MAY, 2022

INDIA’S $222 BILLION AUTOMOBILE SECTOR IS EXPECTED TO REACH $300 BILLION BY 2026.

 

21 MAY, 2022

ADVERTISEMENT REVENUES AROUND THE WORLD ARE DECLINING DUE TO INFLATION WHICH HAS ALSO LEAD TO DIFFICULTIES IN FUND RAISING BY START UPS. EARLIER START UPS USE TO FOCUS ON MARKETING VIA ADVERTISEMENT TO INCREASE THEIR SALES. BUT DUE TO INFLATION WHICH CAUSE SHORTAGE OF FUNDS FORCED THEM TO LAID OFF THEIR EMPLOYEES AND TO CUT THEIR COST ON ADVERTISEMENT. MEDIA SECTOR IS DIRECTLY CONNECTED WITH ADVERTISEMENTS. SO WILL UPCOMING SPORTS LEAGUE WILL SEE DECLINE IN THEIR ADVERTISEMENT REVENUES ? OR WILL THIS SEE OVERALL DECLINE IN REVENUES OF MEDIA SECTOR ?

 

20 MAY, 2022

NEW HOME SALES IN U.S FELL BY 16.6% IN APRIL FROM MARCH AND WERE DOWN 26.9% FROM A YEAR AGO.

 

19 MAY, 2022

PER CAPITA NON ALCOHOLIC DRINK CONSUMPTION IN INDIA IS ONLY AROUND 23 LITRE AS COMPARED TO 114 LITRE IN PHILIPPINES AND 73 LITRES IN VIETNAM AND THESE TWO COUNTRIES ARE DEVELOPING COUNTRIES. THIS SHOW INDIA’S NON ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGE MARKET IS UNDERVALUED.

 

18 MAY, 2022

TO ACHIEVE TARGET OF 20% ETHANOL BLENDING INDIA WILL NEED AN INVESTMENT OF RS 41,000 CRORE TO SET UP DISTILLERIES. 

 

17 MAY, 2022

PUBLIC INVESTMENT FUND OF SAUDI ARABIA TAKES 5% STAKE IN NINTENDO FOR $3 BILLION.

 

16 MAY, 2022

RADIAL TYRES REDUCED THE FUEL CONSUMPTION BY 40%. TYRE MANUFACTURING ASSOCIATION SAYS OVER 85% OF PASSENGER VEHICLE AND OVER 35% OF COMMERCIAL VEHICLES USES RADIAL TYRES. RADIAL TYRES CANNOT BE MADE WITHOUT TYRE CORDS AND TYRE YARN. GROWING NEED FOR REDUCTION IN FUEL CONSUMPTION MAINLY IN COMMERCIAL VEHICLES WILL INCREASE THE OVERALL DEMAND OF TYRE CORD AND TYRE FABRIC DEMAND.

 

15 MAY, 2022

MANY EUROPEAN NATIONS AGREED TO BUY GAS FROM RUSSIA IN RUBLES.

 

14 MAY, 2022

BOEING WINS ORDER FOR 737 MAX JETS FROM BRITISH AIRWAYS.

 

13 MAY, 2022

HARLEY DAVIDSON HAS HALTED ASSEMBLING AND SHIPMENT OF ALMOST MOST OF ITS BIKES DUE TO SHORTAGE RELATED PROBLEMS OF COMPONENT PARTS. AUTOMOBILE SALES WILL NOT REMAIN DOWN THROUGH OUT LIFE. IT IS DOWN JUST BECAUSE OF SEMICONDUCTOR SALES AND SUPPLY ISSUES OF SOME COMPONENTS. THIS SUPPLY ISSUES WILL BECOME NORMAL IN FEW MONTHS. SO ITS PERFECT TIME TO ENTER AUTOMOBILE, TYRE AND RAW MATERIAL SECTOR FROM WHICH TYRES ARE MADE.

 

12 MAY, 2022

VOLKSWAGEN WILL BUILD NEW BRAND CALLED SCOUT FOR U.S.  UNDER SCOUT VOLKSWAGEN WILL BUILD EV SPORTS CAR AND ELECTRIC PICK UP TRUCKS. PRODUCTION WILL START FROM 2026. VOLKSWAGEN PLANS TO INVEST $1 BILLION IN SCOUT.

 

11 MAY, 2022

TYRE MANUFACTURERS TO INCREASE CAPEX BY RS 5,000 CRORES. GOOD NEWS FOR NOCIL BECAUSE NOCIL ENJOYS MONOPOLY IN RUBBER CHEMICALS USED FOR TYRE MANUFACTURING. EVEN DCM SHRIRAM INDUSTRIES WILL BE BENEFITED FROM THIS SINCE COMPANY PRODUCES INDUSTRIAL TECHNICAL TYRE YARN AND EVEN PRODUCES FABRIC FOR TYRE.

 

10 MAY, 2022

UKRAINE REDUCED FLOW OF RUSSIAN GAS THROUGH ITS TERRITORY TO EUROPE. 

 

9 MAY, 2022

WALT DISNEY’S DISNEY+ STREAMING PLATFORM REPORTED 7.9 MILLION MILLION NEW SUBSCRIBERS TO REACH 137.7 MILLION FROM 129.8 MILLION. 

 

8 MAY, 2022

U.S CASINO’S TOTAL REVENUE REACHED $5.31 BILLION IN MONTH OF MARCH. THIS IS HIGHEST MONTHLY REVENUE IN CASINO INDUSTRY’S HISTORY. CAN SUCH TREND CONTINUE IN INDIA ? 

 

7 MAY, 2022

INDIA’S SURPLUS SUGAR WILL COME DOWN TO LESS THAN 1 MILLION TONNE IN NEXT 4-5 YEARS DUE TO ETHANOL BLENDING. NICE TO SEE SURPLUS SUGAR COMING DOWN FROM 14.5 MILLION TONNES TO 1 MILLION TONNE BY 2026.

 

6 MAY, 2022

DIVERSION OF SUGAR FOR ETHANOL MAKING HAS INCREASED IN LAST THREE YEAR IN INDIA. AROUND 3,36,000 TONNES OF SUGAR WAS DIVERTED FOR ETHANOL IN 2019, 9,26,000 TONNES WAS DIVERTED IN 2020, 22,00,000 TONNES WAS DIVERTED IN 2021 AND 35,00,000 WAS DIVERTED IN CURRENT YEAR. AROUND 60 LAKH TONNES OF SUGAR IS ESTIMATED TO BE DIVERTED FOR ETHANOL MANUFACTURING BY 2025.

 

5 MAY, 2022

ORDER BOOK OF OLECTRA GREENTECH IS AT AROUND RS 5,000-6,000 CRORE AND ITS MARKET CAP IS RS 5,102 CRORE.

 

4 MAY, 2022

GOOD RESULTS BY OLECTRA GREENTECH. Q4 REVENUE AT RS 274.47 CRORE VS RS 149.84 CRORE IN PREVIOUS YEAR’S Q4. NET  PROFIT OF Q4 AT RS 17.80 CRORE VS RS 9.66 CRORE IN PREVIOUS YEAR’S Q4. REVENUE OF FY22 AT RS 600.96 CRORE VS RS 292.86 CR IN FY21. NET PROFIT OF FY22 AT RS 35.36 CRORE VS 8.08 CRORE IN FY21.

 

3 MAY, 2022

GST COLLECTION HIGHEST AT RS 1.68 LAKH CRORE. INDIA IS GROWING AT GREAT SPEED. INDIA WILL HAVE ONE OF THE YOUNGEST POPULATION IN THE WORLD IN COMING YEARS. ALMOST HALF OF INDIAN POPULATION WILL BE UNDER AGE OF 27 IN COMING YEARS. AND THIS WILL LEAD TO UNORGANIZED TO ORGANIZED IN ALMOST EVERY SECTOR. AND UNORGANIZED TO ORGANIZED OF ALMOST EVERY SECTOR WILL LEAD TO INCREASE OF GST COLLECTION TO AROUND RS 3.5 TO 4 LAKH CRORE PER MONTH IN COMING YEARS.

 

2 MAY, 2022

MACROTECH DEVELOPERS LODHA PLANS TO INVEST MORE THAN $1 BILLION WITH HELP OF TWO FOREIGN INVESTORS TO DEVELOP WAREHOUSES. MEANS LODHA ENTERS WAREHOUSING SEGMENT.

 

1 MAY, 2022

HIGHER INTEREST RATES WILL HELP NATIONS TO REDUCE THEIR DEBT BUT FOR THIS THEIR SHOULD BE SPENDING POWER BY PEOPLE WHICH IS NOT YET SEEN DUE TO RISING INFLATION. 

 

30 APRIL, 2022

INDIAN GOVERNMENT HAS ORDERED DEFENCE EQUIPMENT OF WORTH RS 58,000 CRORE TO INDIAN COMPANIES. GOVERNMENT IS TRYING TO INCREASE THIS FIGURE TO RS 4.5 LAKH CRORE BY 2027-2029.

 

29 APRIL, 2022

KHADI AND VILLAGE INDUSTRIES COMMISSION HAS CLOCKED A RECORD REVENUE OF RS 1.15 LAKH CRORE FOR THIS YEAR MAKING IT THE ONLY FMCG COMPANY IN INDIA TO REACH RS 1 LAKH CRORE TURNOVER. 

 

28 APRIL, 2022

COMPCAST’S PAYING SUBSCRIBERS TO ITS STREAMING PLATFORM PEACOCK JUMPED BY MORE THAN 40%. 

 

27 APRIL, 2022

FRENCH THIRD PARTY LOGISTICS COMPANY FM LOGISTICS OPENS FIRST WAREHOUSE OF AROUND 7.6 LAKH SQ.FT IN HARYANA.

 

26 APRIL, 2022

I MAY BE WRONG ALSO BUT THERE MIGHT BE A STAKE DILUTION EITHER BY VIACOM OR BY RELIANCE IN VIACOM18 AND THERE MIGHT BE A CHANGE IN MANAGEMENT HAND. BECAUSE IF STAKE DILUTION DOES NOT TAKES PLACE THEN ON WHAT BASIS COMPANY WILL ISSUE SHARES TO BODHI INVESTORS ?

 

25 APRIL, 2022

FINALLY RESULTS OF INDIAN BANKS ARE COMING GOOD. ICICI SAW INCREASE OF 59% IN ITS NET PROFIT, AXIS BANK NET PROFIT WAS UP BY 54%, INDUSIND BANK NET PROFIT IS ALSO UP BY 55%. SO WILL THERE BE FOREIGN INSTITUTIONAL BUYERS LOADING SHARES OF INDIAN BANKS ?

 

24 APRIL, 2022

EUROPEAN NATIONS CONSIDERS TO ACCEPT RUSSIAN DEMAND TO BUY GAS IN RUBBLE FROM RUSSIA.

 

23 APRIL, 2022

THE BASIC IDEAS OF INVESTING ARE TO LOOK AT STOCKS AS BUSINESS, USE THE MARKET’S FLUCTUATIONS TO OUR ADVANTAGE, AND SEEK A MARGIN OF SAFETY ON OUR PURCHASE PRICE. EVEN HUNDRED YEARS FROM NOW THEY WILL BE THE CORNERSTONES OF INVESTING.

 

22 APRIL, 2022

TATA POWER PLANS RS 60,000 CRORE CAPEX FOR RENEWABLES OVER NEXT FIVE YEARS.

 

21 APRIL, 2022

IN U.S MORE THAN 40 MILLION PEOPLE COLLECTIVELY OWE AROUND $1.6 TRILLION IN FEDERAL STUDENT DEBT, A SUM BIGGER THAN U.S TOTALS FOR CREDIT CARDS OR AUTO LOAN DEBT.

 

20 APRIL, 2022

OWNER OF GRUBHUB WHICH IS THRID LARGEST ONLINE FOOD SELLER IN U.S PLANNING TO SELL GRUBHUB.

 

19 APRIL, 2022

U.S MORTGAGE RATES RISE TO 5.11% .

 

18 APRIL, 2022

THERE IS INCREASE IN EXPORT OF RUSSIAN OIL TO UNKOWN DESTINATIONS. IN APRIL SO FAR OVER 11.1 MILLION BARRELS OF RUSSIAN OIL WERE LOADED INTO TANKERS WITHOUT A PLANED ROUTE, MORE THAN TO ANY COUNTRY.

 

17 APRIL, 2022

TO DYE CLOTHES HEAT IS REQUIRED TO KEEP WATER AT CONSTANT TEMPERATURE AND TO SET COLOR. BUT DUE TO SHORTAGE OF ELECTRICITY AND INCREASE IN PRICES OF ELECTRICITY IN WESTERN COUNTRIES THE COST TO DYE FABRIC HAS QUADRUPLED SINCE JANUARY 2020. DUE TO THIS MANY DYE HOUSES IN ITALY ARE CLOSING BECAUSE COSTS ARE EXCEEDING PROFITS.

 

16 APRIL, 2022

IN U.S LEASES OF AROUND 243 MILLION SQ.FT OF OFFICE SPACE IS GOING TO EXPIRE IN 2022. EXPIRATION OF LEASES HAVE BEEN INCREASE BY 40% IN 2022 SINCE 2018. BLACKSTONE IS EXPECTED TO RETURN LEASE OF ITS OFFICE BUILDING IN MANHATTAN TO ITS CREDITORS WITH $308 MILLION DEBT LOAD. HERRICK FEINSTEIN WANTS TO REDUCE ITS OFFICE SPACE BUSINESS BY 40% .

 

15 APRIL, 2022

THREAD ON PIG IRON AND STEEL: PIG IRON A RAW FORM OF THE METAL USED IN PRODUCTION OF STEEL IS IN SHORTAGE. TWO THIRD OF 6 MILLION METRIC TONS OF PIG IRON IMPORTED BY U.S CAME FROM UKRAINE AND RUSSIA. RUSSIA AND UKRAINE ARE WORLD’S BIGGEST SUPPLIER OF PIG IRON AND U.S IS BIGGEST BUYER OF PIG IRON IN THE WORLD. U.S STEEL MAKERS ARE LOOKING OUT IN INDIA FOR SECURING THEIR SUPPLY FOR PIG IRON. EARLIER INDIA HAS NEVER EXPORTED PIG IRON. BUT JSW STEEL CAN PRODUCE 1 MILLION METRIC TONNES OF SURPLUS PIG IRON ANNUALLY JUST TO EXPORT IT. JSW STEEL HAS RECENTLY EXPORTED PIG IRON TO UNITED STATES STEEL CORPORATION AND BIG RIVER STEEL MILL IN ARKANSAS.

 

14 APRIL, 2022

RESULTS ON INDIAN BANKS WILL COME GOOD. ON ONE SIDE DEPOSITS IN U.S BANKS ARE DECLINING AND ON OTHER SIDE TODAY HDFC’S DEPOSITS INCREASED BY 16.8%. WILL THIS FORCE FOREIGN INSTITUTIONAL INVESTORS TO LOAD UP SHARES OF INDIAN BANKS ?

 

13 APRIL, 2022

HDFC HAD OPENED TWO NEW BRANCH DAILY IN FY22.

 

12 APRIL, 2022

TOTAL COMBINED GLOBAL BORROWINGS BY GOVERNMENTS, CORPORATIONS AND HOUSEHOLDS JUMP BY 28% POINTS TO 256% OF GROSS DOMESTIC PRODUCT IN 2020. THIS IS A LEVEL WHICH IS NOT SEEN SINCE THE TWO WORLD WARS. 

 

11 APRIL, 2022

MORTGAGE RATES IN U.S HAVE INCREASED TO 5%. OVERALL BANKS DEPOSITS IN U.S HAVE STARTED TO FALL. JP MORGAN’S NET PROFIT IS DOWN BY 42%, WELLS FARGO’S NET PROFIT IS DOWN BY 21%, NET PROFIT OF BANK OF AMERICA IS DOWN BY 12%. IS U.S HOUSING BUBBLE STARTED TO BURST ?

 

10 APRIL, 2022

ROAD PROJECTS AWARDED IN MARCH 2022 BY NHAI AND MINISTRY OF ROAD TRANSPORT AND HIGHWAYS HAVE INCREASED BY 2X TO 5,113 KM AS COMPARED TO PREVIOUS YEAR SAME MONTH. AS COMPARED BY LAST MONTH’S 735 KM THE AWARDED ROAD PROJECTS INCREASED BY 6X.

 

9 APRIL, 2022

U.S MAY SEE THE FIRST PACE OF DECLINE IN BANK DEPOSITS SINCE WORLD WAR 2.

 

8 APRIL, 2022

VIEWERSHIP OF IPL IS DOWN BY AROUND 20% AND RATINGS IS DOWN BY AROUND 33%. NO BIG COMPANIES LIKE HERO, BAJAJ AND ALL HAVE GIVEN ADS IN THIS YEAR’S IPL. CAN THIS IMPACT THE BIDDING OF IPL STREAMING AND BROADCASTING RIGHTS FOR NEXT FIVE YEARS ?

 

7 APRIL, 2022

AFTER SEEING TATA NEU APP IT SEEMS REAL VALUE OF TATA COMPANIES WILL BE UNLOCK NOW. SALES OF INDIAN HOTES, VISTARA, AIR INDIA, TATA CONSUMER, TRENT, CROMA AND OTHER TATA COMPANIES WILL BE AT SKY IN COMING YEARS. BECAUSE EVERYTHING IS AVAILABLE ON JUST ONE TOUCH. AFTER SEEING THIS IT SEEMS IN COMING YEARS EVERYTHING WILL BE FROM MANUFACTURER TO DIRECT CONSUMER. WHOLESALE AND DISTRIBUTION CHANNEL WILL BE OUT FROM BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT. GREAT CHANGE.

 

6 APRIL, 2022

THREAD ON HIGHWAYS: INDIAN GOVERNMENT HAS AIM TO MAKE INDIA $5 TRILLION ECONOMY. FOR THIS DEVELOPMENT IS HAPPENING AT GREAT SPEED. DEVELOPMENTS IN AIRWAYS SECTOR IS BROUGHT BY UDAN. CONNECTING ALL REGIONAL TOWNS AND CITIES BY AIRWAYS. FOR THESE EVERY CITY OR TOWN WILL HAVE AIRPORT. SAME GOES WITH PORTS. ALL COASTAL CITIES AND TOWN WILL HAVE PORTS. IN FACT GOVERNMENT IS PLANNING TO DEVELOP INLAND WATERWAYS BY BUILDING SMALL PORTS ON RIVERS. MULTIMODAL LOGISTICS PARKS IN EVERY STATE. DEVELOPING INDUSTRIAL ESTATES IN EVERY STATE. AND SO ON. BUT ALL THESE IS IMPOSSIBLE WITHOUT GOOD ROADS. PEOPLE REQUIRES GOOD ROADS TO REACH AIRPORT WITHOUT ANY TRAFFIC, PORT REQUIRES GOOD CONNECTIONS OF ROADS SO THAT CONTAINERS ARE EASILY TRANSPORTED FROM PORTS TO NEARBY CITIES, SAME GOES WITH INLAND WATER PORTS, INLAND WATER PORTS REQUIRES GOOD ROAD CONNECTIONS SO THAT GOODS CAN BE EASILY TRANSPORTED FROM PORTS, MULTIMODAL LOGISTICS PARKS ALSO REQUIRES GOOD CONNECTIVITY OF ROADS SO THAT GOODS CAN BE EASILY TRANSPORTED FROM WAREHOUSES. EVEN INDUSTRIAL ESTATES REQUIRES GOOD CONNECTIVITY OF ROADS TO TRANSPORT GOODS FROM FACTORIES. SO IN SHORT ROADS PLAY AN IMPORTANT ROLE IN DEVELOPING ANY COUNTRY. BECAUSE COUNTRY GROWS ON HOW FAST IT CAN TRANSPORT THE GOODS . FASTER THE TRANSPORTATION OF GOODS WILL IMPROVE THE BUSINESS OF THE COUNTRY. ONCE BUSINESSES ARE IMPROVE THE COUNTRY AUTOMATICALLY GROWS AND ACHIEVE GREAT HEIGHTS. SO BASICALLY TO ATTAIN $5 TRILLION ECONOMY ROAD SECTOR WILL PLAY AN MAJOR ROLE.

 

5 APRIL, 2022

GERMANY GOVERNMENT WILL TEMPORARILY TAKE OVER THE UNIT OF RUSSIAN GAS COMPANY CALLED GAZPROM IN GERMANY TO SECURE GAS DELIVERIES AS TENSION GROWS BETWEEN RUSSIA AND UKRAINE.

 

4 APRIL, 2022

THE TOTAL COLLECTION OF THEATERS IN U.S AND CANADA WAS $4.6 BILLION IN 2021 COMPARED TO $11.4 BILLION IN 2019.

 

3 APRIL, 2022

DRILLMEC A PART OF MEIL GROUP INVESTS 35 MILLION EURO ON INITIAL STAGE TO PRODUCE HYDROGEN. AND MEIL IS A PROMOTER GROUP OF OLECTRA GREENTECH. SO CAN WE EXPECT THAT OLECTRA GREENTECH WILL MANUFACTURE HYDROGEN BASE BUSES IN COMING YEARS IR MONTHS ?

 

2 APRIL, 2022

DUE TO RISING MORTGAGE RATES IN U.S HOUSING DEMAND HAS STARTED TO COME DOWN.

 

1 APRIL, 2022

U.S PLANS TO SHIP 50 BILLION CUBIC METERS OF LNG TO EUROPE ANNUALLY BY 2030. THIS SHOWS UKRAINE IS JUST STUCK IN SUCH SITUATION ONLY BECAUSE OF GREEDY NATURE OF U.S.

 

31 MARCH, 2022

NUVACO INCREASES CEMENT PRICE. COST OF PER BAG WILL BE RS 420.

 

30 MARCH, 2022

CHINA PLANS TO CURB ITS $30 BILLION LIVE STREAMING INDUSTRY.

 

29 MARCH, 2022

QATAR IS EMERGING AS ONE OF THE ATTRACTIVE OPTION FOR GAS. IT WILL SPEND AROUND $28.7 BULLION TO BOOST ITS GAS PRODUCTION CAPACITY BY 40% OR ABOUT 33 MILLION METRIC TONNES A YEAR BY 2026. THIS WOULD BE MORE THAN OFFSET THE ENTIRETY OF RUSSIA’S LNG EXPORT TO EUROPE WHICH WAS 13.7 MILLION METRIC TONNES LAST YEAR.

 

28 MARCH, 2022

GOOGLE HAS ROLL OUT FULLY AUTOMATIC DRIVERLESS CARS IN SAN FRANCISCO. BUT AT PRESENT IT IS ONLY AVAILABLE FOR ITS EMPLOYEES.

 

27 MARCH, 2022

U.S PASSED A BILL TO CAP DOWN THE PRICE OF INSULIN. BILL SAYS PRICE OF INSULIN CANNOT BE MORE THAN $35 PER MONTH. WILL THIS BENEFIT BIOCON ? BIOCON HAS DEVELOPED AND SUPPLIES BIOSIMILAR INSULIN AT PRICE LESS THAN 10 CENTS (AROUND RS 8) A DAY. SO 8X30 IS JUST RS 240. THIS IS EVEN LESS THAN $35.

 

26 MARCH, 2022

REGIS WHICH OPERATES HAIR SALOON BRAND SUPER CUTS AND OTHER SALOONS IS LOOKING TO BE TURNAROUND IF THINGS WENT IN PROPER WAY. IT HAS OWNERSHIP INTEREST AND FRANCHISES OF AROUND 5,800 SALOONS IN U.S, U.K AND CANADA. IT WAS STARTED IN 1922. DUE TO LOCKDOWN SALOONS OF REGIS WERE CLOSED AND DUE TO THIS IT INCURRED LOSS OF $113 MILLION. BUT IN RECENT DAYS COMPANY IS CHANGING ITS OPERATION PLANS BY SWITCHING TO TOTAL FRANCHISE FORMAT INSTEAD OF OWNING STORES. BASICALLY ASSET LIGHT MODEL. THIS HAS HELP COMPANY TO BRING DOWN ITS LOSS FROM $113 MILLION TO $5 MILLION. ASSET LIGHT MODEL HAS ALSO HELP COMPANY TO FREE UP WORKING CAPITAL WHICH WAS STUCK BY OWNING STORES. AND NOW EVERYTHING HAS OPENED UP SO COMPANY IS SEEING GOOD NUMBER OF CUSTOMERS ALSO.

 

25 MARCH, 2022

TANGSHAN CITY IN HEBEI PROVINCE IN CHINA WHICH IS HUB OF STEEL MANUFACTURING HAS HALTED ALL STEEL FACTORIES OPERATIONS DUE TO COVID.

 

24 MARCH, 2022

GROWING FROM LOW BASE OF 62 MILLION IN 2000, CHINA LOGGED 660 MILLION PASSENGERS IN 2019. THIS GROWTH RATE PUT CHINA ON TRACK TO OVERTAKE U.S AS THE WORLD’S BIGGEST AVIATION MARKET BY MID OF 2022. 

 

23 MARCH, 2022

GONE FOR A HAIRCUT IN EVENING. THERE ONE MARWADI UNCLE WAS TELLING TO OWNER OF THE SALOON THAT INDIA BULLS HOUSING AND REAL ESTATE DONO KA SHARE LELE TIP AAYA HAI DOUBLE HONE WALA HAI. AFTER MY HAIRCUT I ASKED HIM UNCLE DO YOU KNOW WHAT BUSINESS INDIA BULLS GROUP DOES. HE TOLD APNE KO USKE DHANDE SE KYA LENA DENA APNE KO TIP AAYA HAI DOUBLE KA LELENA. WAS SHOCKED AFTER LISTING THIS. SHARE PRICES PERFORM WELL IF COMPANY’S BUSINESS PERFORM WELL. BUT HE WAS MUCH FOCUSED ON TIP. NOW IF HE OR ANY ONE ELSE MAKE LOSS IN THAT TIP THEY WILL BLAME MARKETS THAT MARKET IS GAMBLING. BUT THEY DON’T KNOW MARKET REWARDS TO THOSE WHO BELIEVE IN RESEARCH AND WHO RESPECTS MARKETS AND WORKS WITH DISCIPLINE AND ON PRINCIPLES. 

 

22 MARCH, 2022

COKING COAL PRICES HAVE INCREASED TO $700 A TONNE FROM $300 A TONNE JUST A MONTH AGE. WILL THIS IMPACT CEMENT AND METAL INDUSTRY ?

 

21 MARCH, 2022

INDIA IS THIRD LARGEST AVIATION MARKET THEN TOO IT HAS ONLY 57 WIDE BODY PLANES COMPARED TO 668 IN U.S AND 458 IN CHINA.

 

20 MARCH, 2022

INVIT FUND WILL PLAY A MAJOR ROLE IN DELEVERAGING THE BALANCE SHEET OF INFRASTRUCTURE SECTOR SPECIALLY HIGHWAYS.

 

19 MARCH, 2022

YARA INTERNATIONAL WORLD’S LARGEST FERTILISER PRODUCER IS STOPPING DOWN THE PRODUCTION OF UREA AND AMMONIA IN EUROPE BY AROUND 50% DUE TO INCREASE IN PRICE OF GAS.

 

18 MARCH, 2022

CASH IS TO A BUSINESS AS OXYGEN IS TO AN INDIVIDUAL. NEVER THOUGHT ABOUT WHEN IT IS PRESENT, THE ONLY THING I MIND WHEN IT IS ABSENT.

 

17 MARCH, 2022

WAR IS ALWAYS BEARISH ON MONEY. TO SELL STOCK AT THE THREATENED OR ACTUAL OUTBREAK OF HOSTILITIES SO AS TO GET INTO CASH IS EXTREME FINANCIAL LUNACY. ACTUALLY JUST THE OPPOSITE SHOULD BE DONE.

 

16 MARCH, 2022

DUE TO INCREASE IN PRICES OF NATURAL GAS, ELECTRICITY BILLS HAVE INCREASED IN U.S AND THIS HAS LED TO SLOWING DOWN OF EV SALES IN U.S. IN SOME AREAS ELECTRICITY COST HAS GONE UP FROM 6 CENTS A KILOWATT HOUR TO AROUND 18 CENTS A KILOWATT HOUR. SO DUE TO THIS CHARGING OF EV’s HAS BECOME COSTLY.

 

15 MARCH, 2022

IN INITIAL STAGE OF INVESTING WE CANNOT PUT EVERYTHING IN MARKETS. WE NEED TO DIVIDE THE FUND ACCORDING TO OUR REQUIREMENTS. ONCE THE INVESTED AMOUNT BECOMES BIG THEN WE CAN STOP OUR OTHER ACTIVITIES. BECAUSE AFTER THAT MONEY WORKS FOR US BY COMPOUNDING.

 

14 MARCH, 2022

AMC ENTERTAINMENT DIVERSIFIES BY BUYING 22% STAKE IN GOLD AND SILVER MINING COMPANY CALLED HYCROFT MINING.

 

13 MARCH, 2022

SAUDI ARABIA IS IN TALKS WITH CHINA TO SELL OIL IN YUAN.

 

12 MARCH, 2022

EUROPE PLANS TO BAN IMPORT OF FINISH STEEL FROM RUSSIA. TOTAL IMPORT OF FINISH STEEL BY EUROPE FROM RUSSIA IS VALUED AT $3.6 BILLION. WILL INDIA EXPORT THIS FINISH STEEL TO EUROPE ?

 

11 MARCH, 2022

RUSSIA IS THE THIRD LARGEST COAL EXPORTER BEHIND THE FIRST TWO INDONESIA AND AUSTRALIA. RUSSIA ACCOUNTS FOR 18% OF TOTAL COAL EXPORTS IN WORLD. INDONESIA HAS TEMPORARILY BANNED COAL EXPORTS. PLUS FLOODS IN AUSTRALIA DISRUPTED COAL TRADE AFTER KEY PORT CLOSED TEMPORARILY. WILL WORLD SEE RISE IN PRICES OF ELECTRICITY ?

 

10 MARCH, 2022

OIL TANKER FREIGHT RATES INCREASES FROM $10,000 TO $30,000.

 

9 MARCH, 2022

INDIA AIMS TO BUILD MORE THAN 50 KM OF HIGHWAYS PER DAY. AT PRESENT IT IS BUILDING AROUND 36 KM OF ROAD PER DAY. OPPORTUNITY FOR KNR CONSTRUCTIONS. 

 

8 MARCH, 2022

BIRLA ESTATE IS A REAL ESTATE ARM OF CENTURE TEXTILES. REAL VALUE OF CENTURY TEXTILES WILL BE UNLOCK WHEN IT WILL DEMERGE ITS REAL ESTATE ARM BIRLA ESTATES. BIRLA ESTATES DEVELOPS REAL ESTATES BUSINESS ON LAND BANK OF CENTURY TEXTILES BECAUSE TEXTILE MILLS IN MUMBAI AND OTHER PARTS MAHARASHTRA ARE CLOSED DUE LABOUR UNION ISSUES. SO BIRLA ESTATE WILL GET ALL THE LAND BANK OF CENTURY TEXTILES AS FREE COST.

 

7 MARCH, 2022

BOMBAY DYEING DEALS IN TEXTILES AND REAL ESTATE. ITS REAL ESTATE BUSINESS IS NAMED AS BOMBAY REALITY. BOMBAY REALTY AT PRESENT COMES UNDER BOMBAY DYEING. BUT DUE TO HARASSMENT FROM LABOUR UNIONS ITS TEXTILE MILLS IN MUMBAI ARE CLOSED. SO THE LAND OF TEXTILE MILLS OF BOMBAY DYEING IS UNUSED. COMPANY PLANS TO BUILD REALTY PROJECTS ON THAT UNUSED LAND. WADIA GROUP HAS 700 ACRES OF LAND BANK IN MUMBAI ALONE. GROUP PLANS TO TRANSFER THIS 700 ACRES OF UNUSED LAND TO BOMBAY REALTY AS FREE COST SINCE GROUP HAS ALREADY PAID FOR IT EARLIER. SO REAL VALUE OF BOMBAY DYEING WILL GET UNLOCK WHEN ITS REALTY BUSINESS WILL GET DEMERGE. 

 

6 MARCH, 2022

CHINA OWNS $3.3 TRILLION IN CURRENCY RESERVES. UNLIKE RUSSIA, IT CANNOT USEFULLY HOLD THEM IN RENMINBI, A CURRENCY IT PRINTS. BUYING COMMODITY IS AN ALTERNATIVE TO THIS. WILL CHINA BUY GOLD ? WILL OTHER COUNTRIES ALSO BUY GOLD DUE TO FEAR OF SANCTIONS BY U.S ?

 

5 MARCH, 2022

EMBARK TRUCKS PLANS TO LAUNCH TRUCKS USING ITS SOFTWARE IN CALIFORNIA AND TEXAS BY 2024. THE AUTONOMOUS TRUCKS WOULD DRIVE ON HIGHWAYS THE PASS ON THE TRAILERS TO HUMAN DRIVEN TRUCKS FOR THE FINAL STRETCH OF CITY DELIVERIES. 

 

4 MARCH, 2022

RUSSIA PLANS TO BUILD ANOTHER GAS PIPELINE TO SUPPLY GAS TO CHINA. THIS PIPELINE WILL BE CALLED SERBIA PIPELINE 2.

 

3 MARCH, 2022

RUSSIA’S NICKEL COMPANY MMC NORILSK NICKEL PRODUCES AND MINES 6-7% OF WORLD’S TOTAL NICKEL. AND SAME COMPANY PRODUCES WORLD’S 40% OF PALLADIUM. PALLADIUM IS AN IMPORTANT SUBSTANCE TO PRODUCE SEMICONDUCTOR. WITHOUT PALLADIUM SEMICONDUCTOR CANNOT BE MADE.

 

2 MARCH, 2022

RUSSIA WILL BECOME WORLD LARGEST GAS SUPPLIER IN COMING YEARS BECAUSE OF ARTIC REGION. RUSSIA PLANS TO INVEST $300 BILLION IN ARTIC REGION FOR INFRA OF GAS. RUSSIA PLANS TO BUILD 800 KM OF GAS PIPELINE IN ARTIC REGION. 

 

1 MARCH, 2022

RUSSIA BEGAN TO SUPPLY GAS TO CHINA THROUGH SIBERIA PIPELINE WHICH IS BUILT AT COST OF $55 BILLION. THIS CURRENT SITUATION IS ONLY BECAUSE OF GAS.

 

28 FEBRUARY, 2022

WITHOUT RUSSIAN GAS, GERMANY AND OTHERS MIGHT BE FORCED TO RESTART COAL AND OIL POWER PLANTS AND RATION GAS FOR INDUSTRIAL USE AS THEY GIVE PRIORITY TO POWER GENERATION AND HEATING. IT IS THE WORST CASE SCENARIO FOR EUROPE. THIS WILL PUSH UP ALREADY HIGH PRICES OF ENERGY AND WILL ALSO INCREASE INFLATION.

 

27 FEBRUARY, 2022

BP, SHELL, TOTAL ENERGIES HOLD MAJORITY STAKES IN MAJOR OFFSHORE GAS PROJECTS IN RUSSIA. IF U.S PUT SANCTIONS ON RUSSIA THEN WHAT ABOUT GLOBAL OIL COMPANIES HAVING STAKES IN GAS PROJECTS IN RUSSIA ?

 

26 FEBRUARY, 2022

LVMH WORLD’S LEADING FASHION COMPANY SAW 2021 AS ITS BEST YEAR. ITS REVENUE WAS $72.9 BILLION WHICH IS 20% UP FROM PRE-PANDEMIC 2019 LEVELS. ITS PROFIT INCREASED BY 49% TO EURO 17.2 BILLION FROM 2019 LEVELS. CAN THIS TREND HAPPEN WITH ABFRL IN INDIA ?

 

25 FEBRUARY, 2022

INDIA’S SMARTPHONE USERS WILL BE AROUND 1 BILLION BY 2026. THIS CLEARLY SHOWS CONSUMPTION IN INDIA WILL BE DEPENDENT ON SMARTPHONES IN FUTURE. AND THIS WILL CHANGE INDIA FROM UTILITARIAN ECONOMY TO CONSUMPTION ECONOMY.

 

24 FEBRUARY, 2022

LIST OF STOCKS TO PICK UP IN SUCH FALLS: 1) MAHINDRA LOGISTICS, 2) NOCIL, 3) TATA POWER, 4) KNR CONSTRUCTIONS, 5) OLECTRA GREENTECH, 6) ABFRL.

 

23 FEBRUARY, 2022

THIS WAR IS NOT BETWEEN RUSSIA AND UKRAINE BUT IT IS BETWEEN RUSSIA AND U.S TO SUPPLY MORE GAS TO EUROPE AND OTHER PART OF WORLD. EUROPE IS DEPENDENT ON GAS TO PRODUCE ELECTRICITY SINCE THEY HAVE CLOSED ALL COAL BASED POWER PLANTS. THEIR WIND PLANTS ARE ALSO NOT WORKING DUE TO CHANGE IN DIRECTION OF WINDS. SO THIS IS BETWEEN U.S AND RUSSIA TO SUPPLY GAS TO EUROPE.

 

22 FEBRUARY, 2022

IN HONGKONG EIGHT DIGITAL BANKS (WHICH HAS NO PHYSICAL BRANCHES) COLLECTIVELY HAVE 1.1 MILLION ACCOUNTS. AND TOTAL POPULATION OF HONGKONG IS 7.4 MILLION. AIRSTAR BANK OFFERS 3.6% ANNUAL INTEREST ON PERSON’S FIRST DEPOSIT OF HK$20,000 WHICH IS HIGHER THAN 0.001% RATE THAT SOME TRADITIONAL BANKS IN HONGKONG ARE OFFERING ON CURRENT ACCOUNTS. CAN SUCH TYPE OF BANKING SYSTEM WILL EVOLVE IN INDIA ?

 

21 FEBRUARY, 2022

RUSSIA BEGAN TO SUPPLY GAS TO CHINA THROUGH SIBERIA PIPELINE WHICH IS BUILT AT COST OF $55 BILLION. THIS CURRENT SITUATION IS BECAUSE OF GAS CRISIS.

 

20 FEBRUARY, 2022

MARRIOT SAID ITS OCCUPANCY RATE IS AT 58% AT PRESENT, UP 23% FROM A YEAR EARLIER AND ONLY 12% BELOW PRE-PANDEMIC LEVELS. 

 

19 FEBRUARY, 2022

IMAGINE HOW MUCH STUFF WE WOULD HAVE TO MAKE UP IF WE WERE FORCED TO TALK 24/7. REMEMBER THIS WHEN WATCHING FINANCIAL NEWS ON TV.

 

18 FEBRUARY, 2022

AS LONG AS WE STICK TO OUR OWN STYLE, WE GET THE GOOD AND BAD OF OUR OWN APPROACH. WHEN WE TRY TO INCORPORATE SOMEONE ELSE’S STYLE WE OFTEN WIND UP WITH WORST OF BOTH STYLES.

 

17 FEBRUARY, 2022

BLACKSTONE IS DOUBLING ITS INVESTMENT IN WAREHOUSES IN EUROPE DUE TO INCREASE OF SAME DAY DELIVERY CONCEPT. BLACKSTONE WILL INVEST $24 BILLION IN ITS EUROPEAN SUBSIDIARY CALLED MILEWAY WHICH LOOKS AFTER WAREHOUSING BUSINESS OF BLACKSTONE IN EUROPE. SAME GOES FOR AP MOLLAR-MAERSK. MAERSK IS ACQUIRING LAST MILE LOGISTICS COMPANIES IN ASIA, EUROPE AND U.S. COMPANY IS FOCUSING MORE ON SUPPLY LOGISTICS WHICH HAS WAREHOUSES RATHER THAN ITS FOCUS ON CONTAINER SHIPPING. ITS WAREHOUSE PORTFOLIO HAS INCREASED FROM 20 WAREHOUSES IN 2020 TO 120 IN 2021. ITS FOCUS IS ON SUPPLY AND LAST MILE LOGISTICS.

 

16 FEBRUARY, 2022

USED CARS PRICES SURGE PAST ORIGINAL VALUE OF SOME MODELS IN U.S

 

15 FEBRUARY, 2022

A DEVICE BASED AT A U.K FACILITY IN OXFORDSHIRE HAS PRODUCED THE HIGHEST SUSTAINED NUCLEAR FUSION ENERGY EVER RECORDED. THE RESULTS OF THE DECEMBER EXPERIMENT, WHICH GENERATED 59 MEGAJOULES OF FUSION ENERGY FOR FIVE SECONDS. NUCLEAR FUSION, THE SAME PROCESS THAT POWERS THE SUN OCCURS WHEN HYDROGEN GASES ARE SUPERHEATED TO FORM PLASMA. THE PROCESS BRINGS TOGETHER HYDROGEN ATOMS THAT COMBINE TO FORM HELIUM AND RELEASE A TREMENDOUS AMOUNT OF ENERGY AT THE SAME TIME. THE JOINT EUROPEAN TORUS, OR JET, IN OXFORDSHIRE IS A DOUGHNUT SHAPED DEVICE CALLED A TOKAMAK THAT CAN HEAT GASES AT 150 MILLION DEGREES. NOT ALL TOKAMAKS CAN COMBINE THE SAME TYPES OF HYDROGEN ATOMS. WHAT MAKES JET UNIQUE IS THAT IT IS THE ONLY TOKAMAK THAT CAN HARNESS A MIX OF DEUTERIUM AND TRITIUM. THESE TWO TYPES OF HYDROGEN HAVE THE POTENTIAL TO HELP REALIZE THE GOAL OF SUSTAINED NET GAIN IN FUSION ENERGY PRODUCTION. DEMONSTRATING THAT THIS PARTICULAR FUEL MIX PRODUCES SUSTAINED ENERGY IS KEY STEP TO REALIZE FUTURE POWERED BY NUCLEAR FUSION. IF FUSION IS MAINTAINED FOR FIVE SECONDS, IT CAN BE MAINTAINED FOR FIVE MINUTES AND THEN FOR FIVE HOURS AS IT SCALES UP ITS OPERATIONS IN FUTURE MACHINES.

 

14 FEBRUARY, 2022

UNILEVER PLANS TO SELL OR SEPARATE ITS FOOD BUSINESS. COMPANY HAS SET HIGH AMBITIONS FOR ITS HEALTHCARE, BEAUTY AND HYGIENE SEGMENT.

 

13 FEBRUARY, 2022

CHINA IS BUILDING PORTS, HOSPITALS AND ALL IN AFRICA. IN SHORT IN FEW YEARS AFRICA CAN BE UNDER INFLUENCE OF CHINA.

 

12 FEBRUARY, 2022

NIKE HAS CUT AROUND HALF OF ITS WHOLESALE DISTRIBUTORS IN U.S AS IT HAS PUT MORE EMPHASIS ON SELLING PRODUCTS THROUGH ITS OWN APP, WEBSITES AND STORES. SUCH DIRECT SALES NOW ACCOUNT FOR ROUGHLY 40% OF NIKE’S ANNUAL $44 BILLION REVENUE.

 

11 FEBRUARY, 2022

REVENUE OF KNR CONSTRUCTIONS GREW FROM RS 1,679 CR IN 2017 TO RS 2,903 CR IN 2021. COMPANY’S NET PROFIT GREW FROM RS 90 CRORE IN 2019 TO RS 375 CRORE IN 2021. AS ON 31ST DECEMBER 2021, TOTAL ORDER BOOK OF KNR CONSTRUCTIONS STANDS AT RS 10,009 CRORE. ON STANDALONE BASIS COMPANY IS DEBT FREE AND ON CONSOLIDATE BASIS COMPANY’S DEBT IS RS 901 CRORE. I THINK ITS THE ONLY COMPANY IN HIGHWAY SEGMENT WHICH HAS SUCH LOW DEBT.

 

10 FEBRUARY, 2022

DISNEY HAS KEPT $11 BILLION ASIDE FOR SPORTS AND SPORTS RIGHTS. THIS MONTH OR MAY BE NEXT MONTH THERE IS BIDDING FOR IPL AND BCCI SPORTS RIGHTS. VERY INTERESTING.

 

9 FEBRUARY, 2022

IN INDIA BOYS FROM TIER II AND TIER III TOWNS OR CITIES HAVE STARTED TAKING E-GAMING AS THEIR CARRIER. THEY ARE PLAYING FOR THE TEAMS WHICH SELECTS THEM TO PLAY. SUCH TEAMS PROVIDES THEM MONTHLY PACKAGE ACCORDING TO THEIR PLAYING SKILLS. THESE BOYS ARE EARNING AROUND RS 50,000 TO RS 5,00,000 PER MONTH.

 

8 FEBRUARY, 2022

USED CAR PRICES IN U.S SURGE PAST ORIGINAL VALUE OF SOME MODELS.

 

7 FEBRUARY, 2022

FORD SAID IT EXPECTS GLOBAL VEHICLE DELIVERIES TO INCREASE BY RANGE OF 10% TO 15%. IT PRETAX PROFIT MAY RISE 15% TO 25% TO RANGE OF $11.5 BILLION TO $12.5 BILLION IN 2022.

 

6 FEBRUARY, 2022

RELIANCE MIGHT ENTER NBFC SECTOR SINCE RELIANCE RETAIL HAS HIGHEST RETAIL STORES IN INDIA. SO IT HAS HIGHEST CUSTOMER BASE. SO IT MAY PROVIDE FINANCING TO ITS CUSTOMER FOR WHITE CONSUMER GOODS OR FOR ANY OTHER PRODUCTS. AT PRESENT BAJAJ FINANCE IS THE LARGEST PLAYER IN FINANCING FOR WHITE CONSUMER GOODS. WILL ENTRY OF RELIANCE IN NBFC IS THREAT TO BAJAJ FINANCE?

 

5 FEBRUARY, 2022

REAL VALUE OF BOMBAY WILL GET UNLOCK WHEN ITS REALTY BUSINESS WILL GET DEMERGE. BOMBAY DYEING HAS 700 ACRES OF LAND BANK IN MUMBAI ALONE WHICH IS STILL UNUSED. TEXTILE MILLS IN MUMBAI ARE SHUT DOWN SO THIS LAND IS UNUSED AT PRESENT. THIS LAND BELONGS TO WADIA GROUP’S TRUST AND OTHER GROUP COMPANIES. WADIA GROUP PLANS TO TRANSFER THIS 700 ACRE OF UNUSED LAND TO BOMBAY REALTY AT FREE COST SINCE GROUP HAS ALREADY PAID FOR IT EARLIER. BOMBAY REALTY AT PRESENTLY COMES UNDER BOMBAY DYEING. CAN THIS UNLOCK THE VALUE OF BOMBAY DYEING ?

 

4 FEBRUARY, 2022

TENSION BETWEEN U.S AND RUSSIA HAVE SHAKE OUT THE ALUMINIUM SECTOR. THE PRICE OF ALUMINIUM HAS INCREASED BY 24% IN PAST SIX MONTHS TO MORE THAN $3100 A TON. RUSSIA IS WORLD’S BIGGEST ALUMINIUM PRODUCER AND IF CONFLICT TAKES PLACE IT WOULD CREATE UNREST IN GLOBAL ALUMINIUM MARKET. ON OTHER SIDE DUE TO LOW SUPPLY NATURAL GAS TO EUROPE BY RUSSIA HAS CAUSED INCREASE IN ENERGY PRICES BY FIVE TIMES. THIS HAS LED TO CLOSURE OF ALUMINIUM PLANTS IN EUROPE AND CHINA BECAUSE ENERGY ACCOUNTS FOR MORE THAN HALF THE COST TO PRODUCE ALUMINIUM. ALCOA CORP SAID IT WOULD CLOSE ITS ALUMINIUM PLANT IN SPAIN WHICH HAS ANNUAL CAPACITY OF 2.28,000 TONS. NORSK HYDRO A NORWEGIAN ALUMINIUM PRODUCER SAID IT WOULD CUT PRODUCTION OF ALUMINIUM BY 60% AT ITS SLOVAK PLANT. AROUND 4 MILLION TONS OF ALUMINIUM PRODUCTION CAPACITY WILL BE CLOSED GLOBALLY DUE TO RISE IN PRICES OF ENERGY. STOCK PILES OF ALUMINIUM IN WAREHOUSES APPROVED BY LONDON METAL EXCHANGE HAVE CAME DOWN TO 8,50,000 TONS, THE LOWEST LEVEL SINCE 2007. ALUMINIUM SUPPLY SHORTAGE TO DEMAND MAY FALL TO 1 MILLION TON IN 2022. ALUMINIUM PRICE MAY INCREASE ABOVE $4,000 A TON.

 

3 FEBRUARY, 2022

UNILEVER PLANS TO SELL OR SEPARATE ITS FOOD BUSINESS. COMPANY HAS SET HIGH AMBITIONS FOR ITS HEALTHCARE, BEAUTY AND HYGIENE SEGMENTS.

 

2 FEBRUARY, 2022

IN U.S AUTO INSURANCE INSURANCE COMPANIES ARE PLANNING TO INCREASE THE PREMIUMS BECAUSE SHORTAGE OF CHIPS HAS CAUSE SHORTAGE OF NEW CARS AND THIS HAS FORCED PEOPLE TO USE AND BUY SECOND HAND CARS. SECOND HAND OR USED CARS ARE ALREADY OLD SO THEY REQUIRES REPAIRS FREQUENTLY. CAN THIS HAPPEN WITH INDIAN AUTO INSURANCE COMPANIES?

 

1 FEBRUARY, 2022

CHINA IS BUILDING PORTS, HOSPITALS AND ALL IN AFRICA. IN SHORT IN FEW YEARS AFRICA CAN BE UNDER INFLUENCE OF CHINA.

 

31 JANUARY, 2022

BULL MARKETS ARE BORN ON PESSIMISM, GROW ON SKEPTICISM, MATURE ON OPTIMISM AND DIE ON EUPHORIA.

 

30 JANUARY, 2022

IT’S WAITING THAT HELPS US AS AN INVESTOR, AND A LOT OF PEOPLE JUST CAN’T STAND TO WAIT.

 

29 JANUARY, 2022

TOBACCO AND OIL GOES HAND IN HAND. IN TOBACCO HEALTH ISSUES AND IN OIL IT IS ENVIRONMENT ISSUES. MANY TOBACCO COMPANIES HAVE STARTED FMCG BUSINESS AS DIVERSIFICATION AND OIL COMPANIES HAVE STARTED RENEWABLE ENERGY BUSINESS AS DIVERSIFICATION. BUT STILL EVEN AFTER STARTING FMCG BUSINESS TOBACCO REMAINS MAJOR REVENUE CONTRIBUTOR FOR MANY TOBACCO COMPANIES AND OIL REMAINS MAJOR REVENUE CONTRIBUTOR FOR OIL COMPANIES DESPITE OF STARTING RENEWABLE BUSINESS. THIS IS BECAUSE CIGARETTE SALES MAY FALL BUT PRICE OF CIGARETTE WILL NEVER FALL IN FACT PRICE OF CIGARETTE WILL GO ON INCREASING MORE THAN ENOUGH TO COMPENSATE IT. SAME WITH OIL. OIL SALES MAY FALL BECAUSE GOVERNMENT WANT GREEN ALTERNATIVE BUT OIL SALES WILL NOT COME TO ZERO AND ON OTHER SIDES PRICE OF OIL WILL KEEP ON INCREASING TO BOOST PROFIT MARGINS.

 

28 JANUARY, 2022

PE INVESTORS AND VENTURE CAPITAL MADE A RECORD $67 BILLION OF INVESTMENT IN INDIA IN 2021.

 

27 JANUARY, 2022

AMAZON REPRESENTED 11.7% OF UPS’S $97.3 BILLION REVENUE IN 2021.

 

26 JANUARY, 2022

HAPPY REPUBLIC DAY.

 

25 JANUARY, 2022

NAVIGARE LOGISTICS, AMON MARITIME AND MOSVOLDS REDRI HAVE JOINED TOGETHER TO OFFER SHORT SEA BULK TRANSPORTATION ON VESSELS POWERED ENTIRELY BY AMMONIA. 8K AMMONIA BUNKERING VESSEL FIRST OF ITS KIND IN KOREA WILL BE DUEL FUEL SHIP RUNNING ON DIESEL AND AMMONIA.

 

24 JANUARY, 2022

U.S FOOD SYSTEM IS UNDER STRESS DUE TO COVID. ONE IN TEN WORKERS IN PROCESSING PLANT OR IN FOOD DISTRIBUTION NETWORK IS SICK DUE TO COVID. THIS HAS CAUSE TO INCREASE DEMAND SUPPLY PROBLEMS.

 

23 JANUARY, 2022

GM AND FORD BOTH ARE ENTERING INTO USED CAR SEGMENT. GM WILL LAUNCH NEW WEBSITE CAR BRAVO AND FORD HAS LAUNCHED PLATFORM CALLED BLUE ADVANTAGE FOR USED CARS.

 

22 JANUARY, 2022

GOVERNMENT OF INDIA SAYS HYDROGEN POLICY WILL BE READY IN NEXT TEN DAYS. THEY WILL OFFER LAND NEAR PORTS FOR CREATING BUNKERS FOR HYDROGEN AND AMMONIA.

 

21 JANUARY, 2022

NITRIC ACID DEMAND IN INDIA STOOD AT 575 THOUSAND TONNES IN FY21 AND IS EXPECTED TO REACH 930.98 THOUSAND TONNES BY 2030 GROWING AT A CAGR OF 5.50% DEEPAK FERTILISERS IS THE LARGEST MANUFACTURER OF NITRIC ACID IN INDIA AND SECOND LARGEST IN SOUTH ASIA.

 

20 JANUARY, 2022

RECENTLY JOHN DEERE LAUNCH FULLY AUTOMATIC TRACTOR WHICH GIVES FARMERS THE ABILITY TO PLOW THEIR FIELDS WITHOUT SEATING ON TRACTOR. TRACTOR AUTOMATICALLY STOPS WHEN IT SEES A ROCK OR OTHER OBSTRUCTION IN THE FIELD. SIMILARLY HYUNDAI INTRODUCE DRIVERLESS YACHT. NOW HYUNDAI IS TRYING TO BUILD DRIVERLESS AND AUTOMATIC CARGO SHIPS. APPLE BROUGHT SMART MIRROR. IN THIS THE WHOLE PHONE GETS CONNECTED TO MIRROR AND MIRROR ACTS AS A DISPLAY. SAMSUNG BROUGHT VIDEO PROJECTOR, SMART SPEAKER AND LIGHTNING SYSTEM ALL IN ONE WHICH IS ACTUALLY A PORTABLE SCREEN AND ENTERTAINMENT DEVICE. THE FREESTYLE PROJECTOR CAN ROTATE 180 DEGREE TO TURN ANYTHING INTO DISPLAY FROM OUR FLOORS TO WALLS AND CEILING. THERE IS ONE COMPANY WHICH IS GOING TO INTRODUCE SMART DOORS. MEANS ONE DOES NOT NEED TO STAND UP AND OPEN THE DOOR. IT WILL BE FULLY AUTOMATIC DOORS WHICH WILL OPEN BY SENSORS ONCE THEY DETECT OR IDENTIFY THE FACE OF THE PERSON. MANY SUCH TECHNOLOGIES WILL COME IN FUTURE BECAUSE EARLIER WORLD REVOLUTION WAS BROUGHT THROUGH INDUSTRIES SO IT WAS CALLED AS INDUSTRIAL REVOLUTION BUT NOW REVOLUTION AROUND THE WORLD WILL BE BROUGHT BY TECHNOLOGIES SO IT WILL BE CALLED TECHNOLOGY REVOLUTION. AND ALL THIS TECHNOLOGIES ARE POSSIBLE ONLY BECAUSE OF SENSORS, AI, MACHINE LEARNING AND CHIPS.

 

19 JANUARY, 2022

IN JAPAN POWER COMPANIES ARE EXPERIMENTING WITH COFIRING AMMONIA IN COAL BASED POWER PLANTS WITH THE AIM OF CONVERTING ENTIRELY TO AMMONIA ONE DAY.

 

18 JANUARY, 2022

IN U.S AROUND 20,000 CHEMISTS OR PHARMACY STORES ARE CLOSED BECAUSE WORKERS WORKING IN PHARMACY STORES ARE DOWN WITH COVID. SAME GOES WITH AIRLINES. MANY AIRLINES IN U.S HAVE CANCELLED FLIGHTS BECAUSE THEIR EMPLOYEES ARE DOWN WITH COVID. EVEN IN RESTAURANTS DESPITE OF 50% SITTING ALLOWANCE MANY RESTAURANTS ARE CLOSED OR FEW OF THEM ARE OPERATING ONLY ONLINE BECAUSE THEIR EMPLOYEES ARE DOWN IN COVID. AND SUCH SCENARIO IS ALMOST IN EVERY SECTOR OF U.S . SO ALL THIS HAS AGAIN INCREASED THE DEMAND SUPPLY GAP. WAITING OF SHIPS TO UNLOAD GOODS IN U.S HAS INCREASED FROM 90 DAYS TO 104 DAYS.

 

17 JANUARY, 2022

LEASING ACTIVITY IN WAREHOUSE SEGMENT GREW BY 57% Y-O-Y TO CROSS 30 MILLION SQ.FT IN 2021. OVERALL ABSORPTION IS EXPECTED TO CROSS 35 MILLION SQ.FT IN 2022 AND SUPPLY WILL CROSS 30 MILLION SQ.FT.

 

16 JANUARY, 2022

INDIA IS THE SECOND LARGEST CONSUMER OF FERTILISER IN THE WORLD WITH AN ANNUAL CONSUMPTION OF MORE THAN 55 MILLION METRIC TONS.

 

15 JANUARY, 2022

DISNEY SAYS COMPANY IS SHAKING UP ITS STREAMING MANAGEMENT AND FORMING A NEW HUB FOR INTERNATIONAL CONTENT CREATION AS THE COMPANY SEARCHES FOR FURTHER GROWTH AMID INTENSE COMPETITION. MR CHAPEK CEO OF DISNEY SAYS COMPANY WOULD HEAVILY FOCUS ON ITS STREAMING BUSINESS IN 2022. HE SAYS RIGHT NOW CONSUMER BEHAVIOR AND INDUSTRY BEHAVIOR TELLS THAT THE WAY THEY WANT TO EXPERIENCE ENTERTAINMENT IS CHANGING AND ITS CHANGING FAST DUE TO TECHNOLOGY AND PANDEMIC. HE SAYS COMPANY EXPECTS TO HAVE AROUND 260 MILLION PAID DISNEY+ SUBSCRIBERS GLOBALLY BY 2024.

 

14 JANUARY, 2022

HAPPY MAKAR SANKRANTI.

 

13 JANUARY, 2022

INDIAN GOVERNMENT ENCOURAGES INDIAN FERTILISER COMPANIES TO TIE UP WITH FOREIGN COMPANIES TO INCREASE THE PRODUCTION.

 

12 JANUARY, 2022

U.S FOOD SYSTEM IS UNDER STRESS DUE TO COVID. 1 IN 10 WORKERS IN PROCESSING PLANT OR IN FOOD DISTRIBUTION NETWORK IS SICK DUE TO COVID. THIS HAS CAUSE TO INCREASE DEMAND SUPPLY PROBLEMS.

 

11 JANUARY, 2022

TATA POWER REAL VALUE WILL GET UNLOCK WHEN COMPANY WILL RAISE FUNDS FOR ITS RENEWABLE BUSINESS.

 

10 JANUARY, 2022

THE BEST WAY TO MEASURE OUR INVESTING SUCCESS IS NOT BY WHETHER WE ARE BEATING THE MARKET BUT BY WHETHER WE HAVE PUT IN PLACE OF FINANCIAL PLAN AND HAVE A BEHAVIORAL DISCIPLINE THAT ARE LIKELY TO GET US WHERE WE WANT TO GO.

 

9 JANUARY, 2022

THE GENUINE INVESTOR IN COMMON STOCKS DOES NOT NEED A GREAT EQUIPMENT OF BRAIN AND KNOWLEDGE, BUT HE DOES NEED SOME UNUSUAL QUALITIES OF CHARACTER.

 

8 JANUARY, 2022

SINCE THERE IS SUPPLY CRISIS IN U.S STEEL MAKERS IN U.S ARE BUYING OUT SCRAP BUSINESSES. SO THAT THEY CAN MAKE STEEL FROM SCRAP INSTEAD OF MINING IT. AND AT PRESENT IN MINING THERE IS HUGE SHORTAGE OF LABOUR THATS WHY STEEL MAKERS HAVE TURN TO SCRAP BUSINESSES FOR RAW MATERIAL. STEEL MAKER MAKES STEEL BY MELTING SCRAP OR PROCESSED IRON IN ELECTRIC FURNACES, THIS PRODUCTION PROCESS NOW ACCOUNTS FOR ABOUT 70% OF THE STEEL MADE IN U.S. THIS IS LOW COST PROCESS WITH REDUCED CARBON EMISSION. BY END OF 2024 AROUND 10 MILLION TONS A YEAR OF NEW CAPACITY FOR MAKING FLAT ROLLED STEEL WILL BE ADDED BY U.S

 

7 JANUARY, 2022

IN U.S MANY COMMERCIAL BUILDING ARE BEING CONVERTED INTO RESIDENTIAL BUILDING DUE TO INCREASE DEMAND IN RESIDENTIAL PROJECTS AND FALL IN DEMAND OF COMMERCIAL PROJECTS. AROUND 1,000 NEW OFFICE BUILDING WILL GET CONVERTED INTO RESIDENTIAL PROJECT.

 

6 JANUARY, 2022

WE WORK FOUNDER ADAM NEUMANN IS ENTERING INTO BUSINESS CALLED APARTMENT LANDLORD. ADAM IS ACQUIRING MAJORITY STAKES IN MORE THAN 4,000 APARTMENT. ADAM WANTS TO BUILD A COMPANY THAT WOULD SHAKE UP RENTAL HOUSING INDUSTRY.

 

5 JANUARY, 2022

ENERGY RELATED APPLICATIONS FOR METHANOL ARE THE FASTEST GROWING SEGMENTS FOR METHANOL DEMAND AND AT PRESENT REPRESENT 40% OF GLOBAL METHANOL CONSUMPTION.

 

4 JANUARY, 2022

DANISH COMPANY BLUE WORLD TECHNOLOGIES PRODUCES METHANOL FUEL CELL RANGE EXTENDERS TO INCREASE BATTERY ELECTRIC CAR’S RANGE, ALLOWING THEN TO REACH 1,000 KM, WHICH IS FAR BEYOND THE RANGE OF AN AVERAGE ELECTRIC VEHICLE AT CURRENT TIME.

 

3 JANUARY, 2022

AMMONIA IS MORE THAN A FERTILISER. THE GAS LIQUIFIES EASILY UNDER LIGHT PRESSURE AND CHILLING, AND CAN BE TRANSPORTED TO GENERATE CARBON FREE ELECTRICITY. IT CAN ALSO BE CRACKED INTO HYDROGEN A VALUABLE SOURCE FOR FUEL CELL VEHICLES.

 

2 JANUARY, 2022

WARTSILA SHIP ENGINE BUILDER SAYS THEY EXPECTS TO HAVE AMMONIA FUELLED ENGINE OPERATING NEXT YEAR AND PURE HYDROGEN ENGINE IN 2025. THE COMPANY ALSO PLANS TO LAUNCH NEW METHANOL BURNING ENGINE BY 2023. COMPANY SAID METHANOL ENGINES ARE AVAILABLE, THE INFRASTRUCTURE IS AVAILABLE, METHANOL IS AVAILABLE AND ITS AFFORDABLE SO ONLY THING IS TO ACT NOW.

 

1 JANUARY, 2022

HAPPY NEW YEAR.

 

31 DECEMBER, 2021

IN U.S TOP EIGHT MEDIA PLAYERS ARE PLANNING TO INVEST $115 BILLION ON CONTENT MAKING OR MOVIE MAKING FOR OTT PLATFORMS. DISNEY’S INVESTMENT IN STREAMING CONTENT IS LIKEY TO GROW 35-40% IN 2022. NETFLIX IS SET TO SPEND MORE THAN $17 BILLION ON CONTENT NEXT YEAR, UP 25% FROM 2021 AND 57% FROM THE $10.8 BILLION IT SPENT IN 2020.

 

30 DECEMBER, 2021

IF THE ART OF INVESTING WAS ACTUALLY EASY, OR QUICKY ACHIEVED, NO ONE WOULD BE IN THE LOWER OR MIDDLE CLASS .

 

29 DECEMBER, 2021

PILOTS OF CATHAY PACIFIC AIRLINES ARE RESIGNING ON LARGE SCALE DUE TO STRICT QUARANTINE RULES.

 

28 DECEMBER, 2021

ENTERING IN BIGGER QUANTITIES AT BIGGER LEVELS IS EASY BUT ENTERING SMALL CAP OR UNDERVALUED SECTOR IN BIG QUANTITIES AND HAVING CONVICTION THAT INVESTED SMALL CAP WILL BECOME LARGE CAP OR MID CAP IS REAL INVESTING. AND THAT CONVICTION COMES ONLY BY READING 7-8 HOURS A DAY.

 

27 DECEMBER, 2021

SEMICONDUCTOR PROBLEM WILL NOT LAST FOREVER. IN SIX MONTHS THINGS WILL BE NORMAL. SO AT PRESENT CAR PRODUCTION CUT DUE TO CHIP SHORTAGE WILL EASE IN NEXT SIX MONTHS. CAR PRODUCTION WILL EASE MEANS TYRE SALES WILL ALSO INCREASE AND TYRE SALES WILL INCREASE SO DO THE SALES OF NOCIL. BECAUSE IN INDIA NOCIL ENJOYS THE MONOPOLY IN RUBBER CHEMICALS. PLUS NOCIL IS DEBT FREE AND DEBT FREE IS STRESS FREE.

 

26 DECEMBER, 2021

INDIAN COSMETIC MARKET WILL GROW AT A CAGR OF 16.39% BY 2026. INDIAN PHARMACEUTICALS MARKET WILL GROW TO $130 BILLION BY 2030 FROM $42 BILLION IN 2021. INDIAN PAINTS AND COATING SECTOR WILL GROW AT A CAGR OF 9-10% BY 2026. BY 2025 THE CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY IN INDIA MAY EMERGED AS THE THIRD LARGEST ON GLOBAL LEVELS. SO MORE AND MORE PAINTS WILL BE REQUIRED. BUT COSMETICS, PHARMA, PAINTS AND COATING REQUIRES ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL AS A RAW MATERIAL. SO BY SEEING THE GROWTH OF COSMETICS, PHARMA AND PAINT SECTOR, THE GROWTH OF ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL WILL ALSO BE HUGE.

 

25 DECEMBER, 2021

MERRY CHRISTMAS.

 

24 DECEMBER, 2021

GLOBAL METHANOL MARKET IS EXPECTED TO GROW FROM $28.74 BILLION IN 2021 TO $39.18 BILLION IN 2028. GROWING AT A CAGR OF 5%.

 

23 DECEMBER, 2021

DEEPAK FERTILISERS HAS PRODUCTION CAPACITY OF METHANOL AT 1,00,000 MTPA BY 2025, INDIAN METHANOL PRODUCTION IS EXPECTED TO REACH 20 MEGA TONNES BY USING INDIAN HIGH ASH COAL, STRANDED GAS AND BIOMASS AS PER THE METHANOL ECONOMY PROGRAM INITIATED BY NITI AYOG. THIS IS EXPECTED TO HAVE A SIGNIFICANT IMPACT ON IMPORT SUBSTITUTION OF CRUDE OIL FOR INDIA, AND CONSEQUENTLY INCREASE THE USAGE OF METHANOL. NITI AYOG HAS ALSO DRAWN OUT A PLAN TO REPLACE 20% OF CRUDE OIL IMPORTS BY METHANOL ALONE, SEEN TO LEAD A REDUCTION IN ANNUAL FUEL BILL OF INDIA BY 15% TILL 2030. POSITIVE FOR DEEPAK FERTILISER.

 

22 DECEMBER, 2021

THE REASON BUFFETT IS SUCCESSFUL IS NOT BECAUSE HE HAS MAGIC STOCK WAND, BUT RATHER HAS UNBELIEVABLE ABILITY TO STICK TO HIS STYLE.

 

21 DECEMBER, 2021

SELLING OF CERTAIN PACKAGED FOOD CATEGORIES ONLINE HAVE OVERTAKEN SELLING THROUGH MODERN TRADE (PHYSICAL STORES OR MALLS).

 

20 DECEMBER, 2021

DEEPAK FERTILISERS ENJOYS 43% MARKET SHARE IN INDIAN TECHNICAL AMMONIUM NITRATE MARKET.

 

19 DECEMBER, 2021

GOVERNMENT IS PLANNING TO BRING PLI SCHEME FOR HEADPHONE AND WEARABLE SECTOR.

 

18 DECEMBER, 2021

BEST PLANS TO GO FULLY ELECTRIC, NON FOSSIL FUEL BASED BUSES BY 2027 WITH TARGET OF 2,100 ELECTRIC BUSES BY 2023.

 

17 DECEMBER, 2021

THERE WILL BE NO WORKING POPULATION IN GERMANY BY 2025 DUE TO AGEING POPULATION. GERMANY WILL NEED FOUR LAKH IMMIGRANTS EVERY YEAR BY 2025 TO RUN ECONOMIC ACTIVITIES SMOOTHLY. SO FOR THIS THEY ARE GIVING INCENTIVES LIKE FREE EDUCATION AND HEALTHCARE TO CHILDREN OF IMMIGRANTS AND MANY OTHER SUCH FACILITIES. INDIA WILL BE THE ONLY NATION IN WORLD WHICH WILL HAVE YOUNGEST POPULATION BY 2025. JUST IMAGINE THE GROWTH OF INDIA.

 

16 DECEMBER, 2021

DUE TO GLOBAL SHORTAGE OF THE CHEMICAL INGREDIENTS USED TO MAKE FERTILISER WHICH IS WIDELY APPLIED TO SOIL TO BOOST CORN AND WHEAT YIELDS, HAS SENT FERTILISER PRICE SOARING. FERTILISER PRICES HAVE INCREASED MORE THAN DOUBLE IN U.S AS COMPARED TO LAST YEAR. BECAUSE OF THIS MANY FARMERS IN U.S HAS SHIFT TO CROPS LIKE SOYABEAN WHCIH REQUIRES LESS FERTILISER. PLUS CHINA HAS BANNED EXPORT OF PHOSPHATE TO U.S WHICH IS MAJOR COMPONENT IN FERTILISER. THIS WILL FURTHER CREATE SHORTAGE OF FERTILISER IN U.S.  SHORTAGE OF FERTILISER WILL CREATE SHORTAGE OF FOOD IN U.S. INDIA PRODUCES PHOSPHATE AND FERTILISERS. WILL INDIA EXPORT PHOSPHATE AND FERTILISERS TO U.S ?

 

15 DECEMBER, 2021

THE ESSENCE OF INVESTMENT MANAGEMENT IS THE MANAGEMENT OF RISK, NOT THE MANAGEMENT OF RETURNS.

 

14 DECEMBER, 2021

TATA POWER RECEIVES LETTER OF AWARD FROM MSEDCL FOR SETTING UP OF 300 MW HYBRID (WIND & SOLAR) PROJECT.

 

13 DECEMBER, 2021

INDIA HAS THE OPPORTUNITY TO EXPORT THE LOWEST COST CLEAN AMMONIA IN THE WORLD. SHIPPING INDUSTRY IS ALREADY MOVING TOWARDS USING AMMONIA AS A TRANSPORTATION FUEL.

 

12 DECEMBER, 2021

CHARGING STATIONS HAVE BEEN INCLUDED AS PART OF WAYSIDE AMENITIES BEING AWARDED BY THE NATIONAL HIGHWAY AUTHORITY OF INDIA AND THIS WILL BE FOLLOWED IN ALL EXISTING AND UPCOMING HIGHWAYS. OPPORTUNITY FOR TATA POWER.

 

11 DECEMBER, 2021

TYSON FOODS SAID IT PLANS TO SPEND ABOUT $1.3 BILLION IN ROBOTS DUE TO LABOUR SHORTAGE. OUT OF THESE $1.3 BILLION COMPANY WILL INVEST $500 MILLION IN 2022 FISCAL YEAR. INVESTMENTS IN ROBOTS WILL HELP COMPANY TO SAVE $1 BILLION BY 2024.

 

10 DECEMBER, 2021

RAILWAYS IS GOING TO BRING TENDER OF 40GW RENEWABLE ENERGY. OPPORTUNITY FOR TATA POWER.

 

9 DECEMBER, 2021

GROFERS PLANS NOT ONLY TO DELIVER GROCERY IN TEN MINUTES BUT EVERY OTHER GOODS IN 10 MINUTES. ALL E-COMMERCE FIRMS WILL START DELIVERING GOODS IN LOWEST POSSIBLE TIME TO REMAIN AHEAD IN COMPETITION. SO ALL THIS WILL INCREASE DEMAND OF LOGISTICS AND WAREHOUSING.

 

8 DECEMBER, 2021

SELLING OF CERTAIN PACKAGED FOOD CATEGORIES ONLINE HAVE OVERTAKEN SELLING THROUGH MODERN TRADE (PHYSICAL STORES OR MALLS).

 

7 DECEMBER, 2021

INDIA HAS THE OPPORTUNITY TO EXPORT THE LOWEST COST CLEAN AMMONIA IN THE WORLD. SHIPPING INDUSTRY IS ALREADY MOVING TOWARDS USING AMMONIA AS A TRANSPORTATION FUEL.

 

6 DECEMBER, 2021

DESPITE OF VOLATILITY AND CORRECTION IN MARKET ASM TECHNOLOGIES IS STANDING LIKE A ROCK. LOW EQUITY COMPANY. TOTAL SHARES ARE 1 CRORE, OUT OF THESE, PROMOTER HOLDS AROUND 61 LAKH SHARES, SO ONLY 39 LAKH SHARES ARE OUTSTANDING.

 

5 DECEMBER, 2021

ONLY 43 FOREIGNERS VISITED BALI DURING FIRST NINE MONTHS OF 2021, DOWN FROM 6.3 MILLION IN 2019. OVERALL GLOBAL INTERNATIONAL TOURISM WILL RETURN TO PRE-PANDEMIC LEVELS BY 2024.

 

4 DECEMBER, 2021

I THINK METAL CYCLE HAS PEAKED UP. GLOBAL IRON ORE PRICES ARE DOWN BY AROUND 65%. MANY METALS ARE MADE FROM IRON ORE. SPECIALLY STEEL. SO I THINK WE CAN SEE SOME FALL IN METALS.

 

3 DECEMBER, 2021

DUE TO RISING PRICE BECAUSE OF INFLATION AND DEMAND SUPPLY GAP MR. SMITH OF BIKE MART WHO SELLS BICYCLES SAYS HE HAS ALREADY PLACED ORDERS FOR 75% TO 80% OF THE BICYCLES HE ANTICIPATES HE WILL NEED FOR CHRISTMAS 2022. THIS SEEMS PEOPLE OF U.S HAS ALREADY BEGAN PURCHASING FOR NOT ONLY THIS YEAR CHRISTMAS BUT ALSO FOR NEXT YEAR’S CHRISTMAS.

 

2 DECEMBER, 2021

DUE TO PANDEMIC, SOUTH BOMBAY’S FAMOUS SINGLE SCREEN THEATERS ROXY, CENTRAL PLAZA, LIBERTY ARE PERMANENTLY CLOSED.

 

1 DECEMBER, 2021

DEEPAK FERTILISER IS THE ONLY MANUFACTURER AND SUPPLIER OF ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL IN INDIA WITH AN INSTALLED CAPACITY OF 70,000 MTPA. ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL IS USED IN PHARMACEUTICALS, COATINGS AND INKS, SPECIALITY CHEMICALS AND COSMETICS.

 

30 NOVEMBER, 2021

INDIA’S LARGEST SOLAR AND BATTERY STORAGE PROJECT AWARDED TO TATA POWER SOLAR OF RS 945 CRORE. WITH THIS TOTAL ORDER BOOK OF TATA POWER SOLAR BUSINESS IS AROUND RUPEES 9,000 CRORES.

 

29 NOVEMBER, 2021

OLECTRA GREENTECH RECEIVED ORDER FOR 100 EV BUS WORTH RUPEES 140 CRORES. WITH THIS TOTAL ORDER BOOK OF COMPANY WILL BE AROUND 1,530 EV BUSES.

 

28 NOVEMBER, 2021

EVERYONE IS BEHIND CLEAN ENERGY. THE IDEA OF USING AMMONIA AS A CARRIER FOR HYDROGEN DELIVERY HAS GAINED TRACTION IN RECENT MONTHS BECAUSE AMMONIA IS MUCH EASIER TO LIQUIFY THAN HYDROGEN AND IS THEREFORE MUCH EASIER TO STORE AND TRANSPORT. ITS DIFFICULT TO TRANSPORT HYDROGEN BUT ITS EASIER TO TRANSPORT AMMONIA BECAUSE ITS DELIVERY SYSTEM ALREADY EXISTS. SINCE AT PRESENT ALSO IT IS EASILY TRANSPORTED AS IT IS ALREADY USED AS FERTILIZER. AMMONIA WITH HELP OF ELECTROCHEMICAL SYSTEM CAN BE EASILY CONVERTED INTO HYDROGEN AND FURTHER INTO HYDROGEN FUEL CELL. THE AMMONIA FIRST ENCOUNTERS THE CATALYST THAT SPLITS INTO NITROGEN AND HYDROGEN. THE HYDROGEN GETS IMMEDIATELY CONVERTED TO PROTON, WHICH ARE THEN ELECTRICALLY DRIVEN ACROSS THE PROTON CONDUCTING MEMBRANE IN ELECTROCHEMICAL CELL. BY CONTINUALLY PULLING OFF HYDROGEN THE REACTION GOES ON FURTHER AND PURE HYDROGEN IS SEPARATED FROM AMMONIA. THE HYDROGEN SEPARATED FROM AMMONIA SPLITTING THEN CAN BE USED IN A FUEL CELL. LIKE BATTERIES, FUEL CELLS PRODUCE ELECTRIC POWER BY CONVERTING ENERGY PRODUCE BY CHEMICAL REACTION. UNLIKE BATTERIES, FUEL CELLS CAN PRODUCE ELECTRICITY AS LONG AS FUEL IS SUPPLIED, NEVER LOSING THEIR CHARGE. HYDROGEN IS CLEAN FUEL WHEN CONSUMED IN A FUEL CELL. CONVERTING AMMONIA TO HYDROGEN IN A DISTRIBUTED WAY WE CAN GET PRESSURIZED HYDROGEN WHICH CAN BE USED FOR CARS, ELECTRICITY IN FACTORIES, IT CAN BE USED IN SHIPS ALSO BECAUSE BATTERY SHIPS ARE IMPOSSIBLE BECAUSE OF RANGE PROBLEM AND IMPOSSIBLE TO BUILD CHARGING INFRA IN MIDDLE OF OCEANS, IT CAN ALSO BE USED IN AIRCRAFTS BECAUSE ELECTRIC FLIGHTS ARE NOT POSSIBLE DUE TO RANGE PROBLEM.

 

27 NOVEMBER, 2021

ONLY 43 FOREIGNERS VISITED BALI DURING FIRST NINE MONTHS OF 2021, DOWN FROM 6.3 MILLION IN 2019. OVERALL GLOBAL INTERNATIONAL TOURISM WILL RETURN TO PRE-PANDEMIC LEVELS BY 2024.

 

26 NOVEMBER, 2021

AT ALL TIMES, IN ALL MARKETS, IN ALL PARTS OF THE WORLD, THE TINIEST CHANGE IN RATES CHANGES THE VALUE OF EVERY FINANCIAL ASSET.

 

25 NOVEMBER, 2021

D2C SPACE WILL CREATE DISRUPTION TO BIGGER COMPANIES IN FMCG, FASHION, BEAUTY AND OTHER SECTORS. THATS WHY BIGGER COMPANIES ARE TAKING STAKES IN D2C BRANDS OR COMPANIES. RECENTLY ITC, EMAMI, DABUR, HUL AND ALL HAVE BOUGHT STAKES IN D2C BRANDS AND ARE DEVELOPING THEIR OWN D2C PLATFORMS. D2C SPACE WILL BE INTERESTING TO WATCH FOR.

 

24 NOVEMBER, 2021

I THINK METAL CYCLE HAS PEAKED UP. GLOBAL IRON ORE PRICES ARE DOWN BY AROUND 65%. MANY METALS ARE MADE FROM IRON ORE. SPECIALLY STEEL. SO I THINK WE CAN SEE SOME FALL IN METALS.

 

23 NOVEMBER, 2021

A NEW THING HAS STARTED IN U.S DUE TO RISE IN HOME PRICES. MANY PEOPLE IN BIGGER CITIES OF U.S ARE SELLING HOMES AT HIGHER PRICES AND ARE BUYING HOMES AT COUNTRY SIDE WHICH ARE MUCH CHEAPER AS COMPARED TO HOUSES IN BIGGER CITIES. AND THEY HAVE LEFT THEIR JOBS SINCE THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE PRICES OF HOUSES IN BIGGER CITIES AND COUNTRY SIDE IS SO HUGE THAT THEY HAVE STARTED LIVING LIFE ON THAT DIFFERENCE AMOUNT. FOR EG, PRICES OF HOUSE IN BIGGER CITIES ARE AT AROUND $6,00,000 AND HOUSES AT COUNTRY SIDE ARE AT AROUND $3,00,000. SO PEOPLE ARE LEFT WITH $3,00,000. SO FEW OF THEM THINK THE DIFFERENCE IS HANDFUL TO SPEND THEIR REMAINING LIFE. SO THEY HAVE LEFT THEIR JOBS.

 

22 NOVEMBER, 2021

EVERYONE SAYS THIS SECTOR WILL BE BIG THING IN FUTURE OR THIS THEME WILL BE BIG THING IN FUTURE BUT I BELIEVE INDIA ITSELF WILL BE A BIG THING IN COMING YEARS.

 

21 NOVEMBER, 2021

INVESTORS CAN ONLY EARN WHAT COMPANIES THEMSELVES CAN EARN. HOW CAN YOU GET ANYTHING MORE OUT OF A FARM THAN WHAT IT GROWS.

 

20 NOVEMBER, 2021

THERE IS NOTHING MAGICAL ADDED BY THE STOCK MARKET TO CORPORATE RETURNS. IT JUST DOES NOT CREATE MORE EARNINGS TO PAY OUT TO INVEST.

 

19 NOVEMBER, 2021

ROBLOX PLANS TO HELP BRING EDUCATIONAL VIDEOGAMES TO CLASSROOMS WORLDWIDE, PART OF ITS STRATEGY TO EXPAND ITS MOST TEEN AND PRETEEN USER BASE AND PLAY A ROLE IN NEXT EVALUATION KNOWN AS THE METAVERSE.

 

18 NOVEMBER, 2021

GERMANY CANCELS NORD2 PIPELINE FOR TRANSPORTATION OF NATURAL GAS. WILL RUSSIA REVERT TO THIS BY CUTTING SUPPLY OF GAS TO EUROPE ? WILL EUROPE FACE PROBLEMS IN WINTER DUE TO LOW NATURAL GAS SUPPLY ?

 

17 NOVEMBER, 2021

TESLA’S VALUATION ONLY ADDS UP IF IT HITS ITS TARGET PRODUCTION CAPACITY OF 20 MILLION VEHICLES BY 2030, AND THAT TOO AT VERY HEALTHY MARGINS. 

 

16 NOVEMBER, 2021

BIG COMPANIES OR COMPANIES HAVING BIGGER BRANDS CAN EASILY PASS ON THE INCREASED PRICE TO CONSUMER AS COMPARED TO SMALLER COMPANIES OR SMALLER BRANDS. SINCE SMALLER BRANDS ARE ON STAGE OF DEVELOPING BRANDS THEY ARE LESS KNOWN TO PEOPLE SO PASSING ON THE INCREASE PRICE TO CONSUMER FROM THEM BECOME DIFFICULT. FIRST THE FALL LESS REACH TO PEOPLE PLUS INCREASED PRICE SO PEOPLE STAY AWAY FROM THEM AND ON OTHER SIDE CONSUMERS HAVE TRUST FACTOR WITH KNOWN BRANDS SO THEY EVEN BUY PRODUCTS AT HIGHER PRICES FROM BIGGER COMPANIES OR BIGGER BRANDS.

 

15 NOVEMBER, 2021

DUE TO RISING PRICES OF COOKING OIL, MANY RESTAURANTS IN U.S ARE FACING THEFT OF COOKING OIL. MANAGEMENT OF SOME RESTAURANTS SAY THEY ARE EXPECTED TO LOSE MORE THAN $10 MILLION WORTH OF COOKING OIL TO THEFT THIS YEAR.

 

14 NOVEMBER, 2021

IN THE LONG RUN MANAGEMENT STRESSING ACCOUNTING APPEARANCE OVER ECONOMIC SUBSTANCE USUALLY ACHIEVE LITTLE OF EITHER.

 

13 NOVEMBER, 2021

IN U.S DUE TO FEAR OF LEFT OUT BECAUSE OF SUPPLY DISRUPTION PEOPLE HAVE STARTED BUYING OR ORDERING THINGS FOR CHRISTMAS FESTIVAL FROM NOW ITSELF AND THIS HAS CREATED MORE SUPPLY DISRUPTIONS.

 

12 NOVEMBER, 2021

DEEPAK FERTILIZER CAN BE ONE OF THE GREAT INVESTMENT FOR AMMONIA, WHICH WILL BE USED AS GREEN ENERGY RAW MATERIAL IN COMING MONTHS OR YEARS.

 

11 NOVEMBER, 2021

OLECTRA GREENTECH RECEIVED ORDER OF 100 BUS, WITH THIS TOTAL ORDER BOOK IS 1450 BUSES. AND GOVERNMENT ALLOTED 150 ACRES LAND FOR MANUFACTURING OF E-BUS, E-TRUCK, EV CARS AND E-SCOOTERS.

 

10 NOVEMBER, 2021

IMAX ENTERS STREAMING MARKET. IMAX KNOWN FOR ITS BIG MOVIE SCREENS IN BIG THEATERS WITH BIG SOUNDS IS COMING TO STREAMING AND PAT PER VIEW FORMAT. IT IS FIRST TIME THAT AN IMAX VERSION OF MOVIE WILL BE AVAILABLE ON MAJOR STREAMING SERVICE. DISNEY SUBSCRIBERS WON’T HAVE TO PAY EXTRA EVEN THOUGH IMAX SHOWINGS USUALLY COST SEVERAL DOLLARS MORE THAN A REGULAR MOVIE TICKET. MANY MOVIES WILL AUTOMATICALLY PLAY IN IMAX VERSION OF STREAMING AND USERS WILL HAVE THE OPTION TO SWITCH TO REGUALR FORMAT IF THEY WANT.

 

9 NOVEMBER, 2021

OLECTRA GREENTECH MAY ENTER IN E-TRUCK SEGMENT.

 

8 NOVEMBER, 2021

IN AUTOMOBILE AND POWER COMPANIES WE HAVE SEEN STRATEGIC INVESTORS INVESTING IN EV SUBSIDIARIES OR RENEWABLE ENERGY SUBSIDIARIES TO BRING DOWN DEBT AND TO EXPAND THE OPERATIONS. SAME WAY WE MIGHT SEE IN HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION COMPANIES. MANY HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION COMPANIES WILL RAISE FUNDS VIA INVIT. GOVERNMENT IS AGGRESSIVELY FOCUSING ON CONSTRUCTING HIGHWAYS. GOVERNMENT AIMS TO CONSTRUCT 60,000 KM OF WORLD CLASS HIGHWAYS BY 2024. SO MANY HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTING COMPANIES WILL RAISE FUNDS VIA INVIT TO REDUCE DEBT AND TO GRAB SUCH GREAT OPPORTUNITY.

 

7 NOVEMBER, 2021

ADAM ARON, CHIEF EXECUTIVE OF AMC ENTERTAINMENT HOLDINGS INC IS GOING TO SELL ABOUT $53 MILLION OF HIS SHARES IN THE COMPANY.

 

6 NOVEMBER, 2021

THE INDIAN SHARED MOBILITY MARKET IS EXPECTED TO GROW TO $3,952.8 MILLION IN 2025 FROM $1,025.8 MILLION IN 2019 GROWING AT A CAGR OF 56.8%.

 

5 NOVEMBER, 2021

MINNESOTA CITY IN U.S IS GOING TO PASS A BILL WHICH WOULD LIMIT RESIDENTIAL LANDLORDS TO INCREASE RENT BY JUST 3% ANNUALLY. THIS WOULD AFFECT HOUSING MARKET. BECAUSE MANY INVESTORS BUY HOUSE JUST TO ENJOY RENTAL INCOME (CONSTANT PASSIVE INCOME).

 

4 NOVEMBER, 2021

EVERY INVESTOR GIVES NAME OF 5-6 STOCKS AS TOP DIWALI PICKS BUT I WILL GIVE ONLY ONE STOCK WHICH WILL CREATE DHAMAKA IN LONG TERM. AND THE NAME IS MAHINDRA LOGISTICS. HAPPY DIWALI TO EVERYONE.

 

3 NOVEMBER, 2021

IN U.S DUE TO FEAR OF LEFT OUT BECAUSE OF SUPPLY DISRUPTION PEOPLE HAVE STARTED BUYING OR ORDERING THINGS FOR CHRISTMAS FESTIVAL FROM NOW ITSELF AND THIS HAS CREATED MORE SUPPLY DISRUPTIONS.

 

2 NOVEMBER, 2021

DEEPAK FERTILIZER CAN BE ONE OF THE GREAT INVESTMENT FOR AMMONIA, WHICH WILL BE USED AS GREEN ENERGY RAW MATERIAL IN COMING MONTHS OR YEARS.

 

1 NOVEMBER, 2021

CAR PRODUCTION IN GERMANY HAS FALLEN MORE THAN 50%

 

31 OCTOBER, 2021

OVER TIME, WE GET THE REPUTATION WE DESERVE, SAME IS TRUE FOR COMPANIES. 

 

30 OCTOBER, 2021

THE MOST IMPORTANT QUALITY FOR AN INVESTOR IS TEMPERAMENT, NOT INTELLECT.

 

29 OCTOBER, 2021

THERE IS NOTHING LIKE THE PAIN OF A LOUSY BUSINESS TO MAKE YOU APPRECIATE A GOOD ONE. 

 

28 OCTOBER, 2021

SHIPPING OPERATORS AROUND THE GLOBE ARE UNDER PRESSURE FROM GOVERNMENTS AND BIG CUSTOMERS TO GO GREEN BY USING ALTERNATIVES TO FOSSIL FUEL. NOW SHIPS CANNOT BE EV BECAUSE OF THEIR LONG RANGE DISTANCE TO TRAVEL AND NO POSSIBILITY TO BUILD CHARGING INFRASTRUCTURE IN OCEAN. SO METHANOL AND AMMONIA ARE THE TWO ALTERNATIVES TO CRUDE OIL. AP MOLLER-MAERSK, WORLD’S BIGGEST BOX SHIP OPERATOR HAS RECENTLY ORDERED EIGHT METHANOL POWERED SHIPS EXPECTED TO BE DELIVERED BY 2024 THAT CAN RUN ON BOTH METHANOL AND CRUDE OIL. MANY SHIP BUILDERS WILL BUILD SHIPS WHICH WILL RUN ON AMMONIA AS THEY CANNOT ONLY DEPEND ON METHANOL TO REDUCE SUPPLY RISK. PLUS AMMONIA IS ALSO USED TO MANUFACTURE HYDROGEN FOR USE IN FUEL CELLS. SO AMMONIA HAS OFFICIALLY BECOME MAJOR MATERIAL FOR GREEN ENERGY. AND AMMONIA IS PRODUCED BY FERTILIZER COMPANIES. INTERNATIONAL MARITIME ORGANIZATION HAS SET 2050 DEADLINE FOR SHIPPING COMPANIES TO SHARPLY REDUCE CARBON EMISSION AND TO GO GREEN.

 

27 OCTOBER, 2021

THREAD ON ETHANOL: NATURAL GAS PRICES ARE ALMOST SIX TIMES HIGHER IN MANY COUNTRIES. DUE TO THIS FERTILIZER PRODUCTION HAS DROPPED ABOUT 40% IN MANY WESTERN COUNTRIES. NATURAL GAS ACCOUNT FOR 85% OF THE PRODUCTION COST OF AMMONIA, A KEY INGREDIENT FOR MANY FERTILIZERS. HIGH NATURAL GAS PRICE HAVE MADE NITROGEN BASED FERTILIZER MORE EXPENSIVE, WITH BOTH AMMONIA AND UREA PRICES TRIPLING IN U.S THIS YEAR. DUE TO THIS MORE FARMERS ARE OPTING FROM SOYABEAN RATHER THAN CORN. AROUND 8-10 MILLION ACRES, OUT OF 90 MILLION ACRES IN TOTAL WILL SWITCH TO SOYABEAN FROM CORN. AND IN U.S ETHANOL IS MOSTLY PRODUCED FROM CORN. THIS WILL INCREASE THE PRICE OF ETHANOL IN U.S BECAUSE THERE MIGHT COME SHORTAGE OF ETHANOL SINCE FARMERS ARE SHIFTING TO SOYABEAN FROM CORN. 

 

26 OCTOBER, 2021

IN FUTURE IN WAREHOUSING SECTOR WE CAN SEE LARGE INSTITUTIONAL HOLDING OF WAREHOUSE ASSETS WITH THE POSSIBILITY OF A WAREHOUSING REIT ON HORIZON. THERE IS AN EXPECTATION FOR WAREHOUSING REIT’S TO DEVELOP 2X FASTER THAN OTHER ASSET CLASSES, DUE TO FACTORS SUCH AS LONGER AND STICKIER LEASES WITH TYPICAL LEASING RANGING FROM 7-15 YEARS. THESE ARE GOING TO BE HELD BY HIGH QUALITY TENANTS WHO INVESTS HEAVILY WITHIN WAREHOUSE ITSELF.

 

25 OCTOBER, 2021

MAJOR PROBLEMS WILL START IN U.S THIS WINTER. CITIZENS OF U.S WILL SEE HIGHER ELECTRICITY BILLS THIS WINTER. HALF OF THE U.S HOUSEHOLDS WAR THEIR HOMES WITH MAINLY NATURAL GAS. THEY CAN EXPECT TO SPEND AN AVERAGE 30% MORE ON THEIR BILLS COMPARED TO LAST YEAR. BILLS WOULD BE 50% HIGHER IF WINTER IS 20% COLDER THAN AVERAGE AND 22% HIGHER IF WINTER IS 10% WARMER THAN AVERAGE. BUT MOSTLY WINTER WILL BE COLDER. THE RISE WILL RESULT IN AN AVERAGE NATURAL GAS HOME HEATING BILL OF $756 FROM OCTOBER 1 TO MARCH COMPARED WITH $573 LAST YEAR. THE RISING PRICE OF NATURAL GAS FOR HEATING HOUSES ON TOP OF RISING PRICES OF MANY CONSUMER GOODS AND COMMODITIES IS LIKELY TO CAUSE STRESS FOR MANY AMERICANS. IN MANY PARTS OF U.S, ELECTRIC UTILITY DISCONNECTIONS HAS DOUBLED DUE TO NON PAYMENT OF BILL.

 

24 OCTOBER, 2021

TIFFANY IN PARTNERSHIP WITH RELIANCE HAS ANNOUNCE THE LAUNCH OF ITS LOCAL E-COMMERCE SITE WHERE THEY WILL SELL THE ICONIC JEWELLERY BRAND’S COLLECTION OF GEMSTONE, DIAMONDS AND CRAFTED JEWELLERY. ALL ARE BEHIND DIRECT TO CONSUMER.

 

23 OCTOBER, 2021

INDIAN GOVERNMENT HAS INTRODUCE AMRUT SCHEME. IN THIS SCHEME GOVERNMENT FOCUS AND AIM IS ON RECYCLING OF WATER AND TO MAXIMIZE THE REUSE OF THAT RECYCLED WATER. TREATMENT OF SEWAGE WATER SO THAT WATER BODIES LIKE LAKES, RIVERS AND ALL ARE NOT POLLUTED. AND IN THIS WHOLE RECYCLE SECTOR VA TECH WABAG IS A LEADING PLAYER.

 

22 OCTOBER, 2021

TO MEET GLOBAL ENERGY DEMAND, AS WELL AS CLIMATE ASPIRATIONS, INVESTMENTS IN CLEAN ENERGY WOULD NEED TO GROW FROM $1.1 TRILLION THIS YEAR TO $3.4 TRILLION A YEAR BY 2030.

 

21 OCTOBER, 2021

INDIA IS CHANGING FROM UTILITARIAN ECONOMY TO A CONSUMPTION ECONOMY.

 

20 OCTOBER, 2021

COMCAST HAS LAUNCHED TV NAMED XCLASS WITH IN BUILD STREAMING SOFTWARE. THOSE WHO BUY THIS TV WILL GET ONE YEAR STREAMING SUBSCRIPTION FOR FREE. SO NOW NO NEED FOR SCREEN MIRRORING OR , CONNECTING MOBILE OR LAPTOPS WITH TV.

 

19 OCTOBER, 2021

YOU CAN’T DO WELL INVESTING UNLESS YOU THINK INDEPENDENTLY. AND THE TRUTH IS, YOU ARE NEITHER RIGHT NOR WRONG BECAUSE PEOPLE AGREE WITH YOU. YOU ARE RIGHT BECAUSE YOUR FACTS AND REASONING ARE RIGHT. IN THE END, THAT’S WHAT COUNTS.

 

18 OCTOBER, 2021

WHAT YOU ARE LOOKING FOR IS SOME WAY TO GET ONE GOOD IDEA A YEAR, AND THEN RIDE IT TO ITS FULL POTENTIAL. AND THAT’S VERY HARD TO DO IN AN ENVIRONMENT WHERE PEOPLE ARE SHOUTING PRICES BACK AND FORTH EVERY FIVE MINUTES.

 

17 OCTOBER, 2021

THE BEST BUSINESS RETURNS ARE USUALLY ACHIEVED BY COMPANIES THAT ARE DOING SOMETHING QUITE SIMILAR TODAY TO WHAT THEY WERE DOING FIVE OR TEN YEARS AGO.

 

16 OCTOBER, 2021

GAINS WON’T COME IN SMOOTH OR UNINTERRUPTED MANNER, THEY NEVER HAVE.

 

15 OCTOBER, 2021

DROUGHT SITUATION IN AFGHANISTAN. PRICES OF DRY FRUITS WILL INCREASE MORE FURTHER.

 

14 OCTOBER, 2021

THREAD ON LOGISTICS: FROM PAST YEAR THERE HAS BEEN A 70% INCREASE IN BRANDS DEVELOPING THEIR OWN WEBSITE IN INDIA AND SELLING GOODS FROM THEIR WEBSITE INSTEAD OF SELLING GOODS THROUGH DISTRIBUTORS. LAKME, ITC, HUL, EMAMI ETC HAS LAUNCHED THEIR OWN WEBSITES TO SELL GOODS DIRECT TO CONSUMERS. D2C SELLING IS GROWING NEW OMNI CHANNEL TREND AMONG RETAILERS ACROSS FMCG, ELECTRONICS, FURNITURE, HOUSEHOLD GOODS, APPAREL AND MANY MORE. INDIA IS HOME TO AROUND 800 D2C BRANDS. BUT TO BE A SUCCESSFUL D2C PLAYER ONE NEEDS LOGISTICS. BECAUSE WITHOUT LOGISTICS D2C BUSINESS IS IMPOSSIBLE. D2C PLAYERS NEED SMART WAREHOUSING, TRACKING OF PARCELS, LABELING, CODING OF PRODUCTS, LAST MILE DELIVERY, SORTING OF GOODS AND MANY OTHER SUCH SERVICES. BUT D2C FIRMS WILL FIND IT DIFFICULT TO BUILD SUCH AUTOMATED LOGISTICS SERVICES IN HOUSE DUE TO HIGHER COST AND THEY DON’T HAVE SPECIALIZATION IN LOGISTICS LIKE BIG E-COMMERCE FIRMS AMAZON AND FLIPKART. BUT ALL SUCH AUTOMATED LOGISTICS SERVICES ARE PROVIDED BY THIRD PARTY LOGISTICS SERVICES AT CHEAPER RATES. SO TO BE SUCCESSFUL D2C PLAYER, D2C FIRMS HAVE NO OTHER OPTION RATHER THAN THIRD PARTY LOGISTICS. ITS LIKE D2C FIRMS AND THIRD PARTY LOGISTICS FIRMS ARE MADE FOR EACH OTHER. AND MAHINDRA LOGISTICS IS ONE OF THE BIGGEST THIRD PARTY LOGISTICS PLAYERS IN INDIA.

 

13 OCTOBER, 2021

BRAZIL IS FACING DROUGHT. INDIAN SUGAR WILL BECOME MORE SWEETER.

 

12 OCTOBER, 2021

BY 2025 INDIA WILL HAVE AROUND 370 MILLION ONLINE FASHION SHOPPERS. D2C BRANDS WILL GRAB SUCH OPPORTUNITY.

 

11 OCTOBER, 2021

PIZZA’S BIG GAIN DURING PANDEMIC IS STARTING TO LOSE MOMENTUM IN U.S SAME STORES SALES AT DOMINO’S PIZZA U.S.  SAME STORES SALES  DROPPED 1.9% IN THE THREE MONTHS THROUGH EARLY SEPTEMBER COMPARED WITH THE SAME PERIOD LAST YEAR. IT IS DOMINO’S FIRST U.S SAME STORE SALES DECLINE IN MORE THAN A DECADE. 

 

10 OCTOBER, 2021

INDIAN GOVERNMENT HAS INTRODUCE AMRUT SCHEME. IN THIS SCHEME GOVERNMENT FOCUS AND AIM IS ON RECYCLING OF WATER AND TO MAXIMIZE THE REUSE OF THE RECYCLED WATER. TREATMENT OF SEWAGE WATER SO THAT WATER BODIES LIKE LAKES, RIVERS AND ALL ARE NOT POLLUTED. AND IN THIS WHOLE RECYCLE SECTOR VA TECH WABAG IS A LEADING PLAYER.

 

9 OCTOBER, 2021

TO MEET GLOBAL ENERGY DEMAND, AS WELL AS CLIMATE ASPIRATIONS, INVESTMENTS IN CLEAN ENERGY WOULD NEED TO GROW FROM $1.1 TRILLION THIS YEAR TO $3.4 TRILLION A YEAR BY 2030.

 

8 OCTOBER, 2021

BEWARE OF THE INVESTMENT ACTIVITY THAT PRODUCES APPLAUSE. THE MOVES ARE USUALLY GREETED BY YAWNS. 

 

7 OCTOBER, 2021

THE MARKET, LIKE THE LORD, HELPS THOSE WHO HELP THEMSELVES. BUT UNLIKE THE LORD, THE MARKET DOES NOT FORGIVE THOSE WHO KNOW WHAT THEY DO.

 

6 OCTOBER, 2021

PURCHASE PRICE AND DEBT LOADS ARE CLIMBING AMID THE BOOM, RAISING CONCERNS THAT WHEN ECONOMIC GROWTH SLOWS, THE COMPANIES BEING BOUGHT WON’T BE ABLE TO REPAY THE LOANS PRIVATE EQUITY FIRMS USE TO BUY THEM.

 

5 OCTOBER, 2021

EVERYONE IS BEHIND CLEAN AND GREEN ENERGY. SO PEOPLE STARTED USING EV. IN EV AT PRESENT BATTERIES ARE MADE OF LITHIUM-ION. BUT LITHIUM-ION HAVE HIGHER CHANCES OF CATCHING FIRE. SO MANY BATTERY MANUFACTURERS ARE POURING BILLIONS OF DOLLARS INTO R&D OF SOLID STATE BATTERIES. SOLID STATE TECHNOLOGY BATTERIES TAKES LESS TIME TO CHARGE BATTERIES AND THEY DO NOT CATCH FIRE. TOYOTA MOTORS IS DEVELOPING IN HOUSE TECHNOLOGY TO PRODUCE SOLID STATE BATTERY CELLS. VOLKSWAGEN AND FORD HAVE ALSO INVESTED INTO SOLID STATE BATTERY STARTUPS. SOLID STATE TECHNOLOGY IS A LONGER TERM ENDEAVOR. BUT CAR MAKERS ARE INVESTING NOW IN IT TO GAIN EXPERTISE AND READY THEIR MANUFACTURING OPERATIONS. 

 

4 OCTOBER, 2021

MANY POWER COMPANIES WILL DEMERGE THEIR RENEWABLE ENERGY SUBSIDIARY, OR WILL BRING InvIT FUND, OR WILL SELL SOME STAKE IN RENEWABLE ENERGY SUBSIDIARY JUST TO RAISE FUNDS. THIS CAN BE VALUE UNLOCKING FOR POWER COMPANIES.

 

3 OCTOBER, 2021

THIRD PARTY LOGISTICS MARKET IN INDIA IS EXPECTED TO REACH $10.74 BILLION GROWING AT 8% CAGR FROM 2021 TO 2025.

 

2 OCTOBER, 2021

MARKET IS AN OCEAN WITH LOTS OF OPPORTUNITIES, IF WE CRY FOR MISSED OPPORTUNITIES THEN WE WILL NOT BE ABLE TO FIND OR FOCUS ON NEW OPPORTUNITIES.

 

1 OCTOBER, 2021

MANUFACTURING IN INDIA IS EXPECTED TO CONTRIBUTE UP TO 25-30% OF GDP BY 2025 WHICH WILL DRIVE THE GROWTH OF WAREHOUSING SEGMENT IN INDIA. PORT CAPACITY IS EXPECTED TO GROW AT CAGR OF 7% BY 2023 ADDING CAPACITY OF 275 TO 350 MT. FREIGHT TRAFFIC ON AIRPORT IS EXPECTED TO REACH 20 MT BY 2040. INDIAN RAILWAYS AIMS TO INCREASE ITS FREIGHT TRAFFIC FROM 1.1 BILLION TONS IN 2018 TO 3.3 BILLION TONS BY 2030. I THINK ALL THIS WILL GIVE BOOST TO LOGISTICS SECTOR BECAUSE ALL THIS THINGS AND TARGETS ARE NOT POSSIBLE WITHOUT LOGISTICS.

 

30 SEPTEMBER, 2021

CHIP CRISIS WILL BOOST WORLD’S SECOND HAND CAR MARKET.

 

29 SEPTEMBER, 2021

BEING OPTIMISTIC IS KEY TO CREATE WEALTH. NO ONE HAS CREATED WEALTH BY BEING PESSIMISTIC. BEING OPTIMISTIC EVEN IN PESSIMISTIC SITUATION IS THE ART TO CREATE WEALTH.

 

28 SEPTEMBER, 2021

FURTHER INCREASE IN PRICE AND DISRUPTION IN SUPPLY OF OIL AND NATURAL GAS ARE ON THE WAY: THAWING EARTH ONCE THOUGHT TO BE FROZEN IS SPRINGING TO LIFE AND THREATENING RUSSIA’S ECONOMY. DUE TO CLIMATIC CHANGE THE THICK LAYER OF EARTH OF RUSSIA IS MELTING AND IS CALLED AS PERMAFROST. TWO THIRD OF RUSSIA’S LAND IS FACING SUCH PERMAFROST, INCLUDING MUCH OF ITS OIL AND GAS INFRASTRUCTURE. DUE TO PERMAFROST OIL AND GAS PLANTS, MINE PLANTS AND OTHER INFRASTRUCTURES ARE FACING CORROSION LEAKS AND CRACKS. PIPES WHICH ARE USED FOR TRANSPORTATION OF CRUDE AND NATURAL GAS ARE ALSO FACING LEAKS DUE TO CRACKS CAUSED BY PERMAFROST. AND RUSSIA’S ECONOMY HOLD GOOD POSITION IN OIL AND NATURAL GAS INDUSTRY. BUT DUE TO PERMAFROST RUSSIA MAY FACE BAD DAYS AND IT MAY HAVE NEGATIVE EFFECTS ON WORLD SINCE RUSSIA SUPPLY OIL AND NATURAL GAS TO OTHER PARTS OF THE WORLD.

 

27 SEPTEMBER, 2021

MANY D2C BRANDS OR FIRMS WILL GET LISTED IN NEXT 2-3 YEARS. SLOWLY BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT IS CHANGING. AND D2C FIRMS ARE HANDICAPPED WITHOUT LOGISTICS. BULLISH ON LOGISTICS SECTOR.

 

26 SEPTEMBER, 2021

TITAN HAS ONLY 4% MARKET SHARE IN ORGANIZED GOLD JEWELLERY MARKET. GREAT OPPORTUNITY AHEAD FOR TITAN TO INCREASE ITS MARKET SHARE.

 

25 SEPTEMBER, 2021

U.K IS GOING TO FACE WORST CRISIS DUE TO SUPPLY SHORTAGE.

 

24 SEPTEMBER, 2021

THREAD ON CHANGE IN CONSUMER BEHAVIOR WHICH LEADS TO CHANGE IN BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT: THE GEN Z PREFERS PLAYING VIDEOGAMES, LISTENING TO MUSIC, BROWSING INTERNET, AND SCROLLING THROUGH SOCIAL MEDIA IN THEIR LEISURE TIME OVER WATCHING MOVIES AND TV AT HOME. EVERY OLDER GENERATION RANKED MOVIES AND TV AS THEIR TOP ENTERTAINMENT OPTION. TRADITIONAL HOLLYWOOD IS IN WEIRD SPOT RIGHT NOW BECAUSE THEY ARE SEEING TIKTOKERS AND YOUTUBERS BECOMING MORE POPULAR THAN TRADITIONAL ACTORS AND ACTRESSES. THE ONLINE PLATFORM HAVE ALSO EVOLVED THEIR ALGORITHMS TO MORE EFFECTIVELY DIRECT VIEWERS TOWARD POPULAR CONTENT. TOP INFLUENCERS CAN MAKE TENS OF MILLIONS OF DOLLARS A YEAR THROUGH SPONSORED CONTENT, AD-REVENUE SHARING AND SUBSCRIPTIONS TO EXCLUSIVE CONTENT. IN THE U.S THE NUMBER OF YOUTUBE CHANNELS MAKING AT LEAST $1,00,000 IN REVENUE GREW BY MORE THAN 35% IN 2020. FACED WITH AN AGING AUDIENCE AND A YOUNGER GENERATION MORE INTERESTED IN SOCIAL MEDIA THAN THE SILVER SCREEN AND TELEVISION, STREAMING PLATFORMS LIKE NETFLIX AND AMAZON ARE HIRING FAMOUS YOUTUBERS AND TIKTOKERS AS LEAD ROLES BECAUSE THEY HAVE HUGE BAN BASED FOLLOWING. YOUNG GENERATION WANT TO SEE SOMETHING NEW EVERYDAY, THEY ARE TIRED OF SEEING OLD AND REPEATED HEROES IN MOVIES EVERYDAY. NOW PRODUCERS CAN’T BRING NEW HEROES EVERYDAY SO THEY ARE HIRING YOUTUBERS AND TIKTOKERS AS HEROES WHO HAS HUGE FAN BASE FOLLOWING ON SOCIAL MEDIA.

 

23 SEPTEMBER, 2021

RISING GAS PRICES STIR SUPPLY FEAR. PRICES OF EVERYTHING ARE RISING. PRICES OF RAW MATERIALS ARE AT SKY, THIS IS NOT A GOOD SIGN FOR GROWTH.

 

22 SEPTEMBER, 2021

IN U.S HOME SALES IN AUGUST DECLINED BY 2% FROM JULY, THE BIGGEST MONTHLY DECREASE SINCE APRIL. HOME SALES IN AUGUST DECLINED BY 1.5% FROM A YEAR EARLIER. SHARE OF FIRST TIME BUYERS FELL TO 29%, THE LEVEL SINCE JANUARY 2019.

 

21 SEPTEMBER, 2021

INDIAN LOGISTICS SECTOR IS EXPECTED TO GROW FROM RS 19,56,000 CRORES IN 2020 TO RS 34,50,000 CRORES IN 2026 GROWING AT CAGR OF 11-13%.

 

20 SEPTEMBER, 2021

HAD A TALK WITH 3-4 MANUFACTURERS WHO PRODUCES FINISHED PRODUCTS FROM METAL SHEETS. THEY ARE SAYING PRICES OF RAW MATERIALS ARE RISING IN EVERY 3-4 DAYS. DUE TO THIS PRICES OF MANY FINISH PRODUCTS HAVE GONE OUT OF THE RANGE. SO CUSTOMER AT GROUND LEVEL ARE NOT BUYING FINISHED PRODUCTS AT SUCH HIGH PRICES. DUE TO THIS MANY MANUFACTURERS HAS STOPPED THE PRODUCTION OF FINISHED PRODUCTS. SITUATION AT GROUND LEVELS IS NOT GOOD. BUT MARKET IS AT DIFFERENT LEVEL. NO CO-ORDINATION BETWEEN GROUND LEVEL AND MARKET. I THINK IN FEW DAYS OR MONTHS GROUND LEVEL SITUATIONS WILL REFLECT IN MARKET.

 

19 SEPTEMBER, 2021

THREAD ON SEAMLESS PIPE SECTOR: EARLIER AND EVEN TODAY ALL SEAMLESS PIPES ARE COMING FROM CHINA. SO HERE INDIAN PLAYERS LIKE JINDAL, RATNAMANI WERE NOT INTERESTED IN PIPES MANUFACTURING. BUT DUE TO SUPPLY DISRUPTION AROUND THE WORLD THEY THOUGHT THIS IS THE PERFECT TIME TO PRODUCE SEAMLESS PIPES. SO FIRST THEY THOUGHT TO VISIT STEEL SECTOR AND THEY BROUGHT BIS IN SEAMLESS PIPES. DUE TO THIS RATES OF PIPES IN CHINA HAS GONE FROM RS 300/KG TO RS 400. PLUS RECENTLY CHINA’S NATIONAL ELECTRICITY POLICY HAS ALSO DESTROYED THE PRODUCTION BECAUSE IN A WEEK ONLY TWO DAYS FACTORIES ARE ALLOWED TO WORK. SEEING THIS RATNAMANI JINDAL AND ALL WILL GO TO STEEL MINISTRY TO BRING ANTI DUMPING DUTY ON SEAMLESS PIPES. SO RATES OF CHINESE SEAMLESS PIPES WILL AGAIN INCREASE AND HERE JINDAL, RATNAMANI AND CHANDAN WILL PRODUCE PIPES AT MUCH CHEAPER RATES. I THINK ALREADY RATNAMANI HAS WRITTEN LETTER TO STEEL MINISTRY FOR ANTI DUMPING DUTY ON SEAMLESS PIPES. ALREADY SOME CASE IS GOING ON FOR BRINGING ANTI DUMPING DUTY ON SEAMLESS PIPES. RATNAMANI HAS RECENTLY STARTED MANUFACTURING PLANT OF SEAMLESS PIPES. I AM MOSTLY SURE THAT INDIAN GOVERNMENT WILL 100% BRING ANTI-DUMPING DUTY ON SEAMLESS PIPES.

 

18 SEPTEMBER, 2021

PURCHASE PRICES AND DEBT LOADS ARE CLIMBING AMID THE BOOM, RAISING CONCERNS THAT WHEN ECONOMIC GROWTH SLOWS, THE COMPANIES BEING BOUGHT WON’T BE ABLE TO REPAY THE LOANS PRIVATE EQUITY FIRMS USE TO BUY THEM.

 

17 SEPTEMBER, 2021

STOCK PRICE MOVEMENTS ACTUALLY BEGIN TO REFLECT NEW DEVELOPMENTS BEFORE IT IS GENERALLY RECOGNIZED THAT THEY HAVE TAKEN PLACE.

 

16 SEPTEMBER, 2021

WE DO NOT NEED TO OUTPERFORM EVERY CALENDAR YEAR IN ORDER TO OUTPERFORM IN THE LONG TERM.

 

15 SEPTEMBER, 2021

THE MOST BORING COMPANIES CAN BE SOME OF THE BEST LONG TERM INVESTMENTS. 

 

14 SEPTEMBER, 2021

OWNING GREAT COMPANIES AND TRYING TO PREDICT THE STOCK MARKET IS THE KEY TO BEAT THE INDEX OVER THE LONG RUN.

 

13 SEPTEMBER, 2021

WE MAY SEE INCREASE IN CEMENT PRICES THIS MONTH.

 

12 SEPTEMBER, 2021

EVERYONE AROUND THE WORLD IS BEHIND HYDROGEN BASED FUEL CELLS TO MOVE TOWARDS GREEN AND CLEAN ENVIRONMENT BUT HYDROGEN BASED FUEL CELLS ARE MADE FROM AMMONIA. THE COMPANIES PRODUCING AMMONIA WILL HAVE HUGE OPPORTUNITY FOR GROWTH.

 

11 SEPTEMBER, 2021

THREAD ON DISRUPTION IN SUPPLY AND FORMATION OF BUBBLE: CONTAINER PRICES ARE AT SKY, EVEN IN HIGH PRICES CONTAINERS ARE NOT AVAILABLE, THIS HAS CREATED SHORTAGE OF RAW MATERIALS. SHORTAGE OF RAW MATERIALS HAS CREATED RISE IN PRICE OF RAW MATERIALS. DUE TO RISE IN PRICE OF RAW MATERIALS, RATES OF MANY FINISHED PRODUCTS HAVE REACHED TO SKY. HOW ECONOMY WILL ABSORB ALL THIS? IF THERE IS SHORTAGE OF RAW MATERIALS, SHORTAGE OF CONTAINERS MEANS DIFFICULTY IN SUPPLY OF GOODS THEN HOW WILL SALES OF GOODS WILL INCREASE? IF SALES OF GOODS WILL NOT INCREASE THEN HOW WILL RESULTS OF COMPANIES WILL IMPROVE OR INCREASE? IF RESULTS OF COMPANIES WILL NOT INCREASE OR IMPROVE THEN HOW WILL MARKETS GO UP? ON TOP OF IT THERE IS HUGE SHORTAGE OF CHIPS AND CHIPS ARE ALMOST REQUIRED IN EACH AND EVERY DAILY NECESSITY THINGS LIKE MOBILE, WHITE GOODS AND SO ON. SHORTAGE OF RAW MATERIALS AND INCREASE IN PRICES OF RAW MATERIALS IS NOT A GOOD SIGN FOR GROWTH.

 

10 SEPTEMBER, 2021

I WILL NOT BE SURPRISED IF TATA MOTORS INTRODUCES FIRST ELECTRIC PICK UP TRUCK IN INDIA. THEY CAN MOSTLY BRING ELECTRIC PICK UP TRUCK UNDER TATA ACE (CHOTA HATHI) MODE. IF THEY GET SUCCESS THEN TATA CAN HAVE MONOPOLY IN ELECTRIC PICK UP TRUCK SINCE NO OTHER PICK UP TRUCK IN INDIA IS AS SUCCESSFUL AS TATA ACE (CHOTA HATHI) EVEN IN COMBUSTION ENGINE BECAUSE TATA WAS FIRST COMPANY TO BRING SMALLER SIZE PICK UP TRUCKS IN INDIA. SO IN ELECTRIC PICK UP TRUCK ALSO TATA MOTORS WILL BE SURELY SUCCESSFUL AS THEY ARE PRESENT IN EACH AND EVERY CITY AND VILLAGE OF INDIA. EVEN TODAY IN COMBUSTION ENGINE TATA ACE IS HIGHLY USED AND IS MOST PREFERRED PICK UP TRUCK IN EVERY CITY AND VILLAGE OF INDIA FOR TRANSPORTATION OF GOODS. SO MOSTLY THEY WILL BE SUCCESSFUL IN ELECTRIC PICK UP TRUCK ALSO SINCE THEY ONLY HAVE TO CHANGE TECHNOLOGY. BECAUSE ALREADY BRAND TATA ACE IS REACHED IN EVERY PART OF INDIA. PLUS ELECTRIC PICK UP TRUCK WILL REDUCE THE COST OF TRANSPORTATION WHICH WILL BE HIGHLY BENEFITTED TO TRANSPORT COMPANIES AND CONSUMERS.

 

9 SEPTEMBER, 2021

I STILL FEEL THERE IS LOT OF VALUE IN FUTURE CONSUMER LTD FROM CURRENT PRICE.

 

8 SEPTEMBER, 2021

UNITED KINGDOM HAS CLOSED MANY OF THEIR COAL BASED POWER PLANTS AND WAS SWITCHING ON TO WIND ENERGY AS SOURCE OF CLEAN AND GREEN ENERGY. TOTAL WIND ENERGY PRODUCED BY U.K IS AROUND 16.9GW. BUT CURRENTLY FROM FEW DAYS WIND HAS CHANGED DIRECTIONS AFTER MANY YEARS AND WIND IS FLOWING IN VERY SLOW SPEED SO AT PRESENT WIND ENERGY PRODUCED BY U.K IS JUST 2.5 GW. IF SUCH SITUATION GOES ON THEN MANY PARTS OF U.K WILL TURN BLACK. SO NOW U.K IS PLANNING TO DEPEND ON NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS AS SOURCE OF ELECTRICITY. DUE TO THIS REASON PRICES OF URANIUM IS RISING. THIS SHOWS NO ONE CAN PREDICT MOVES OF NATURE. WIND AND RIVER CAN ANY TIME CHANGE THEIR WAY OF FLOW BUT SUN WILL REMAIN THE SAME. EVERYDAY SUN WILL COME OUT TO LIGHTEN THE EARTH. SO SOLAR ENERGY WILL ALWAYS BE MORE SUCCESSFUL AND RELIABLE SOURCE OF CLEAN AND GREEN ENERGY AS COMPARED TO WIND ENERGY OR ANY OTHER SOURCE OF CLEAN AND GREEN ENERGY.

 

7 SEPTEMBER, 2021

INDIA WILL MAKE IT MANDATORY FOR AUTO MANUFACTURERS TO OFFER VEHICLES RUNNING 100% ON BIO-FUELS IN THE SIX MONTHS.

 

6 SEPTEMBER, 2021

TATA POWER HAS 48% (1,10,99,630 SHARES) STAKE IN NELCO LTD. CURRENT MARKET CAP OF NELCO IS RS 1,061 CRORES. NELCO IS TATA COMPANY WHICH HOLDS VSAT LICENSE, INTERNET SERVICE PROVIDER (ISP) LICENSE AS WELL AS THE INFLIGHT & MARITIME COMMUNICATION (IFMC) LICENSE ISSUED BY DEPARTMENT OF TELECOMMUNICATION, GOVERNMENT OF INDIA (DOT). NELCO CONNECT BUSINESSES TO WHAT’S CRITICAL FOR THEIR PAN INDIA SPREAD AND REMOTE OPERATIONS THROUGH RELIABLE, FLEXIBLE, SWIFT AND COST EFFECTIVE SATELLITE COMMUNICATION SERVICES. IN ADDITION, NELCO OFFER END TO END NETWORKING SOLUTIONS (SATCOM PROJECTS) AND MAINTENANCE OF PRIVATE HUBS AND HYBRID NETWORKS FOR ITS CUSTOMER, FROM GOVERNMENT TO CORPORATES. IT ALSO PROVIDES BANK CONNECTIVITY, ENTERPRISE WAN, END TO END SATELLITE BASE CONNECTIVITY TO OIL, ENERGY AND GAS SECTOR. NELCO IS PREFERRED PARTNERS FOR THE GOVERNMENT, DEFENSE AND ENTERPRISE SECTORS WHEN IT COMES TO SECURITY AND SURVEILLANCE IN INDIA. FROM KEEPING THE BORDERS SAFE TO CHECKING PILFERAGE AND SABOTAGE AT FACTORIES, NELCO SOLUTIONS HAVE BEEN DEPLOYED EVERYWHERE.

 

5 SEPTEMBER, 2021

GOVERNMENT MIGHT INCLUDE DRONE MANUFACTURING UNDER PLI SCHEME.

 

4 SEPTEMBER, 2021

IN COMING YEARS THE REAL CONSUMPTION POWER OF INDIA WILL COME FROM MILLENNIALS AND GEN Z.

 

3 SEPTEMBER, 2021

SMARTPHONES HAS MORE THAN A THOUSAND TINY BITS OF CERAMIC TO CONTROL THE FLOW OF ELECTRICITY. EVEN ELECTRIC VEHICLE CONTAINS MORE THAN 10,000 BITS OF CERAMIC. THEY ARE CALLED MLCCs FOR MULTILAYER CERAMIC CAPACITORS. MURATA MANUFACTURING CO OF KYOTO, JAPAN THE BIGGEST MLCC MAKER CLOSED A MAJOR FACTORY FOR THE FINAL WEEK OF AUGUST DUE TO VIRUS OUTBREAK. JAPAN’S TAIYO YUDEN CO, ANOTHER MAJOR MAKER SAID THAT IT SUSPENDS SOME OPERATIONS AT ITS FACTORY IN MALAYSIA BECAUSE OF EMPLOYEE INFECTION. MLCC SUPPLY WILL REMAIN VERY TIGHT. AND THE NUMBER OF MLCCs IN AN EV IS MORE THAN DOUBLE THE NUMBER IN GASOLINE FUEL BASED VEHICLE. WITHOUT MLCCs PRODUCTION OF MOBILE AND CARS ARE NOT POSSIBLE. SO THIS SHORTAGE OF MLCC WILL HUGELY IMPACT PRODUCTION OF CARS AND MOBILES.

 

2 SEPTEMBER, 2021

IF OUR HORSES DON’T RUN IN BULL MARKET THEN IT MEANS THEY ARE NOT HORSES THEY ARE DONKEYS.

 

1 SEPTEMBER, 2021

TAIWAN SEMICONDUCTOR MANUFACTURING COMPANY THE WORLD LARGEST MANUFACTURER OF CHIPS TOLD THAT COMPANY WILL RAISE PRICE OF CHIPS BY 20%. ON ONE SIDE THERE IS SHORTAGE AND NOW ON OTHER SIDE THIS 20% PRICE INCREASE. THIS WILL IMPACT ALMOST ALL SECTORS SINCE SEMICONDUCTOR IS USED IN ALL THINGS WE USE IN OUR DAILY LIFE. MOBILE, ELECTRONICS, CARS AND SO ON.

 

31 AUGUST, 2021

COMPANIES WHO OUTSOURCE GOODS FROM VIETNAM WILL FACE HUGE DEMAND SUPPLY CAP. BECAUSE OF COVID THERE IS HUGE LABOUR SHORTAGE IN VIETNAM. FACTORIES IN WHICH THERE WERE AROUND 400 WORKERS WORKING BEFORE COVID ARE NOW WORKING WITH 70-80 WORKERS ONLY. NIKE AND ADIDAS ARE DEPENDENT ON VIETNAM SO THEY ARE WORRIED THAT THEY SEE 40-50% PRODUCTION DROP. SUCH CONDITION WILL APPEAR FOR OTHER COUNTRIES ALSO THOSE WHO ARE DEPENDENT ON VIETNAM. OPPORTUNITIES FOR INDIA TO TAKE BENEFIT BY BOOSTING LOCAL MANUFACTURING.

 

30 AUGUST, 2021

INSTEAD OF GIVING SUBSIDY FOR SUGAR EXPORTS, WHICH HAVE NOW BECOME LUCRATIVE, THE GOVERNMENT IS LIKELY TO INCREASE ETHANOL PROCUREMENT PRICES. 

 

29 AUGUST, 2021

THREAD ON PET INSURANCE: DUE TO PANDEMIC MANY PEOPLE HAVE BECOME LONELY SINCE THERE WAS A LOCKDOWN AND LONELINESS HAS FORCE THEM INTO DEPRESSION. TO COME OUT OF DEPRESSION DOCTORS RECOMMENDED TO ADOPT PETS WHICH WOULD HELP TO DIVERT MIND SO THAT PERSON DOES NOT FEEL LONELY. DUE TO THIS MANY PEOPLE HAVE ADOPTED PETS. BUT IN EVERY 1-2 MONTHS PETS ARE REQUIRED TO TAKE TO VET. AND VET FEES ARE COSTLY. THERE IS ONLY ONE SOLUTION TO THIS COSTLY FEES TO VET AND THAT IS INSURANCE OF PETS. HARDLY ANY PETS ARE INSURED IN INDIA COMPARED TO 1% OF PETS IN U.S, 30% OF PETS IN SWEDEN , 25% OF PETS IN U.K AND 5% OF PETS IN FRANCE HAVE MEDICAL INSURANCE. SO PET INSURANCE IS HIGHLY UNDERRATED INDUSTRY WHICH HAS HUGE OPPORTUNITY FOR GROWTH. BAJAJ ALLIANCE, NEW INDIA ASSURANCE, ORIENTAL INSURANCE AND VETINA PAWTECH ARE THE COMPANIES WHO PROVIDES PET INSURANCE.

 

28 AUGUST, 2021

THREAD ON CHANGE IN CONSUMER BEHAVIOR: DUE TO PANDEMIC MOSTLY EVERYONE AROUND THE WORLD ARE WORKING FROM HOME ON LAPTOPS AND PC. TO PROTECT EYES FROM BLUE LIGHT OF LAPTOPS AND PC PEOPLE STARTED WEARING SPECS. AND SINCE NOW PEOPLE ARE USED TO WEARING SPECS THEY ARE EVEN WEARING SPECS WHEN THEY GO OUT BECAUSE THEY THINK THEIR LOOKS HAVE CHANGED DUE TO SPECS AND THEY ARE LOOKING COOL IN IT. SO CONSUMER BEHAVIOR HAS CHANGED USED OF SPECS AS FASHION ACCESSORY. BEFORE PANDEMIC PEOPLE USED TO SAY CHASMISH TO THOSE WHO WEAR SPECS BUT TODAY THE SAME PEOPLE THOSE WHO USED TO SAY CHASMISH HAS THEMSELVES STARTED WEARING SPECS AS FASHION ACCESSORY. SUCH CHANGE OF CONSUMER BEHAVIOR WILL INCREASE THE SALE OF SPECS. THERE ARE VERY FEW COMPANIES LISTED IN INDIA WHO DEALS IN SPECS. MAY BE ONE OR TWO.

 

27 AUGUST, 2021

LOGISTICS FIRMS ARE CHARGING ALMOST $6000 PER CONTAINER NOW COMPARED WITH $3000 IN APRIL-MAY AND $1000-$2,000 AT PRE-COVID LEVELS AND STILL AVAILABILITY OF CONTAINER IS NOT GUARANTEED. PLUS SHIPPING LEAD TIMES WILL INCREASE TO 60 DAYS DUE TO PORT JAMS. BENEFIT TO ALLCARGO.

 

26 AUGUST, 2021

INDIA IS SLATED TO INCREASE STEEL CAPACITY FROM EXISTING 110 MTPA TO 300 MTPA. GAP IS OF ABOUT 190 MILLION TONNES. WHICH COMPANY WILL FILL MAXIMUM OF THIS GAP? THERE ARE ONLY FIVE MAJOR STEEL PLAYERS IN INDIA.

 

25 AUGUST, 2021

THREAD ON INDIAN CONSUMPTION: IN INDIA AROUND 70 CR PEOPLE USES INTERNET. IN EVERY 3-4 SECONDS A NEW INDIAN USER JOINS THE INTERNET. DUE TO THIS INTERNET USERS THERE IS 3 BILLION MONTHLY UPI TRANSACTION WORTH RS 6 TRILLION. THE INTERNET USERS ARE GOING TO INCREASE FROM 70 CRORES IN 2021 TO AROUND 90 CRORES IN 2024. BRAND AWARENESS AND ALL IS POSSIBLE ONLY BECAUSE OF INTERNET USERS. THIS INTERNET USERS WILL HELP IN CREATING THE REAL CONSUMPTION STORY OF INDIA. ALL THIS INTERNET USERS ARE USING AND WILL FURTHER ALSO USE SOCIAL MEDIA LIKE INSTAGRAM, YOUTUBE, FACEBOOK AND SO ON. SO IN COMING MONTHS WE CAN SEE BIG BRANDS WILL BE GIVING ADS OF THEIR BRANDS AND PRODUCTS ON SUCH SOCIAL MEDIA SINCE ITS COST IS LOW AS COMPARED TO GIVING ADS ON TV AND PRINTED MEDIA. PLUS SOCIAL MEDIA IS AN EASY MODE TO PROMOTE BRANDS AND PRODUCTS IN RURAL AND REMOTE RURAL AREAS. DUE TO POWER OF SOCIAL MEDIA RURAL PEOPLE GOT AWARE ABOUT BRANDS AND THEY HAVE COMPLETELY CHANGED THEIR PURCHASING BEHAVIOR (SHIFT FROM UNORGANIZED TO ORGANIZED). PLUS SINCE RURAL PEOPLE ARE SLOWING GETTING AWARE OF BRANDS, COMPANIES STARTED GIVING ONLINE LINK IN SOCIAL MEDIA ADS ABOUT THEIR BRANDS AND PRODUCTS SO THAT PEOPLE CAN EASILY PURCHASE NEW PRODUCTS JUST ON SINGLE CLICK. LIKE THIS WAY COMPANIES ARE SELLING PRODUCTS WITHOUT GIVING COSTLY ADS ON TV AND WITHOUT OPENING BIG STORES WHICH REQUIRES HUGE CAPITAL. AND THE PERCENTAGE OF CAPITAL WHICH WAS EARLIER USED IN OPENING STORES IS NOW BEING USED BY COMPANIES IN CREATING NEW BRANDS AND PRODUCT INNOVATIONS. SO IN COMING YEARS WE CAN SEE A COMPLETE CHANGE IN CONSUMER BEHAVIOR WHICH WILL CHANGE THE WHOLE BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT. MOBILE AND INTERNET USERS WILL COMPLETELY CHANGE THE WHOLE CONSUMPTION STORY OF INDIA IN COMING YEARS. THIS WILL CREATE HUGE OPPORTUNITY FOR INDIAN MARKETS.

 

24 AUGUST, 2021

THE CHINESE STEEL INDUSTRY HAS PLEDGED TO CUT OUTPUT BY A SUBSTANTIAL MARGIN, PRODUCTION IN JULY WAS MORE THAN 8% LOWER Y-O-Y.

 

23 AUGUST, 2021

UTTAR PRADESH HAS TAKEN OVER DELHI IN THE NUMBER OF NEW COMPANY REGISTRATIONS IN A MONTH, TO BE THE SECOND MOST ENTERPRENEURIAL STATE AFTER MAHARASHTRA.

 

22 AUGUST, 2021

MALLS IN TIER 2 AND 3 CITIES HAVE SEEN RECOVERY OF AROUND 60-65% AS COMPARED WITH PRE-COVID LEVELS. TIER 2&3 CITIES AND RURAL AREAS ARE LESS IMPACTED FROM COVID. THIS SHOWS THE GROWTH OF INDIA WILL MOSTLY COME FROM SMALLER CITIES AND RURAL AREAS. IN SOME PLACES REVERSE MIGRATION IS HAPPENING (FROM BIGGER CITIES TO SMALLER CITIES) JUST TO TAKE PART IN HUGE DEVELOPMENT TAKING PLACE IN SMALLER CITIES. EARLIER PEOPLE USE TO MIGRATE TO BIGGER CITIES LIKE MUMBAI FOR THEIR LIVELIHOOD BUT NOW THINGS ARE CHANGED, NEW GENERATIONS ARE NOT WILLING TO COME MUMBAI SINCE EVERYTHING IS MANUFACTURED IN EVERY TOWN OF INDIA SO THERE IS NO NEED TO MIGRATE TO BIGGER CITIES. INTERNET AND MOBILE USAGE HAS CREATED HUGE BRAND AWARENESS AMONG RURAL PEOPLE AND PEOPLE OF SMALLER CITIES. EVERYTHING IS AVAILABLE AT DOOR STEP EVEN IN RURAL AND REMOTE AREAS. DUE TO THIS MANY SMALLER TOWNS AND CITIES HAS BEEN CHANGED TOTALLY AND ARE STILL FURTHER DEVELOPING AT RAPID PACE.

 

21 AUGUST, 2021

MARKET IS MOVING UP JUST BECAUSE THERE IS HUGE DEMAND SUPPLY GAP CREATED IN EVERY SECTOR JUST BECAUSE OF COVID. ONCE WHEN THINGS WILL GET SETTLED THEN AUTOMATICALLY GAP BETWEEN DEMAND AND SUPPLY WILL BECOME NARROW AND AT THAT TIME ALL COMPANIES WILL AGAIN COME AT THEIR ORIGINAL VALUATIONS.

 

20 AUGUST, 2021

XANDER BUYS MORE LOGISTICS SPACE IN TAMIL NADU FOR RS 400-500 CRORE. INDIAN LOGISTICS SECTOR IS HIGHLY UNDERVALUED.

 

19 AUGUST, 2021

THERE ARE PORT JAMS IN MANY COUNTRIES DUE TO HUGE GAP BETWEEN DEMAND AND SUPPLY. EARLIER IT USED TO TAKE MAXIMUM TWO DAYS TO CLEAR CONTAINER OUT OF PORT BUT DUE TO CURRENT PORT JAMS IT TAKES AROUND 8-10 DAYS TO CLEAR A CONTAINER OUT OF PORT. DUE TO THIS THERE IS HUGE SHORTAGE OF CONTAINERS AND THIS HAS INCREASE THE FREIGHT PRICES WHICH HAS HELPED COMPANIES LIKE ALLCARGO.

 

18 AUGUST, 2021

RAW SUGAR PRICES TOUCHED HIGEST IN FOUR YEARS DUE TO FALL IN SUPPLY. INDIAN SUGAR MILLS ASSOCIATION HAS WRITTEN TO PRIME MINISTER TO IMMEDIATE INCREASE THE PRICE OF SUGAR TO RS 35 PER KG FROM RS 31 PER KG. BRAZIL IS GOING TO DIVERT MORE CANE TOWARDS ETHANOL AS COMPARED TO LAST SESSION. ALSO CANE IN BRAZIL HAS LOWER YIELD THIS YEAR DUE TO ADVERSE WEATHER CONDITION.

 

17 AUGUST, 2021

WELSPUN ONE PLANNING TO INVEST RS 2,000 CRORE TO DEVELOP WAREHOUSES.

 

16 AUGUST, 2021

THREAD ON LOGISTICS: INDIA HAS TOTAL POPULATION OF AROUND 1.39 BILLION. THERE ARE 1.10 BILLION MOBILE CONNECTIONS IN INDIA. OUT OF THESE CONNECTIONS ONLY 624 MILLION PEOPLE USE INTERNET CONNECTIONS. INTERNET PENETRATION IN INDIA IS AROUND 45%. IN NEXT 3-4 YEARS THIS INTERNET PENETRATION WILL INCREASE TO AROUND 55-60% SINCE INDIA WILL HAVE THE YOUNGEST POPULATION IN THE WORLD. SO BASICALLY CONSUMPTION WILL MOSTLY DEPEND ON THE NUMBER OF MOBILE AND INTERNET USERS SINCE EVERYTHING FROM INSURANCE TO GROCERY, GROCERY TO OPENING OF BANK ACCOUNT, CLOTHES, EVERYTHING IS EASILY AVAILABLE THROUGH MOBILE ON JUST SINGLE TOUCH. TAKING ADVANTAGE OF GROWING INTERNET AND MOBILE USERS, COMPANIES ARE TARGETING THROUGH MOBILE APPS AND SOCIAL MEDIA TO SELL THEIR PRODUCTS DIRECTLY. MANY BIG COMPANIES LIKE ITC, HUL, TATA CONSUMER AND MANY OTHER SUCH COMPANIES HAVE RECENTLY ANNOUNCED THEIR DEVELOPMENT IN D2C SEGMENT. INDIA’S D2C SEGMENT IS EXPECTED TO GROW FROM $33 BILLION IN 2020 TO $100 BILLION IN 2025. RECENTLY TATA HAS TAKEN OVER 1MG ONLINE DIGITAL HEALTH COMPANY AND HAS STARTED TO DELIVER MEDICINES IN JUST 3-4 HOURS, NO OTHER COMPANIES PROVIDE SUCH FAST DELIVERY. AND THEY ARE FURTHER PLANNING TO DELIVER IT IN JUST 1 HOUR. ALL THESE SHOWS INDIA’S D2C AND E-COMMERCE SEGMENT IS ON GREAT CONSOLIDATION MODE. BUT TO INCREASE THE SALE OF COMPANIES THROUGH D2C AND E-COMMERCE PLATFORM, COMPANIES NEED TO PROVIDE GOOD SERVICE AND IN D2C AND E-COMMERCE SEGMENT GOOD SERVICE MEANS DELIVERY GOODS AS SOON AS POSSIBLE. AND TO DELIVER GOODS FAST ONE NEEDS GOOD LOGISTICS. WITHOUT GOOD LOGISTICS WHICH INCLUDE WAREHOUSING ALSO ONE CANNOT JUST DELIVER GOODS AND INCREASE THEIR SALES. THIS SHOWS INDIA’S LOGISTICS SECTOR IS HIGHLY UNDERVALUED. IT WILL NEED HUGE FUNDS TO DEVELOP LOGISTICS SECTOR IN TERMS OF LIVE GOODS TRACKING AND ALL. IN SHORT LOGISTICS SECTOR WILL SEE A HUGE TRANSFORMATION FROM TRADITIONAL WAY TO MODERN WAY, IN SHORT WE WILL SEE HUGE SHIFT FROM UNORGANIZED TO ORGANIZED LOGISTICS. HUGE HUGE FOREIGN FUNDS WILL INVEST IN INDIAN LOGISTICS SECTOR SINCE INDIAN LOGISTICS SECTOR IS HIGHLY UNDERRATED AND HAS VERY HUGE HUGE POTENTIAL TO GROW. TOP PICK: MAHINDRA LOGISTICS.

 

15 AUGUST, 2021

HAPPY INDEPENDENCE DAY. 

 

3 AUGUST, 2021

COFFEE: THE WORST FROST TO STRIKE BRAZIL’S COFFEE GROWING REGION IN MORE THAN 25 YEARS IS SET TO CUT A CHUNK OUT OF NEXT YEAR’S CROP, SENDING PRICE OF THE BEAN TO SIX YEAR HIGH.

 

2 AUGUST, 2021

PAPER IS CYCLICAL SECTOR ITS NOT FOR AN INVESTMENT. IT IS UP BECAUSE OF DEMAND SUPPLY GAP IN PAPER. ONE SHOULD KNOW THE PEAK OF IT OTHERWISE WOULD HAVE TO WAIT TILL THE NEXT CYCLE TO SELL OUR PAPER STOCKS.

 

1 AUGUST, 2021

JSW PAINTS HAS POTENTIAL TO BECOME BIG PLAYER IN PAINT SECTOR. JSW PAINTS EYES SPOT AMONG TOP THREE PLAYERS IN THE COUNTRY BY 2025.

 

31 JULY, 2021

U.S IS PLANNING TO BRING BILL OF AROUND $52 BILLION FOR CHIP MANUFACTURING.

 

30 JULY, 2021

INDIGO’S DAILY CASH BURN INCREASED TO RS 33.4 CRORE IN JUNE QUARTER FROM RS 19 CRORE IN MARCH QUARTER.

 

29 JULY, 2021

GREAT RESULTS BY CENTURY TEXTILES & INDUSTRIES: Q1 REVENUE 8.32 BILLION RUPEES VS 3.94 BILLION. Q1 NET PROFIT 216 MILLION RUPEES VS LOSS 400 MILLION Y-O-Y, LOSS 84 MILLION Q-O-Q AND ORIENT PAPER HOLDS 12,46,523 (1.2%) SHARES OF CENTURY TEXTILE. 

 

28 JULY, 2021

OBVIOUS PROSPECTS FOR PHYSICAL GROWTH IN A BUSINESS DO NOT TRANSLATE INTO OBVIOUS PROFITS FOR INVESTORS.

 

27 JULY, 2021

IN LONG RUN IT DOES NOT MATTER MUCH WHETHER YOUR TIMING IS GREAT OR LOUSY. WHAT MATTER IS THAT YOU STAY INVESTED.

 

26 JULY, 2021

THE NUMBER OF SECURITIES THAT SHOULD BE OWNED TO REDUCE PORTFOLIO RISK IS NOT GREAT, AS FEW AS 10 TO 15 HOLDINGS USUALLY SUFFICE.

 

25 JULY, 2021

ONLY LIARS MANAGE ALWAYS TO BE OUT OF THE MARKET DURING BAD TIMES AND IN DURING GOOD TIMES.

 

24 JULY, 2021

FOUR YEAR OLD BATTERY STARTUP IN U.S CALLED FORM ENERGY HAS BUILD BATTERY FROM IRON ORE. IT HAS GOT FUNDING FROM BILL GATES AND JEFF BEZOS.

 

23 JULY, 2021

JSW PAINTS HAS POTENTIAL TO BECOME BIG PLAYER IN PAINT SECTOR.

 

22 JULY, 2021

ANYTHING CAN HAPPEN IN STOCK MARKETS AND WE OUGHT TO CONDUCT OUR AFFAIRS SO THAT IF THE MOST EXTRAORDINARY EVENTS HAPPEN, THEN TOO WE ARE STILL AROUND TO PLAY THE NEXT DAY.

 

21 JULY, 2021

I INVESTED IN OLECTRA GREENTECH AT RS 152 BEFORE PANDEMIC. BUT SUDDENLY PANDEMIC CAME AND EVERYTHING WAS CLOSED. AT THAT TIME OLECTRA WENT DOWN TILL RS 42. FRIENDS AND FAMILY MEMBERS TOLD ME TO SELL IT. THEY WERE SAYING SELL IT BEFORE IT COMES IN SINGLE DIGIT. I TOLD THEM TO BUY MORE, SINCE COMPANY WAS ALMOST DEBT FREE, PLUS HAVING HUGE ORDERS, NO OTHER E-BUS COMPANIES IN INDIA HAD ORDERS COMPARED WITH OLECTRA, PLUS SECTOR HAS A GREAT OPPORTUNITY TO GROW SINCE EVERY COUNTRY IN WORLD WAS BRINGING ITS OWN EV POLICY. BUT ALL REFUSED IT TO BUY. NOW WHEN COMPANY IS AROUND RS 250 THEY ALL ARE TELLING WHY DIDN’T YOU FORCE US TO BUY. PEOPLE WANT THAT SHARE PRICES SHOULD ALWAYS GO UP FROM THEIR BUYING PRICE, NO ONE LIKES CORRECTIONS IN MARKET, DUE TO SUCH EMOTIONS THEY NEVER SELL IN BULL MARKET AND NEVER BUY IN BEAR MARKET. SO BASICALLY CONVICTIONS AND RESEARCH ARE THE ONLY THINGS THAT CAN BRING SUCCESS IN STOCK MARKET. IN FACT EMOTION IS THE MOST DANGEROUS THING FOR PEOPLE IN STOCK MARKET.

 

20 JULY, 2021

IF WE ARE ALREADY RICH, THEN THERE IS NO UPSIDE TO TAKING ON A LOT MORE RISK, BUT THERE IS DISGRACE ON THE DOWNSIDE.

 

19 JULY, 2021

AUTOMOBILE INDUSTRY REVOLUTION: IN COMING YEARS I WILL NOT BE SURPRISED IF TECH COMPANIES PRODUCES A CAR. BECAUSE GREAT REVOLUTION IS TAKING PLACE IN AUTOMOBILE INDUSTRY. EARLIER PEOPLE USED TO SEE ONLY AVERAGE AND MILEAGE SINCE THERE WERE NO NEW FEATURES IN IT. BUT NOW AROUND 60-70% OF CAR IS MADE OF FEATURES AND SOFTWARE CONNECTED. NOT A SINGLE CAR COME WITHOUT SOFTWARE TECHNOLOGIES LIKE IoT, DIGITAL DASH BOARD, GPS, INTERNET CONNECTION TO CONNECT IT WITH MOBILE AND ALL SUCH THINGS. BASICALLY EARLIER THERE WERE OLD PHONES BUT WE HAVE SMART PHONES. SAME IS IN AUTOMOBILES. EARLIER TRADITIONAL CARS MOSTLY FOCUSED ON AVERAGE AND MILEAGE, BUT NOW ITS MOST FOCUSED ON SOFTWARE AND CHIPS. SO BASICALLY THIS REVOLUTION IS CALLED SMART CARS. EVEN IN MAY ELECTRIC VEHICLES THERE IS AI FOR RANGE AND CHARGE PREDICTION, ANTI-THEFT FEATURE, SOFTWARE TO COLLECT DATA OF CAR FOR SAFETY PURPOSE TO CHECK THE HEAT PRODUCE BY BATTERY SINCE THERE IS NO VIBRATION AND SOUND IN EV. SO BASICALLY TO COMPETE IN INDUSTRY PRODUCERS OF CARS WILL HAVE TO BRING NEW FEATURES AND TECHNOLOGIES IN CAR AND THIS NOT POSSIBLE WITHOUT SOFTWARE COMPANY AND ALL THESE WILL TAKE SOFTWARE SHARE IN CARS FROM 0% TO AROUND 60-70%.

 

18 JULY, 2021

THE IT INDUSTRY KEPT THE WORLD RUNNING EVEN DURING THE PANDEMIC. WE WOULD NOT BE SURPRISED IF THE INDUSTRY GROWS IN VERY DECENT DOUBLE DIGITS IN FY2022.

 

17 JULY, 2021

THE MOST IMPORTANT QUALITY TO DO WELL IN CAPITAL MARKETS IS TEMPERAMENT WHICH WOULD PERMIT THE CONTROL OF FEAR AND GREED WHICH HAVE RUINED MANY.

 

16 JULY, 2021

PEOPLE WIN LOTTERIES EVERY DAY BUT THERE IS NO REASON TO LET THAT AFFECT OUR INVESTING STRATEGY AT ALL. WE HAVE TO FIND WHAT MAKES SENSE AND FOLLOW OUR OWN INVESTING STRATEGY.

 

15 JULY, 2021

BITCOIN IS A METHOD OF TRANSMITTING MONEY. A CHEQUE IS A WAY OF TRANSMITTING MONEY TOO. ARE CHEQUES WORTH A WHOLE LOT OF MONEY JUST BECAUSE THEY CAN TRANSMIT MONEY?

 

14 JULY, 2021

THE REAL FORTUNE IN THE WORLD HAVE BEEN MADE BY PEOPLE WHO HAVE BEEN RIGHT ABOUT THE BUSINESS THEY INVESTED IN, AND NOT RIGHT ABOUT THE TIMING OF THE STOCK MARKET.

 

13 JULY, 2021

UNLESS WE ARE A SHORT SELLER OR A POET LOOKING FOR A WEALTHY SPOUSE, IT NEVER PAYS TO PESSIMISTIC.

 

12 JULY, 2021

TODAY IF WE BELIEVE IN OURSELVES, THEN TOMORROW THE WORLD WILL BELIEVE IN US.

 

11 JULY, 2021

IN STOCK MARKET WE NEED REASONABLE INTELLIGENCE, BUT WE ABSOLUTELY HAVE TO HAVE THE RIGHT TEMPERAMENT. OTHERWISE, SOMETHING WILL SNAP US.

 

10 JULY, 2021

OFTEN BEST IDEA FOR NEW MONEY IS TO BUY MORE OF WHAT YOU ALREADY OWN.

 

9 JULY, 2021

BUY A STOCK THE WAY YOU WOULD BUY A HOUSE. UNDERSTAND AND LIKE IT SUCH THAT YOU HAD BE CONTENT TO OWN IT IN THE ABSENCE OF ANY MARKET.

 

8 JULY, 2021

IF VODAFONE IDEA IS NOT ABLE TO RAISE FUNDS THEN THE SITUATION IS WORRYING FOR BANKS. SBI HAD LOANED RS 11,200 CRORES TO VODAFONE IDEA, PNB HAS ADVANCED RS 1,000 CRORES, INDUSIND LOANED RS 5,000 CRORES AND ICICI LOANED RS 1,700 CRORES. EVEN YES BANK HAS LOANED VODAFONE IDEA.

 

7 JULY, 2021

INDIAN SEMICONDUCTOR DESIGN MARKET GREW TO $52.58 BILLION IN 2020 FROM $14.5 BILLION IN 2015, GREW AT CAGR OF 29.4%.

 

6 JULY, 2021

THE GLOBAL ELECTRIC VEHICLE BATTERY SWAPPING INDUSTRY GENERATED $118.44 MILLION IN 2019 AND IS PROJECTED TO REACH $409.99 MILLION BY 2027, GROWING AT A CAGR OF 22.3%.

 

5 JULY, 2021

D2C SEGMENT FORMS ROUGHLY 15% OF THE OVERALL E-COMMERCE MARKET IN INDIA AND IS PROJECTED TO GROW 30-35% IN THE NEXT FIVE YEARS. 

 

4 JULY, 2021

INVIT IN ALL SECTOR WILL PLAY A MAJOR ROLE IN DEBT REDUCTION AND WILL UNLOCK THE VALUATION OF COMPANIES AND SECTORS.

 

3 JULY, 2021

GLOBAL AI MARKET IS EXPECTED TO GROW TO $309.6 BILLION BY 2026 FROM $58.3 BILLION IN 2021, GROWING AT CAGR OF 39.7%. THAT’S MASSIVE.

 

2 JULY, 2021

GLOBAL COFFEE PRODUCTION IS EXPECTED TO DECLINE TO 164.8 MILLION BAGS.

 

1 JULY, 2021

THERE IS HUGE DEMAND OF RENTAL CARS. DAILY RATES FOR RENTAL CARS IN U.S ARE CURRENTLY AT $166, ABOUT 140% INCREASE FROM 2019 PRICES. IN OAHU CAR RENTAL PRICES ROSE FROM $60 A DAY TO $400 A DAY.

 

30 JUNE, 2021

BEING SLOW AND STEADY MEANS THAT WE ARE WILLING TO EXCHANGE THE OPPORTUNITY OF MAKING A KILLING FOR THE ASSURANCE OF NEVER GETTING KILLED.

 

29 JUNE, 2021

THE BIGGEST THING ABOUT MAKING MONEY IS TIME. WE DON’T HAVE TO BE PARTICULARLY SMART, WE JUST HAVE TO BE PATIENT.

 

28 JUNE, 2021

THE FOCUS OF MOST INVESTORS DIFFERS FROM THAT OF VALUE INVESTORS. MOST INVESTORS ARE PRIMARILY ORIENTED TOWARD RETURN, HOW MUCH THEY CAN MAKE AND PAY LITTLE ATTENTION TO RISK, HOW MUCH THEY CAN LOSE.

 

27 JUNE, 2021

IT IS THE WEAK LINK THAT SNAPS US. AND FREQUENTLY, IN THE FINANCIAL MARKETS, THE WEAK LINK IS THE BORROWED MONEY.

 

26 JUNE, 2021

INVESTING IN STOCKS IS NOT LIKE PUTTING OUR MONEY IN A SAVINGS ACCOUNT THAT PAYS 10% ANNUALLY. RETURNS WILL FLUCTUATE FROM YEAR TO YEAR, SOME TIMES DRAMATICALLY. THE 10% RETURN IS ONLY ON AVERAGE OF SOME BANG UP YEARS, AND SOME GUT WRENCHING YEARS.

 

25 JUNE, 2021

WIDESPREAD FEAR IS OUR FRIEND AS AN INVESTOR, BECAUSE IT SERVES UP BARGAIN PURCHASES, BUT PERSONAL FEAR IS OUR BIGGEST ENEMY.

 

24 JUNE, 2021

ALWAYS LOOK HOW MUCH THE OTHER GUY IS MAKING WHEN HE IS TRYING TO SELL YOU SOMETHING.

 

23 JUNE, 2021

BUSINESSES SELDOM OPERATE IN A TRANQUIL, NO-SURPRISE ENVIRONMENT, AND EARNINGS SIMPLY DON’T ADVANCE SMOOTHLY.

 

22 JUNE, 2021

THERE IS NO DIGNITY QUITE SO IMPRESSIVE AND NO INDEPENDENCE QUIT SO IMPORTANT AS LIVING WITHIN YOUR MEANS.

 

21 JUNE, 2021

FINANCIAL INDEPENDENCE IS PERSON SPECIFIC. I HAVE ALWAYS BEEN TAKEN ABACK AT THE HIGH NUMBER OF PEOPLE IN WHOM AN ASTONISHINGLY HIGH INCOME LED TO ADDITIONAL SYCOPHANCY AS THEY BECOME MORE DEPENDENT ON THEIR CLIENTS AND EMPLOYERS AND MORE ADDICTED TO MAKING EVEN MORE MONEY.

 

20 JUNE, 2021

THE TIDE CONTINUES TO BE FAR MORE IMPORTANT THAN THE SWIMMERS.

 

19 JUNE, 2021

BALRAMPUR CHINI MILLS IS BETTING BIG ON DISTILLERY CAPACITIES. COMPANY IS SETTING UP A 3,20,000 LITERS PER DAY CAPACITY, WHICH WILL BE START IN DECEMBER 2022.

 

18 JUNE, 2021

SEMICONDUCTOR CAN BE THE NEXT BIG THEME TO INVEST. SEMICONDUCTORS ARE ALMOST USED IN ALL ITEMS WHICH HAVE NOW BECOME DAILY NECESSITY OF HUMANS. IN WORLD EVERYDAY NEW GENERATIONS ARE BORN AND SO DO THE NEW TECHNOLOGIES. BECAUSE NEXT REVOLUTION IN THE WORLD WILL BE BROUGHT BY TECHNOLOGIES. MORE THE TECHNOLOGIES MORE THE USE OF SEMICONDUCTORS. WITHOUT SEMICONDUCTORS NO NEW TECHNOLOGIES CAN BE BUILD.

 

17 JUNE, 2021

IN OUR GRANDFATHER’S GENERATION THEY USE TO STAY IN DHARAMSHALAS WHENEVER THEY WENT OUT OF TOWN FOR LEISURE, IN OUR DAD’S GENERATION THEY USE TO STAY IN 3 STAR HOTELS, IN OUR GENERATION WE STAY IN 5 STAR HOTELS, BUT NOW THERE IS ONE MORE CHANGE IN TREND, NOW WE ALL STAY IN LUXURIOUS VILLAS OR NORMAL VILLAS. ANY HOSPITALITY COMPANY WHICH GIVES VILLAS ON RENT WILL SEE GOOD AMOUNT OF SALES.

 

16 JUNE, 2021

FLIGHTS IN U.S ARE 84% FULL, ON AVERAGE, AMID A SURGE OF SUMMER TRAVEL. THE NUMBER OF PEOPLE PASSING DAILY THROUGH AIRPORT SECURITY CHECKPOINTS HAS NEARED 2 MILLION RECENTLY, A LEVEL LAST REACHED IN MARCH 2020.

 

15 JUNE, 2021

THERE IS MIGRATION HAPPENING FROM DIESEL TRUCKS TO CNG TRUCKS. IN LIGHT AND MEDIUM TRUCKS AROUND 30% OF MARKET HAS MOVED TO CNG.

 

14 JUNE, 2021

WE SHOULD BE A BUSINESS ANALYST, NOT A MARKET, MACROECONOMICS, OR A SECURITY ANALYST.

 

13 JUNE, 2021

BEING SLOW AND STEADY MEANS THAT WE ARE REALLY WILLING TO EXCHANGE THE OPPORTUNITY OF MAKING A KILLING FOR THE ASSURANCE OF NEVER GETTING KILLED.

 

12 JUNE, 2021

WITH EACH INVESTMENT WE MAKE, WE SHOULD HAVE THE COURAGE AND THE CONVICTION TO PLACE AT LEAST 10% OF OUR NET WORTH IN A PARTICULAR STOCK.

 

11 JUNE, 2021

THE BIGGEST THING ABOUT MAKING MONEY IS TIME. YOU DON’T HAVE TO BE PARTICULARLY SMART, YOU JUST HAVE TO BE PATIENT.

 

10 JUNE, 2021

DEBT IS THE ENEMY OF COMPOUNDING.

 

9 JUNE, 2021

TRUTH IS DEBIT CARD PAY FIRST ENJOY LATER AND LIE IS A CREDIT CARD ENJOY FIRST PAY LATER.

 

8 JUNE, 2021

FORD SAID IT WOULD INCREASE ITS INVESTMENT IN ELECTRIC VEHICLE SPENDING THROUGH MID DECADE BY ABOUT ONE THIRD, TO $30 BILLION BY 2025. IT EXPECTS HALF OF VEHICLE SALES FROM ITS LUXURY LINCOLN BRAND TO BE FULLY ELECTRIC WITHIN FOUR YEARS. VOLKSWAGEN AG IS SPENDING ABOUT $40 BILLION THROUGH MID DECADE ON ELECTRIC VEHICLES. FORD SAID THAT IT COULD NEED 10 BATTERY FACTORIES GLOBALLY BY THE END OF THE DECADE.

 

7 JUNE, 2021

THERE IS SO MUCH OF SHORTAGE OF CHIP IN THE WORLD THAT, COST OF ONE FLASH MEMORY CHIP WHICH WAS AROUND 50 CENTS EARLIER IS NOW SELLING AT $49.50

 

6 JUNE, 2021

THE MOST THAT OWNERS IN AGGREGATE CAN EARN BETWEEN NOW AND JUDGEMENT DAY IS WHAT THEIR BUSINESS IN AGGREGATE CAN EARN. 

 

5 JUNE, 2021

THE BASIC IDEAS OF INVESTING ARE: TO LOOK AT STOCKS AS BUSINESS, USE THE MARKET’S FLUCTUATION TO OUR ADVANTAGE, AND TO SEEK A MARGIN OF SAFETY IN OUR PURCHASE PRICE.

 

4 JUNE, 2021

EXTRA CARE IN THINKING IS NOT ALL GOOD BUT ALSO INTRODUCES EXTRA ERROR. MOST GOOD THINGS HAVE UNDESIRED SIDE EFFECTS AND THINKING IS NO EXCEPTION.

 

3 JUNE, 2021

IN MARKET PEOPLE CANNOT CONTROL THEIR GREED, ONLY THING BIGGER THAN GREED IS JUST BIGGER GREED.

 

2 JUNE, 2021

IN MARKETS, WHEN WE BREAK THE DISCIPLINE, WE PAY THE PRICE FOR IT.

 

1 JUNE, 2021

IN STOCK MARKET PEOPLE SEE SOMETHING DIFFERENT, THINK SOMETHING DIFFERENT AND DOES SOMETHING DIFFERENT.

 

31 MAY, 2021

I STRONGLY BELIEVE TATA MOTORS WILL BRING ELECTRIC PICK UP TRUCK IN NEAR FUTURE. I THINK FIRST THEY WILL MOSTLY TRY TO BRING ELECTRIC PICK UP TRUCK IN TATA ACE MODEL (CHOTA HATHI). ONCE THEY GET SUCCESS IN TATA ACE ELECTRIC PICK UP TRUCK, THEY CAN GO FOR BIGGER ELECTRIC TRUCK ALSO.

 

30 MAY, 2021

CHINESE COPPER DEMAND FROM EV’S AND RELATED INFRA WILL SEE A 26% CAGR OVER THE NEXT DECADE.

 

29 MAY, 2021

EUROPEAN OIL COMPANIES INCLUDING BP, ROYAL DUTCH SHELL ARE BUILDING NEW WIND AND SOLAR PROJECTS AND STRIKING DEALS TO SUPPLY ELECTRICITY TO BIG CORPORATE BUYERS LIKE AMAZON AND MICROSOFT. FRANCE’S TOTAL SAID IT AGREED TO SUPPLY SOLAR POWER TO U.S DRUG MAKER MERC. EARLIER THIS YEAR SHELL AGREED TO SUPPLY POWER TO AMAZON FROM WIND FARM IN NETHERLAND. IN EUROPE SHELL AND TOTAL SE ARE ALSO SEEKING DEALS TO SUPPLY COMPANIES WITH RENEWABLE ENERGY AS THEY STARTED TO PIVOT AWAY FROM OIL IN ANTICIPATION OF FAILING DEMAND AND LOOK TO BOOST THEIR PRESENCE IN LOW CARBON ENERGY. ALL THIS WILL GIVE BOOST TO COPPER INDUSTRY. BECAUSE RENEWABLE ENERGY WILL CREATE 30 MILLION TONNES OF EXTRA DEMAND OF COPPER BY 2050.

 

28 MAY, 2021

THE U.S SPENDING AT STORES, RESTAURANTS AND ONLINE JUMPED 10.7% TO $620 BILLION IN MARCH FROM FEBRUARY 2021 AND REMAINED AT THAT LEVEL IN APRIL. THAT MEANS AMERICANS SPENT MORE THAN $100 BILLION EXTRA EACH MONTH COMPARED WITH MARCH AND APRIL 2019.

 

27 MAY, 2021

IN U.S MANY CITIES ARE CONSIDERING TO BAN NATURAL GAS FOR HOME COOKING AND HEATING PUMPS DUE TO CLIMATE CONCERNS. BIDEN’S $1.7 TRILLION INFRASTRUCTURE PLAN CALLS FOR GREATER ADOPTION OF ALL ELECTRIC HEAT PUMPS AND INDUCTION STOVES. CALIFORNIA STATE IS GOING TO CUT EMISSIONS FROM HOMES BY 40% BY 2030 TO ADOPT ZERO EMISSION BUILDING CODES FOR EACH WITHIN FEW YEARS. GOVERNMENT IS PLANNING TO BAN USE OF FOSSIL FUEL IN NEW HOMES AND BUILDING. THIS GOOD NEWS FOR TTK PRESTIGE. SINCE TTK PRESTIGE IS THE ONLY COMPANY IN INDIA TO EXPORT GOOD AMOUNT OF INDUCTION STOVES AND ELECTRIC RELATED COOKING UTENSILS AND EQUIPMENTS  TO U.S CITIES.

 

26 MAY, 2021

THERE CAN BE A BRIGHT FUTURE FOR SEMICONDUCTOR INDUSTRY IN INDIA. GOVERNMENT WILL OFFER $1 BILLION IN CASH TO EACH COMPANY THOSE WHO WILL SET UP SEMICONDUCTOR MANUFACTURING UNITS. INDIA IS WORLD’S SECOND LARGEST SMARTPHONE MARKET. INDIA EXPORTED 145 MILLION SMARTPHONES IN 2020. INDIA’S IT SECTOR IS ALSO GROWING AT GREAT PACE. ALL THIS WILL INCREASE THE DEMAND OF SEMICONDUCTOR.

 

25 MAY, 2021

DUE TO RISING COST OF RAW MATERIAL IN CHINA, CHINESE MANUFACTURERS ARE REFUSING TO ACCEPT NEW ORDERS OR ARE EVEN CONSIDERING SHUTTING DOWN OPERATIONS TEMPORARILY. THIS MOVE CAN DISTURB THE WHOLE GLOBAL SUPPLY CHAIN.

 

24 MAY, 2021

IN ELECTRIC VEHICLE SEGMENT TESLA IS OVERRATED, VOLKSWAGEN AND FORD ARE UNDERRATED.

 

23 MAY, 2021

THE COMPANY MUST RECOGNIZE THAT THE WORLD IN WHICH IT IS OPERATING IS CHANGING AT AN EVER INCREASING RATE. THE COMPANY THAT IS RIGID IN ITS ACTIONS AND IS NOT CONSTANTLY CHALLENGING ITSELF HAS ONLY ONE WAY TO GO, AND THAT WAY IS DOWN.

 

22 MAY, 2021

MARKET DON’T LIKE NEGATIVE SURPRISE.

 

21 MAY, 2021

THE INTELLIGENT INVESTOR IS A REALIST WHO SELLS TO OPTIMISTS AND BUY FROM PESSIMISTS.

 

20 MAY, 2021

WHEN MARKET GIVES SECOND CHANCE THEN DON’T REPEAT THE OLD MISTAKES AGAIN. OTHERWISE WE WILL BE OUT OF THE MARKET FOROVER.

 

19 MAY, 2021

DEBT FREE IS STRESS FREE.

 

18 MAY, 2021

ALL THERE IS TO INVESTING IS PICKING GOOD STOCKS AT GOOD TIMES AND STAYING WITH THEM AS LONG AS THEY REMAIN GOOD COMPANIES 

 

17 MAY, 2021

SAVE MONEY IS THE MOST BORING ADVICE. BUT THIS IS THE MAIN THING ON WHICH EVERYONE’S FINANCIAL LIFE IS BUILT.

 

16 MAY, 2021

GREAT INVESTMENT OPPORTUNITIES COME AROUND WHEN EXCELLENT COMPANIES ARE SURROUNDED BY UNUSUAL CIRCUMSTANCES THAT CAUSE THE STOCK TO BE MISAPPRAISED.

 

15 MAY, 2021

COST OF CHIPS USED IN AUTONOMOUS VEHICLES TO JUMP TO $1,200 BY 2030 FROM CURRENT COST OF $170. CHIP SHORTAGE IS LIKELY TO CONTINUE IN NEXT YEAR ALSO.

 

14 MAY, 2021

AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLE CONTAINS ABOUT 22.5 KG OF COPPER, WHILE HIGH END LUXURY CARS CONTAIN AROUND 1.6 KILOMETERS OF COPPER WIRES ON AN AVERAGE.

 

13 MAY, 2021

INCREASE IN LUMBER PRICE IN GENERATING GOOD PROFITS FOR SAW MILL OWNERS. WOOD PRICES PUSHED FURTHER INTO RECORD TERRITORY. LUMBER PRICES HAS REACHED $1575.60 PER THOUSAND BOARD FEET, AN ALL TIME HIGH AND MORE THAN FOUR TIMES THE TYPICAL PRICE THIS TIME OF YEAR. 

 

12 MAY, 2021

COPPER IS FACING AN IMPENDING SUPPLY GAP. THERE WILL BE A 10 MILLION SUPPLY DEFICIT BY 2028 DUE TO LACK OF COPPER MINES IN THE PIPELINE. THE METAL IS NOT BEING DISCOVERED FAST TO SATISFY THE UPCOMING DEMAND.

 

11 MAY, 2021

MINING COMPANIES NEED TO INVEST $1.7 TRILLION IN THE NEXT 15 YEARS TO SUPPLY ENOUGH COPPER, COBALT AND NICKEL TO CREATE A LOW CARBON WORLD.

 

10 MAY, 2021

THERE IS SHORT SUPPLY OF ACRYLIC ACID, THE PROPYLENE BASED COMPOUND THAT MAKES DIAPERS ABSORBENT. DIAPER PRICES ARE UP AROUND 9%. PROCTER & GAMBLE CO. IS THE BIGGEST DIAPER MANUFACTURER.

 

9 MAY, 2021

HOUSING MARKET IN U.S: SOME BUYERS ARE OFFERING $1,00,000-$5,00,000 ABOVE ASKING PRICE. A GENERAL THUMB RULE IS TO SPEND ONLY BETWEEN A QUARTER AND A THIRD OF A MONTHLY GROSS INCOME ON MORTGAGE PAYMENT AND BETWEEN 35% AND 45% OF MAINTENANCE TAXES AND INSURANCE. HOW CAN PEOPLE WANTED TO BE INVESTED IN THEIR HOUSE THAT NO MONEY IS LEFT FOR ANYTHING ELSE WITH THEM AFTER BEING INVESTED IN HOUSE. BUYERS OFFERING $1,00,000-$5,00,000 ABOVE ASKING PRICE ITSELF INDICATES U.S MAY FACE HOUSING BUBBLE BECAUSE PRICES OF HOUSES ARE INCREASING BUT ON OTHER SIDE INCOME OF INDIVIDUAL IS NOT INCREASING.

 

8 MAY, 2021

WHEN ALL MONEY GOES ON ONE WAY, GO THE OTHER WAY.

 

7 MAY, 2021

IN INVESTING, FINDING GOOD BUSINESS IS NOT HARD PART, EVERYONE CAN FIND IT. BUT HOLDING THAT GOOD BUSINESS IN BAD TIMES IS MOST IMPORTANT THING. USUALLY PEOPLE HAS NO PATIENCE TO HOLD GOOD BUSINESS IN BAD TIMES AND THAT IS THE MAIN REASON WHY MANY PEOPLE DO NOT MAKE HUGE WEALTH CREATION. ONLY FEW HAVE HAVE PATIENCE TO HOLD GOOD BUSINESS IN BAD TIMES THAT’S WHY THEY ARE CALLED SUCCESSFUL INVESTORS.

 

6 MAY, 2021

PROTECT IN DOWN MARKETS AND PARTICIPATE IN UP MARKETS.

 

5 MAY, 2021

RETAIL INVESTOR HAS USUALLY GATHERED A GOOD DEAL OF HALF TRUTHS, MISCONCEPTIONS THAT THE GENERAL PUBLIC HAS GRADUALLY ACCUMULATED ABOUT SUCCESSFUL INVESTING.

 

4 MAY, 2021

MULTI-BAGGER CANNOT BE FOUND WITHOUT HARD WORK AND THEY CANNOT BE FOUND EVERYDAY.

 

3 MAY, 2021

INVESTORS SHOULD ALWAYS KEEP IN MIND THAT THE MOST IMPORTANT METRIC IS NOT THE RETURNS ACHIEVED BUT THE RETURNS WEIGHED AGAINST THE RISKS INCURRED. ULTIMATELY, NOTHING SHOULD BE MORE IMPORTANT TO INVESTORS THAN THE ABILITY TO SLEEP SOUNDLY AT NIGHT.

 

2 MAY, 2021

AT ALL TIMES, IN ALL MARKETS, THE TINIEST CHANGE IN INTEREST RATES CHANGES THE VALUE OF EVERY FINANCIAL ASSETS.

 

1 MAY, 2021

DEBT FREE IS STRESS FREE AND DEBT FREE IS THE ONLY WAY ONE CAN ACHIEVE FINANCIAL INDEPENDENCE.

 

30 APRIL, 2021

STUDY SUCCESSFUL INVESTORS, AND WE WILL NOTICE A COMMON DENOMINATOR. THEY ARE MASTER OF PSYCHOLOGY. THEY CAN’T CONTROL THE MARKET, BUT THEY HAVE COMPLETE CONTROL OVER THE GRAY MATTER BETWEEN THEIR EARS.

 

29 APRIL, 2021

IN CAPITAL MARKETS AVOIDING OR MINIMIZING PERMANENT LOSS OF CAPITAL IS MORE IMPORTANT THAN RUNNING BEHIND THE GOOD RETURNS. BECAUSE TO MAKE MONEY ONE NEEDS MONEY. SO IF THERE IS NO PERMANENT LOSS OF CAPITAL MEANS MONEY WILL BE DEFINITELY MADE IN CAPITAL MARKETS IF NOT TODAY THEN TOMORROW DEFINITELY IT WILL BE MADE.

 

28 APRIL, 2021

LEARN TO SELL, LEARN TO BUY. IF WE CAN DO BOTH THEN WE WILL BE UNSTOPPABLE.

 

27 APRIL, 2021

EU WANTS TO DIVERSIFY ITS VALUE CHAIN AWAY FROM CHINA TO INDIA AND HENCE THERE IS INTEREST IN ITS PART ALSO TO HAVE TRADE DEAL WITH INDIA.

 

26 APRIL, 2021

INCREASE IN LUMBER PRICE IS GENERATING GOOD PROFITS FOR SAW MILL OWNERS. WOOD PRICES PUSHED FURTHER INTO RECORD TERRITORY. LUMBER PRICES HAS REACHED $1575.60 PER THOUSAND BOARD FEET, AN ALL TIME HIGH AND MORE THAN FOUR TIMES THE TYPICAL PRICE THIS TIME OF YEAR.

 

25 APRIL, 2021

ALL OF US WOULD BE BETTER INVESTORS IF WE JUST MADE FEWER DECISIONS.

 

24 APRIL, 2021

LONG TERM INVESTORS NEED TO LEARN TO LIVE WITH UP’S AND DOWN’S, OVER VALUATION AND UNDER VALUATION, MULTI-BAGGER AND MULTI-BEGGAR, BUY AND SELL CALL. THEY CAN’T LIVE WITHOUT ALL THESE. THERE IS NO WAY TO AVOID SUCH ROLLER COASTER RIDE.

 

23 APRIL, 2021

IN STOCK MARKET WE DON’T NEED TO BE OLD, TO BE RIGHT.

 

22 APRIL, 2021

QUESTION WE SHOULD ASK OURSELVES BEFORE BUYING STOCK FOR LONG TERM: DOES THE COMPANY HAVE PRODUCTS OR SERVICES WITH SUFFICIENT MARKET POTENTIAL TO MAKE POSSIBLE A SIZABLE INCREASE IN SALES FOR LONGER PERIOD OF YEARS?

 

21 APRIL, 2021

WHEN PROFIT MARGIN OF A WHOLE COMMODITY INDUSTRY RISE BECAUSE OF REPEATED PRICE INCREASES, THE INDICATION IS NOT A GOOD ONE FOR THE LONG TERM INVESTORS,

 

20 APRIL, 2021

NORWAY HAS BECOME THE FIRST COUNTRY IN THE WORLD TO SEE THE SALE OF ELECTRIC CARS OVERTAKE SALES OF THOSE POWERED BY FOSSIL FUELS.

 

19 APRIL, 2021

INVESTORS CAN WIN BUT ONLY IF THEY DON’T TRY TO BEAT THE PROS AT THEIR OWN GAME OR IF THEY DON’T TRY TO BEAT THE SYSTEM OR MARKETS.

 

18 APRIL, 2021

INDIAN SUGAR HAS BECOME SWEET AS SAME AS BRAZIL, DUE TO ETHANOL PRODUCTION.

 

17 APRIL, 2021

LONG TERM RETURNS IS A PROCESS. INVESTORS CAN ONLY GET GOOD LONG TERM RETURNS IF THEY HAVE GONE THROUGH HIGH RETURNS, LOW RETURNS, NO RETURNS AND NEGATIVE RETURNS.

 

16 APRIL, 2021

PATIENCE IS NECESSARY IF LARGE AND ENDURING PROFITS ARE TO BE MADE FROM EQUITY INVESTMENTS. PUT ANOTHER WAY, IT IS OFTEN EASIER TO TELL WHAT WILL HAPPEN TO THE PRICE OF A SECURITY THAN WHEN IT WILL HAPPEN.

 

15 APRIL, 2021

NO INVESTOR CAN AVOID UNDER PERFORMANCE AND NO PARTICULAR STRATEGY OF INVESTOR CAN ALWAYS GIVE GOOD RESULTS. SO SUCCESSFUL INVESTORS ARE THOSE WHO STAY IN MARKETS EVEN DURING BAD TIMES.

 

14 APRIL, 2021

GROWTH IS A PROCESS, IT TAKES MANY YEARS, IT CANNOT BE HAPPENED OVERNIGHT. THEN WHY TO MEASURE RETURNS AND PERFORMANCE BY EVERYDAY PRICE MOVEMENT OR ON REGULAR BASIS.

 

13 APRIL, 2021

STOCK MARKET IS NOT ABOUT BULLS AND BEARS. ITS ABOUT SENTIMENTS OF PEOPLE. ITS ABOUT EMOTIONALLY STRONG AND WEAK PARTICIPANTS. MONEY GETS TRANSFERRED FROM EMOTIONALLY WEAK TO EMOTIONALLY STRONG PEOPLE.

 

12 APRIL, 2021

IN STARTING PHASE OF INVESTING CAREER IT IS BETTER TO LOSE MONEY THAN TO MAKE PROFITS. BECAUSE GAINING MONEY IN STARTING PHASE MAKES US PROUDY AND MAKES US THINK THAT OUR RESEARCH IS ALWAYS RIGHT, AND SUCH THINKING DOES NOT ALLOWS US TO SEARCH NEGATIVE SIDE OF A COMPANY. AND SUCH THINKING WILL BE VERY HARMFUL FOR OUR LONG TERM CAREER IN INVESTING.

 

11 APRIL, 2021

DON’T HESITATE ESPECIALLY IN CRISIS.

 

10 APRIL, 2021

DISCOUNT SALE, TIME TO ADD SOME QUALITY COMPANIES ON EVERY DIPS. ONE SHOULD TAKE ADVANTAGE OF FEAR.

 

9 APRIL, 2021

WORK HARD, SPEND LITTLE, SAVE THE DIFFERENCE, LET OUR ASSETS WORK FOR US. THAT’S REALLY ALL THE FINANCIAL ADVICE WE NEED.

 

8 APRIL, 2021

IF WE DON’T INVEST, OUR RETURN IS 0% AND IT’S NEGATIVE WITH INFLATION. STOP OVERTHINKING, STOP OVER ANALYZING, START DOING. 

 

7 APRIL, 2021

THE BIGGEST CAUSE OF TROUBLE TODAY IS THAT THE STUPID ARE COMPLETELY SURE ABOUT THINGS, WHILE THE KNOWLEDGEABLE, ARE COMPLETELY UNSURE.

 

6 APRIL, 2021

AT ONE POINT, SURVIVAL IN MARKET IS MORE IMPORTANT THAN MAKING RETURNS IN MARKET.

 

5 APRIL, 2021

EXPENSES ARE FOREVER, BUT INCOME IS FOR A LIMITED PERIOD. SO WE SHOULD MAKE OUR EXPENSES VERY WISELY.

 

4 APRIL, 2021

IF WE ARE NOT ABLE TO SEARCH MULTI-BAGGERS, THEN WE SHOULD THINK OF 12-15% CAGR FOR LONG TERM. BECAUSE 12-15% CAGR FOR TEN YEARS GENERATES 4X RETURNS.

 

3 APRIL, 2021

MAKING AS MUCH MONEY AS QUICKLY AS POSSIBLE IS NOT AN INVESTMENT STRATEGY BUT IT IS CALLED GAMBLING.

 

2 APRIL, 2021

U.S IS PLANNING FOR 5 LAKH NEW CHARGING STATIONS, FIVE TIMES THE SIZE OF TOTAL NETWORK IN U.S, AS PART OF $174 BILLION PLAN TO BOOST THE EV INDUSTRY IN MR. BIDEN BOARD $2.3 TRILLION INFRASTRUCTURE PROPOSAL.

 

1 APRIL, 2021

INDIA WILL WITNESS MORE THAN TWO FOLD INCREASE OR A 64% HIKE IN INTERNET USERS BY 2023. AND THIS WILL LEAD TO INCREASE IN CONSUMPTION. INDIA’S CONSUMPTION WILL DEPEND ON MOBILE AND INTERNET PENETRATION.

 

31 MARCH, 2021

INDIA IS LARGELY AN UNORGANIZED RETAIL MARKET, CONTRIBUTING 88% TO THE TOTAL RETAIL SECTOR IN INDIA. THE ORGANIZED RETAIL MARKET IS CURRENTLY VALUED AT $60 BILLION, WHILE THE UNORGANIZED MARKET HOLDS THE REST. THE SHARE OF THE ORGANIZED RETAIL MARKET IS PROJECTED TO INCREASE TO 22-25% BY 2022, THEREBY REDUCING THE UNORGANIZED RETAIL MARKET’S SHARE TO 77%. THE ORGANIZED RETAIL MARKET, THEREFORE HAS POTENTIAL TO REACH APPROXIMATELY $140-160 BILLION.

 

30 MARCH, 2021

BOEING GOT BOOST FROM NEW ORDER. SOUTHWEST AIRLINE SAID IT IS BUYING 100 NEW BOEING 737 MAX JETS, A WIN FOR THE BOEING AFTER SUFFERING FROM PROLONGED GROUNDING OF THE TROUBLED JET AND FALLOUT FROM THE PANDEMIC. THE ORDER ALSO MEAN BOEING WILL RETAIN ITS LOCK ON ONE OF ITS MOST IMPORTANT AIRLINE CUSTOMERS. SOUTHWEST’S FLEET IS MADE ENTIRELY OF 737 JETS, BUT THE CARRIER HAD BEEN RE-EVALUATING THAT STRATEGY.

 

29 MARCH, 2021

HAPPY HOLI TO EVERYONE. MAY THIS HOLI BRINGS COLORS TO EVERYONES LIVES.

 

28 MARCH, 2021

THE MOST POWERFUL PERSON IN MARKET IS THE ONE WHO HAS CONTROL OVER HIMSELF.

 

27 MARCH, 2021

JAB TAK MARKET ME DAR HAI TAB TAK MARKET BADHTA RAHEGA.

 

26 MARCH, 2021

FEAR IS THE BIGGEST ENEMY OF SUCCESSFUL INVESTMENT.

 

25 MARCH, 2021

CORONA SE DARO MARKET SE NAHI. BUY ON EVERY DIPS. BECAUSE NO ONE CAN STOP THE GROWTH OF ANY COUNTRY. NEW GENERATIONS WILL BE BORN EVERYDAY AND NEW TECHNOLOGY WILL BE INVENTED EVERYDAY TO FULFILL THE NEEDS OF NEW GENERATIONS. WORLD WILL NOT COME AN END. ONE SHOULD TAKE ADVANTAGE OF FEAR.

 

24 MARCH, 2021

BOEING FORECASTED INDIA WILL REQUIRE MORE THAN 2,200 NEW AIRCRAFT WORTH NEARLY $320 BILLION OVER THE NEXT 20 YEARS.

 

23 MARCH, 2021

THE WADIA GROUP WAS INCORPORATED IN 1736. IT BEGAN THE BUSINESS WITH BUILDING SHIPS FOR EAST INDIA COMPANY.

 

22 MARCH, 2021

MARKET HAS A BIG HEART. MARKET WILL RESPECT US IF WE RESPECT MARKET. BUT IF WE TRY TO BECOME A KING OF MARKET THEN MARKET WILL SHOW ITS SIDE. NOBODY CAN BE A KING OF MARKET BECAUSE MARKET ITSELF IS A KING.

 

21 MARCH, 2021]

LOSING MONEY IN MARKET IS NOT A LOSS. BUT WE SHOULD TAKE IT AS A TUITION FEE. IT TEACHES US MANY THINGS. NO ONE IN MARKET HAS MADE HUGE WEALTH WITHOUT LOSING MONEY IN INITIAL STAGE OF CAREER IN MARKET.

 

20 MARCH, 2021

ONE CAN ONLY BECOME A SUCCESSFUL INVESTOR BY SEEING OR BEING A PART OF TWO BULL MARKET AND TWO BEAR MARKET. BEING A PART OF TWO BULL MARKET AND TWO BEAR MARKETS GIVES US GREAT EXPERIENCE OF HOW TO HOLD AND BET BIG ON OUR CONVICTION EVEN WHEN MARKETS ARE FALLING. BY SEEING TWO BULL MARKET AND TWO BEAR MARKET MAKES US FEARLESS.

 

19 MARCH, 2021

ONE CAN NOT RETIRE IF THEY DON’T HAVE MONEY. PERSON WILL EVEN WORK AT AGE OF 80 IF HE DO NOT HAVE MONEY. SO RETIREMENT IS NOT JUST THE MATTER OF AGE BUT IT IS THE MATTER OF FINANCIAL INDEPENDENCE. 

 

18 MARCH, 2021

COMPOUND INTEREST IS ONE OF THE BEST THING WHICH IS INVENTED BY HUMANS.

 

17 MARCH, 2021

IF ONE HAVE SHORT TERM VIEWS IN MARKET THEN HE IS JUST THINKING OF MAKING MONEY. AND ONE WHO HAS LONG TERM VIEWS ON MARKET THINKS OF MASSIVE WEALTH CREATION. IN SHORT TERM VIEWS ONE CAN MAKE MONEY BUT CAN NOT CREATE HUGE WEALTH. WEALTH CREATION IS ONLY POSSIBLE BY LONG TERM VIEWS. PEOPLE MAKE MISTAKES IN MAKING DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MONEY AND WEALTH. 

 

16 MARCH, 2021

WE CAN PREDICT A SEASON BUT WE CAN NOT PREDICT WEATHER. SAME WAY WE CAN PREDICT LONG TERM RETURNS IN STOCK MARKET BUT WE CAN NOT PREDICT SHORT TERM RETURN IN MARKETS. 

 

15 MARCH, 2021

IN TRADING, WE MAKE MISTAKES EVERYDAY. IT IS NOT IMPORTANT THAT WE ARE RIGHT OR WRONG IN TRADING, IT IS IMPORTANT HOW MUCH WE LOSE WHEN WE ARE WRONG AND HOW MUCH WE MAKE WHEN WE ARE RIGHT.

 

14 MARCH, 2021

EVERY INVESTMENT HAS AN IDEAL ENVIRONMENT IN WHICH IT FLOURISHES. THERE IS A SEASON FOR EVERYTHING.

 

13 MARCH, 2021

WE CAN BECOME RICH BY MAKING THE SHIFT FROM BEING A CONSUMER IN THE ECONOMY TO BECOMING A OWNER. AND WE CAN DO IT BY BECOMING AN INVESTOR.

 

12 MARCH, 2021

A STOCK IS NOT JUST A TICKET SYMBOL OR AN ELECTRONIC BLIP, IT IS AN OWNERSHIP INTEREST IN AN ACTUAL BUSINESS, WITH AN UNDERLYING VALUE THAT DOES NOT DEPEND ON ITS SHARE PRICE.

 

11 MARCH, 2021

OWNING GREAT COMPANIES, AND NOT TRYING TO PREDICT THE STOCK MARKET IS THE KEY TO BEAT THE INDEX OVER LONG RUN.

 

10 MARCH, 2021

INDIA’S EV FINANCING INDUSTRY IS PROJECTED TO BE WORTH RS 3.7 LAKH CRORE IN 2030, ABOUT 80% OF THE CURRENT SIZE OF INDIA’S RETAIL VEHICLE FINANCE INDUSTRY, WORTH RS 4.5 LAKH CRORE TODAY.

 

9 MARCH, 2021

WE SHOULD NOT FOCUS ON BIG STORIES SHOWN BY MANAGEMENT OF COMPANY. IN FACT WE SHOULD FOCUS ON EARNINGS AND CASH FLOWS.

 

8 MARCH, 2021

IN INVESTING, PATIENCE OF MANY YEARS IS REWARDED IN A SINGLE YEAR . THOSE WHO UNDERSTANDS THIS WILL NEVER CONSTANTLY SHUFFLE OR JUMP FROM ONE STOCK TO ANOTHER.

 

7 MARCH, 2021

FINANCIAL DISCIPLINE IN EARLY 20’S AND 30’S WOULD SAVE OUR REMAINING YEARS OF LIFE BY PROVIDING US FINANCIAL INDEPENDENCE. 

 

6 MARCH, 2021

IF WE ARE GENERALLY A SMART PERSON, THEN THERE WILL BE TONS AND TONS OF OPPORTUNITY IN MARKET.

 

5 MARCH, 2021

INVESTORS WHO SHARES HIS FAILURES ARE THE REAL INVESTORS. BECAUSE OUR RETURNS OR OUR NET WORTH IS A TOTAL OF OUR FAILURES AND SUCCESSES.

 

4 MARCH, 2021

PEOPLE WHO ARE NOT IN MARKET SAYS MAKING MANY IN STOCK MARKET IS EASY, BUT THEY DON’T KNOW MAKING MONEY IN STOCK MARKET REQUIRES 6 TO 7 HOURS OF READING DAILY, TO KEEP BELIEF IN GOOD COMPANIES EVEN IF MARKET OR SHARE PRICE OF COMPANY IN WHICH WE HAVE INVESTED GOES DOWN DUE TO SOME SMALL NEGATIVE NEWS WHICH DOES NOT AFFECTS LONG TERM FUNDAMENTALS OF THAT COMPANY, TO MANAGE FUND OR INCOME FOR OUR DAY TO DAY LIVING SO THAT WE DO NOT NEED TO SELL SHARES FOR OUR DAY TO DAY LIVING OR DURING IN EMERGENCY. SO INVESTING IN STOCK MARKET IS NOT EASY.

 

3 MARCH, 2021

BUSINESSMAN INVESTS IN GOODS AND SERVICES WHICH HE SELLS OR PROVIDES TO CUSTOMERS TO EARN MONEY, ACTORS INVEST IN HIS BODY TO GET NEW FILMS, SAME WAY INVESTORS SHOULD INVEST TIME IN READING TO ACHIEVE FINANCIAL INDEPENDENCE. 

 

2 MARCH, 2021

FLUCTUATIONS OF STOCK PRICES AFFECTS THE SENTIMENTS OF PEOPLE BUT IT DOES NOT AFFECTS THE FUNDAMENTALS OF COMPANIES.

 

1 MARCH, 2021

STUDY COMPANIES NOT MARKET BECAUSE IF COMPANY IS NOT GOOD AND MARKET GOES UP, THEN TOO THAT BAD COMPANY WILL NOT GO UP. 

 

28 FEBRUARY, 2021

ONE WILL ONLY MAKE MONEY IN MARKET IF HE DE-ATTACHES HIS DESIRE OF BECOMING RICH QUICKLY.

 

27 FEBRUARY, 2021

WE SHOULD NEVER BORROW MONEY AND INVEST BECAUSE WHEN WE MAKE A LOSS IN IT WE LOSE OUR EVERYTHING, FREEDOM, SLEEP , IN SHORT OUR LIFE. WE SHOULD NEVER BORROW CONVICTION AND INVEST BECAUSE VIEWS AND CONVICTIONS DIFFERS FROM PERSON TO PERSON ACCORDING TO THEIR FINANCIAL GOALS. OUR FINANCIAL GOALS MAY BE DIFFERENT FROM THE PERSON WE BORROW CONVICTION SO THAT BORROWED  CONVICTION FOR US MAY GO WRONG. SO ITS BETTER TO MAKE AN INVESTMENT WITH OUR OWN CONVICTION AND OUR OWN MONEY. BECAUSE EVEN IF WE MAKE MISTAKE AND LOSE MONEY, WE DON’T HAVE TO GIVE ANSWER TO ANYBODY, IN FACT WE CAN LEARN FROM IT.

 

26 FEBRUARY, 2021

ONE SHOULD NOT CRY FOR BITS AND PIECES IN STOCK MARKET. IF ONE DECIDES TO BUY A SHARE AND IT GOES UP BY A RUPEE THEN INVESTOR WHO SAYS I WILL NOT BUY NOW SINCE IT HAS GONE UP BY A RUPEE, I WILL BUY ONLY WHEN IT COMES DOWN BY A RUPEE. BY SUCH THINKING WE MISS AN INVESTMENT OPPORTUNITY. BECAUSE SOMETIMES THAT INCREASED OF 1 RUPEE TURNS INTO THE INCREASE OF RS 30,40,50 AND WE MISS AN OPPORTUNITY. SAME GOES WHILE SELLING. IF WE WANT TO SELL AND AT THAT TIME IF PRICE DECREASE BY 1 RUPEE, MANY INVESTORS SAYS ITS I RUPEE LOSS, I WILL SELL ONLY WHEN IT COMES UP. BUT SOMETIME THAT 1 RUPEE FALL TURNS INTO A FALL OF RS 30,40,50 AND WE MISS AN OPPORTUNITY TO SELL WHICH CAUSES LOSS OF CAPITAL. SO ONE SHOULD NEVER CRY FOR BITS AND PIECES IN MARKET.

 

25 FEBRUARY, 2021

EVERYONE SAYS THAT ONE SHOULD ALWAYS MAKE INVESTMENTS TO ACHIEVE FINANCIAL INDEPENDENCE AND GOOD RETIREMENT. BUT ONE CAN ONLY MAKE INVESTMENTS IF THEY HAVE SAVED MONEY FROM THEIR SOURCE OF INCOME. SO SAVINGS PLAYS MOST IMPORTANT ROLE TO ACHIEVE FINANCIAL INDEPENDENCE.

 

24 FEBRUARY, 2021

A PERSON WHO ENTERS THE MARKET JUST TO EARN MONEY WILL NEVER EARN MONEY. BUT A PERSON WHO ENTERS THE MARKET TO LEARN SOMETHING WILL DEFINITELY EARN MONEY.

 

23 FEBRUARY, 2021

MARKET IS SUPREME. NO CAN CAN BE THE KING OF THE MARKET BECAUSE MARKET ITSELF IS A KING.

 

22 FEBRUARY, 2021

IN INVESTING READING GIVES KNOWLEDGE, KNOWLEDGE GIVES CONVICTION, CONVICTION GIVES COURAGE TO WAIT FOR LONGER PERIOD OF TIME ONCE AFTER WE HAVE INVESTED (PATIENCE). AND PATIENCE GIVES WEALTH.

 

21 FEBRUARY, 2021

BULL MARKET IS BULL MARKET FOR THOSE INVESTORS WHO PICKS STOCKS WISELY, BECAUSE IN BULL MARKET THERE IS A MOVEMENT IN EVERY STOCK, BUT ONLY THE STOCKS OF QUALITY COMPANIES CAN RETAIN THE PRICE EVEN AFTER THE BULL MARKET IS OVER. NON QUALITY STOCKS WILL FALL BELOW THEIR PAST LOWS ONCE AFTER THE BULL MARKET IS OVER. 

 

20 FEBRUARY, 2021

MARKET ITSELF IS A TEACHER, IT ALWAYS TEACHES US SOME THING NEW EVERYDAY. 

 

19 FEBRUARY, 2021

SALVADOR VERGARA WAS SO ENTHUSIASTIC ABOUT GAMESTOP IN LATE JANUARY THAT HE TOOK A USD 20,000 PERSONAL LOAN TO PURCHASE GAMESTOP STOCK. THEN THE STOCK FALLS ABOUT 80%. THIS IS THE PERFECT EXAMPLE OF NOT TO BUY STOCKS ON LEVERAGE.

 

18 FEBRUARY, 2021

NOT GETTING CARRIED AWAY BY POSITIVE NEWS OR NEGATIVE NEWS IN STOCK MARKET IS AN ART. TO BE SUCCESSFUL IN LONG TERM INVESTING ONE SHOULD LEARN THIS ART.

 

17 FEBRUARY, 2021

IF WE ARE JEALOUS OF OTHER INVESTORS SUCCESS, THEN WE WOULD NEVER BE ABLE TO STICK TO OUR ONE INVESTMENT PROCESS OR PHILOSOPHY.

 

16 FEBRUARY, 2021

MARKET IS NOT ABOUT BULL OR BEAR. BUT MARKET IS ABOUT TIMING, VERY RARE PEOPLE CAN TIME MARKET PROPERLY.

 

15 FEBRUARY, 2021

COMPANY WITH BAD MANAGEMENT TAKES US TO HELL. COMPANY WITH BAD MANAGEMENT CAUSES US PERMANENT LOSS OF CAPITAL.

 

14 FEBRUARY, 2021

WE SHOULD NOT SELL A SHARE JUST BECAUSE WE ARE FRUSTRATED WITH ITS RECENT PERFORMANCE.

 

13 FEBRUARY, 2021

THERE ARE SAME PEOPLE IN MARKET EVERYDAY, BUT ONLY THE SENTIMENTS OF THAT PEOPLE CHANGES EVERYDAY NOT THE PEOPLE. SAME WAY COMPANIES ARE SAME, BUT THE PRICE CHANCES EVERYDAY.

 

12 FEBRUARY, 2021

STOCK MARKET IS A MATTER OF VISION, COURAGE AND PATIENCE.

 

11 FEBRUARY, 2021

MARKET SENDS A SIGN FOR EVERYTHING. WE JUST HAS TO SEE IT.

 

10 FEBRUARY, 2021

BULL MARKET IS NOT T20 CRICKET BUT  ITS A TEST MATCH. BEFORE THE START OF A BULL MARKET, THE MARKET SHAKES US IN SUCH A MANNER THAT PEOPLE JUST FORGET TO BUY STOCKS.

 

9 FEBRUARY, 2021

ONLY THOSE PEOPLE WHO HAVE POSITIVE THINKING AND FAITH IN MARKET CAN MAKE MONEY FROM MARKET.

 

8 FEBRUARY, 2021

DEBT IS THE BIGGEST ENEMY OF HUMANS. IT SNATCHES AWAY OUR SLEEP, DESTROYS OUR RELATIONS, KEEP PEOPLE FAR FROM US. IN SHORT IT TAKES OUR LIFE.

 

7 FEBRUARY, 2021

DEMAND FOR HOMES IN U.S HAS SURGED IN THE PAST YEAR AS BUYERS TOOK ADVANTAGE OF RECORD LOW INTEREST RATES AND THE PANDEMIC PROMPTED MANY HOUSEHOLD TO SEEK BIGGER HOUSES THAT COULD BETTER ACCOMMODATE REMOTE WORK. HOME SALES IN 2020 ROSE 5.6% TO THE HIGHEST PACE SINCE 2006. PEOPLE ARE WILLING TO MOVE FARTHER OUT BECAUSE THEY ONLY HAVE TO GO TO OFFICE ONCE OR TWICE A WEEK OR MONTH. THE BIGGEST HOME PRICE GAINERS IN THE Q4 WERE IN NORTHEAST, LED BY THE AREA AROUND THE SEAPORT CITY IN BRIDGEPORT, CONN, WHERE PRICES SHOT UP 39.2% FROM A YEAR EARLIER. IN PITTSFIELD, MASS THEY ROSE 32.2%, WHILE IN THE COASTAL RESORT TOWN OF ATLANTIC CITY, NJ HOME PRICES GAINED 30%.

 

6 FEBRUARY, 2021

INDIA WILL NEED AN INVESTMENT OF AROUND RS 1.75 LAKH CRORE FOR HAVING 35GW OF RENEWABLE POWER GENERATION CAPACITY NEXT YEAR TO MEET THE AMBITIOUS TARGET OF 175 GW OF CLEAN ENERGY CAPACITY BY 2022.

 

5 FEBRUARY, 2021

STARTING YEARS OF COMPOUNDING ARE BORING. MANY PEOPLE CANNOT BARE SUCH BORING AND THEY SELL THEIR GOOD COMPOUNDING BUSINESSES JUST TO BUY MOMENTUM STOCKS TO EARN FAST MONEY. THIS IS THE BIGGEST MISTAKE PEOPLE MAKE. WE SEE RETURNS OF COMPOUNDING BUSINESSES ONLY AFTER 8-10 YEARS AND THEN ITS ORIGINAL MOMENTUM PICKS UP.

 

4 FEBRUARY, 2021

EVERYONE CALL THEMSELVES AS LONG TERM INVESTOR TILL THE SHARE PRICE OF THE COMPANY IN WHICH THEY HAVE INVESTED GOES ON RISING. AS SOON AS SOME BAD NEWS OR BAD QUARTERLY RESULT COMES THEY IMMEDIATELY BECOME TRADERS AND JUMP ON TO OTHER COMPANIES WHOSE SHARE PRICES ARE RISING WITHOUT CHECKING THE FUNDAMENTALS BEHIND BAD NEWS OR BAD QUARTERLY RESULTS. SUCH JUMPING FROM ONE COMPANY TO ANOTHER IS VERY INJURIOUS FOR OUR FINANCIAL GOALS. SOMETIME SITUATION COMES THAT WE ENTERED THE COMPANY AT ITS PEAK JUST BECAUSE ITS SHARE PRICE IS RISING WITHOUT CROSS CHECKING ITS VALUATION. UNDER SUCH SITUATIONS WHEN VALUATIONS ARE NOT JUSTIFIED, THEN THE STOCK CORRECTS ITSELF AND GOES DOWN. THIS CAUSES LOSS. 

 

3 FEBRUARY, 2021

WHENEVER A MANAGEMENT IS SHOWING A BIGGER PICTURE OR BIGGER STORY OF A COMPANY IT MEANS MANAGEMENT IS HIDING SOMETHING. ONLY FIGURES IN BALANCE SHEET AND QUARTERLY RESULTS CAN SHOW THE EXACT POSITION OF COMPANY. IF FIGURES OF COMPANY ARE NICE THEN THERE IS NO NEED TO SHOW BIGGER PICTURE AND BIGGER STORY OF COMPANY BY MANAGEMENT.

 

2 FEBRUARY, 2021

NET INCOME IS MORE IMPORTANT THAN NET WORTH. BECAUSE WITHOUT INCOME NO ONE CAN SURVIVE. INCOME CAN BE IN ANY FORM, RENT FROM ASSETS, INTEREST INCOME FROM FD OR PPF, DIVIDEND INCOME FROM EQUITIES AND SO ON. IF NO INCOME THEN THE NET WORTH WILL ALSO DIMINISH BECAUSE NET WORTH IS CREATED FROM NET INCOME.

 

1 FEBRUARY, 2021

INVESTMENT PROCESS: GOAL-> ASSET ALLOCATION-> TO STUDY EACH ASSET CLASS PROPERLY-> CHOOSE THE PRODUCT CATEGORIES-> INVEST IN THE PRODUCT FROM ASSETS WHICH WE HAVE CHOSEN. 

 

31 JANUARY, 2021

MANY PEOPLE WHO ARE FORCED TO GET OUT OF STOCK MARKET  DUE TO HEAVY LOSS IN MID WAY IS BECAUSE OF THEIR GREED TO GET RICH QUICKLY.

 

30 JANUARY, 2021

ALTRIA, THE U.S BIGGEST TOBACCO COMPANY SALES ROSE TO 4.9% TO $6.3 BILLION IN QUARTER ENDED 31ST DECEMBER FROM $6 BILLION A YEAR EARLIER. REVENUE FROM CIGARETTES AND CIGARS WAS $5.6 BILLION.

 

29 JANUARY, 2021

SAYING NO TO DEBT IS THE BEST PRICE TO STAY IN MARKETS.

 

28 JANUARY, 2021

FINANCIAL SECURITY IS MORE IMPORTANT THAN JOB SECURITY. BECAUSE JOB SECURITY IS NOT IN OUR CONTROL BUT FINANCIAL SECURITY IS IN OUR CONTROL AND WE CAN MAKE IT HAPPEN.

 

27 JANUARY, 2021

HUGE ORDER FLOW OR GOOD SALES REVENUE WITH LOW DEBT IS THE BEST COMBINATION TO LOOK IN COMPANY FOR INVESTMENT. SUCH COMBINATION IS VERY RARE TO BE FOUND IN COMPANIES.

 

26 JANUARY, 2021

HAPPY REPUBLIC DAY.

 

25 JANUARY, 2021

A BULL MARKET MAKES US BULLISH ON TAKING RISK, AND A BEAR MARKET SCARES US ON TAKING RISK. BUT RISK IS ACTUALLY COUNTER INTUITIVE.

 

24 JANUARY, 2021

FINANCIAL INDEPENDENCE TAKES 15-20 YEARS OF SAVINGS, HARD WOK, WISELY INVESTING SAVINGS IN EQUITIES, LIVING A NORMAL LIFE WITHOUT BUYING BIG CARS AND LUXURIOUS HOMES ON LOAN AND LIVING BELOW OUR MEANS.

 

23 JANUARY, 2021

INVEST IN MARKET WHEN IT IS IN RED TO ENJOY RETURNS WHEN MARKET IS IN GREEN. 

 

22 JANUARY, 2021

KNOWING THE EARLY TRENDS IN CHANGE OF CONSUMER BEHAVIOR IS MOST IMPORTANT IN INVESTING.

 

21 JANUARY, 2021

THE INVESTOR WHO CONSTANTLY INVEST IN MARKETS BY FOLLOWING THE VIEWS OF AN ECONOMIST OR BY VIEWS OF ANY FINANCIAL MEDIA CAN NEVER CREATE WEALTH.

 

20 JANUARY, 2021

BORROWING WORKS GOOD IN INVESTING. BUT PEOPLE ARE BEHIND THRILL. PEOPLE CANNOT SEAT TIGHT ON SOME STOCKS FOR LONGER PERIOD OF TIME. IN GREED TO GET RICH FAST THEY DO THRILL BY CONSTANTLY JUMPING FROM ONE STOCK TO OTHER. AND BY SUCH ACTIVITY THEY CANNOT CONSTRUCT GOOD COMPOUNDING PORTFOLIO.

 

19 JANUARY, 2021

NETFLIX NOW HAS MORE THAN 200 MILLION SUBSCRIBERS, A MILESTONE POWERED BY CONSUMERS LEFT HOMEBOUND BY THE PANDEMIC EAGER FOR ENTERTAINMENT AND RISING DEMAND IN MARKETS WHERE STREAMING GIANTS HAS A HEAD START OVER MANY RIVALS. NETFLIX IS NOW ABLE TO GENERATE MORE CASH THAN IT NEED AND NO LONGER ANTICIPATES HAVING TO BORROW MONEY TO FUEL ITS GROWTH STRATEGY.

 

18 JANUARY, 2021

DEBT IS BIGGER ENEMY OF FINANCIAL INDEPENDENCE AND TENSION FREE LIFE.

 

17 JANUARY, 2021

INVESTING WITH BORROWED MONEY + JUMPING FROM ONE STOCK TO ANOTHER TO GET RICH FAST = WORKING LIKE SLAVE IN AGE OF RETIREMENT.

 

16 JANUARY, 2021

INVESTING WITH OWN MONEY + PATIENCE = RETIRE RICH.

 

15 JANUARY, 2021

SAVINGS + WISELY INVESTING = FINANCIAL INDEPENDENCE.

 

14 JANUARY, 2021

HAPPY MAKAR SANKRANTI. 

 

13 JANUARY, 2021

MANY PLAYERS ARE ENTERING TO PROVIDE SOLUTIONS FOR JEE EXAMINATION ONLINE. WHOLE ONLINE EDUCATION SECTOR IS ON CONSOLIDATION MODE. RECENTLY BYJU’S ACQUIRED AAKASH EDUCATIONAL SERVICES FOR $1 BILLION. AMAZON RECENTLY STARTED TO PROVIDE ONLINE JEE SOLUTIONS. IT WILL BE AMAZING TO LOOK CAREER POINT. WILL IT SURVIVE THE COMPETITION FROM BIG PLAYERS, OR TO SURVIVE THE COMPETITION WILL IT DO STRATEGIC PARTNERSHIP WITH SOME BIG PLAYER BY PROVIDING THEM SOME STAKE ? 

 

12 JANUARY, 2021

RECENTLY LISTED COMPANIES OR COMPANIES WHICH ARE GOING TO BRING IPO’S ARE NOT LISTING THEIR COMPANIES FOR GROWTH PURPOSE BUT THEY ARE FORCED BY PE FIRMS OR INVESTORS TO BRING IPO TO EXIT FROM COMPANY. MANY LOSS MAKING FIRMS ARE GETTING LISTED OR WILL GET LISTED AND THEIR IPO’S GET OVER SUBSCRIBE AT CRAZY VALUATIONS. LEARNED NICE THING FROM MARKET THAT IF IN YEAR OR CERTAIN MONTHS MANY COMPANIES BRING THEIR IPO’S MEANS THAT MARKET ARE AT CRAZY VALUATIONS AND IT CREATES AN ENVIRONMENT OF BUBBLE.

 

11 JANUARY, 2021

AVIATION COMPANY WITH NO AIR CRAFTS, NO PARKING SLOTS AND NO OPERATIONS IS TRADING IN THREE DIGITS. THIS SHOWS MARKET WORKS ONLY ON EMOTIONS OF PEOPLE. PEOPLE DO NOT CARE ABOUT REVENUES, PROFIT AND DEBT OF COMPANY.

 

10 JANUARY, 2021

NO ONE CAN LEARN AND EARN MONEY FROM STOCK MARKET WITHOUT LOSING MONEY IN INITIAL STAGE OF CAREER IN STOCK MARKET.

 

9 JANUARY, 2021

INVESTING OUR OWN MONEY HAS HUGE ADVANTAGE. NO ONE KNOWS HOW BADLY WE SCREWED UP AND IT GIVES TENSION FREE SLEEP AT NIGHT SINCE WE DO NOT OWE TO ANYONE.

 

8 JANUARY, 2021

LONG TERM INVESTING IS LIKE RUNNING A RACE. INSTEAD OF SPEED, STAMINA IS MORE IMPORTANT.

 

7 JANUARY, 2021

DISCIPLINE IS MORE IMPORTANT THAN IQ TO CONSTRUCT A GOOD PORTFOLIO.

 

6 JANUARY, 2021

DON’T GET CARRIED AWAY BY BEAR MARKET OR BULL MARKET. INSTEAD ONE SHOULD STUDY COMPANIES AND SECTORS BECAUSE AT THE END IF COMPANIES DOES NOT GIVE OR PERFORM GOOD IN QUARTERLY OR YEARLY RESULTS THEN EVEN IN BULL MARKET THAT COMPANIES WILL NOT MOVE.

 

5 JANUARY, 2021

WE SHOULD BUILD OUR PORTFOLIO AIMING THREE THINGS: GROWTH, INCOME AND CASH. AT YOUNG AGE WE CAN LOOK AT GROWTH AND LIQUIDITY AND WHEN WE RETIRE WE CAN LOOK AT INCOME, LIQUIDITY AND GROWTH.

 

4 JANUARY, 2021

ASSET ALLOCATION IS NOT A WEALTH CREATION TOOL. BUT IT IS A WEALTH PROTECTION TOOL. SAME LIKE INSURANCE. IT DOES NOT MAKES US RICH BUT ENSURE US THAT WE DO NOT BECOME POOR BECAUSE OF AN ACCIDENT OR ANY OTHER THING.

 

3 JANUARY, 2021

IN CAPITAL MARKETS WE JUST HAVE TO FIND GOOD COMPANIES AND INVEST IN THEM. AFTER THAT ALL OTHER THINGS ARE LOOKED AND DONE BY TIME.

 

2 JANUARY, 2021

RETURNS ARE NOT THE ONLY THING WHICH DECIDES HOW MUCH MONEY WE ARE GOING TO MAKE FROM OUR INVESTMENTS. THERE ARE TWO MORE FACTOR: 1) THE AMOUNT OF TIME OUR MONEY STAYS INVESTED AND 2) THE AMOUNT WE PUT INTO OUR SAVINGS AND INVESTMENTS.

 

1 JANUARY, 2021

HAPPY NEW YEAR.

 

31 DECEMBER, 2020

BY SAVING GOOD AMOUNT FROM OUR INCOME WE BUY OUR FUTURE AND BY TAKING DEBT AND SPENDING MORE THAN OUR INCOME WE SELL OUR FUTURE. 

 

30 DECEMBER, 2020

DEBT MAKES A PERSON SLAVE.

 

29 DECEMBER, 2020

ONE SHOULD NOT CRY FOR MISSED OPPORTUNITIES IN MARKET. MARKET IS AN OCEAN WHICH WILL CONTINUE TO CREATE MORE AND MORE OPPORTUNITIES. SO WHY TO WASTE TIME BEHIND MISSED OPPORTUNITIES ? WASTING TIME OR FEELING BAD ABOUT MISSED OPPORTUNITY DOES NOT LET US TO FIND AND CONCENTRATE ON NEW OPPORTUNITIES.

 

28 DECEMBER, 2020

THINGS TO LOOK FOR BUYING FALLING STOCK: BE PREPARE OF OUR PSYCHOLOGICAL BIASES, IS THE WEAKNESS TEMPORARY OR STRUCTURAL, BECOME THE SPECIALIST IN THE FIELD OR STOCK, UNDERSTAND THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN LONG TERM TREND AND SHORT TERM OVERSOLD, RISK MANAGEMENT, ASSUME THE NEGATIVE TREND WILL CONTINUE, LEARN TO SAY NO, DIVERSIFICATION, STICK TO ONE STRATEGY AND DON’T SELL AFTER THE FIRST RISE IN PRICE, MARGIN OF SAFETY.

 

27 DECEMBER, 2020

THINGS TO LOOK FOR IN ORDER TO DETERMINE WHETHER COMPANY HAS A MOAT ARE: STRONG BRAND NAME, THE NETWORK EFFECT, HIGH SWITCHING COST, LOW COST PROVIDER, GOOD WILL, GOVERNMENT POLICIES, ECONOMIES OF SCALE.

 

26 DECEMBER, 2020

THE EASY WAY TO KNOW WHEN TO SELL IS TO COMPARE HOW FUNDAMENTALS HAVE CHANGED IN RELATION TO THE STOCK PRICE. FUNDAMENTALS LIKE DIVIDEND YIELDS, REVENUE GROWTH, DEBT REDUCTION, EXPANSION PLANS AND MANY OTHER SUCH FUNDAMENTALS. ANY NEGATIVE CHANGE IN FUNDAMENTALS IS A SELL SIGN.

 

25 DECEMBER, 2020

MERRY CHRISTMAS.

 

24 DECEMBER, 2020

INVESTING IN GOOD COMPANIES FOR LONG TERM IS ALWAYS BETTER. BECAUSE IF WE SELL OUR STOCK THEN MAIN PROBLEM IS WHAT TO BUY NEXT. IF WE FIND WHAT TO BUY NEXT THEN PROBLEM IS WHEN TO BUY. SO TO AVOID SUCH DIFFICULTIES ITS ALWAYS BETTER TO FIND GOOD BUSINESSES SO THAT WE CAN ALWAYS HAVE A TENSION FREE SLEEPS AT NIGHT.

 

23 DECEMBER, 2020

THERE IS NO NEED TO RUN BEHIND ALL OUT PERFORMING STOCKS. INSTEAD ITS BETTER STOCK IN OUR PORTFOLIO PERFORM. 

 

22 DECEMBER, 2020

AS BUSINESSMAN CAN’T TAKE AWAY MONEY HOME INVESTED IN HIS BUSINESS SAME WAY INVESTORS CAN NEVER TAKE AWAY MONEY INVESTED IN MARKETS. IF WE TAKE AWAY MONEY HOME THEN HOW WILL WE MAKE MORE MONEY. SO AT THE END MONEY ALWAYS REMAINS IN MARKET.

 

21 DECEMBER, 2020

CHASING GOOD BUSINESSES IS BETTER THAN CHASING STOCK PRICES.

 

20 DECEMBER, 2020

IT IS NOT NECESSARY THAT STOCKS WHICH ARE AT ALL TIME HIGH ARE ALWAYS OVERVALUED. THERE MIGHT BE SOME STOCKS WHICH ARE TRADING AT ALL TIME HIGH BUT ARE STILL UNDERVALUED.

 

19 DECEMBER, 2020

AVIATION COMPANY WHOSE PLANES ARE FLYING IS TRADING IN DOUBLE DIGIT AND AN AVIATION COMPANY WHO DOES NOT HAVE A SINGLE PLANE OR A SINGLE AIRPORT SLOT NOW IS TRADING IN THREE DIGITS. ISN’T IT STRANGE ? THIS IS WHAT MARKET IS AND TEACHES US.

 

18 DECEMBER, 2020

ITS BETTER WE DON’T INVEST IF WE DON’T UNDERSTAND SOMETHING, INSTEAD WE SHOULD JUST WAIT FOR THE NEXT OPPORTUNITY THAT WE CAN COMPREHEND AND ARE HAPPY ABOUT HOW IT FITS OUR FINANCIAL GOALS. SITTING CALMLY AND NOT DOING ANYTHING WHILE MARKET IS EUPHORIC IS THE MOST DIFFICULT CHARACTERISTICS FOR AN INVESTOR TO ACHIEVE.

 

17 DECEMBER, 2020

BUYING A STOCK JUST BECAUSE IT HAS FALLEN OR ITS AVAILABLE AT CHEAPER RATE IS RISKY BECAUSE THERE MIGHT BE SOME REASONS LIKE LACK OF GROWTH, MANAGEMENT ISSUES, SECTOR WEAKNESS AND MANY OTHER SUCH REASONS. AND IF A STOCK HAS SUCH REASONS THEN RECOVERY OF THAT STOCK IS VERY DIFFICULT. AND THEN SUCH STOCKS BECOME A VALUE TRAP.

 

16 DECEMBER, 2020

OUR OWN CONVICTION IS BETTER THAN BORED TIPS.

 

15 DECEMBER, 2020

DEBT IS GOOD FOR SHORT TERM BUT DEBT FOR LONG TERM ALWAYS KILLS THE PERSON OR THE COMPANY WHOEVER TAKES THE DEBT.

 

14 DECEMBER, 2020

IN STARTING PHASE OF INVESTING ITS BETTER TO LOSE MONEY THAN TO EARN QUICK MONEY DUE TO MARKET EUPHORIA, BECAUSE QUICK MONEY MAKES IMPRESSION THAT MAKING MONEY IS EASY IN STOCK MARKET. BUT SUCH THOUGHTS ARE VERY DANGEROUS.

 

13 DECEMBER, 2020

POINT TO CONSIDER MARGIN OF SAFETY IN INVESTMENTS ARE : 1) BUSINESS THAT OPERATES PROFITABILITY, 2) CASH IS MORE THAN MARKET CAPITALIZATION, 3) NO DEBT OR LOW DEBT AND 4) GOOD FUNDAMENTALS.

 

12 DECEMBER, 2020

THE EASIEST WAY TO KNOW WHEN TO SELL A STOCK IS BY KEEPING IN MIND WHY WE BOUGHT THE STOCK IN THE FIRST PLACE AND THEN WE SHOULD CONTINUE TO COMPARE FUNDAMENTAL CHANGES OF THAT PARTICULAR COMPANY WITH THE CHANGES IN THE STOCK PRICE OF THAT COMPANY.

 

11 DECEMBER, 2020

INVESTING IS NOT AN ELUSIVE ENVIRONMENT WHERE EXTREMELY SMART PEOPLE CONSTANTLY PERFECTLY TIME ASSETS BUT IT IS A SMALL WORLD WHERE ONLY FEW OF ANALYSTS FOLLOW AN INVESTMENTS. THUS, STOCK PRICES OF SMALL COMPANIES ARE OFTEN EXTREMELY INEFFICIENTLY PRICED WHERE EVEN AN AMATEUR INVESTOR ARMED WITH A PATIENCE CAN FIND EXCELLENT INVESTMENTS.

 

10 DECEMBER, 2020

MANY PEOPLE THINK HIGHER THE RISK HIGHER THE RETURN. BUT THEY FORGET ONE THING THAT INVESTMENT DOES NOT WORKS ON RISK, IT WORKS ON PRICE.

 

9 DECEMBER, 2020

STOCK MARKET IS SAME LIKE PENDULUM. PENDULUM CONSTANTLY MOVE FROM LEFT TO RIGHT AND FROM RIGHT TO LEFT. SAME WAY MARKETS MOVES UP AND DOWN. BEAR MARKET AND BULL MARKET ARE PART OF MARKETS. SO MAIN THING IS TIMING. BUT VERY FEW PEOPLE GETS IT RIGHT IN TIMING THE MARKET. 

 

8 DECEMBER, 2020

FASTEST WAY TO LOSE MONEY IN STOCK MARKET IS TO ALWAYS RUN BEHIND TO SEARCH MULTIBAGGER STOCKS WITH BLIND THINKING THAT STOCKS CAN BECOME MULTIBAGGER IN SHORT PERIOD OF TIME. 

 

7 DECEMBER, 2020

ITS OKAY IF BULL MARKET GET CHANGED TO BEAR MARKET OR BEAR MARKET GET CHANGED TO BULL MARKET BUT ITS NOT OKAY IF WE LOSE OUR PATIENCE. 

 

6 DECEMBER, 2020

IN STOCK MARKET OUR PORTFOLIO CAN GO DOWN BY MORE THAN 50% TWICE IN A LIFETIME. SO THOSE WHO THINK TO ENTER MARKETS OR THOSE WHO ARE ALREADY IN MARKET WHO HAVE NOT SEEN SUCH SITUATION SHOULD BE PREPARED FOR SUCH SITUATIONS. AND THOSE WHO CANNOT SEE THEIR PORTFOLIO DOWN BY MORE THAN 50%, SHOULD NOT ENTER MARKET.

 

5 DECEMBER, 2020

INVESTING CONSISTS OF DOING LOTS OF RESEARCH, SAYING NO TO THOUSANDS OF INVESTMENT OPPORTUNITIES, BUYING ONLY WHEN SOMETHING MEETS ALL CRITERIA, AND THEN WAITING FOR THE MARKET TO RECOGNIZE THE VALUE OF THE UNDERVALUED INVESTMENT WE FOUND. EVENTUALLY THE MARKET ALWAYS RECOGNIZED VALUE BUT NO ONE CAN ESTIMATE THE PERFECT TIME OR PERIOD THAT WHEN MARKET WILL RECOGNIZE VALUE OF THE UNDERVALUED INVESTMENT.

 

4 DECEMBER, 2020

INVESTING IS PERSONAL AS ALL WORK HARD FOR MONEY AND WE ALL ARE NOT INVESTING JUST FOR SAKE OF INVESTING. WE MAKE INVESTMENTS FOR OUR PERSONAL GOALS LIKE HAVING ENOUGH MONEY TO RETIRE, ACHIEVING FINANCIAL FREEDOM, TRAVELLING THE WORLD AND MANY OTHER SUCH THINGS. THEREFORE BEFORE MAKING ANY DECISION ON INVESTMENTS, IT IS EXTREMELY IMPORTANT TO FIRST KNOW OURSELVES, OUR INVESTMENT GOALS AND HOW WE WILL REACT TO ANYTHING THAT MIGHT HAPPEN IN STOCK MARKET, GOOD OR BAD.

 

3 DECEMBER, 2020

THE PROBLEM IS THAT GROWTH WORKS FINE AS LONG AS THERE IS AN UPTREND IN ECONOMIC CYCLE, BUT AS SOON AS THERE IS RECESSION, THE GROWTH STOPS AND MANY OF THOSE COMPANIES THAT WERE PROMISING GREAT THINGS, SUDDENLY FIND THEMSELVES WITH NO OPPORTUNITY FOR FURTHER CAPITAL INJECTIONS AND GO BANKRUPT. ON THE OTHER HAND, VALUE STOCKS CAN ALWAYS RELY ON THE ASSETS OWNED AND CAN SURVIVE ANY ECONOMIC STORM. OVER THE LONG TERM, VALUE LOWERS RISK AND THAT IS ALL THAT MATTERS IN INVESTING, NOT PROMISES.

 

2 DECEMBER, 2020

IN SOCCER IF A PLAYER TAKES A SHOT ON GOAL AND MISSES, NOTHING HAPPENS TO THE SCORE. THE PLAYER GETS A FRESH START WITH THE NEXT BALL. BUT IF SOCCER WAS INVESTING, THE PLAYER WOULD GET NEGATIVE POINTS FOR MISSING. GOALS WOULD BE REQUIRED JUST TO GET BACK TO ZERO. THAT’S WHY INVESTORS BEHAVE WITH RESTRAIN. WE SHOULD PUT CAPITAL PRESERVATION FIRST. WE SHOULD DO SO BECAUSE THE MATHEMATICS OF OUR MISSED SHOT IS PUNITIVE.

 

1 DECEMBER, 2020

BAD NEWS OR BAD STORIES ABOUT COMPANIES OFTEN EMPHASIZE AN EXTREME ELEMENT OF AN EVENT. THESE EXTREMES GET AMPLIFIED IN HEADLINES. HEADLINE DRIVE HUMAN REACTION, SOMETIMES TOO FAR. THIS CAN CAUSE STOCK PRICE SWINGS DEEPER THAN WOULD A MORE SOBER TAKEN ON FACTS.

 

30 NOVEMBER, 2020

QUESTIONABLE REASONS FOR SELLING INCLUDE REBALANCING, MEMORIALIZING SUCCESS AND INDUSTRY COMPENSATION.

 

29 NOVEMBER, 2020

EVEN WITHOUT ACTIVE SELLING, AN EQUITY PORTFOLIO CAN GENERATE CASH. IT CAN BE POSSIBLE BY TWO WAYS: FIRST ONE IS THROUGH ACQUISITIONS AND SECOND IS THROUGH DIVIDENDS. DIVIDENDS CAN BECOME SIZABLE.

 

28 NOVEMBER, 2020

AFFINITY URGES US TO BUY A STOCK BECAUSE WE ARE FOND OF SOMETHING ASSOCIATED WITH IT. LIKE MANAGEMENT SHOWING BIG DREAMS OF COMPANY’S FUTURE, EXCITEMENT OF NEW PRODUCT LAUNCH, AND MANY OTHER SUCH THINGS. BUT IN REALITY ALL SUCH THINGS MAKES US BLIND FOR SEEING NEGATIVE SIDES OF A COMPANY, SO ALL SUCH THINGS SHOULD NOT BE THE REASON THAT WE STICK WITH A PARTICULAR INVESTMENT IDEA.

 

27 NOVEMBER, 2020

LACK OF CONSENSUS AROUND AN INVESTMENT IDEA ISN’T ENOUGH TO MAKE IT ATTRACTIVE. IT MIGHT BE TRULY BAD. SO UNPOPULARITY IS BEST THOUGHT OF AS A NECESSARY BUT NOT SUFFICIENT CHARACTERISTIC OF A BUYING OPPORTUNITY.

 

26 NOVEMBER, 2020

CLEVERNESS BIAS PUSHES US AWAY FROM INVESTMENTS THAT SEEM TOO SIMPLE. IT MAKES US DISTRUST OPPORTUNITIES THAT WE UNDERSTAND QUICKLY. THIS IS HARMFUL BECAUSE MANY WORTHY INVESTMENT IDEAS TRULY ARE QUITE BASIC. 

 

25 NOVEMBER, 2020

GOOD, FOCUSED STOCK PORTFOLIOS OUTPERFORM DIVERSIFIED STOCK PORTFOLIOS. THIS IS BECAUSE DIVERSIFIED PORTFOLIOS ARE MORE LIKE AN INDEX. THEY HAVE MORE NAMES IN THEM. THE MORE A PORTFOLIO LOOKS LIKE AN INDEX, THE MORE IT BEHAVES LIKE AN INDEX. IT IS HARD TO BOTH RESEMBLE AND OUTPERFORM SOMETHING. BUT A BAD FOCUSED PORTFOLIO CAN CERTAINLY LAG A DIVERSIFIED PORTFOLIO. CONCENTRATION ISN’T ENOUGH TO ASSURE OUT PERFORMANCE. BUT IF IT IS PURPOSEFULLY CONSTRUCTED, A FOCUSED GROUP OF INEXPENSIVELY BOUGHT GOOD COMPANIES IS PARTICULARLY PROMISING.

 

24 NOVEMBER, 2020

COMPANIES THAT ARE UNDERSTOOD AND GOOD DON’T GO ON SALE EVERYDAY. THEY ARE HARD TO FIND. SO ABSENT AN ACUTE CASH REQUIREMENT, EACH STOCK SALE MANDATES A HUNT FOR THE NEXT OPPORTUNITY.

 

23 NOVEMBER, 2020

IN INVESTING PERSEVERANCE IS A VIRTUE. IF A GOOD COMPANY SEE ITS STOCK PRICE DROP FOR NO REASON, IT’S WISE TO HOLD FAST. CONSISTENCY, BY CONTRAST, IS STICKING WITH A STOCK MERELY BECAUSE ONE ALREADY OWNS IT. IF THE FUNDAMENTALS OF A HOLDING HAVE TRULY DETERIORATED THEN NOT SELLING IS A MISTAKE.

 

22 NOVEMBER, 2020

WE SHOULD NOT PUT MORE THAN A TENTH OF THE PORTFOLIO INTO A SINGLE EQUITY. THIS REDUCES THE CHANCE THAT WE WILL LACK THE CASH NECESSARY TO TAKE ADVANTAGE OF OTHER OPPORTUNITIES THAT EMERGE.

 

21 NOVEMBER, 2020

IF WE ARE PASSIONATE TOWARDS OUR PROFESSION AND WORK HARD FOR IT THEN WE NEED NOT WORRY BECAUSE PROFESSION WILL TAKE CARE FOR US.

 

20 NOVEMBER, 2020

COMPANIES PAYING TOO MUCH FOR MANAGEMENT MAY BE BEARABLE, BUT COMPANIES PAYING TOO MUCH FOR ACQUISITIONS CAN KILL COMPANIES ITSELF.

 

19 NOVEMBER, 2020

MOATS WHICH ARE RARE COME FROM ONE OF THE SIX SOURCES: 1) GOVERNMENT, 2) COST, 3) BRAND, 4) NETWORK, 5) INGRAINEDNESS, 6) SWITCHING COSTS.

 

18 NOVEMBER, 2020

BORING WORKS GOOD IN INVESTING BECAUSE INVESTING IS NOT T20 CRICKET IT IS TEST CRICKET.

 

17 NOVEMBER, 2020

DEPENDING ON TIP IS MORE DANGEROUS THAN BORROWED MONEY. BUT DEPENDING ON TIP AND BORROWING MONEY TO BUY SHARES ON THE TIP IS THE ROAD TO PERMANENT LOSS OF CAPITAL.

 

16 NOVEMBER, 2020

WE SHOULD NOT CHANGE OUR PORTFOLIO FOR THE MOMENTUM STOCKS LIKE ADANI GREEN. BECAUSE AT THE END FIRE CRACKERS ALWAYS GETS BURST AND TURNS INTO SMOKE WHICH POLLUTES THE AIR.

 

15 NOVEMBER, 2020

WE SHOULD STAY AWAY FROM THE STOCKS WHICH GIVES US ENTERTAINMENT AND MAKES US ANXIOUS.

 

14 NOVEMBER, 2020

MARKET HAS A VERY BIG HEART. IT WILL SURELY FULFILL EVERYONE’S DREAM. HAPPY DIWALI TO EVERYONE.

 

13 NOVEMBER, 2020

NO ONE CAN EARN MONEY IN CAPITAL MARKETS WITHOUT HAVING PATIENCE.

 

12 NOVEMBER, 2020

SOMETIME A STRONG COMPANY BORROWS MONEY AT LOW INTEREST TO BUY BACK ITS STOCK AT PRICE WELL BELOW VOLUME. BUT DEBT SOARS AND BOOK VALUE CONDENSES, CREATING A GROTESQUELY HIGH LIABILITIES TO EQUITY RATIO. BUT SUCH SITUATION MAY NONETHELESS BE ATTRACTIVE TO THE ASTUTE INVESTOR.

 

11 NOVEMBER, 2020

PANDEMIC IS FORCING MANY AIRLINES TO DEFEND ITS TURF, BUT SOUTHWEST AIRLINES IS USING IT AS AN OPPORTUNITY. THE AIRLINE IS ADDING MANY CITIES TO ITS NETWORK THIS YEAR AND ANNOUNCED PLANS TO ADD SIX MORE CITIES IN 2021. OTHER AIRLINE ARE OFFERING 42% LESS FLIGHT THIS MONTH THAN LAST NOVEMBER. SOUTHWEST FLIGHTS ARE DOWN 36%. SOUTHWEST HAS BORROWED BILLIONS OF DOLLARS THIS YEAR BUT STILL HAS MORE CASH THAN DEBT. SOUTHWEST HAD LESS DEBT COMING IN CRISIS THAN COMPARED TO ITS RIVALS. THE PANDEMIC OFFERED SOUTHWEST A NEW CHANCE. MOST CITIES WHICH SOUTHWEST PICKED ARE ONES IT HAS STOPPED TO FLY TO EVENTUALLY, AND NOW SOUTHWEST HAS MORE PLANES TO SPARE AND AIRPORTS WITH SPACE. ONE LESSON WHICH MANAGEMENT OF SOUTHWEST LEARNED FROM PREVIOUS VENTURE INTO RIVAL TERRITORY IS TO GO BIG. SOUTHWEST MANAGEMENT THINKS THAT IF THEY HAVE ENOUGH FLIGHTS TO ANY GIVEN CITY THEN NO OTHER AIRLINES CAN TOUCH SOUTHWEST. SO SOUTHWEST WILL START 20 FLIGHTS A DAY FROM O’HARE IN FEBRUARY.

 

10 NOVEMBER, 2020

THE PANDEMIC DISRUPTIONS HAVE TRANSFORMED HOW U.S CONSUMERS BEHAVE BY ACCELERATING THEIR EMBRACE OF DIGITAL COMMERCE AND CHANGES ARE LIKELY TO PROVE PERMANENT ACCORDING TO ADAPTING CHANGES. AROUND 7% OF CONSUMER SURVEYED INTENDED TO CONTINUE BUYING ONLINE FOR STORE PICK UP. THE PANDEMIC COLLAPSED INTO 3 MONTHS A PROCESS OF ADOPTING E-COMMERCE THAT OTHERWISE WOULD HAVE TAKEN 10 YEARS IN U.S. CONSUMERS HAVE BECOME USED TO DIGITAL SHOPPING SO THEY WON’T GO BACK TO SHOPPING THE WAY THEY DID BEFORE PANDEMIC. RETAIL STORES CLOSING IN U.S REACHED A RECORD HIGH IN FIRST HALF OF 2020, AND THE YEAR IS ON PACE FOR RECORD BANKRUPTCIES AND LIQUIDATION.

 

9 NOVEMBER, 2020

CHEAP STOCKS OR LOW VALUATION STOCKS ARE AVAILABLE AT CHEAPER RATES BECAUSE OF VARIOUS REASONS LIKE HIGH DEBT, BAD BALANCE SHEET, BAD FUNDAMENTALS AND MANY OTHER SUCH THINGS. AND INVESTING IN SUCH STOCKS CAN CAUSE PERMANENT LOSS OF CAPITAL. EXPENSIVE STOCK OR HIGH VALUATION STOCKS ARE AVAILABLE AT HIGHER RATES BECAUSE OF VARIOUS REASONS LIKE NO DEBT, GOOD CASH FLOW, GOOD BALANCE SHEET, GOOD FUNDAMENTALS, HIGH POTENTIAL AND MANY OTHER SUCH THINGS. INVESTING IN SUCH STOCKS CAN GIVE US TENSION FREE SLEEP AT NIGHT AND CAN GIVE GOOD RETURNS. SO THEREFORE CHEAP IS COSTLY AND COSTLY IS CHEAP.

 

8 NOVEMBER, 2020

WHILE INVESTING WE SHOULD SEE 5 THINGS IN A BUSINESS: 1) PRODUCTS, 2) CUSTOMERS, 3) INDUSTRY, 4) GEOGRAPHY, AND 5) STATUS (TRANSFORMATION, AGE OF BUSINESS AND OTHER MERITS OF BUSINESS).

 

7 NOVEMBER, 2020

STOCKS HAVE NO UPPER LIMIT BECAUSE BUSINESSES DON’T HAVE A SET LIMIT ON HOW WELL THEY CAN DO. THEY CAN EARN CUSTOMER’S TRUST, INTRODUCE NEW PRODUCTS, ENTER NEW MARKETS AND INCREASE EARNINGS FOR DECADES. THERE IS NO GUARANTEE THAT THEY WILL, BUT THEY CAN. THAT’S WHY STOCKS PERFORMS BETTER OVER TIME. THEY ARE NOTHING LESS THAN CLAIMS ON OVER GROWING EARNINGS. THAT’S WHY THEY OFFER CEILING FREE UPSIDE.

 

6 NOVEMBER, 2020

WE DON’T HEAR MORE ABOUT VALUE INVESTING IS BECAUSE VALUE INVESTING IS QUITE ACTIVITY BY NATURE. BUYING SHARES FROM OPEN MARKET AND HOLDING THEM FOR YEARS IS SIMPLY NOT AN ATTENTION GETTING ACTIVITY. IN TODAY’S WORLD EVERYONE IS BEHIND FAST MONEY WHICH GIVES THEM FAME. BUT THERE IS AN INVERSE RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN PERFORMANCE AND VISIBILITY. THE APPROACHES POISED TO DISAPPOINT GET ATTENTION, WHILE VALUE INVESTING OUTSHINES UNSEEN.

 

5 NOVEMBER, 2020

IN HORSE RACE, HORSES DON’T RUN WITHOUT JOCKEY, SAME WAY IN STOCK MARKET PENNY STOCKS DON’T MOVE WITHOUT OPERATORS. SOME PENNY STOCKS DON’T HAVE ANY GOOD FUNDAMENTALS OR GOOD BALANCE SHEET THEN TOO SOMETIMES THEIR PRICES ARE AT 52 WEEK HIGH. SOME PEOPLE CONSIDER MARKET AS HORSE RACE, POKER GAME, CRICKET BETTING ETC AND THIS IS THE MAIN REASON PEOPLE SUFFER PERMANENT LOSS OF CAPITAL.

 

4 NOVEMBER, 2020

WE SHOULD STAY AWAY FROM COMPLEX PRODUCTS OFFERED BY INVESTMENT FIRMS AND BANK. IF WE STICK TO OUR OWN STRATEGY WHICH IS FAVORABLE TO US, THEN WE WILL BE MUCH BETTER OFF OVER TIME.

 

3 NOVEMBER, 2020

TWO THINGS THAT SHOULD BE INCORPORATED AS GOOD DEFINITION OF RISK: 1) THE PROBABILITY THAT THE INVESTMENT WE CHOOSE WILL PRESERVE OUR CAPITAL OVER THE TIME WE INTEND TO INVEST OUR FUNDS. 2) THE PROBABILITY THAT THE INVESTMENTS WE SELECT WILL OUTPERFORM ALTERNATE INVESTMENTS FOR THIS PERIOD.

 

2 NOVEMBER, 2020

THE CHANGED ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT UNAMBIGUOUSLY INDICATES THAT THE LONGER WE HOLD EQUITIES OR OTHER INVESTMENTS THAT OUTPERFORM INFLATION, THE BETTER OFF WE WILL BE FINANCIALLY OVER TIME.

 

1 NOVEMBER, 2020

EVERY MEDIA BRINGS THEIR TOP DIWALI STOCKS OR TOP NEW YEAR STOCKS. ACTUALLY IS IT NECESSARY THAT PEOPLE BUY STOCKS ONLY ON DIWALI OR NEW YEAR? WE SHOULD NOT FOLLOW SUCH HERD MENTALITY WHILE INVESTING BECAUSE INVESTING HAS NO TIME, FESTIVAL OR ANY OTHER THING, INVESTING IS ONLY BASED ON VALUATIONS AND FUNDAMENTALS NOTHING ELSE.

 

31 OCTOBER, 2020

RISK CAN BE TEMPTRESS. IT BECKONS US TO CASINO OR MARKETS AND SOMETIMES PROVIDES US WITH AMAZING REWARDS THAT DEFY ALL ODDS. WHEN WE WIN, WE OFTEN DON’T POCKET THE MONEY AND WALK AWAY. RATHER WE PLAY ON, TOO OFTEN GIVING BACK EVERYTHING WE HAVE WON AND PLUS EXTRA MONEY FROM SAVINGS.

 

30 OCTOBER, 2020

IN CAPITAL MARKETS CERTAIN PRINCIPLES ARE ONLY WRITTEN IN BOOKS BUT DIFFICULT TO FOLLOW. LIKE EVERYONE KNOWS AND SAYS BUY LOW AND SELL HIGH. BUT IN REALITY WHEN MARKET GOES ON MOVING HIGHER PEOPLE BELIEVE THAT THEY WILL BE LEFT OUT FROM THE RALLY AND THEY START FOLLOWING HERD WITHOUT CONSIDERING THE VALUATION OF COMPANIES. IN SUCH SITUATION THE PERSON WHO ENTERS AT THE PEAK HAS MORE CHANCES OF PERMANENT LOSS OF CAPITAL.

 

29 OCTOBER, 2020

IF WE DON’T UNDERSTAND A BOND OR A HEDGE FUND, OR ANY OTHER SECURITY THEN WE SHOULD NOT BUY IT. FORGET THE YIELD, NO MATTER HOW ATTRACTIVE AND EXCITING IT IS, LET OTHER PEOPLE EARN CRORES FROM IT BUT IF WE DON’T UNDERSTAND THAT PARTICULAR COMPANY THEN WE MAY NOT MAKE ANY SENSIBLE DECISIONS ON IT. SO ITS BETTER TO STAY AWAY FROM IT SO THAT OUR CAPITAL IS PROTECTED AND BETTER OPPORTUNITIES ALWAYS COME PROBABLY SOONER THAN WE THINK.

 

28 OCTOBER, 2020

PEOPLE MAKE MISTAKE THINKING THAT THEY ARE INVESTING IN MARKETS. BUT ACTUALLY WE ALL ARE INVESTING IN COMPANIES. SO INSTEAD OF LOOKING SENSEX AND NIFTY EVERYDAY ITS BETTER TO LOOK AT QUARTERLY PERFORMANCE OF COMPANIES IN WHICH WE HAVE INVESTED. BECAUSE EVEN IF MARKETS ARE AT ALL TIME HIGH BUT COMPANIES IN WHICH WE HAVE INVESTED DOES NOT SHOW GOOD QUARTERLY AND YEARLY RESULTS THEN IT WILL NOT MOVE.

 

27 OCTOBER, 2020

TARGETS GIVEN BY MANY BROKERAGE REPORTS OR RESEARCH ANALYSTS REPORTS ARE BASED ON 50% RESEARCH AND 50% SENTIMENTS. SOMEONE GIVES THE TARGET OF PARTICULAR SHARE OF RS 300 WHOSE CURRENT PRICE IS 175, ONCE THAT SHARE TOUCHES 300, THEY GET CARRIED AWAY BY THEIR SENTIMENTS AND GIVES NEXT TARGET OF THAT SHARE OF RS 400, AND MANY PEOPLE WAITS FOR TARGETS TO BUY SHARES. LIKE THIS WAY A HUGE VOLUME IS CREATED AND STOCKS PRICES AND SENTIMENTS OF PEOPLE BOTH GOES ON INCREASING. BUT IN THIS PEOPLE FORGETS THAT NOT A SINGLE SHARE CAN CONSTANTLY MOVE UPWARDS WITHOUT CORRECTION. AND PEOPLE ARE SO MUCH CARRIED AWAY BY THEIR OWN SENTIMENTS THAT THEY DON’T EVEN BOTHER TO SEE THAT IS THE SHARE OVERVALUED, IF OVERVALUED THEN CORRECTION MIGHT COME SOON. IN SUCH SITUATIONS PEOPLE WHO BUYS THE SHARES AT THE PEAK, HAS TO FACE LOSS DUE TO CORRECTION.

 

26 OCTOBER, 2020

WHEN SOMEONE MAKE LOSS IN CAPITAL MARKETS THEY BLAME MARKETS. BUT ACTUALLY MARKET IS ALWAYS SUPREME AND THERE IS NO MISTAKE OF MARKETS ANY TIME. EVEN IN FUTURE ALSO THERE WILL BE NO MISTAKE OF MARKET, MARKET CAN NEVER BE WRONG. MARKETS WORKS ON SENTIMENTS OF PEOPLE. PEOPLE MAKE LOSS BECAUSE THEY GET CARRIED AWAY BY THEIR OWN SENTIMENTS, DESIRE TO GET RICH QUICKLY, DEPENDING ON TIPS AND MANY OTHER SUCH THINGS. PEOPLE HAVE AN ATTITUDE LIKE THEY WILL BEAT MARKET BUT THEY FORGET HOW CAN ONE BEAT MARKET BECAUSE ITSELF IS A KING. IF WE RESPECT MARKET THEN DEFINITELY MARKET WILL NEVER MAKE US SAD.

 

25 OCTOBER, 2020

NOT GETTING CARRIED AWAY BY DAILY MARKET NEWS IS ALSO AN ART. PEOPLE WHO GET CARRIED AWAY BY DAILY MARKET NEWS CAN NEVER GET SUCCESS IN CAPITAL MARKETS. 

 

24 OCTOBER, 2020

ONLY EARNINGS BUT NO SAVINGS FROM THAT EARNINGS IS OF NO USE.

 

23 OCTOBER, 2020

D2C (DIRECT TO CONSUMER) BRANDS COULD BE LOOKING AT $100 BILLION CONSUMER OPPORTUNITY IN INDIA BY 2025. INDIA’S OVERALL RETAIL MARKET IS STILL DOMINATED BY UNORGANIZED SMALL STORES, WITH OVERALL CONTRIBUTION ON E-COMMERCE STILL AT 4%. HOWEVER ONLINE SPENDING IN INDIA IS EXPECTED TO REACH $200 BILLION IN NEXT FIVE YEARS FROM $39 BILLION IN 2019. LEADING D2C BRANDS IN PERSONAL CARE AND FOOD SPACES HAVE WITNESSED 100% GROWTH IN SCALE WITH RESPECT TO PRE COVID LEVELS.

 

22 OCTOBER, 2020

GAMING IS SET TO EMERGE AS THE NEXT DOMINANT TECHNOLOGY PLATFORM MUCH THE WAY SEARCH ENGINES, MOBILE PHONES AND PAST SOCIAL NETWORKS REDEFINED INDUSTRY IN THE PAST. CONSUMER GAMING INDUSTRY WILL REACH A VALUE OF $198 BILLION BY 2024. THE COVID PANDEMIC HAS INCREASED THE GAMING POPULARITY, WITH OVERALL TIME SPENT GAMING RISING BY 29%.

 

21 OCTOBER, 2020

ONE OF THE BEST WAY WE CAN  INCREASE OUR RETURNS AND SAVINGS IS BY  CONTROLLING OUR EXPENSES. 

 

20 OCTOBER, 2020

WHILE INVESTING DEBT SHOULD BE OUR BIGGEST ENEMY. BECAUSE INVESTING IN COMPANIES WHICH HAVE HIGH DEBT CAUSES PERMANENT LOSS OF CAPITAL

 

19 SEPTEMBER , 2020

NOT GETTING CARRIED AWAY BY DAILY MARKET NEWS IS ALSO AN ART. PEOPLE WHO GET CARRIED AWAY BY DAILY MARKET NEWS CAN NEVER GET SUCCESS IN CAPITAL MARKETS. 

 

18 SEPTEMBER, 2020

IF A PERSON EARNS 1,000 CRORE BUT DOES NOT SAVES ANY FROM THAT 1,000 CRORES THEN THAT 1,000 CRORE IS A BIG ZERO. ONLY EARNINGS BUT NO SAVINGS FROM THAT EARNINGS IS OF NO USE.

 

17 OCTOBER, 2020

LONG TERM INVESTING WORKS ONLY FOR GOOD COMPANIES WHERE TIME CREATES WEALTH. FOR BAD COMPANIES, TIME DESTROYS WEALTH.

 

16 OCTOBER, 2020

LONG TERM INVESTING DOES NOT MEAN THAT WE SLEEP AFTER MAKING AN INVESTMENT. WE SHOULD TRACK THAT INVESTMENT AFTER EVERY QUARTER SO THAT WE CAN KNOW WHETHER OUR DECISION TO MAKE AN INVESTMENT IS WRIGHT OR WRONG. IF WRONG THEN PERIODICALLY TRACKING INVESTMENTS HELPS US TO SELL THAT INVESTMENT AT EARLY STAGE SO THAT WE DO NOT MAKE PERMANENT LOSS OF CAPITAL.

 

15 OCTOBER, 2020

SUCCESS IN MARKET WITHOUT PROPER TEMPERAMENT WILL BE ONLY TEMPORARY AND NOT PERMANENT.

 

14 OCTOBER, 2020

THE BASIC IDEA OF INVESTING IS TO LOOK COMPANIES BEHIND THE STOCK PRICE. STOCK PRICE IS NOT JUST THE TICKER SYMBOL BUT THERE IS THE COMPANY OR BUSINESS BEHIND IT. SO TO BE SUCCESSFUL, RATHER LOOKING CONSTANTLY AT STOCK PRICES WE SHOULD LOOK AT BUSINESS AND COMPANY BEHIND THAT STOCK PRICE.

 

13 OCTOBER, 2020

WE SHOULD NOT BUY A COMPANY THAT IS LOSING MONEY. ONE OR TWO QUARTER IS OKAY BUT NOT FREQUENTLY. LOSSES ARE AN EARLY WARNING SYSTEM THAT ALL IS NOT WELL. MOST GOOD COMPANIES DO TURN AROUND, BUT WHEN THEY DON’T WE GET STUCK AND THAT CAUSES PERMANENT LOSS OF CAPITAL.

 

12 OCTOBER, 2020

PER CAPITA SPENDING ON EATING OUT IN USA IS US$ 3630, IN EUROPE IS US$ 1188, IN MIDDLE EAST AND AFRICA IS US$ 112 AND IN ASIA PACIFIC IS US$ 237.21. TOTAL NUMBER OF QSR IN USA IS 3,57,766 AND IN UK IS 26,005 AND IN INDIA IS 3,357. US AND UK HAVE MUCH SMALLER POPULATION THAN INDIA (US: 331 MILLION AND UK: 67.2 MILLION) THEN TOO THEY SPEND MORE ON FOOD AND HAVE MORE QSR THAN INDIA. THIS CALLED THE ACTUAL CONSUMPTION.

 

11 OCTOBER, 2020

INVESTING DOES NOT MEAN WE SHOULD HAVE ONLY AIM TO BECOME RICH OR TO GAIN FAME. BUT WE SHOULD PLAN AND INVEST IN SUCH WAY THAT WE BECOME FINANCIAL INDEPENDENT AT YOUNG AGE. MANY PEOPLE START INVESTING AFTER 50 YEARS OF AGE FOR THEIR RETIREMENT. BUT THEN NOT ENOUGH TIME IS LEFT. SO BEST WAY TO PLAN AND INVEST IS TO START FROM A YOUNG AGE SO THAT WE CAN NOT ONLY ENJOY OUR RETIREMENT BUT WE CAN EVEN ENJOY IN OUR 30s AND 40s.

 

10 OCTOBER, 2020

WE SHOULD TRY TO IGNORE NEAR TERM MARKET FLUCTUATIONS IF WE HAVE INVESTED FOR LONGER PERIOD, THE TRUE RISK IS NOT OWNING STOCKS OR SIMILAR INVESTMENTS THAT APPRECIATE FASTER THAN THE RATE OF INFLATION OVER TIME. 

 

9 OCTOBER, 2020

PEOPLE THINK IN EVERY BUSINESS PROFIT IS ON SELLING PRICE, HIGHER THE SELLING PRICE, HIGHER THE PROFIT RATIO. BUT ACTUALLY COST PRICE IS THE BIGGEST PROFIT. IF COST PRICE IS LOW THEN PROFIT INCREASES AUTOMATICALLY. BHAAV BHAGWAN CHE SAHEB.

 

8 OCTOBER, 2020

LEARNINGS I LEARNED FROM MARKETS ARE: NEVER TO INVEST IN HIGH DEBT COMPANIES, NEVER TO INVEST IN COMPANIES WHICH HAVE UNCERTAINTY LIKE STUCK IN COURT CASES, NEVER TO INVEST IN COMPANY WHICH HAVE HIGHER PROMOTER STAKE PLEDGED, NEVER TO INVEST IN COMPANY IN WHICH PROMOTER IS WORRIED MORE ABOUT SHARE PRICE RATHER THAN BUSINESS, NEVER TO INVEST IN COMPANY WHICH JUST SHOWS BIGGER PICTURE TO ITS SHAREHOLDERS, AND NEVER TO INVEST IN COMPANY WHOSE MANAGEMENT FREQUENTLY COMES ON FINANCIAL MEDIA.

 

7 OCTOBER, 2020

5 CONTRARIAN STRATEGIES: 1) LOW PRICE TO INDUSTRY STRATEGY, 2) LOW PRICE TO EARNINGS STRATEGY, 3) LOW PRICE TO BOOK VALUE STRATEGY, 4) HIGH YIELD STRATEGY, 5) LOW PRICE TO CASH FLOW STRATEGY.

 

6 OCTOBER, 2020

POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE SURPRISES AFFECT BEST AND WORST STOCKS IN A DIAMETRICALLY OPPOSITE MANNER.

 

5 OCTOBER, 2020

FOR INVESTORS, PSYCHOLOGY IS THEIR BIGGEST ALLY AND THEIR WORST ENEMY. IN ORDER TO WIN WE HAVE TO STAY WITH THE GAME, BUT FOR MANY INVESTORS THIS IS DIFFICULT OR IMPOSSIBLE.

 

4 OCTOBER, 2020

THE OVERREACTION OCCURS PRIOR TO THE EVENT TRIGGER OR OTHER FACTORS THAT LEAD TO A REEVALUTION OF THE BEST AND WORST STOCKS. AFTER THE EVENT TRIGGER OTHER REEVALUTION FORCES OCCUR THAT CONTINUE THE REVERSION TO THE MEAN. WORST STOCKS CONTINUE THEIR RISE IN PRICE AND BEST STOCKS THEIR FALL FOR A PERIOD OF YEARS.

 

3 OCTOBER, 2020

WE SHOULD AVOID UNNECESSARY TRADING. THE COSTS CAN LOWER OUR RETURNS OVER TIME. BUY AND HOLD STRATEGIES PROVIDE WELL ABOVE MARKET RETURNS FOR YEARS AND ARE AN EXCELLENT MEANS OF LOWERING TURNOVER AND THEREBY SIGNIFICANTLY REDUCING TAXES AND EXCESS TRANSACTION COSTS.

 

2 OCTOBER, 2020

WINNING A BET WHEN IT IS HIGHLY PROBABLE EVOKES LESS REJOICING THAN WINNING A BET WHEN OUTLOOK WAS UNLIKELY. LOSING A BET WHEN THE OUTCOME IS PROBABLE EVOKES LESS REGRET THAN LOSING A BET WHEN THE OUTLOOK IS IMPROBABLE. THE HIGHER THE EXPECTATION OF WINNING, THE LOWER THE AMOUNT OF REJOICING AND LOWER THE EXPECTATION OF WINNING, THE HIGHER THE AMOUNT OF REJOICING.

 

1 OCTOBER, 2020

FAVORED STOCKS MOSTLY UNDERPERFORMS THE MARKETS, AND OUT OF FAVOR STOCKS MOSTLY OUTPERFORMS THE MARKET, BUT THE REAPPRAISAL OFTEN HAPPENS, SLOWLY EVEN GLACIALLY.

 

30 SEPTEMBER, 2020

WE SHOULD BE REALISTIC ABOUT THE DOWNSIDE OF AN INVESTMENT, WE SHOULD EXPECT THE WORST CASE TO BE MORE SEVERE THAN WE ANTICIPATED. BECAUSE CONSTANTLY LOOKING FOR HIGHER RETURNS MAKES US WEAK TO ACCEPT THE NEGATIVE RETURNS AND IT CHANGES OUR NATURE THAT I WILL NEVER BE WRONG. AND SUCH ATTITUDE TOWARDS MARKET NEVER MAKES US TO LEARN NEW THINGS AND LEAD TO DESTRUCTION OF WEALTH.

 

29 SEPTEMBER, 2020

ALL CORRELATIONS IN THE MARKET, WHETHER REAL OR ILLUSORY WILL SHIFT AND DISAPPEARS FAST. SO WE SHOULD NOT MAKE AN INVESTMENT DECISION BASED ON CORRELATIONS.

 

28 SEPTEMBER, 2020

THERE IS NO CO RELATION BETWEEN RISK AND RETURN. HIGHER VOLATILITY DOES NOT GIVE BETTER RESULTS, NOR LOWER VOLATILITY WORSE RESULTS. IF INVESTMENT IN PARTICULAR ASSET IS RISKY WHEN WHY WOULD THAT INVESTMENT IN PARTICULAR ASSET GIVE POSITIVE RETURNS.

 

27 SEPTEMBER, 2020

ONE SHOULD NOT BE INFLUENCED BY THE SHORT TERM RECORD OR GREAT MARKET CALLS OF A MONEY MANAGER, ANALYST, MARKET TIMER, OR ECONOMIST, NO MATTER HOW IMPRESSIVE THEY ARE , ONE SHOULD NOT ACCEPT CURSORY ECONOMIC OR INVESTMENT NEWS WITHOUT SIGNIFICANT SUBSTANTIATION.

 

26 SEPTEMBER, 2020

WE SHOULD NOT GET CARRY AWAY BY RECENT RATE OF RETURNS FOR STOCKS OR THE MARKET WHEN THEY DEVIATE SHARPLY FROM PAST NORMS. IF RETURNS ARE PARTICULARLY HIGH OR LOW, THEY ARE LIKELY TO BE ABNORMAL.

 

25 SEPTEMBER, 2020

WE SHOULD LOOK BEYOND OBVIOUS SIMILARITIES BETWEEN A CURRENT INVESTMENT SITUATION AND ONE THAT HAS APPEARS SIMILAR IN THE PAST. WE SHOULD CONSIDER OTHER IMPORTANT FACTORS THAT MAY RESULT IN A MARKEDLY DIFFERENT OUTCOME

 

24 SEPTEMBER, 2020

SELECTING STOCKS FOR LONG TERM INVESTING IS EASY BUT TO CONTROL OUR EMOTIONAL BEHAVIOR FOR LONG TERM IS DIFFICULT.

 

23 SEPTEMBER, 2020

WE SHOULD NOT EXPECT THE STRATEGY WE ADOPT WILL GIVE US A QUICK SUCCESS IN THE MARKET, BUT INFACT WE SHOULD GIVE OUR STRATEGY A REASONABLE TIME TO WORK OUT.

 

22 SEPTEMBER, 2020

IT TAKES MONTHS FOR PORTFOLIO TO TURN GREEN BUT IT TAKES A SINGLE DAY FOR PORTFOLIO TO TURN RED.

 

21 SEPTEMBER, 2020

AT BEGINNING EVERYONE SAYS WE ARE LONG TERM INVESTORS. BUT AS SOON AS WHEN CORRECTION HAPPENS IN MARKET OR INVESTORS DON’T GET RETURN FOR SOME PERIOD AND THEIR PATIENCE IS TESTED, FROM THAT TIME THEY BECOME SPECULATORS AND RUN BEHIND TIPS AND MOMENTUM STOCKS.

 

20 SEPTEMBER, 2020

IN EVERY BUBBLE, THE EXPERTS HAVE ALSO BEEN CAUGHT UP IN THE SPECULATION, NOT ONLY CONDONING THE RISING PRICES BUT PREDICTING MUCH HIGHER ONES IN THE FUTURE. AFTER ALL IN EACH CASE PEOPLE THINK THEY HAVE GOOD REASON TO BELIEVE THAT THE OPPORTUNITY THIS TIME IS REALLY FAR BETTER THAN ANY OTHER THEY HAD EVER SEEN.

 

19 SEPTEMBER, 2020

IT IS OBVIOUS THAT THE MISTAKES AND INCOMPETENCE OF THE POLICY MAKERS AND THE LEVEL OF GREED THAT CAUSES THE SUBPRIME COLLAPSE CANNOT BE BRUSHED ASIDE AND SOON FORGOTTEN, BUT IN SUCH SITUATION WE SHOULD BE CONCERNED ABOUT HOW TO REBUILD SAVINGS, HOW TO STRUCTURE OUR PORTFOLIO TO WITHSTAND BAD CONDITIONS AHEAD, AND HOW TO TAKE THE PROPER ACTION THAT WILL LET OUR PORTFOLIO PROSPER AGAIN OVER TIME.

 

18 SEPTEMBER, 2020

IN INVESTING WE MUST KEEP WHAT IS USEFUL BUT DISCARD WHAT DOES NOT WORK, WE SHOULD MAKE THIS DECISION NOT ON ANECDOTAL REPORTS BUT ON SOLID EMPIRICAL PERFORMANCE DATA. BUT THIS IS NOT AN EASY STEP OR EASY WAY.

 

17 SEPTEMBER, 2020

INSTEAD OF FINDING NEXT NESTLE, BRITANNIA, HUL, KOTAK, HDFC AND MANY SUCH COMPANIES, ITS BETTER TO INVEST IN THESE COMPANIES. BECAUSE IN FINDING NEXT NESTLE AND OTHER COMPANIES WE MAY END UP WITH SOME BAD COMPANIES BECAUSE ITS VERY RARE THAT GOOD QUALITY COMPANIES GET REPLACED BY UPCOMING COMPANIES.

 

16 SEPTEMBER, 2020

WE SHOULD HAVE PORTFOLIO WHICH GIVES US GOOD SLEEP NOT WHICH TAKES AWAY OUR SLEEP. FOR THIS WE SHOULD INVEST IN GOOD VALUABLE COMPANIES AND SHOULD STAY AWAY FROM HOT STOCKS OR MOMENTUM STOCKS.

 

15 SEPTEMBER, 2020

WE SHOULD MAKE INVESTMENTS WITH AIM OF ACHIEVING FINANCIAL INDEPENDENCE AND GETTING RICH SLOWLY RATHER THAN INVESTING WITH DESIRE OF GETTING RICH FAST

 

14 SEPTEMBER, 2020

INVESTMENT FOR LONG TERM DOES NOT MEAN TO INVEST AND JUST SIT FOR LONG PERIOD WITHOUT ANY UPDATION OF THE LATEST INFORMATION ON THAT PARTICULAR INVESTMENT. PERIODICALLY TRACKING THE INVESTMENT IS NECESSARY SO THAT WE KNOW THAT THE THESIS ON WHICH WE HAVE INVESTED IS STILL INTACT OR NOT. IF NOT THEN IT IS BETTER TO GET OUT OF THAT INVESTMENT. SO PERIODICALLY TRACKING THE INVESTMENTS ALWAYS HELP US TO TAKE BETTER DECISIONS ON OUR INVESTMENTS WHICH WILL HELP US TO REACH OUR FINANCIAL GOALS.

 

13 SEPTEMBER, 2020

INVESTING IN TIME AND INVESTING IN OURSELVES IS MORE IMPORTANT THAN INVESTING IN GOOD COMPANIES.

 

12 SEPTEMBER, 2020

WE SHOULD NOT BE STUBBORN, NOT BE GREEDY AND NOT BE AFRAID TO TAKE SMALL LOSSES. WHEN WE BUY A STOCK, WE SHOULD MAKE A MENTAL DECISION AS TO LEVEL AT WHICH WE WILL SELL IT, AND SHOULD STICK TO THAT DECISION. WE MAY LOSE A FEW POINTS AT THE TOP, BUT IN THE LONG RUN WE WILL MAKE MORE THAN WE WILL LOSE.

 

11 SEPTEMBER, 2020

LIKING AND DISLIKING CREATES EXAGGERATION IN MIND. AND EXAGGERATION MAKES US TO LOOK AT THINGS WHICH ARE NOT REAL. IT MAKES US TO THINK EXTRA GOOD OR EXTRA WORST FOR A PARTICULAR THINGS BUT IT CAN NOT MAKE US TO VIEW THE THINGS AS THEY ARE. SO INSTEAD OF LIKING OR DISLIKING PARTICULAR STOCK, WE SHOULD ALWAYS DO PROPER STUDY AND STICK TO THE TRUE STUDY AND TRUE INFORMATION OF A PARTICULAR COMPANY BECAUSE LIKING AND DISLIKING A PARTICULAR STOCK NEVER ALLOW US TO KNOW THE TRUTH OF THAT PARTICULAR COMPANY.

 

10 SEPTEMBER, 2020

WE SHOULD SELL A STOCK WHEN ITS PE RATIO APPROACHES THAT OF THE OVERALL MARKET, REGARDLESS OF HOW FAVORABLE ITS PROCESS MAY APPEAR. WE SHOULD REPLACE IT WITH ANOTHER CONTRARIAN STOCK.

 

9 SEPTEMBER, 2020

LOOSING MONEY IS NOT A LOSS BUT ACTUALLY IT IS A TUITION FEE. WE SHOULD LEARN FROM THE MISTAKES SO THAT WE DON’T REPEAT IT AGAIN. BUT MANY INVESTORS AFTER LOOSING MONEY SAYS THAT MARKET IS GAMBLING SO ITS BETTER TO STAY OUT OF IT. BUT ACTUALLY MARKET IS GREATEST TEACHER WHO TEACHES US MANY THINGS LIKE TO REMAIN CALM, TO CONTROL OUR EMOTIONAL BEHAVIOUR, NOT TO FOLLOW ANY TIPS, NOT TO FOLLOW CROWD AND MANY OTHER SUCH THINGS. MAIN MARKET TEACHES IS MARKET IS ALWAYS A KING AND IT KNOWS MORE THAN WHAT INVESTORS KNOW, SO MARKET IS ALWAYS SMARTER THAN INVESTORS.

 

8 SEPTEMBER, 2020

WE SHOULD NEVER BUY A COMPANY THAT IS LOSING MONEY. LOSSES ARE AN EARLY WARNING SIGNS THAT ALL IS NOT WELL. MOST GOOD COMPANIES DO TURN AROUND, BUT WHEN THEY DON’T WE GET STUNG.

 

7 SEPTEMBER, 2020

AT TIMES NO PRICE SEEMS TOO HIGH FOR AGGRESSIVE GROWTH STOCKS OR IPOs. INVESTORS REPEATEDLY PAY THROUGH THE NOSE AND JUST AS REPEATEDLY GET STUNG. STRONG PSYCHOLOGICAL FORCES COMPEL PEOPLE TO BUY SIZZLING ISSUES AND THEN PREVENT US FROM ANALYZING WHERE WE WENT WRONG.

 

6 SEPTEMBER, 2020

VALUE INVESTING IS LIKE BUYING UMBRELLA FOR NEXT MONSOON RIGHT NOW.

 

5 SEPTEMBER, 2020

WE SHOULD LOOK FOR INVESTMENTS DIFFERENTLY THAN OTHERS DO IS THE ONLY WAY TO SEPARATE OURSELVES FROM THE CROWD. WE SHOULD KNOW THAT THE ONLY WAY TO ACHIEVE SUPERIOR INVESTMENTS RESULTS IS TO BUY WHAT OTHERS ARE DESPONDENTLY SELLING AND SELL WHAT OTHERS ARE AVIDLY BUYING IN THE MARKET.

 

4 SEPTEMBER, 2020

EXCESS PROFITS ATTRACT COMPETITION, AND COMPETITION WILL BUILD UNTIL EXCESS PROFITS ARE SQUEEZED. THEREFORE WE MUST SEE HOW DEFENSIVE ARE THE COMPANY’S PROFIT MARGINS IN THE FACE OF INCREASING COMPETITION? IT IS AN ENCOURAGING SIGN IF THE COMPANY HAS COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGES THAT OTHER COMPETITORS CANNOT REPLICATE.

 

3 SEPTEMBER, 2020

EXPECTATIONS OF RETURNS ALWAYS MAKES US TO LOOSE OUR EMOTIONAL DISCIPLINE. SAME GOES IN MARKETS ALSO. EXPECTATION OF RETURNS LEADS TO ATTACHMENT WITH THE STOCK OR INVESTMENT. AND ATTACHMENT ALWAYS MAKES US BLIND. ATTACHMENT NEVER LET US TO SEE THE NEGATIVE SIDE OF STOCK OR INVESTMENT. BUT THAT DOES NOT MEAN WE INVEST ANYWHERE IN BAD COMPANY OR INVEST WITHOUT PROPER STUDY. WE SHOULD MAKE INVESTMENTS AFTER PROPER STUDY AND THEN WE SHOULD LEAVE THE HOPE OF THE RETURNS ON GOD.

 

2 SEPTEMBER, 2020

THE PSYCHOLOGY AWARE INVESTORS HOLDS A SUPERIOR ADVANTAGE, NOT JUST MORE THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE BUT GENUINE PRACTICAL INVESTING EDGE. 

 

1 SEPTEMBER, 2020

RISK CAN BE TEMPTRESS OR A SAVAGE GOD. IT BECKONS US TO CASINOS OR MARKETS AND SOMETIMES PROVIDES US WITH AMAZING REWARDS THAT DEFY ALL ODDS. WHEN WE WIN, WE OFTEN DON’T POCKET THE MONEY AND WALK AWAY. RATHER, WE PLAY ON TOO OFTEN GIVING BACK EVERYTHING WE HAVE WON AND MORE.

 

31 AUGUST, 2020

IN COLLEGE MY ECONOMICS PROFESSOR TAUGHT US MOB IS ALWAYS MAD. AFTER FEW YEARS I SAW ITS LIVE EXAMPLE IN MARKETS. CROWD IS ALWAYS MAD. DECIDING TO BUY AND SELL BY FOLLOWING THE CROWD WILL ALWAYS BE HARMFUL TO US AND WE WILL LOOSE OUR FOCUS FROM LONG TERM FINANCIAL GOALS.

 

30 AUGUST, 2020

BY KEEPING AN OPEN DOOR TO PURCHASE SHARES AT A PREDETERMINED PRICE, WE CAN SIDESTEP A GREAT DEAL OF THE PRESSURE THAT COMES WITH BUYER WHEN EVERYONE ELSE IS SELLER.

 

29 AUGUST, 2020

THE MOST SUCCESSFUL INVESTORS ARE DEFINED BY THEIR ACTIONS IN BEAR MARKET, NOT IN BULL MARKET. MAKING MONEY IS RELATIVELY EASY WHEN ENTIRE STOCK MARKET IS RISING. AGGRESSIVELY SEEKING THE OPPORTUNITY PROVIDED THROUGH DEEP ADVERSITY WHEN THE STOCK MARKET IS IN FREE FALL REQUIRES FAR MORE THAN THE ABILITY TO ANALYZE A COMPANY. IT REQUIRES A MINDSET THAT LOOKS FOR A CHANCE TO SHINE, AND THIS REQUIRES CONFIDENCE AND COURAGE. THE ONLY WAY TO EXECUTE UNDER PRESSURE IS TO HAVE DEEP SEATED BELIEF IN OUR ABILITIES AND THE CONVICTION THAT WE ARE CORRECT IN OUR ACTIONS.

 

28 AUGUST, 2020  

WHEN MANY IPO’S GETS LISTED IN A PARTICULAR MONTH OR A PARTICULAR YEAR, THEN IT IS THE SIGN WHICH SHOWS MARKETS ARE AT PEAK POINT OF BULL MARKET. AFTER THAT MARKETS WILL START CORRECTING. SO THE LISTING OF THE IPO’S IS THE SIGN WHICH INDICATES THAT IT IS THE TIME FOR INVESTORS TO BOOK SOME PROFITS.

 

27 AUGUST, 2020

DESPITE THE COMMON SENSE WHICH EVERYONE KNOWS THAT ONE SHOULD BUY THE STOCK WHEN THE REST OF THE MARKET IS SELLING OUT OF FEAR, BUT THIS TASK IS DIFFICULT TO DO. VERY FEW PEOPLE CAN EXECUTE THIS. THE PROBLEM OF NOT EXECUTING THIS IS THAT ALL PSYCHOLOGICAL DURESS THAT THE STOCK MARKET CAN MUSTER WILL BE THROWN DIRECTLY INTO OUR FACE.

 

26 AUGUST, 2020

VOLATILITY IS OUR BEST ALLY IN SEARCH FOR BARGAINS TO PURCHASE. VOLATILITY PRESENTS OPPORTUNITIES. THE GREATER THE VOLATILITY, THE GREATER THE OPPORTUNITIES TO FIND A BARGAIN. IF WE ARE A PURCHASER OF BARGAIN STOCKS, THEN VOLATILITY IS OUR FRIEND, BUT IF WE ARE PURCHASER OF POPULAR STORY STOCK, THEN VOLATILITY IS OUR ENEMY.

 

25 AUGUST, 2020

SOMETIMES PEOPLE SELL THE STOCKS THEY OWN SIMPLY BECAUSE THEY OBSERVE OTHERS SELLING THEM IN THE MARKET, GIVING NO CONSIDERATION TO THE VALUE OF THE COMPANY. SOMETIMES BUYERS PURCHASES SHARES BECAUSE THEY SEE OTHER BUYERS DRIVING UP THE PRICE. THE POINT IS THAT IF WE HAVE SOME NOTION THAT STOCK PRICES ALWAYS ACCURATELY REFLECT THE TRUE WORTH OF THE COMPANY, WE ARE IN MANIC RIDE OF OUR LIFE. SO RATHER THEN BUYING STOCKS, WE SHOULD TAKE OUR MONEY AND SPEND IT AT AMUSEMENT PARK, WE WILL HAVE MUCH MORE FUN ON THOSE RIDES. 

 

24 AUGUST, 2020

IN MARKETS WHEN A COMPANY MANAGEMENT SAYS THAT THE PLANT WILL BE UP AND RUNNING IN A YEAR’S TIME, AND THE COMPANY WILL SELL 25% MORE GOODS ONCE THE PLANT RUN. AFTER THIS NEWS ANALYSTS PLANS ON AND CALCULATES THE PROBABLE SALES OF THE NEW PLANT AND BUILT IT INTO EARNINGS FORECASTS FOR THE COMING YEAR. BUT UNFORTUNATELY, IF COMPANY SAYS CONSTRUCTION OF PLANT IS STALLED, AND PLANT WILL TAKE SIX MONTHS LONGER TO GET UP AND RUNNING THAN ORIGINALLY PLANNED. AFTER THIS NEWS ANALYSTS SOON REDUCES ITS ESTIMATES AND THE BUYERS OF THE STOCK ARE CAUGHT OFF GUARD BY THE ANNOUNCEMENT AND SELL THEIR STOCKS IMMEDIATELY, WHICH DRIVES THE STOCK PRICE DOWN BY 25-30% OVER FEW DAYS. BUT NO ONE SEES THAT IS THIS A TEMPORARY PROBLEM? IF THE ANSWER IS YES, THEN THIS IS THE GOOD EXAMPLE OF HOW TO TAKE ADVANTAGE OF A SMALL PROBLEM THAT LEADS TO A BIG OVERREACTION. TO A LONG TERM INVESTOR THE COMPANY IS NOT WORTH 30% LESS, IT MAY TAKE ONLY A LITTLE WHILE LONGER FOR THE NEW SALE TO MATERIALIZE. TAKING ADVANTAGE OF BIG OVERREACTION IN A STOCK PRICE CAUSE BY TEMPORARY PROBLEMS IN ANY COMPANY IS A GREAT TACTIC TO EARN HUGE WEALTH.

 

23 AUGUST, 2020

IF WE ARE GOING TO INVEST IN A SITUATION IN WHICH OUTLOOK IS NEGATIVE, WE NEED TO HAVE THE PSYCHOLOGICAL FORTITUDE TO STAND PAT UNDER THE MOST IMPOSING, DARKEST CLOUDS AND NOT RUN FOR THE HILLS. IN VALUE INVESTING, THE PRICE OF SUCCESS IS PAID IN ADVANCE.

 

22 AUGUST, 2020

TO BUY WHEN OTHERS ARE DESPONDENTLY SELLING AND TO SELL WHEN OTHERS ARE AVIDLY BUYING REQUIRES THE GREATEST FORTITUDE AND PAYS THE GREATEST ULTIMATE REWARDS. 

 

21 AUGUST, 2020

THE MARKET IS VERY UNUSUAL DESPITE HOW SIMPLE IT APPEARS. PEOPLE ALWAYS TRY TO SEARCH WHERE THE OUTLOOK IS GOOD, BUT THAT’S THE WRONG THING. THE RIGHT WAY IS TO SEARCH WHERE THE OUTLOOK IS MOST MISERABLE. THE OBVIOUS THING OF THIS CONCEPT IS TO AVOID FOLLOWING CROWD. THE CROWD CONSISTS OF THE MAJORITY OF BUYERS IN THE STOCK MARKET CONTINUOUSLY SEARCH THE STOCK WHOSE PROSPECTS LOOKS THE BEST. BUT IN REALITY IN INVESTING, THE OPPOSITE BEHAVIOUR IS REQUIRED, THAT IS SEEKING OUT POOR LOOKS.( THAT HAS POTENTIAL TO IMPROVE).

 

20 AUGUST, 2020

WILLINGNESS TO EARN FAST MONEY IN STOCK MARKET IS THE BIGGEST MISTAKE ONE MAKES. BECAUSE IN EARNING FAST MONEY ONE CONSTANTLY JUMP FROM ONE STOCK TO ANOTHER, BORROW MONEY, DEPENDS ON TIPS AND MANY OTHER SUCH THINGS. AND ALL SUCH THINGS LEADS TO PERMANENT LOSS OF CAPITAL. USUALLY PEOPLE FORGETS INVESTING IS A PROCESS. ITS LIKE A TEST CRICKET BUT PEOPLE THREAT IT AS IT IS T20 CRICKET.

 

19 AUGUST, 2020

IF WE COME TO MARKET JUST TO EARN THEN WE WILL NEVER EARN BUT WE WILL MAKE MISTAKES. BUT IF COME TO MARKET TO LEARN, THEN DEFINITELY WE WILL EARN.

 

18 AUGUST, 2020

TO BE SUCCESSFUL IN STOCK MARKET ONE SHOULD ALWAYS BE FEARLESS. AND TO BE FEARLESS ONE SHOULD HAVE DISCIPLINE AND HAVE CONTROL ON EMOTIONAL BEHAVIOUR. WHENEVER THERE IS CORRECTION IN MARKETS OR BIG FALL IN MARKETS PEOPLE SELL STOCKS OF GOOD COMPANIES IN FEAR, WHICH CAUSE THEM HUGE LOSSES AND MANY OF THEM CANNOT ENTER THE MARKET AFTER THE FALL OF THE MARKET. BUT MARKET CORRECTIONS AND FALL OF MARKETS ARE TEMPORARY BECAUSE NO POLITICIANS, GOVERNMENT OR NO ONE CAN STOP THE GROWTH OF ANY COUNTRY. NEW GENERATIONS WILL BE BORN EVERYDAY AND DUE TO THAT NEW TECHNOLOGIES WILL BE DEVELOPED CONSTANTLY. SO MARKET HAS TO COME UP AFTER CORRECTION OR FALL. PEOPLE WHO ARE FEARLESS AND HAVE DISCIPLINE AND CONTROL ON EMOTIONAL BEHAVIOUR NEVER SELL THEIR STOCKS IN FEAR OR IN PANIC THATS WHY THEY DO NOT FACE ANY PERMANENT LOSS OF CAPITAL. AND IF THERE IS NO PERMANENT LOSS OF CAPITAL THEN ONE CAN DEFINITELY MAKE HUGE WEALTH.

 

17 AUGUST, 2020

INVESTORS SHOULD NOT HAVE CLOSE FRIENDSHIP OR CLOSE CONTACT WITH MANAGEMENT OF ANY COMPANY. BECAUSE CLOSE FRIENDSHIP AND CONTACT MAKES US BLIND AND WE START TRUSTING THAT COMPANY BLINDLY WHICH FORBID US TO FIND THE HIDDEN TRUTHS OF COMPANY OR NEGATIVE SIDE OF THAT COMPANY.

 

16 AUGUST, 2020

DEADLY SINS OF BANKING: 1) IMPRUDENT ASSET LIABILITY MISMATCHES ON THE BALANCE SHEET. 2) SUPPORTING ASSET LIABILITY MISMATCHES BY CLIENTS. 3) REACHING FOR GROWTH IN UNFAMILIAR AREAS. 4) LENDING TO CAN’T PAY, WON’T PAY TYPES OF PEOPLE. 5) ENGAGING IN OFF BALANCE SHEET LENDING. 6) GETTING STUCK INTO VICIOUS CYCLE DYNAMICS.

 

15 AUGUST, 2020

WHEN AN INVESTOR MAKES A LONG TERM INVESTMENT IN A COMPANY, HIS SUCCESS OR FAILURE GENERALLY DEPENDS ON THE INVESTING SKILL OF SENIOR MANAGEMENT OF THAT COMPANY. OVER THE MEDIUM TERM, RETURN ON CAPITAL IS GENERALLY DETERMINED BY THE CEO’S DECISION ABOUT CAPITAL EXPENDITURE, MERGER AND ACQUISITION ACTIVITY, AND THE LEVEL OF DEBT AND EQUITY USED TO FINANCE THE COMPANY. THE CEO’S FUND MANAGEMENT SKILLS IS AS IMPORTANT AS HIS SKILLS IN MANAGING DAY TO DAY OPERATIONS.

 

14 AUGUST, 2020

INVESTORS WHO ADHERE TO ONE PARTICULAR STYLE ARE LIKELY TO END UP IN TROUBLE. STOCKS SHOULD NOT BE VIEWED AS GROWTH OR VALUE OPPORTUNITIES BUT RATHER FROM PERSPECTIVE OF WHETHER THE MARKET IS EFFICIENTLY VALUING THEIR FUTURE EARNING PROSPECTS

 

13 AUGUST, 2020

DEPARTMENT STORES HAVE BEEN COMMODITIZED IN 30 YEARS BY BIG BOX RETAILING. THEN SHIFTING FROM BIG BOX RETAILING TO ONLINE SALES, SHIFT FROM PETROL AND DIESEL TO BATTERIES, AND MANY MORE THINGS WILL CHANGE. DEVELOPMENT IN WAYS OF BUSINESSES AND TECHNOLOGIES WILL ALWAYS TAKE PLACE BECAUSE OF UPCOMING NEW GENERATIONS. SO INVESTORS SHOULD HAVE AN ABILITY OR SHOULD TRY TO SEARCH SUCH CHANGES IN EARLY STAGES SO THAT IT CAN BE GREAT OPPORTUNITY TO EARN BIG MONEY.

 

12 AUGUST, 2020

WE INVESTORS SHOULD NOT EXPECT EARNINGS TO GROW IN LINE WITH ECONOMY. RATHER WE SHOULD LOOK OUT FOR THOSE RARE EXAMPLES OF MANAGEMENT WHO ARE PRUDENT IN THEIR USE OF CAPITAL. THE STARTING POINT FOR COMPANY ANALYSIS IS NOT THE OUTLOOK FOR END DEMAND BUT RATHER SUPPLY SIDE. OUR GOAL SHOULD BE TO FIND INVESTMENTS AT POSITIVE INFLECTION POINTS IN THE CAPITAL CYCLE AND IN SECTORS WITH BENIGN AND STABLE SUPPLY SIDE FUNDAMENTALS.

 

11 AUGUST, 2020

THE CASE FOR LONG TERM INVESTMENT HAS TENDED TO CENTRE AROUND SIMPLE MATHEMATICAL ADVANTAGES SUCH AS REDUCED COSTS AND FEWER MISTAKES, THE REAL ADVANTAGE TO THIS APPROACH COMES FROM ASKING MORE VALUABLE QUESTIONS. THE SHORT TERM INVESTOR ASK QUESTIONS IN THE HOPE OF GLEANING CLUES TO NEAR TERM OUTCOMES, RELATING TYPICALLY TO OPERATING MARGINS, EARNING PER SHARE AND REVENUE TRENDS OVER THE NEXT QUARTER. SUCH INFORMATION IS RELEVANT FOR THE SHORT PERIOD OF TIME AND HAS VALUE IF IT IS CORRECT. EVEN WHEN IT IS CORRECT THE VALUE OF THE INFORMATION IS LIKELY TO BE MODEST, A FEW PERCENTAGE POINTS IN PERFORMANCE. IN ORDER TO BUILD A VIABLE, ECONOMICALLY IMPORTANT TRACK RECORD, THE SHORT TERM INVESTOR MAY NEED TO PERFORM THIS TRICK MANY TIMES IN A CAREER OR EMPLOY LARGE AMOUNT OF FINANCIAL LEVERAGE TO EXPLOIT MARGINAL OPPORTUNITIES.

 

10 AUGUST, 2020

THE PROTECTION TO MINIMIZE THE LOSSES IN BEAR MARKETS IS TO OWN DIVIDEND PAYING, DIVIDEND GROWING QUALITY COMPANIES.

 

9 AUGUST, 2020

GOOD COMPANIES ARE AVAILABLE CHEAP DURING INVESTMENT PHASE AND BECOME EXPENSIVE IN GROWTH PHASE. LONG TERM INVESTORS WHO UNDERSTAND THIS ARE ABLE TO GET COMPANY AT A FAR LESS PRICE THAN ITS FUTURE WORTH.

 

8 AUGUST, 2020

THERE IS NO POINT IN BEING ASSET RICH AND CASH POOR. NEED TO INVEST IN ASSETS WHICH GENERATE CASH FLOWS.

 

7 AUGUST, 2020

DIFFERENTIATING BUSINESS PERFORMANCE FROM STOCK PERFORMANCE IS THE FIRST STEP OF INVESTING PROCESS.

 

6 AUGUST, 2020

HIGH CURRENT PROFITABILITY OFTEN LEADS TO OVERCONFIDENCE AMONG MANAGERS, WHO CONFUSE BENIGN INDUSTRY CONDITIONS WITH THEIR OWN SKILL, A MISTAKE ENCOURAGED BY THE MEDIA, WHICH IS CONSTANTLY LOOKING FOR CORPORATE HEROES AND VILLAINS. BOTH INVESTORS AND MANAGERS ARE ENGAGED IN MAKING DEMAND PROJECTIONS. SUCH FORECASTS HAVE A WIDE MARGIN OF ERROR AND ARE PRONE TO SYSTEMATIC BIASES. IN GOOD TIMES, THE DEMAND FORECASTS TEND TO BE OPTIMISTIC AND IN BAD TIMES OVERLY PESSIMISTIC.

 

5 AUGUST, 2020

OVERINVESTMENT IS NOT A SOLITARY ACTIVITY, IT COMES ABOUT BECAUSE SEVERAL PLAYERS IN AN INDUSTRY HAVE BEEN INCREASING CAPACITY AT THE SAME TIME. WHEN MARKET PARTICIPANTS RESPOND TO PERCEIVED INCREASES IN DEMAND BY INCREASING CAPACITY IN AN INDUSTRY, THEY FAIL TO CONSIDER THE IMPACT OF INCREASING SUPPLY ON FUTURE RETURNS.

 

4 AUGUST, 2020

IF A PERSON GETS BORE IN INVESTING IT MEANS HE IS GOING ON RIGHT TRACK. BECAUSE INVESTING IS LIKE TEST CRICKET. NO ONE CAN DOUBLE THEIR WEALTH IN SHORT PERIOD OF TIME.

 

3 AUGUST, 2020

THE MAIN BEHAVIORAL EXPLANATION FOR VALUE STOCKS LONG RUN OUTPERFORMANCE IS EXCESSIVE EXTRAPOLATION BY MULTIYEAR GROWTH RATES. IN REALITY, GROWTH MEAN REVERTS FASTER THAN THE MARKET EXPECTS, MAKING GROWTH STOCKS MORE LIKELY TO DISAPPOINT.

 

2 AUGUST, 2020

ONLY SAVINGS WILL NOT MAKE US FINANCIALLY FREE BUT INVESTING THAT SAVINGS IN PROPER MANNER WILL DEFINITELY MAKE US FINANCIALLY FREE WHICH IS CALLED AS FINANCIAL INDEPENDENCE.

 

1 AUGUST, 2020

WITHOUT STOCK MARKETS WE WOULD NEVER HAVE BIGGER COMPANIES OR INVENTIONS THAT WOULD CHANGE THE LIVING OF EACH AND EVERY PERSON. EG, TWO WHEELERS AND FOUR WHEELERS GOT INVENTED MANY YEARS AGO BUT TO RAISE THE REQUIRED CAPITAL TO INCREASE THE PRODUCTION SO THAT EVERY ONE CAN USE THAT PRODUCT, STOCK MARKET IS REQUIRED. BECAUSE WITHOUT STOCK MARKET COMPANY CANNOT RAISE BIG MONEY. SO WHILE INVESTING ONE SHOULD NOT LOOK STOCK MARKET OR A SHARE PRICE OF ANY COMPANY AS A PRICE TICKER BUT ONE SHOULD THINK THAT WE ARE INVESTING IN THE BUSINESS OF THAT COMPANY AND NOT IN THE PRICE OF THE SHARE OF THAT COMPANY. MANY THINGS IN THE WORLD HAVE BEEN INVENTED BUT IF THERE WERE NO STOCK MARKETS TO RAISE MONEY THEN THE USES OF THAT INVENTION WOULD NOT BE AVAILABLE TO EACH AND EVERY PERSON.

 

31 JULY, 2020

TREES GROW UP TO CERTAIN LIMIT. BUT IF THEY ARE CUT THEY AGAIN GROW UP FROM THE PART FROM WHERE THEY ARE CUT. SAME WAY MARKETS CANNOT GO UP WITHOUT CORRECTIONS. CORRECTIONS ARE REQUIRED FOR THE NEXT BULL MARKET. WITHOUT CORRECTIONS LIKE TREES MARKETS ALSO GROW UP TO CERTAIN LIMIT.

 

30 JULY, 2020

MANY SAY IF WE BUY ANY STOCK AND IT GOES DOWN IN PRICE, JUST BUY MORE AND IT WILL COME BACK. BUT IT IS NOT NECESSARY THAT ALL STOCK THAT FALL IN PRICE RECOVER.

 

29 JULY, 2020

MOST PEOPLE WILL NOT TAKE THE TIME TO STUDY AND ANALYSE WHAT THEY ARE DOING RIGHT AND WHAT THEY ARE DOING WRONG. BUT THIS IS HOW WE IMPROVE AND GET TO BE REALLY GOOD AT WHAT WE ARE DOING, IN MARKET AND IN LIFE. PERSONAL OPINION, PRIDE, EGO AND THE DESIRE TO SAVE FACE AND PROVE WE ARE RIGHT HAVE ABSOLUTELY NO PLACE IN THE STOCK MARKET AND WILL COST US BADLY. SO WE SHOULD BETTER LEARN TO OBJECTIVELY ANALYSE OUR MISTAKES. IT’S NEVER TOO LATE TO LEARN.

 

28 JULY, 2020

TO INVEST IN ANY COMPANY ONE SHOULD SEE FOLLOWING: DOES THE COMPANY’S PRODUCT SAVE MONEY, SOLVE PROBLEM OR SAVE TIME WITH NEW TECHNOLOGY? OR IS IT A NEW PRODUCT OR NEW TECHNOLOGY? DOES THAT PRODUCT IS WIDELY NEEDED OR LIKED? IS IT A PRODUCT THAT ENCOURAGES REPEAT SALES?

 

27 JULY, 2020

MOST PEOPLE IN THE INVESTMENT BUSINESS TELL US TO WIDELY DIVERSIFY. BUT WE SHOULD GO AGAINST THIS CONVENTIONAL WISDOM, EVEN IF IT MAKES US A LITTLE UNCOMFORTABLE AT FIRST. COPYING WHAT EVERYBODY IS SAYING AND DOING IN THE STOCK MARKET MAY FEEL REASSURING, BUT IT WILL NOT BE THE MOST REWARDING. OUR GOAL SHOULD NOT JUST TO BE RIGHT IN THE MARKET BUT TO MAKE SUBSTANTIAL MONEY WHEN WE ARE RIGHT. THIS IS BEST DONE BY CONCENTRATING OUR EGGS IN FEWER BASKETS, KNOWING THEM WELL AND WATCHING THEM CAREFULLY.

 

26 JULY, 2020 

LOSS MADE IN STOCK MARKET IS NOT A LOSS BUT IT IS ACTUALLY A TUITION FEE.

 

25 JULY, 2020

WE SHOULD NOT SELL AND TAKE PROFIT IF OUR ANY STOCK IS UP 20% TO 25% IN ONLY TWO TO THREE WEEKS. THAT’S A SIGN OF REAL POWER, AND WE MAY BE HOLDING A BIG WINNER.

 

24 JULY, 2020

MARKETS USUALLY DISCOUNT NEWS ITEMS AND LOOK HEAD OF THE ECONOMY UP TO SIX MONTHS IN ADVANCE. WE SHOULD NOT MAKE OUR DECISIONS BASED ON OUR OPINION OF THE NEWS. WE SHOULD MAKE DECISIONS ON THE OBJECTIVE OBSERVATION OF WHEN AND HOW THE GENERAL MARKET INDICES FINALLY CHANGE DIRECTION FROM THEIR DOWNTREND. MARKETS ARE RARELY WRONG, PEOPLE OPINIONS AND FEARS ARE FREQUENTLY WRONG. 

 

23 JULY, 2020

MONEY WITHOUT SATISFACTION IS LIKE LIVING A LIFE OF A SLAVE. 

 

22 JULY, 2020

BEAR MARKETS ARE NORMAL AND NECESSARY AND SERVE TO CLEAN UP PRIOR EXCESSES. THEY ALSO ALLOW THE MARKET TO CREATE A WHOLE NEW SET OF CHART BASES AND LEADERS FOR THE BULL MARKET THAT, IN TIME ALWAYS FOLLOWS. SO WE SHOULD NEVER LET OURSELVES GET DISCOURAGED OR LOSE OUR CONFIDENCE, OTHERWISE WE WILL MISS THE NEXT BULL MARKET.

 

21 JULY, 2020

ONE SHOULD INVEST IN SECTORS WHICH ARE OUT OF FAVOR. IN THAT OUT OF FAVOR SECTOR ONE SHOULD INVEST IN COMPANY WHICH IS MARKET LEADER OF THAT SECTOR. BECAUSE MAJORITY OF TIME NO SECTOR REMAIN OUT OF FAVOR FOR LONGER PERIOD OF TIME. AND STOCKS IN THAT OUT OF FAVOR SECTOR ARE ALSO AVAILABLE AT CHEAPER VALUATIONS SINCE THEY ARE NOT IN LIMELIGHT SO NO SPECULATIONS AND GAMBLING CAN BE DONE IN IT.

 

20 JULY, 2020

OUR OBJECTIVE IS NOT TO BE RIGHT ALL THE TIME. IT IS TO MAKE BIG MONEY WHEN WE ARE RIGHT AND TO GET OUT EARLY WHEN WE APPEAR TO BE WRONG. TO MAKE BIG MONEY WE HAVE GOT TO BUY THE VERY BEST.

 

19 JULY, 2020

WHETHER WE ARE NEW OR EXPERIENCED INVESTOR, THE HARDEST LESSON TO LEARN IS THAT WE ARE NOT GOING TO BE RIGHT ALL THE TIME. AND IF WE DON’T CUT LOSS QUICKLY, SOONER OR LATER WE WILL SUFFER SOME VERY LARGE LOSSES. THE PROBLEM IS WE ALWAYS HOPE TO MAKE MONEY WHEN WE BUY A STOCK. AND WHEN WE HAVE TO SELL AND TAKE A LOSS, WE FIND IT GUT WRENCHING AND HARD TO ADMIT WE WERE WRONG. WE HAD RATHER WAIT AND HOPE THE PRICE WILL COME BACK. BUT SOME TIME THE PRICE DOES NOT COME BACK.

 

18 JULY, 2020

WHEN PURCHASING A STOCK, WE SHOULD BUY HALF OF OUR DESIRED POSITION AT THE INITIAL BUY POINT. WE SHOULD BUY A SMALL AMOUNT MORE IF THE PRICE RISES 2% OR 3% ABOVE OUR FIRST BUY. WE SHOULD AVERAGE UP IN PRICE, NEVER AT DOWN.

 

17 JULY, 2020

SUCCESS IN STOCK MARKET IS MORE OF CONTROL OF EMOTIONAL BEHAVIOUR RATHER THAN KNOWLEDGE.

 

16 JULY, 2020

WE SHOULD SELL A STOCK WITH A PROFIT BECAUSE IT MOVES UP IN PRICE LESS THAN ANOTHER STOCK WE ARE HOLDING. THE MONEY IT CAN BE USED IN THE BETTER PERFORMING STOCK.

 

15 JULY, 2020

SOMETIMES IF A STOCK CLOSES DOWN IN PRICE ON THE LARGEST ONE DAY VOLUME SINCE THE BEGINNING OF ITS LONG PRICE ADVANCE OVER MANY MONTHS, IT COULD BE WARNING SIGNS FOR US TO CONSIDER SELLING. 

 

14 JULY, 2020

WE SHOULD ALWAYS KEEP INVESTING SIMPLE, BASIC AND EASY TO UNDERSTAND. WE SHOULD NOT TRY TO BE A JACK OF ALL TRADES. NO ONE CAN BE HIGHLY SUCCESSFUL IN SPECULATING PENNY STOCKS, BUYING OPTIONS AND TRADING IN FUTURE. THE KEYS TO SUCCESS IN INVESTING AND IN LIFE ARE CONCENTRATION AND FOCUS. 

 

13 JULY, 2020

INVESTING IS A PROCESS. GOOD INVESTING COMES FROM A VERY GOOD CONTINUOUS PROCESS AND, AS IN EVERY CONTINUOUS PROCESS, IF ANYTHING COMMANDS AN OBSERVER’S ATTENTION, THERE IS PROBLEM WITH THE PROCESS. A GOOD CONTINUOUS PROCESS SHOULD NEVER BE INTERESTING.

 

12 JULY, 2020

INVESTORS SPEND MOST OF TIME DECIDING WHAT STOCK TO BUY. WE SPEND LITTLE IF ANY TIME THINKING ABOUT WHEN AND UNDER WHAT CIRCUMSTANCES OUR STOCK SHOULD BE SOLD. THIS IS A SERIOUS MISTAKE. EQUAL TIME MUST BE DEVOTED TO DEVELOPING A REALISTIC SET OF SELLING RULES. WE CAN BECOME A HIGHLY SUCCESSFUL INVESTOR IF WE BUY STOCKS WELL AND SELL THEM WELL. EVERYONE WILL BE BEHIND WHAT TO BUY BUT VERY LESS WILL TELL WHAT TO SELL.

 

11 JULY, 2020

POTENTIAL WINNERS WILL HAVE STRONG EARNINGS AND SALES GROWTH, INCREASING PROFIT MARGINS AND HIGH RETURN ON EQUITY. 

 

10 JULY, 2020

BEAR MARKET CREATE FEAR AND UNCERTAINTY. WHEN STOCK HIT BOTTOM AND TURN UP TO BEGIN THE NEXT BULL MARKET LOADED WITH OPPORTUNITIES, MOST PEOPLE SIMPLY DON’T BELIEVE IT.

 

9 JULY, 2020

IN STOCK MARKET THE MISTAKE WE DO IS INSTEAD OF FOCUSING ON LONG TERM INVESTMENTS, WE OVERREACT TO RECENT GOOD NEWS AND RECENT BAD NEWS.

 

8 JULY, 2020

BEAR MARKET CREATE FEAR AND UNCERTAINTY. WHEN STOCK HIT BOTTOM AND TURN UP TO BEGIN THE NEXT BULL MARKET LOADED WITH OPPORTUNITIES, MOST PEOPLE SIMPLY DON’T BELIEVE IT.

 

7 JULY, 2020

WE SHOULD WRITE DOWN ALL OUR PAST WORST INVESTMENTS WITH AN HONEST EXPLANATION OF WHY THEY WENT WRONG. FROM THAT EXPLANATIONS WE SHOULD TAKE LESSONS SO THAT WE DO NOT MAKE SUCH MISTAKES AGAIN. ANY ONE WHO COME TO MARKET TO LEARN AND SURVIVE WILL EARN AND BE SUCCESSFUL IN MARKETS, BUT ANY ONE WHO ONLY COMES TO EARN IN MARKET WILL LEARN FROM MARKET.

 

6 JULY, 2020

INVESTORS NEED TO KNOW THEMSELVES, KNOW THEIR STRENGTHS AND WEAKNESS. A GOOD INVESTOR NEEDS TO FIND A STYLE OR METHOD THAT SUITS HIS TEMPERAMENT AND THEN STICK TO THAT APPROACH. THERE ARE MANY APPROACHES TO MAKING MONEY IN STOCK MARKET AND THE INVESTOR NEEDS TO BE ABLE TO ESTABLISH WHAT WORKS FROM HIM PERSONALLY AND SHOULD THEN STICK TO IT. I DON’T BELIEVE ANY INVESTOR CAN BE JACK OF ALL TRADES, SWITCHING BETWEEN DIFFERENT APPROACHES OVER TIME. 

 

5 JULY, 2020

TO BE SUCCESSFUL IN INVESTING WE SHOULD EXAMINE OUR BETS AND LOOK AT THE SHAPE OF OUR PORTFOLIO AND SHOULD CHECK THAT DOES IT REFLECTS OUR CONVICTION LEVELS. WE SHOULD SEE THAT DOES OUR STRONGEST CONVICTION BETS ARE LARGE ENOUGH. WE SHOULD SEE THAT WHAT ARE THE CHARACTERISTICS OF THE TAIL OF OUR PORTFOLIO AND SHOULD CHECK OUR PORTFOLIO FOR UNINTENDED BETS.

 

4 JULY, 2020

WITH AN OPEN MIND WE MUST LISTEN TO ADVICE FROM OTHERS ABOUT WHY WE ARE NOT DOING WELL IN INVESTING. WE MUST SEEK VIEWS FROM COLLEAGUES ABOUT WHAT WE ARE DOING WRONG AND WE MUST BE PREPARED TO TAKE CRITICISM TO BE A SUCCESSFUL INVESTOR.

 

3 JULY, 2020

WE SHOULD MAKE SURE THAT WE ARE SPENDING ENOUGH TIME ON LOOKING FOR NEW IDEAS RATHER THAN JUST MONITORING WHY WE ALREADY OWN. A PORTFOLIO WITH VERY FEW NEW HOLDINGS CAN BECOME STALE.

 

2 JULY, 2020

IN MARKETS, EVERYONE TENDS TO SEE THE SAME THINGS, READ THE SAME NEWSPAPER OR INFORMATION AND GET THE SAME DATA FEEDS. THE ONLY WAY TO ARRIVE AT A DIFFERENT CONCLUSION FROM EVERYBODY ELSE IS ORGANISE THE DATA IN DIFFERENT WAYS OR BRING TO THE ANALYTICAL PROCESS THINGS THAT ARE NOT TYPICALLY PRESENT. THE NEWSPAPER ARTICLE OR THE INFORMATION OF THE COMPANY IS ALREADY PRESENT IN THE STOCK PRICE.

 

1 JULY, 2020

AT THE HEART OF STOCK MARKETS THERE ARE TWO BASIC HUMAN EMOTIONS: FEAR AND GREED. ON TOP OF THIS ARE CYCLICAL FASHIONS THAT ENGULF INVESTORS OVER TIME. IF WE CAN STAND ASIDE FROM THESE ELEMENTS, BE AWARE OF THEM AND TAKE ADVANTAGE OF THEM WHERE RELEVANT BUT NEVER BE ENGULFED BY THEM, AND ALWAYS BE AWARE OF WHAT THEY REALLY ARE, THEN WE HAVE THE BASICS FOR BEING A SUCCESSFUL INVESTOR.

 

30 JUNE, 2020

THREE REASONS TO SELL A STOCK: 1) IF SOMETHING NEGATES THE INVESTMENT THESIS, 2) IF IT MEETS OUR VALUATION TARGET AND 3) IF WE FIND SOMETHING BETTER.

 

29 JUNE, 2020

THE WILLINGNESS TO DIG DEEPER, SEARCH MORE WIDELY AND KEEP AN OPEN MIND TO ALL IDEAS, INCLUDING THE IDEA THAT WE MIGHT HAVE MADE A BAD CALL, DISTINGUISHES INVESTMENT WINNERS. INVESTOR WHO TURNS OVER THE MOST ROCKS, LOOKS OVER THE MOST INVESTMENT IDEAS, AND IS UNSENTIMENTAL ABOUT PAST CHOICES IS MOST LIKELY TO SUCCEED.

 

28 JUNE, 2020

WE SHOULD SELL A STOCK ONLY WHEN WE HAVE FOUND A NEW STOCK WHICH IS AVAILABLE AT BETTER BARGAIN THAN THE ONE THAT WE HAVE HOLD. 

 

27 JUNE, 2020

IN INVESTING REAL CHALLENGE IS TO COMMIT TO THE DISCIPLINE OF LONG TERM INVESTING AND AVOID REACTING TO MARKETS COMPELLING DISTRACTIONS, WHICH ARE SUPERFLUOUS TO THE REAL WORK OF INVESTING. A PERSISTENT COMMITMENT TO THE DISCIPLINE OF LONG TERM INVESTING SHOULD BE OUR PRINCIPAL RESPONSIBILITY AND OUR BEST OPPORTUNITY TO ASSURE OUR OWN LONG TERM INVESTING SUCCESS.

 

26 JUNE, 2020

THERE ARE TWO DIFFERENT KINDS OF PROBLEMS IN TRYING TO BEAT THE MARKETS. ONE PROBLEM IS THAT IT IS EXTRAORDINARILY DIFFICULT TO BEAT THE MARKET. THE OTHER PROBLEM IS THAT IT WILL DIVERT OUR ATTENTION FROM ESTABLISHING LONG RANGE OBJECTIVES AND INVESTMENT STRATEGIES THAT ARE WELL MATCHED TO OUR FINANCIAL GOALS. 

 

25 JUNE, 2020

GREAT SUCCESS IS USUALLY ACHIEVED THROUGH SPECIALIZATION ON LINE OF WORK OR ONE KIND OF INVESTING. MOST FINANCIALLY SUCCESSFUL PEOPLE WILL BE WISE TO BE DEFENSIVE IN THE DIVERSIFICATION OF THEIR INVESTMENTS. IF WE HAVE WON THE MONEY GAME, IT MAKES NO SENSE TO RISK CONVERTING A WIN INTO A LOSS BY TRYING TOO HARD.

 

24 JUNE, 2020

IN STOCK MARKET IT IS ESSENTIAL TO KEEP AN OPEN MIND TO OTHER INVESTORS POINTS OF VIEW, PARTICULARLY VIEWS ON OUR OWN MAIN HOLDINGS THAT CONFLICT WITH OUR OWN. WE SHOULD NEVER FEEL THAT WE ARE THE COMPLETE EXPERT ON A PARTICULAR STOCK AND ONE ONE ELSE VIEWS COUNTS. WE SHOULD EVALUATE HONESTLY WHY WE BELIEVE OTHER INVESTORS ARE WRONG AND WE ARE RIGHT.

 

23 JUNE, 2020

OUR INVESTMENTS DO NOT KNOW OUR WISHES OR INTENTIONS. THE INVESTMENT MARKET WON’T ADAPT TO US. SO AS AN INVESTOR, WE MUST ADAPT TO THE MARKET.

 

22 JUNE, 2020

STOCK MARKET NEVER LEAD US TO LOSE MONEY BUT OUR SENTIMENTS TOWARDS DAILY MOVEMENT OF MARKET MAKE US TO LOSE MONEY. 

 

21 JUNE, 2020

AT AIRPORTS IN BOARDING PASS LINE OR LUGGAGE DROP OUT LINE WE NEVER SHUFFLE FROM ONE LINE TO ANOTHER. THERE IS NOTHING WE LOSE THERE THEN TOO WE DON’T SHUFFLE FROM ONE LINE TO ANOTHER. AND IN MARKETS WE CONSTANT SHUFFLE FROM ONE STOCK TO OTHER JUST DUE TO GREED CAUSED BY MARKET MOMENTUM. IN SHUFFLING FROM ONE STOCK TO OTHER JUST BECAUSE OF GREED TO EARN MORE DUE TO MARKET MOMENTUM FORCES US TO SELL OUR QUALITY STOCKS. CONSTANT SHUFFLING FROM ONE STOCK TO ANOTHER IS BIGGEST MISTAKE WE DO.

 

20 JUNE, 2020

SUCCESSFUL INVESTOR SHOULD BE CAREFUL, THEY SHOULD NOT PUT THEIR VICTORY AT RISK IN ATTEMPT TO WIN BIG, PARTICULARLY BY UNNECESSARILY BORROWING, COMMITTING TOO MUCH TO ANY SINGLE INVESTMENT, OR OVEREXTENDING RESPONSIBILITIES AND COMMITMENTS. SUCCESSFUL INVESTORS SHOULD ALSO AVOID SPECULATION. THEY SHOULD BE EQUALLY CAREFUL ABOUT BEING TOO CAREFUL.

 

19 JUNE, 2020

PREDICTING THE STOCK MARKET ROUGHLY IS NOT HARD, BUT PREDICTING IT ACCURATELY IS TRULY IMPOSSIBLE. EQUALLY PREDICTING APPROXIMATELY WHERE THE STOCK MARKET WILL NORMALLY BE IN THE LONG RUN IS NOT HARD, BUT EVEN ESTIMATING HOW IT WILL MOVE OVER THE NEXT FEW MONTHS IS NEARLY IMPOSSIBLE AND POINTLESS.

 

18 JUNE, 2020

THE SUCCESSFUL INVESTORS ARE NOT IN COMPETITION WITH ONE ANOTHER, THEY ARE IN COMPETITION WITH THEMSELVES TO STAY ON THEIR INVESTING STRATEGY OR INVESTING STYLE EVEN WHEN MARKET GOES DOWN. INVESTMENT STRATEGY OR STYLE IS THE EXPLICIT LINKAGE BETWEEN OUR LONG TERM INVESTMENT OBJECTIVES AND DAILY OPERATIONAL WORK OF INVESTING.

 

17 JUNE, 2020

THE BEST SHIELDS AGAINST THE DISRUPTION OF MARKET’S SHORT TERM PROVOCATIONS ARE KNOWLEDGE AND UNDERSTANDING, PARTICULARLY KNOWLEDGE OF OURSELVES AND OUR OWN GOALS. THAT’S WHY WE SHOULD WRITE DOWN OUR INVESTMENT STRATEGY. WE SHOULD NOT TRUST OURSELVES TO BE COMPLETELY RATIONAL WHEN ALL OTHER INVESTORS AROUND US ARE BEING DRIVEN BY EMOTIONS, BECAUSE WE TOO ARE HUMANS.

 

16 JUNE, 2020

HAVING PROUD ON STOCK SELECTION CAPABILITY IS MISTAKE SOME INVESTORS MAKE. SOMETIMES WE OVERESTIMATE OUR OWN INVESTMENT CAPABILITIES AND OUR INVESTMENT PERFORMANCE RELATIVE TO MARKET. AND DUE TO PROUD WE DON’T LIKE TO RECOGNIZE AND ACKNOWLEDGE OUR MISTAKES EVEN TO OURSELVES. TOO OFTEN WE ARE ALSO STUBBORN. THE STOCK DOES NOT KNOW WE OWN IT. AND STOCK REALLY DOES NOT CARE ABOUT IT.

 

15 JUNE, 2020

THE BIGGEST MISTAKE WE MAKE IN MARKETS IS WE DISTORT OUR PERCEPTION OF OUR DECISION TO BE ALMOST ALWAYS IN OUR OWN FAVOR, SO WE BELIEVE THAT WE ARE ALWAYS BETTER IN DECISION MAKING THAN WE REALLY ARE. DUE TO SUCH TYPE OF NATURE INVESTORS CANNOT LEARN NEW THINGS AND THIS LEADS TO OVERCONFIDENT.

 

14 JUNE, 2020

TO MAKE MONEY IN MARKETS ONE NEEDS TO REMAIN INVESTED IN MARKETS IN ALL CONDITIONS. RUNNING AWAY AND SELLING STOCKS IN FEAR, IN A LOSS WHEN MARKET FALLS NEVER ALLOWS THAT INVESTOR TO RE-ENTER THE MARKET DUE TO PERMANENT CAPITAL LOSS MADE BY SELLING STOCKS WHEN MARKET FALLS.

 

13 JUNE, 2020

THE MISTAKE WE INVESTORS MAKE IS WE EVALUATE THE EQUALITY OF A DECISION BASED ON THE FAVORABLE OR UNFAVORABLE OUTCOME, AND NOT ON THE QUALITY OF THE WAY THE DECISION WAS MADE.

 

12 JUNE, 2020

MOST INVESTORS FOCUS ONLY ON ONE SIDE OF INVESTING, THAT IS RETURNS. BUT THERE IS ANOTHER SIDE ALSO WHICH IS RISK. PARTICULARLY RISK OF SERIOUS PERMANENT LOSS. AND FOR LONG TERM BEING CAUTIOUS OF PERMANENT LOSS IS MORE IMPORTANT THAN RETURNS BECAUSE IF THERE IS PERMANENT LOSS THEN NO ONE CAN EARN MONEY. CAPITAL PROTECTION IS MOST IMPORTANT TO MAKE MONEY.

 

10 JUNE, 2020

THERE ARE TWO MAJOR CATEGORIES OF RISK IN INVESTING. ONE IS INVESTMENT RISK AND OTHER IS INVESTOR RISK. INVESTMENT RISK GET ALL THE ATTENTION, BUT INVESTOR RISK SHOULD BE OUR FOCUS BECAUSE, WHILE WE CAN DO VERY LITTLE ABOUT INVESTMENT RISK, EVERY INVESTOR CAN MAKE A MAJOR DIFFERENCE WITH A MODERATE EFFORT ON INVESTOR RISK. THE MARKET IS WHAT IT IS. MARKET DOES WHAT IT DOES. AS WITH THE WEATHER, WE CAN CHOOSE AN AGREEABLE CLIMATE, BUT WE MUST LEARN TO ACCEPT THE DAY TO DAY CHANGES AS THEY COME. 

 

9 JUNE, 2020

THE SAD TRUTH IS MANY INVESTORS BUY AFTER THE BEST RESULTS AND SELL OUT AFTER THE WORST IS OVER. THIS BEHAVIOR IS VERY COSTLY TO INVESTORS.

 

8 JUNE, 2020

PROFESSIONALS DO MAKE MISTAKES. BUT OTHER PROS ARE ALWAYS LOOKING FOR ANY ERRORS SO THEY CAN POUNCE ON IT. NEW INVESTMENT OPPORTUNITIES SIMPLY DON’T COME ALONG ALL THAT OFTEN, AND IF IT COMES THEN TOO IT DO NOT STAY UNDISCOVERED FOR LONG.

 

7 JUNE, 2020

IN INDIA PROMOTERS OF SMALLER COMPANIES ARE NOT WILLING TO EMPOWER PROFESSIONAL IN SENIOR MANAGERIAL ROLES. INSTEAD, PROMOTER STUFF THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS AND SENIOR RANKS OF THE MANAGEMENT TEAM WITH FAMILY MEMBERS AND FRIENDS. THE LACK OF HIGH QUALITY PROFESSIONAL MANAGEMENT TEAM MEANS THAT AS AND WHEN PROBLEM ARISE, MANY SMALL COMPANIES OFTEN DO NOT HAVE THE MANAGEMENT BANDWIDTH TO DEAL WITH THEM.

 

6 JUNE, 2020

THE THREE INTEGRAL SOURCES OF VALUE ARE ASSETS, EARNINGS AND GROWTH.

 

5 JUNE, 2020

WE INVESTORS ARE MORTAL, BUT OUR INVESTMENTS DON’T KNOW IT AND FRANKLY DON’T CARE. THIS APPLIES TO ALL INVESTMENTS: STOCKS, BONDS, BUILDINGS ETC. ALL HAVE THE VALUE TODAY AND WILL HAVE A FUTURE VALUE IRRESPECTIVE OF WHO OWNS THEM. THEREFORE INVESTING SHOULD BE DONE FOR INVESTMENT REASONS, AND NOT FOR PERSONAL REASON AS AGE. WE SHOULD NOT CHANGE OUR INVESTMENTS JUST BECAUSE WE HAVE REACHED A CERTAIN AGE OR HAVE RETIRED. IF WE COULD AFFORD FINE PAINTINGS, WE WOULDN’T CHANGE THE ONES WE LOVE THE MOST SIMPLY BECAUSE WE HAVE REACHED RETIREMENT. IT IS SAME WITH INVESTMENTS. WHY NOT MAINTAIN A LONG TERM STRATEGY.

 

4 JUNE, 2020

INVESTING IS SIMPLE, BUT THE INDUSTRY HAS MADE IT COMPLICATED. IN ITS QUEST FOR INSTANT GRATIFICATION, IT HAS WOVEN A WEB OF COMPLEXITY TO CONFUSE THE INVESTOR.

 

3 JUNE, 2020

WHEN THE BROADER MARKET IS UNDERGOING EUPHORIC OR BULLISH PHASE, MOST STOCKS DO WELL REGARDLESS OF THE QUALITY OF THEIR UNDERLYING FUNDAMENTALS. HOWEVER WHEN THE EUPHORIA ENDS, STOCKS WITH POOR UNDERLYING FUNDAMENTALS ARE DECIMATED, LEADING TO SIGNIFICANT CAPITAL EROSION FOR INVESTORS WHO DID NOT ADEQUATELY UNDERSTAND THE WEAK FUNDAMENTALS OF THEIR PORTFOLIO COMPANIES. AND THEN IT TAKES LONGER TIME FOR COMPANIES WITH WEAK FUNDAMENTALS TO COME UP AGAIN.

 

2 JUNE, 2020

IT IS IMPORTANT TO LINK OUR INVESTMENT STYLE WITH OUR FINANCIAL OBJECTIVES, OTHERWISE WE WILL END UP EITHER TAKING UNNECESSARY RISKS OR UNDERSHOOTING OUR FINANCIAL GOALS. THE ESSENTIAL LINK BETWEEN OUR INVESTMENT STYLE AND OUR FINANCIAL OBJECTIVE IS MADE THROUGH FINANCIAL PLANNING.

 

1 JUNE, 2020

IN STOCK MARKET CAPITAL PROTECTION IS MORE IMPORTANT THAN MAKING MONEY. BECAUSE IF CAPITAL IS PROTECTED THEN MONEY CAN BE MADE. IF CAPITAL IS NOT PROTECTED THEN THERE IS NO WAY OR CHANCE TO MAKE MONEY.

 

31 MAY, 2020

OVER LAST 10-15 YEARS SMALL CAPS HAVE OUTPERFORM LARGE CAPS IN MOST LARGE STOCK MARKETS. THERE ARE THE TWO FACTORS FOR THIS OUT PERFORMANCE: 1) SMALLER COMPANIES HAVE THE POTENTIAL TO GROW THEIR PROFITS MUCH FASTER THAN THE LARGE COMPANIES AND 2) AS SMALL COMPANIES GROW IN SIZE THEY ARE DISCOVERED BY THE STOCK MARKET.

 

30 MAY, 2020

INVESTORS WHO DO NOT HAVE PATIENCE FOR STOCK HOLDING PERIOD FOR AT LEAST ONE YEAR, ARE LIKELY TO BELIEVE THAT MORE OFTEN THAN NOT, PEOPLE LOSE MONEY IN STOCK MARKET. FOR HOLDING PERIOD GREATER THAN ONE YEAR, THE SENSEX’S RETURN FOR PAST MANY YEARS SUGGESTS THAT AS THE INVESTMENT HOLDING PERIOD INCREASES FROM ONE YEAR TO TEN YEAR, THE INVESTORS POSITION ON RISK REWARD MATRIX MOVES FROM HIGH RISK LOW RETURN TO LOW RISK HIGH RETURN.

 

29 MAY, 2020

IN STOCK MARKET EVERYONE ARE LEARNERS TILL THE END OF LIFE. MARKET TEACHES US NEW THINGS AND NEW EXPERIENCE EVERY DAY. SO ONE SHOULD NOT HAVE AN EGO AND SAY THAT HE KNOWS EVERYTHING ABOUT MARKET. BECAUSE HAVING SUCH NATURE WILL BRING OBSTACLE IN LEARNING NEW THINGS. 

 

28 MAY, 2020

INVESTORS ALSO INVEST IN REAL ESTATE AS MOST OF THEM BURN THEIR FINGERS IN STOCKS. THEY USUALLY SEE REAL ESTATE INVESTMENTS AS BEING SAFER THAN THEIR STOCK INVESTMENT. WHAT THEY DON’T REALIZE IS THIS IS BECAUSE OF THE INADVERTENT COFFEE CAN INVESTING STYLE OF INVESTING THAT THEY ADOPT IN THE REAL ESTATE AS AGAINST THE TRADING STYLE IN THEIR STOCK PORTFOLIO. WHEN IT COMES TO REAL ESTATE, INVESTORS ARE HAPPY TO BUY AND HOLD FOR LONG PERIOD OF TIME. DUE TO THIS THEY END UP HOLDING THEIR PROPERTIES THROUGH THICK AND THIN, WHICH IS WHY THEY ARE ABLE TO SEE AN APPRECIATION IN THE VALUE. ON OTHER HAND IN EQUITY, INVESTORS TYPICALLY END UP BUYING AT THE PEAK, TRADE FREQUENTLY AND THEN EXITING AT THE BOTTOM. THE HARSHNESS OF MOST INVESTORS EXPERIENCE OF THE STOCK MARKET VERSUS THEIR HAPPIER EXPERIENCE IN THE REAL ESTATE IS, IN PAST SELF INFLICTED RATHER THAN BEING DUE TO THE UNDERLYING NATURE OF THESE ASSET CLASSES. 

 

27 MAY, 2020

IN ORDER TO TRULY BECOME RICH AN INVESTOR HAS TO LET A SENSIBLY CONSTRUCTED PORTFOLIO STAY UNTOUCHED FOR A LONG PERIOD OF TIME. THE INSTINCTIVE THING FOR A HARD WORKING, INTELLIGENT INVESTOR IS TO TRY AND OPTIMIZE HIS PORTFOLIO PERIODICALLY, USUALLY ONCE A YEAR. IT IS VERY HARD FOR INVESTORS TO LEAVE A PORTFOLIO UNTOUCHED FOR TEN YEARS. A RETAIL INVESTOR WILL BE TEMPTED TO INTERVENE WHENEVER HE SEES STOCKS IN THE PORTFOLIO SAG IN PRICE. A PROFESSIONAL INVESTOR WILL FEEL THAT HE HAS A FIDUCIARY RESPONSIBILITY TO INTERVENE IF PARTS OF THE PORTFOLIO ARE UNDER PERFORMING. BUT AN INVESTOR WILL MAKE WAY MORE MONEY IF HE LEAVES THE PORTFOLIO UNTOUCHED.

 

26 MAY, 2020

TO CONSISTENTLY GENERATE HEALTHY RETURNS FROM EQUITY INVESTING, ONE HAS TO INVEST IN HIGH QUALITY COMPANIES AND THEN SIT TIGHT FOR LONG WITHOUT LOSING SLEEP ABOUT WHERE THE SHARE PRICE IS GOING.

 

25 MAY, 2020

FOR VAST MAJORITY OF EQUITY INVESTORS, INVESTMENT BECOME A COMPLICATED AFFAIR, NOT ONLY BECAUSE THEY ARE SURROUNDED BY SUBSTANDARD ADVISERS, BUT ALSO BECAUSE THEY IMBIBE INCORRECT INVESTMENT THEORIES. THE MOST COMMON ONE IS THAT TO MAKE HIGHER RETURNS FROM STOCK MARKETS, ONE MUST TAKE HIGHER RISKS. SUCH MISCONCEPTIONS IN MIND OF INVESTORS BLUR THE DEMARCATION BETWEEN PUNTING AND INVESTING AS INVESTORS RESPOND TO EPHEMERAL EVENTS WHICH CORRODE THEIR CAPITAL AND ENHANCE THE WEALTH OF INTERMEDIARIES. 

 

24 MAY, 2020

IN INVESTING WE SHOULD ASK OURSELVES WHAT COULD GO WRONG?. RATHER THAN FOCUSING ON THE CURRENT STOCK PRICE AND HOW MUCH WE THINK THE COMPANY IS WORTH, WE SHOULD ASK, WHAT IF THE BUSINESS IS WORTH ONLY HALF OF WHAT WE THINK IS? OR WHAT IF THE COMPANY HAS REPUTATIONAL SCANDAL TOMORROW, CAN THE BUSINESS RECOVER FROM THE SCANDAL?. ONLY AFTER WE HAVE CONVINCED OURSELVES THAT EVEN WITH STOCK PRICE GETTING TRASHED IN THE MARKET, WE CAN STILL AFFORD TO LIVE WITH THE DOWNSIDE RISK, SHOULD WE GO AHEAD WITH THE INVESTMENT.

 

23 MAY, 2020

INVESTORS SHOULD AVOID ALL LISTED COMPANIES IN INDIA WHERE THE PROMOTERS ARE CLOSE TO POLITICAL APPARATUS. PROXIMITY TO POLITICIANS NOT ONLY CREATES THE NEED TO TRANSFER MONEY FROM LISTED ENTITY TO GRATIFY POWERS THAT BE, IT ALSO BREEDS IN THE PROMOTER’S MIND THE SENSE THAT HE IS ABOVE AND BEYOND THE LAW.

 

22 MAY, 2020

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN SUCCESSFUL LONG TERM INVESTOR AND AVERAGE INVESTOR IS THAT THE SUCCESSFUL INVESTOR IS WILLING TO LISTEN TO AND FULLY CONSIDER BEARISH VIEWS ON STOCKS THAT HE OWN AND BULLISH VIEWS ON STOCKS THAT HE HAVE AVOIDED. THE AVERAGE INVESTOR SUFFERS FROM CONFIRMATION BIAS. HE WILL ONLY LISTEN TO PEOPLE OR SOURCES WHO AGREE HIM THAT HIS HOLDINGS ARE GREAT INVESTMENTS AND THE STOCKS THAT HE DOES NOT OWN ARE PERPETUALLY CONDEMNED TO BE NON PERFORMERS.

 

21 MAY, 2020

UNDERSTANDING THE PSYCHOLOGY OF THE PARTICIPANT IS THE KEY TO KNOWING HOW THEY WILL BEHAVE WHEN THEY ARE GRIPPED BY FEAR AND GREED. THE ONE WHO UNDERSTANDS THIS PSYCHOLOGY IS ABLE TO MANIPULATE THE MARKETS BY USING DIFFERENT PARTICIPANTS AT DIFFERENT TIMES.

 

20 MAY, 2020

MANY INVESTORS BELIEVE THAT A BONUS SHARE IS A FREEBIE GIVEN BY THE COMPANY TO ITS SHAREHOLDERS. THEY EVEN BUY MORE ON SUCH NEWS. BUT THEY ARE WRONG. COMPANIES GIVE BONUS SHARE TO CAPITALIZE RESERVES AND BALANCE THEIR FINANCES. BUT INVESTORS DON’T SEE THAT WAY. THEY CONSIDER IT TO BE A WINDFALL. THIS LEADS THEM TO BECOME EXTRAVAGANT. MOST INVESTORS SUFFER FROM THIS MENTAL ACCOUNTING ERROR. THAT IS WHY THE STOCK MARKET RISE ON SUCH ANNOUNCEMENTS.

 

19 MAY, 2020

IMPORTANT FEATURE OF EVERY TURMOIL IS, IT IS ALL RIGHT TO LOSE MONEY, BUT WE CANNOT AFFORD TO LOSE THE LEARNING FROM IT. TO THAT END WE HAVE TO SEE WHETHER WE HAVE ALTERED OUR VIEWS, ASSUMPTIONS AND EXPECTATIONS ABOUT THE MARKETS. ALSO WHAT EFFECT THE DOWNTURN MAY HAVE HAD ON OUR GOALS IS VERY IMPORTANT TO LEARN AND REMEMBER.

 

18 MAY, 2020

IN CAPITAL MARKETS THE BEST WAY TO MINIMIZE FUTURE REGRET WHEN WE HAVE BIG GAINS OR LOSSES IS TO SELL SOME. THERE IS NO RIGHT AMOUNT, BUT FOR EXAMPLE, IF WE SELL 20% AND THE STOCK DOUBLED, AT LEAST WE STILL HAVE 80% OF IT. IF THE STOCK GET CUT IN HALF, AT LEAST WE SOLD SOME OF IT. PEOPLE TEND TO THINK IN ALL OR NOTHING TERMS, BUT IT DOESN’T HAVE TO BE THAT WAY. THINKING IN ABSOLUTES IS ALMOST GUARANTEED TO END WITH REGRET. MINIMIZE REGRET AND WE WILL MAXIMIZE THE CHANCES OF BEING SUCCESSFUL INVESTOR OVER THE LONG TERM.

 

17 MAY, 2020

SMART INVESTORS START INVESTING AT YOUNG AGE, INVEST REGULARLY AND KEEP THE LONG TERM VIEW WHILE INVESTING. KEEPING TIME ON THEIR SIDE IS A VERY IMPORTANT CHARACTERISTIC OF SMART INVESTOR. SMART INVESTOR HAVE AN INVESTMENT PHILOSOPHY, THEY DO GOAL BASED INVESTING.

 

16 MAY, 2020

INVESTING IS A GREAT PROFESSION BUT A VERY EXPENSIVE HOBBY. IT IS ALSO VERY COMPLICATED ON ONE LEVEL AND VERY SIMPLE ON ANOTHER. WE HAVE TO KNOW HOW MUCH TIME, WILLINGNESS AND EFFORTS WE WISH TO PUT INTO INVESTING PROCESS. FINANCIAL PLANNING IS NOT JUST ABOUT INVESTING. IT IS ALSO ABOUT GOAL SETTING, ACCOUNTING AND MONITORING THE INVESTMENT. IF WE ARE NOT WILLING TO INVEST OUR TIME IN LEARNING ABOUT INVESTING, THEN IT IS BETTER THAT WE DON’T INVEST AND JUST SAFEGUARD OUR SAVINGS. BECAUSE INVESTING WITHOUT LEARNING CAN DRAIN OUR HARD EARNED MONEY AND OUR SAVINGS.

 

15 MAY, 2020

IF WE WANT TO REAP FINANCIAL BENEFITS, WE HAVE TO SOW FINANCIALLY FOR IT. 

 

14 MAY, 2020

WE INVESTORS SHOULD REVIEW OUR PORTFOLIO ON QUARTERLY BASIS, WE SHOULD NOT MAKE SELL DECISIONS MORE OFTEN THAN ANNUALLY. WE SHOULD CHECK THE INVESTMENT MADE IN PARTICULAR COMPANY GIVES US HIGHER RETURNS AS COMPARED TO THE RETURNS GIVEN BY OTHER COMPANIES IN SAME SECTOR. AND LAST, WE SHOULD DETERMINE WHETHER OUR INVESTMENTS ARE EDGING US TOWARDS OUR GOALS.

 

13 MAY, 2020

IF SOMEONE HAVE A SIP OF RS 10,000 FOR A PERIOD OF 35 YEARS, THAT AMOUNT GROWING AT 12% P.A WILL GROW TO RS 5,17,99,620. DEFINITELY IT IS NOT BAD RETURN, CONSIDERING THAT TODAY MOST PEOPLE STARTING THEIR LIFE CAN PUT ASIDE RS 10,000 A MONTH. NOW JUST INCREASE THE SIP AMOUNT BY 10% A YEAR. THIS GROWS TO RS 14,81,83,096. WHICH IS ALMOST 3 TIMES THE AMOUNT THAT IT BECOMES WITHOUT THE INCREASE IN PERCENTAGE OF RETURN. LET SEE HOW MUCH DOES RS 10,000 A MONTH BECOME IN 35 YEARS AT 18% P.A? IT BECOMES RS 21,79,92,813. NOW HOW MUCH DOES RS 10,000 A MONTH BECOME IN 35 YEARS AT 18% P.A WITH 10% ANNUAL INCREASE OF SIP AMOUNT? IT BECOMES RS 44,98,42,280. SO THIS SHOWS ONE DOES NOT NEED HUGE CAPITAL ON THE SPOT TO GET HUGE RETURN AND CAN EARN HUGE MONEY WITHOUT BEING ACTIVELY INVOLVED IN CAPITAL MARKETS.

 

12 MAY, 2020

ACCUMULATING MONEY HAS TWO STAGES, SAVINGS AND INVESTING. BOTH ARE NOT EASY. SAVING IS A DELIBERATE DELAY IN CONSUMPTION. PATIENCE IS LIKE MEDITATION, IT HAS TO BE LEARNT BY OURSELVES. WHENEVER WE FEEL WE NEED SOMETHING, WE SHOULD LEARN TO POSTPONE THAT PURCHASE OR INDULGENCE. NOT BECAUSE WE CANNOT AFFORD IT, BUT BECAUSE WE NEED TO STRENGTHEN OUR RESOLVE. IT IS NOT AN EASY THING TO DO, BUT IT IS DEFINITELY DO ABLE.

 

11 MAY, 2020

NO ONE CAN FOOL US IF WE DO NOT WANT TO BE FOOLED. IT IS UP TO US TO FALL FOR A BAIT OR NOT. WE ALWAYS BELIEVE THAT IF ANYTHING HAPPENS TO US THEN IT IS NOT BECAUSE OF US BUT THE PROBLEM FROM OUTSIDE. IN FACT, WE ARE THE PROBLEM OF ALL OUR MISFORTUNES. GREED PLAYS A VERY IMPORTANT PART IN OUR FINANCIAL WELL BEING. IF WE ARE GREEDY, THEN WE PROVIDE MATERIAL FOR SOMEONE TO EXPLOIT OUR GREED. CONTROL OF GREED IS VERY IMPORTANT IN THE STOCK MARKET. 

 

10 MAY, 2020

MANY PEOPLE ARE INVESTMENT SAVVY AND WOULD LIKE TO MANAGE THEIR OWN MONEY THEMSELVES. MANY WOULD OUT SOURCE MONEY MANAGEMENT BUT WOULD MONITOR IT ON REGULAR BASIS. AND MANY WOULD HAVE BLINDLY TRUST TO THEIR FINANCIAL PLANNER AND DO NOT EVEN MONITOR IT. WHICH EVER CATEGORY OF INVESTORS WE BELONG TO, WE NEED TO START AND BUILD A RETIREMENT CORPUS. IMMATERIAL AT WHAT AGE WE START, WE NEED TO INVEST FOR OUR MONEY TO GROW, FOR OUR RETIREMENT NEST EGG TO EXPAND. IF ONE IS LUCKY ENOUGH TO START YOUNG, THEN HE SHOULD INVEST AGGRESSIVELY IN A HIGH AMOUNT OF EQUITY, AND START RE-BALANCING WHEN RE REACHES 60. IF ONE IS OLD, HE/SHE SHOULD INVEST MORE CONSERVATIVELY, SIMPLY BECAUSE THERE IS NOT TOO MUCH TIME AVAILABLE FOR CORRECTION.

 

9 MAY, 2020

INVESTING TEACHES US THAT WE HAVE TO TAKE SATISFACTION IN ASSESSING THE PROBABILITIES OF DIFFERENT OUTCOMES GIVEN THE DECISIONS UNDER CONSIDERATION AND IN EXECUTING THE INVESTMENT WE THINK IS BEST. WITH THE CONSTANT STREAM OF DECISIONS AND OUTCOMES UNDER UNCERTAIN CONDITIONS, WE GET USE TO LOSING SOMETIMES. TO SOME DEGREE WE ARE ALL OUTCOME JUNKIES, BUT THE MORE WE WEAN OURSELVES FROM THAT ADDICTION, THE HAPPIER WE WILL BE. NON OF US IS GUARANTEED A FAVOURABLE OUTCOME, AND WE ARE ALL GOING TO EXPERIENCE PLENTY OF UNFAVOURABLE ONES. WE CAN ALWAYS HOWEVER MAKE A GOOD INVESTMENT. AND EVEN WHEN WE MAKE BAD INVESTMENT, WE USUALLY GET A SECOND CHANCE BECAUSE WE CAN LEARN FROM THE EXPERIENCE AND MAKE BETTER INVESTMENT NEXT TIME.

 

8 MAY, 2020

IN STOCK MARKETS, MOST OF THE PROFITS AND LOSSES ARISE OUT OF EMOTIONAL BUYING AND SELLING. 

 

7 MAY, 2020

TO MAKE BETTER INVESTING DECISIONS, WE INVESTORS NEED TO PERFORM RECONNAISSANCE ON THE FUTURE. IF A DECISION IS BET ON PARTICULAR FUTURE BASED ON BELIEFS, THEN BEFORE WE PLACE A INVESTMENT WE SHOULD CONSIDER IN DETAIL WHAT THOSE POSSIBLE FUTURES MIGHT LOOK LIKE. ANY DECISION CAN RESULT IN SET OF POSSIBLE OUTCOMES. THINKING ABOUT WHAT FUTURES ARE CONTAINED IN THAT SET, HELPS US FIGURE OUT WHICH DECISIONS TO MAKE.

 

6 MAY, 2020

KEY LESSON IN INVESTING IS TO LOOK FOR BUSINESSES WHICH HAVE THE FUNDAMENTALS TO BEAT THE EXPECTATIONS BUILT INTO THE PRICES.

 

5 MAY, 2020

ONE OF THE MOST IMPORTANT ASPECTS OF SUCCESSFUL INVESTING IS TO ENSURE THAT CLOSER ATTENTION IS PAID TO THE RISK REWARD RATIO AND NOT JUST TO THE REWARD ALONE.

 

4 MAY, 2020

IN INVESTING WE MAKE BETTER DECISIONS, AND WE INVESTORS FEEL BETTER ABOUT THOSE DECISIONS, ONCE WE GET OUR PAST, PRESENT AND FUTURE SELVES TO HANG OUT TOGETHER. THIS NOT ONLY ALLOW US TO ADJUST HOW OPTIMISTIC WE ARE, IT ALLOWS US TO ADJUST OUR GOALS ACCORDINGLY AND TO ACTIVELY PUT PLANS IN PLACE TO REDUCE THE LIKELIHOOD OF BAD OUTCOMES AND INCREASE THE LIKELIHOOD OF GOOD OUTCOMES. WE ARE LESS LIKELY TO BE SURPRISED BY A BAD OUTCOME AND CAN BETTER PREPARE CONTINGENCY PLANS.

 

3 MAY, 2020

WE INVESTORS CAN MAKE BEST POSSIBLE DECISIONS AND STILL NOT GET THE RESULT WE WANT. IMPROVING DECISION QUALITY IS ABOUT INCREASING OUR CHANCES OF GOOD OUTCOMES, NOT GUARANTEEING THEM. MORE RATIONAL THINKING AND FEWER EMOTIONAL DECISIONS, INCREASES THE PROBABILITY OF BETTER OUTCOMES. IT CAN HAVE GOOD IMPACT ON OUR INVESTMENTS. GOOD RESULTS COMPOUND. GOOD PROCESSES BECOME HABIT, AND MAKE POSSIBLE FUTURE CALIBRATION AND IMPROVEMENT.

 

2 MAY, 2020

THINKING IN INVESTING DEMANDS THE IMPERATIVE OF SKEPTICISM. WITHOUT EMBRACING UNCERTAINTY, WE INVESTORS CANNOT RATIONALLY INVEST JUST ON BASE OF OUR BELIEFS. AND WE NEED TO PARTICULARLY SKEPTICAL OF INFORMATION THAT AGREES WITH US BECAUSE WE KNOW THAT WE ARE BIASED TO JUST ACCEPT AND APPLAUD CONFIRMING EVIDENCE. IF WE DON’T LEAN OVER BACKWARDS TO FIGURE OUT WHERE WE COULD BE WRONG, WE ARE GOING TO MAKE SOME BAD INVESTMENTS.  

 

1 MAY, 2020

IN EXCHANGE OF FOR LOSING THE FEAR OF TAKING BLAME FOR BAD OUTCOME, WE ALSO LOSE THE UNADULTERATED HIGH OF CLAIMING GOOD OUTCOMES WERE 100% BECAUSE OF OUR SKILLS. IN INVESTING, INVESTORS MOSTLY GOES THROUGH THIS BEHAVIOUR. LOSING FEELS ABOUT TWICE AS BAD AS WINNING FEELS GOOD, BEING WRONG FEELS ABOUT TWICE AS BAD AS BEING RIGHT FEELS GOOD. INVESTORS ARE IN BETTER PLACE WHEN THEY DON’T HAVE TO LIVE AT EDGES. EUPHORIA OR MISERY, WITH NO CHOICE IN BETWEEN, IS NOT VERY SELF COMPASSIONATE WAY TO LIVE.

 

30 APRIL, 2020

IN INVESTING, INVESTORS TAKE DECISION BY THEMSELVES TO INVEST, IF INVESTORS GET GOOD RETURNS ON THAT INVESTMENT IN FUTURE THEN THEY WILL TAKE CREDIT THEMSELVES THAT THEY GOT GOOD RETURNS BECAUSE OF THEIR GOOD DECISION. IF THE RETURNS ON THAT INVESTMENT IS NEGATIVE OR BELOW AVERAGE THEN INVESTORS WILL BLAME THEIR LUCK. THIS IS THE BIGGEST MISTAKE INVESTORS MAKE. BY BLAMING OUR LUCK WE MISS THE BIGGEST OPPORTUNITY TO LEARN FROM OUR MISTAKES. OR BY BLAMING OUR LUCK WE FORGET TO SEE OURSELVES THAT WHERE WE MADE MISTAKE IN DECISION MAKING SO THAT WE CAN TRY NOT TO MAKE SUCH MISTAKES AGAIN IN FUTURE. ACCEPTING OUR MISTAKES IS THE BIGGEST STEP FROM WHERE THE PROCESS OF LEARNING STARTS. 

 

29 APRIL, 2020

IN OUR INVESTMENT DECISIONS, WE ARE NOT BETTING AGAINST ANOTHER PERSON. WE ARE BETTING AGAINST ALL THE FUTURE VERSIONS OF OURSELVES THAT WE ARE NOT CHOOSING.

 

28 APRIL, 2020

IN INVESTING, THE DESIRE TO KNOW THE TRUTH REGARDLESS OF WHETHER THE TRUTH ALIGNS WITH THE BELIEFS WE CURRENTLY HOLD FOR OUR INVESTMENTS, IS NOT NATURALLY SUPPORTED BY THE WAY WE PROCESS INFORMATION. WE MIGHT THINK OF OURSELVES AS OPEN MINDED AND CAPABLE OF UPDATING OUR BELIEFS BASED ON NEW INFORMATION. BUT IN REALITY INSTEAD OF ALTERING OUR BELIEFS TO FIT NEW INFORMATION, WE DO THE OPPOSITE, ALTERING OUR INTERPRETATION OF THAT INFORMATION TO FIT OUR BELIEFS.

 

27 APRIL, 2020

WE ARE DISCOURAGE FROM SAYING “I DON’T KNOW” OR “I AM NOT SURE”. WE REGARD THESE EXPRESSIONS AS VAGUE, UNHELPFUL AND EVEN EVASIVE. BUT GETTING COMFORTABLE WITH “I AM NOT SURE” IS VITAL STEP IN TAKING BETTER DECISION REGARDING INVESTING OR ANY OTHER TOPIC. WE HAVE TO MAKE PEACE WITH NOT KNOWING. EMBRACING “I AM NOT SURE” IS DIFFICULT. WE ARE TRAINED IN SCHOOL THAT SAYING “I DON’T KNOW” IS A BAD THING. NOT KNOWING IN SCHOOL IS CONSIDER FAILURE OF LEARNING. WRITE “I DON’T KNOW” AS AN ANSWER ON A TEST AND THAT ANSWER WILL BE MARKED WRONG. ADMITTING THAT WE DON’T KNOW HAS AN UNDESERVEDLY BAD REPUTATION. OF COURSE WE WANT TO ENCOURAGE ACQUIRING KNOWLEDGE, BUT THE FIRST STEP IS UNDERSTANDING WHAT WE DON’T KNOW. “I DON’T KNOW IS NOT A FAILURE BUT NECESSARY STEP TOWARD ENLIGHTENMENT. 

 

26 APRIL, 2020

WHEN INVESTORS GO WRONG IN THEIR PURCHASE OF STOCK THEY BUY MORE AT EVERY FALL. THEY BELIEVE THAT THIS WILL BRING DOWN THE COST OF THEIR PURCHASE. THERE IS NOTHING WRONG IN THAT, PROVIDED THEY ARE CONFIDENT THAT THE STOCK HAS GREAT VALUE. BUT IF THEY DO ONLY TO JUSTIFY PAST ACTIONS, THEN THEY ARE PRONE TO SUNK COST FALLACY.

 

25 APRIL, 2020

UNPREPARED INVESTORS ARE HIGHLY VULNERABLE TO BEING WHIPLASHED BY UNPREDICTABLE PRICE SWINGS, ENTERING THE MARKETS WITH OPTIMISM AND HOPE, BUT THEN QUICKLY ABANDONING THEIR POSITIONS WHEN THE MOOD DARKENS AND PRICES SUDDENLY PLUMMET. THE ABSENCE OF ANALYSIS INEVITABLY LEADS TO WRONG CHOICES. SO, THOUGHTFUL AND THOROUGH ANALYSIS IS OF UTMOST IMPORTANT FOR INVESTING WISELY.

 

24 APRIL, 2020

THERE ARE TWO SOURCES OF RETURN IN THE STOCK MARKET: 1) FUNDAMENTALS REPRESENTED BY EARNINGS AND DIVIDENDS. 2) SPECULATION REPRESENTED BY THE MARKETS VALUATION OF THESE FUNDAMENTALS.

 

23 APRIL, 2020

INVESTING IS NOT A PRODUCT OR PROCEDURE. IT IS VERY PERSONAL PLAN. AN INVESTOR HAS TO DECIDE WHAT HIS GOALS ARE AND HOW HE CAN GO FROM ONE LEVEL OF COMFORT TO ANOTHER. HE WOULD HAVE CERTAIN RESOURCES COMING TO HIM AND CERTAIN COMMITMENTS TO BE FULFILLED. A PERSON IS ABLE TO EARN WHEN HE IS YOUNG. THESE EARNINGS NEED TO BE INVESTED WISELY SO THAT IN OLD AGE, WHEN A PERSON’S CAPACITY TO EARN DIMINISHES, HE CAN DEPEND ON HIS INVESTMENTS. THEREFOR INVESTORS NEED TO HAVE A CLEAR PICTURE OF THEIR FINANCIALS BEFORE MAKING AN INVESTMENT PLAN.

 

22 APRIL, 2020

CONSTRUCTING A ROBUST PORTFOLIO IS INTEGRAL TO INVESTING WISELY. NO MATTER HOW THOROUGH THE ANALYSIS OF COMPANIES AND SECURITIES, EVERY INVESTMENT THESIS WILL SUFFER FROM UNKNOWNS AND UNKNOWABLES, AS WELL AS FACTORS THAT CAN NEITHER BE CONTROLLED NOR ANTICIPATED BY EVEN THE BEST ANALYST. IRREDUCIBLE UNCERTAINTIES REMAIN NO MATTER WHAT, AND NEW UNCERTAINTIES EMERGE AS THE WORLD CHANGES.

 

21 APRIL, 2020

TO INVEST WISELY INVESTORS SHOULD UNDERSTAND THAT GOOD CHOICES DO NOT ALWAYS MEAN GOOD RESULTS. BECAUSE THE STRONGEST EMOTIONS OF THE MOMENT DRIVE PRICE IN THE SHORT RUN, GOOD ANALYSIS DOES NOT GUARANTEE SUCCESS, NOR DOES POOR ANALYSIS GUARANTEE FAILURE IN NEAR TERM. THE CHAOS OF THE MARKET OBFUSCATES THE CONNECTION THAT MAY EXIST BETWEEN THOUGHTFUL ANALYSIS AND INVESTMENT PERFORMANCE, MAKING SOME MISTAKENLY CONCLUDE THAT ANALYSIS IS POINTLESS.

 

20 APRIL, 2020

GROWTH COMPANIES AND STOCKS POSE A DILEMMA FOR CAUTIOUS INVESTORS. THEY OFFER THE CHANCE TO MAKE OUTSIZED PROFITS BUT AT POTENTIALLY SIGNIFICANT HAZARDS TO OTHERWISE WELL CONSTRUCTED CORE PORTFOLIO.

 

19 APRIL, 2020

LONG TERM INVESTORS IN THE COMPANY MUST EVALUATE THE QUALITY OF ITS VALUE PROPOSITIONS AND OPERATING MODEL IN EACH KEY BUSINESS AREA. THEIR FOCUS MUST PARTICULARLY REMAIN ON ANALYSIS OF THE LEADERSHIP TEAM AND THE BUSINESS MODEL OF EACH COMPANY.

 

18 APRIL, 2020

RAPIDLY RISING PRICES MAKE GROWTH COMPANIES HIGHLY VISIBLE AND FODDER FOR ENDLESS SPECULATION IN THE MEDIA, PROVIDING THEM THE MARKETING EXPOSURE THAT OTHER STOCKS DON’T USUALLY GET. THE HYPE AROUND SUCH STOCKS THEN CREATES DEMAND AND ATTRACTS TRADERS, GAMBLERS, SPECULATORS AND THE RETAIL INVESTORS, ALL AFRAID OF MISSING A SPECTACULAR OPPORTUNITY. GREATEST MISTAKE INVESTORS MAKE WHEN SEEKING GROWTH IS PAYING ATTENTION NOT TO ECONOMICS BUT TO FAST RISING STOCK PRICES. 

 

17 APRIL, 2020

CORE PORTFOLIO ECONOMIZE ON THE MOST IMPORTANT RESOURCES THAT INVESTORS HAVE: THEIR ATTENTION AND TIME.

 

16 APRIL, 2020

DEPENDING SOLELY ON PAST RETURN DATA TO ESTIMATE EXPECTATIONS OF FUTURE RETURNS IS PROBLEMATIC ESPECIALLY IN ABSENCE OF A CLEAR UNDERSTANDING OF HOW WELL A PARTICULAR SECURITY IS PRICED IN RELATION TO REASONABLE ESTIMATES OF ECONOMIC WORTH.

 

15 APRIL, 2020

THE GREATER THE INDEPENDENCE BETWEEN THE RETURNS OF TWO STOCKS, OR THE SMALLER CONDITIONAL PROBABILITIES OF THE TWO, THE LOWER IS THE LIKELIHOOD THAT THE RETURNS OF THE TWO STOCKS WILL MOVE TOGETHER IN THE SAME DIRECTION. IF WE HOLD A DIVERSIFIED PORTFOLIO OF, SAY TWO UNRELATED STOCKS, THE PROBABILITY IS SMALL THAT STOCKS WILL GO BUST AT THE SAME TIME.

 

14 APRIL, 2020

COMPANIES THAT GENERATE SUFFICIENT CASH BUT DO NOT ISSUE DIVIDENDS OR REPURCHASE SHARES, THEN TWO THINGS ARE POSSIBLE: 1) EITHER THEY ARE HOLDING ON TO CASH AND GENERATING POOR OR RISKY RETURNS ON IT OR 2) THEY WILL DO SOMETHING QUESTIONABLE WITH IT. IF THEY ARE HOARDING TOO MUCH CASH, THEN IT IS IMPORTANT FOR INVESTORS TO UNDERSTAND WHY COMPANIES MAY BE DOING SO.

 

13 APRIL, 2020

THREE THINGS THAT HELPS TO JUDGE MANAGEMENT OF ANY COMPANY: 1) FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE IN THE RECENT PAST, 2) THE QUALITY OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS THROUGH WHICH THEY PRESENT THEIR ACCOMPLISHMENTS AND 3) THEIR BEHAVIOUR OR RELATION WITH SHAREHOLDERS.

 

12 APRIL, 2020

UNDERSTANDING A COMPANY’S BUSINESS MODEL ALLOWS INVESTORS TO SETUP THEIR INVESTMENT THESIS FOR DISCONFIRMATION, AND THEREFORE IMPROVES THE QUALITY OF THEIR INVESTMENT CHOICES. 

 

11 APRIL, 2020

GOOD INVESTMENT PROSPECTS ARE NOT JUST ABOUT PROFIT AND LOSS IN THE SHORT RUN, STRONG INVESTMENT PERFORMANCE COMES FROM BUSINESSES THAT HOME IN ON THE FUNDAMENTAL PROBLEMS THEY MUST SOLVE FOR PAYING CUSTOMERS AND THEN ASSEMBLE, ALIGN, AND CONCENTRATE RESOURCES TO ADDRESS THOSE PROBLEMS IN A SYSTEMATIC WAY. DURABLE AND MEANINGFUL REWARDS FOR INVESTORS COMES FROM SELECTIVELY INVESTING IN COMPANIES THAT SOLVE SIGNIFICANT PROBLEMS AT A SUFFICIENTLY LARGE SCALE TO MAKE THE EFFORTS ECONOMICALLY MEANINGFUL. 

 

10 APRIL, 2020

COMPANIES CAN INCREASE ROE BY TAKING ON A GREAT DEAL OF DEBT. BUT AT SOME POINT, DEBT CAN CREATE SUBSTANTIAL OBLIGATIONS THAT MAY ENDANGER THE FINANCIAL HEALTH OF THE COMPANY. INVESTORS SHOULD NOT TAKE ROE AT FACE VALUE BUT EXAMINE CLOSELY HOW IT IS ACCOMPLISHED AND WHAT IT MIGHT IMPLY ABOUT PROFITABILITY, OPERATING EFFICIENCY, AND ESPECIALLY DEBT BURDEN. 

 

9 APRIL, 2020

PROTECTION FOR INVESTORS COMES NOT FROM OVERLY BROAD DIVERSIFICATION BUT FROM GOOD VALUATION IN RELATION TO PREVAILING PRICES. WELL CONSTRUCTED PORTFOLIOS NEED NOT TO BE LARGER THAN ONLY HANDFUL OF WELL SELECTED COMPANIES WITH ROBUST PROSPECTS. VALUATION REMAINS BY FAR THE SINGLE MOST IMPORTANT CRITERION IN COMPANY SELECTION AND PORTFOLIO CONSTRUCTION.

 

8 APRIL, 2020

TREES CAN GROW TO CERTAIN LIMIT. AFTER CUTTING THEM THEY AGAIN GROW TO PREVIOUS LIMIT. SAME GOES IN STOCK MARKET. WITHOUT FALL NO STOCK MARKET CAN GROW CONSTANTLY. INVESTORS MUST BE PREPARE FOR FALL OR CORRECTIONS IN MARKET BECAUSE WITHOUT FALL OR CORRECTIONS, MARKET CANNOT RISE.

 

7 APRIL, 2020

WHILE INVESTING IN A COMPANY, THE HIDDEN PROBLEMS CAN BE THE MOST DANGEROUS, THE ONES THAT ARE NOT IMMEDIATELY OBVIOUS BUT WHICH COULD QUICKLY SURFACE AND DESTROY OUR INVESTMENT. THERE ARE MANY HIDDEN PROBLEMS IN EVERY COMPANY, BUT INVESTORS SHOULD TRY TO AT LEAST WATCH OUT FOR THE MOST NOTABLES ONES IN THAT HIDDEN PROBLEMS.

 

6 APRIL, 2020

SUCCESS IN INVESTING REQUIRES THAT WE CULTIVATE A CAPACITY FOR SELF AWARENESS AND SELF REFLECTION, THINKING ABOUT THINKING AND FOR UNDERSTANDING HOW WE KNOW AND WHAT WE KNOW SO THAT WE MAY BE ABLE TO DELIBERATELY REGULATE OUR OWN LEARNING PROCESS.

 

5 APRIL, 2020

A VARIETY OF MOTIVATIONS AND PERCEPTIONS INFLUENCE DEMAND FOR A PARTICULAR STOCK. IT IS NOT JUST ECONOMIC FUNDAMENTALS THAT INFLUENCES PRICES, PRICES REMAIN VULNERABLE TO A VARIETY OF NON ECONOMIC INFLUENCES AND MANIPULATIONS.

 

4 APRIL, 2020

INVESTMENT ANALYSIS IS THE PROCESS OF UNCOVERING THE ODDS BUILT INTO SITUATION, SO THAT WE MAY COMMIT RESOURCES WHERE THEY ARE HEAVILY IN OUR FAVOUR.

 

3 APRIL, 2020

BUYERS AND SELLERS IN MARKETS ARE NOT INDEPENDENT OF EACH OTHER, THEY ARE EXPOSED TO A LOT OF THE SAME INFORMATION AND INFLUENCES, OFTEN FROM SAME SOURCES (MEDIA). MARKET PARTICIPANTS OFTEN SUFFER FROM COMMON SOURCE BIAS AND DURING TIMES OF CRISIS PARTICIPANTS LOSE THEIR INDEPENDENCE OF THOUGHT.

 

2 APRIL, 2020

NEW INVESTORS OFTEN START WITH WILD, FRENZIED BUYING AND SELLING. THEY ARE ATTRACTED TO POPULAR NAMES, IMPRESSED BY THE COMMENTATORS, AND FASCINATED BY THE THOUGHT OF STRIKING IT RICH. THEY ALTERNATE CHAOTICALLY BETWEEN HOPE AND FEAR, FIXATE ON ONE STOCK AFTER ANOTHER IN QUICK SUCCESSION, AND TRADE TOO MUCH. THEIR DISTRACTED, DISJOINTED PLAYS INEVITABLE LEAD TO STEEP LOSSES, SOONER OR LATER AND THEN THEY REALIZE THAT INVESTING IS MORE COMPLEX THAN IT MAY AT FIRST SEEM. DRAINED RESOURCES AND IN FINANCIAL PAIN, THEY BEGIN TO DEVELOP AN APPRECIATION OF THE COMPLEXITY OF THE ENDEAVOR. THEY GET CAUTIOUS AND BEGIN TO LEARN THE IMPORTANCE OF REASONED RESTRAINT WHEN INVESTING.

 

1 APRIL, 2020

WISE INVESTING REQUIRES A TWO STEP MENTAL PROCESS: 1) GENERATING INVESTMENT IDEAS AND 2) SORTING GOOD IDEAS FROM BAD ONES. GOOD IDEAS ARE THE MEDIUM THROUGH WHICH THE PRINCIPLE OF NEGATION OPERATES, SO IDEA GENERATION IS THE HEART OF THE INVESTING PROCESS.

 

31 MARCH, 2020

INSTEAD OF TRYING TO VERIFY THAT INVESTMENT IS GOOD OR BAD, AS WE MAY BE INCLINED TO BELIEVE FROM HEARSAY, HALF TRUTHS, AND INITIAL IMPRESSIONS, WE MUST USE SOUND, DATA DRIVEN JUDGEMENTS TO SORT THROUGH TO THE CORE TRUTHS ABOUT AN INVESTMENT. WE MUST BE QUANTITATIVE AND AWARE OF THE HAZARDS OF INVESTING AND INTERPRETATION OF FACTS. DISCONFIRMATION IS THE KEY, METHOD IS KING, AND A CONSERVATIVE ORIENTATION IS INDISPENSABLE FOR INVESTING WISELY.

 

30 MARCH, 2020

INVESTING IS A HEAD GAME, THAT REQUIRES CONSIDERABLE JUDGMENTS ABOUT WHERE TO INVEST AND WHEN TO STAY PUT AND HOW TO FOLD. IT ALSO REQUIRES BEING ABLE TO SEE DECEPTIONS AND SELF DECEPTIONS THAT COULD TRAP INVESTED CAPITAL. SUCCESS IN INVESTING COMES FROM STABILIZING THE MIND SO THAT WE MAY BE ABLE TO GRASP THE ESSENCE OF THINGS AND DIFFERENTIATE TRUE OPPORTUNITY FROM THE MANY ILLUSIONS OUT IN MARKETS.

 

29 MARCH, 2020

KEY TO INVESTING WISELY IS TO FORM PORTFOLIO WITH ONLY HANDFUL OF CORE HOLDINGS, EACH CAREFULLY SELECTED USING A WELL CONSTRUCTED INVESTMENT THESIS THAT HAS SURVIVED SERIOUS ATTEMPTS AT REFUTATION AND DISCONFIRMATION.

 

28 MARCH, 2020

SOMETIMES WE ARE UNNECESSARILY OPTIMISTIC AND OVERCONFIDENT IN OUR ABILITIES TO MAKE CORRECT DECISIONS, WHICH IS WHY WE MAY BE SUBJECT TO EASY MANIPULATION. 

 

27 MARCH, 2020

INVESTORS HAVE STRONG DESIRE TO AVOID REGRET, WHICH LEADS THEM TO SELL THEIR WINNERS TO SOON BUT HOLD ON TO LOSERS TOO LONG. IT IS IMPOSSIBLE TO BUILD GOOD LONG TERM PORTFOLIO BY SELLING WINNERS AND HOLDING ON TO LOSERS. 

 

26 MARCH, 2020

IT IS NOT SIMPLY THAT WE AS INDIVIDUALS MAKE MISTAKES. MORE IMPORTANT IS THE FACT THAT INDIVIDUAL ERRORS OFTEN BECOME HIGHLY CORRELATED TO PRODUCE LARGE SCALE MOVES AND COLLECTIVE ERRORS. SHARED FEELINGS AND IMPASSIONED STORIES ARE THE KEY INGREDIENTS THAT TRANSFORM A COLLECTION OF INDIVIDUALS INTO AN ACTIVE MASS THAT ERUPTS WITH NOTABLE IMPACT. INVESTORS TOO ARE PRONE TO BOUTS OF EUPHORIA OR PANIC WHEN EMOTIONS OF GREED OR FEAR BUILT ON POWERFUL UNDERLYING SCRIPTS, OVERWHELM SOUND OF ANALYSIS.

 

25 MARCH, 2020

SUCCESSFUL INVESTING REQUIRES ADEQUATE DEFENSES AGAINST SOME VERY POWERFUL INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL OBSTACLES TO MAKING GOOD CHOICES. THESE DEFENSES DO NOT COME NATURALLY TO US. THEY MUST BE CAREFULLY BUILT, CONCEPT BY CONCEPT, TO HELP OVERCOME DEEP FLAWS IN HOW WE THINK AND TO HELP WARD OFF EXTERNAL INFLUENCES THAT INDUCE US TO DO FOOLISH THINGS WITH OUR MONEY. WITHOUT SUCH DEFENSES INVESTORS REMAIN EXTREMELY VULNERABLE.

 

24 MARCH, 2020

INVESTORS WORK DILIGENTLY TO TRY TO REDUCE RELIANCE ON LUCK AND FOCUS INSTEAD ON SKILLS NECESSARY FOR UNDERSTANDING THE IMPORTANT DRIVERS OF ECONOMIC PERFORMANCE AND WORTH. IT IS THIS AFFINITY FOR HIGHLY FAVOURABLE ODDS THAT MAKES INVESTORS FUNDAMENTALLY DIFFERENT FROM GAMBLERS. INVESTORS FOCUS ON DIFFERENT PROBLEMS. GAMBLERS WANT TO TAKE CHANCES, INVESTORS WANT TO MAKE GOOD CHOICES. GAMBLERS WANT TO TRADE, INVESTORS WANTS TO INVEST.

 

23 MARCH, 2020

ANALYTICAL ABILITY AND TECHNIQUE ARE NECESSARY FOR INVESTING WELL. KNOWING HOW TO COMPUTE WEIGHTED PROBABILITIES OR ASSESS MATHEMATICAL EXPECTATIONS IS AN IMPORTANT SKILL FOR INVESTING WISELY. BUT WHAT IS EVEN MORE IMPORTANT IS THE ABILITY TO REGULATE EMOTIONS, THINK INDEPENDENTLY, AND SEE CLEARLY WHEN MAKING INVESTMENT CHOICES. BUT CONTROLLING EMOTIONS AND SEEING CLEARLY IS NOT EASY, AS THE FINANCIAL MARKETS ARE INCREDIBLY NOISY AND RIPE WITH HALF BACKED OPINIONS, INNUENDOS AND CONS. THEY OVERWHELM THE SENSES, CONFUSE AND DISORIENT, AND INVITE ALL VARIETIES OF DECEPTION AND SELF DECEPTIONS.

 

22 MARCH, 2020

SOME MISTAKES IN INVESTING ARE SELF INFLICTED, WHEREAS OTHERS ARE INDUCED FROM OUTSIDE. THEY ARISE FROM THE SECRET WORKINGS OF FORMIDABLE ENEMIES BOTH INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL. INTERNAL ENEMIES ARE OUR OWN EMOTIONS, NEEDS, DESIRES, THOSE DEEP ROOTED PRIMAL URGES THAT TUG AT THE PSYCHE AND CLOUD THE MIND. FEAR, HOPE AND GREED ARE AS MUCH PART OF THE HUMAN PSYCHE AS ANYTHING ELSE, ALWAYS PRESENT, ALWAYS LURKING BENEATH THE SURFACE. WHEN ACTIVATED, THEY ENCOURAGE BEHAVIOUR THAT IS FOOLISH AS IT IS HARMFUL TO OUR OWN ECONOMIC INTERESTS.

 

21 MARCH, 2020

WHEN PEOPLE THINK ABOUT INVESTING, THEY DO NOT THINK CAREFULLY ABOUT DEFENSIVELY DEPLOYING THEIR PRECIOUS CAPITAL IN SOUND BUSINESSES, INSTEAD THEY APPEAR TO BE PREOCCUPIED MOSTLY WITH BUYING TICKER SYMBOLS ON SCREEN, HOPING TO SELL OUT AS SOON AS PRICE GOES UP LITTLE. BUYING AND SELLING CONSIDERING INVESTING AS TICKER SYMBOL MAY CAUSE LOSS OF CAPITAL.

 

20 MARCH, 2020

INVESTING SHOULD NOT BE CAST AS A MATHEMATICAL PROBLEM OF GAMBLE BUT SHOULD BE CAST AS A VERY HUMAN PROBLEM OF CHOICE. THERE IS CHOICE IN EVERY GAMBLE AND GAMBLE IN EVERY CHOICE. CHANCE DOES INFLUENCE INVESTMENT PERFORMANCE, EMOTIONAL AND BROADLY ANALYTICAL SKILLS EXERT A MUCH GREATER INFLUENCE ON THE EXPERIENCES THAT INVESTORS HAVE WHEN INVESTING. SO IF ONE CAST INVESTMENT AS PROBLEM OF CHOICE THEN IT WILL HELP THEM TO SETUP PROPER DISCIPLINE TO IMPROVE THE QUALITY OF CHOICE.

 

19 MARCH, 2020

NO ONE CAN GUESS THE BOTTOM OF MARKETS. ONE WHO WAITS FOR BOTTOM WILL NEVER HAVE COURAGE TO BUY STOCKS AND WILL MISS AN OPPORTUNITY TO BUY STOCKS IN GUESSING THE BOTTOM. SO ONE SHOULD INVEST IN VERY FALL TO ENJOY ITS RETURNS ON EVERY RISE.

 

18 MARCH, 2020

EVERYONE AND EVERY INVESTING BOOK SAYS WE SHOULD BUY LOW AND SELL HIGH OR CURRENT MARKET SITUATION OR CRISIS ARE THE BEST TIME TO BUY. BUT THE TRUTH IS NO ONE CAN PREDICT CRISIS IN MARKETS. SINCE NO ONE CAN PREDICT CRISIS IN MARKETS SO ONE HAS MONEY TO BUY STOCKS AT TIME OF CRISIS BECAUSE ALMOST ALL INVESTORS ARE FULLY INVESTED IN MARKETS DURING THE PEAK TIME OF MARKET AND DO NOT SELL THEIR STOCKS. SO INVESTORS SHOULD PLAN PROPERLY HOW MUCH CAPITAL TO ALLOCATE IN STOCKS AT ITS PEAK OR SHOULD HAVE PROPER FINANCIAL PLANNING SO THAT THEY HAVE CAPITAL IN HAND DURING CRISIS WHICH WOULD HELP THEM TO INVEST AND GET GOOD RETURNS ON IT. 

 

17 MARCH, 2020

THERE ARE AROUND 4,500-5,000 LISTED COMPANIES IN INDIA. AND OUT OF THESE SOME OF THEM WILL ALWAYS PROVIDE INVESTMENT OPPORTUNITIES FOR VARIOUS REASONS INCLUDING TOUGH TO UNDERSTAND BUSINESS MODELS, CYCLICAL REASONS, POOR COMMUNICATION WITH SHARE HOLDERS, THE SHORT TERM MINDSET OF MARKET AND MANY OTHER REASONS. INVESTORS JUST NEED TO FIND THE PERFECT REASON TO INVEST IN ANY OF THESE COMPANIES.

 

16 MARCH, 2020

FALLING PRICES SHOULD BE WELCOME AS THEY FORM THE BASE FOR THE NEXT BULL RUN BY SHAKING WEAK HANDS AND PROVIDING THE OPPORTUNITY FOR LONG TERM INVESTORS TO ENTER AT ATTRACTIVE PRICES. IT MAY LEAD TO NOTIONAL LOSSES BUT PROVIDES THE OPPORTUNITY FOR HIGHER FUTURE PROFITS ON EXISTING AND NEW INVESTMENTS MADE DURING FALLING PRICES. INVESTORS ARE WRONG WHO BOOK LOSSES WHEN PRICE FALLS. BUT THIS SHOULD BE ALSO WELCOME AS THESE BOOKED LOSSES ARE LESSONS FROM THE MARKET THAT HELPS US TO EVOLVE INTO A BETTER INVESTOR. 

 

15 MARCH, 2020

KEEP INVESTING IN RED TO ENJOY THE GREEN.

 

14 MARCH, 2020

INVESTORS SHOULD NOT HAVE AN ATTACHMENT TO THE COMPANY IN WHICH THEY ARE INTERESTED TO INVEST OR TO STOCK PRICES OF THE COMPANY IN WHICH THEY ARE INVESTED. ATTACHMENT IS THE BIGGEST ENEMY OF HUMANS. ATTACHMENT MAKES PEOPLE BLIND AND DUE TO ATTACHMENT PEOPLE CANNOT SEE THE TRUTH IN IT. PEOPLE ACCEPTS EVERYTHING IN ATTACHMENT. DUE TO ATTACHMENT PEOPLE EVEN LIKES WRONG THING IN THE COMPANY. THIS IS THE MOST NEGATIVE THING IN INVESTING AND CAUSES CAPITAL LOSS.

 

13 MARCH, 2020

STOCK MARKETS ARE A GAME OF MIND AS IT IS BUSINESS ANALYSIS AND VALUATIONS. ALMOST 40-50 % OF OUR TIME IN MARKET GOES IN STARING AT THE PRICES OF STOCKS WHICH ARE AT LEAST 20-30% BELOW THEIR PAST PEAK. SUCH ACTIVITIES TESTS OUR CONVICTION AND FORCES US AWAY FROM LONG TERM BUY AND HOLD INVESTING. TO NAVIGATE THROUGH SUCH TIMES, WE SHOULD BE RATIONAL, AND TO BE RATIONAL WE SHOULD HAVE FORESIGHT AND WISDOM.

 

12 MARCH, 2020

MARKET IS ALWAYS A KING. MARKET KNOWS EVERYTHING. MARKET IS SMARTER THAN EVERYONE. SO ONE SHOULD NOT DECIDE OR TRY TO BEAT MARKET. BECAUSE WHEN MARKET DECIDES TO BEAT EVERYONE, THEN NO INVESTORS OR TRADERS ARE SPARED.

 

11 MARCH, 2020

DALAL STREET OR MARKET NEVER CHANGES, THE TRADER CHANGE, THE INVESTOR CHANGE, THE BROKER CHANGE, THE STOCKS CHANGE, BUT DALAL STREET OR MARKET NEVER CHANGES BECAUSE HUMAN NATURE NEVER CHANGES.

 

10 MARCH, 2020

COMPANY WHICH HAS ABILITY TO DIVERSIFY IN ITS EXISTING BUSINESS SEGMENT AND ACCEPTS THE EARLY CHANGE IN BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT IS BEST COMPANY FOR INVESTMENT. PAST EXAMPLE OF COMPANIES WHICH DIVERSIFIED IN THEIR EXISTING BUSINESS SEGMENT ARE TITAN ENTERED RETAIL JEWELLERY BUSINESS, SAFARI INDUSTRIES ENTERED IN OFFICE BAGS, LAPTOP BAGS AND COLLEGE BAG SEGMENT. THERE ARE MANY SUCH EXAMPLES.

 

9 MARCH, 2020

THREE FACTORS TO WATCH WHILE INVESTING: 1) FREE NET CASH OR FIXED INCOME GENERATING ASSET. 2) MANAGEMENT QUALITY. AND 3) BUSINESS QUALITY. 

 

8 MARCH, 2020

SOMETIMES MANAGEMENT PURPOSEFULLY MISLEAD INVESTORS BY PROVIDING OVERSTRETCHED AND UNACHIEVABLE GUIDANCE. THE INTENT OF SUCH MISLEAD IS TO BOOST SHARES PRICES. HIGH PRICES ENABLE PROMOTERS TO PLEDGE SHARES AND RAISE DEBT, RAISE EQUITY FROM INSTITUTIONAL INVESTORS, SELL THEIR STAKES AT HIGHER PRICES IN THE SECONDARY MARKETS AND MANY OTHER SUCH WRONG THINGS. WE SHOULD NOT FULLY DEPEND ON MANAGEMENT SPEECH OR THEIR VIEWS FOR FUTURE OF COMPANY WHILE INVESTING. WE SHOULD ALSO LOOK INTO RESULTS. BECAUSE AT THE END GROWTH MATTERS. IF THERE ARE NO SIGNS OF INCREASE IN REVENUES AND INCREASE IN PROFITS OF COMPANY THEN THE WHOLE SPEECH OR VIEWS OF MANAGEMENT IS USELESS.

 

7 MARCH, 2020

VOLATILITY ACTUALLY IS THE OPPOSITE OF RISK. VOLATILITY IS AN OPPORTUNITY. BUT WE NEED TO THINK THROUGH AND FIGHT SOME BASIC HUMAN WEAKNESSES.

 

6 MARCH, 2020

TWO SIMPLE INVESTMENT STRATEGIES: 1) BUY LARGE CAPITALIZATION QUALITY COMPANIES AND HOLD THEM FOR LONG TERM PERIOD. 2) BUY SMALL CAPITALIZATION QUALITY COMPANIES AVAILABLE AT VALUE PRICES AT THE START OF THE RECOVERY AND SELL THEM ONCE ECONOMIC EXPANSION MATURES.

 

5 MARCH, 2020

MARKET HUMBLE EVERYONE, BUT WE STILL MAKE MISTAKES AND LOSE MONEY. HOWEVER WHEN THAT HAPPENS WE SHOULD NEVER FORGET TO CONNECT EVERYTHING, WE SHOULD REALIZE WHERE EXACTLY WE WENT WRONG AND SHOULD WRITE IT DOWN AND HANG IT ON THE WALL SO THAT WE WILL NEVER FORGET THEM. IF WE FORGET THEM, THEN MARKET WILL NOT FAIL IN TEACHING IT TO US AGAIN. 

 

4 MARCH, 2020

TAKING INVESTMENT DECISIONS REQUIRES DEEP RESEARCH AND INSIGHT INTO EVERY INVESTMENT THAT WE MAKE. IT ALSO REQUIRES RAISING THE KNOWLEDGE AND NOT JUST ACCEPTING ANY OTHER THING THAT COMES IN WAY. KNOWLEDGE BASED INVESTMENT MAKES US CONVINCED ABOUT AN INVESTMENT AND THAT CONVICTION WILL PROVIDE US ENOUGH CONFIDENCE TO BET A SIGNIFICANT PORTION OF OUR PORTFOLIO IN PARTICULAR INVESTMENT.

 

3 MARCH, 2020

WE SHOULD NOT HAVE ATTACHMENT OR WE SHOULD LOWER OUR ATTACHMENT TO MONEY AND FAME. BY REDUCING THE ATTACHMENT TO MONEY AND FAME, WE LESSEN THE ATTACHMENT TO SHARE PRICES AND OUTCOMES, THUS HELPING US TO INCREASE THE FOCUS ON THE FUNDAMENTALS OF THE COMPANY.

 

2 MARCH, 2020

SLOW AND STEADY RETURNS ON CAPITAL IS MORE CONCERNED WITH AVOIDING LARGE LOSSES THAN WITH CHASING THE NEXT GREAT INVESTMENT. BEING SLOW AND STEADY MEANS THAT WE ARE WILLING TO EXCHANGE THE OPPORTUNITY OF MAKING A KILLING FOR THE ASSURANCE OF NEVER GETTING KILLED. SLOW AND STEADY CAPITAL MEANS WE CAN HAVE A LIFE. IF WE ACCEPT THE FACT THAT SLOW AND STEADY WINS THE RACE AND WE CAN FIND A WAY TO INVEST THAT WAY, THEN WE CAN TURNOFF ALL THE NOISE OF THE MARKETS.

 

1 MARCH, 2020

THINKING ABOUT MAKING A SUDDEN CHANGE TO OUR PORTFOLIO, WE SHOULD ASK OURSELVES THAT IS OUR DECISION BASED ON HOW WE FEEL OR WHAT WE KNOW. IS IT BASED ON OUR FEELINGS ABOUT WHAT IS GOING IN THE MARKET OR IS IT BASED ON INVESTMENT PLAN WE PUT IN PLACE WHEN WE WERE THINKING CLEARLY? FOR CURRENT MARKET SITUATION THERE IS AN OLD SAYING: DON’T JUST DO SOMETHING, STAND THERE. WHEN DEALING WITH INVESTMENTS THERE IS OFTEN THIS FEELING THAT WE SHOULD DO SOMETHING. A LACK OF ACTION IMPLIES WE ARE MISSING AN OPPORTUNITY OR MAKING A MISTAKE. CULTIVATING A GARDEN TAKES LOTS OF HARD WORK, BUT AT SOME POINT WE HAVE TO LET THE PLANTS GROW. IF WE HAVE A PLAN, LET IT WORK.

 

29 FEBRUARY, 2020

BUYING OR SELLING A STOCK OR PREDICTING MARKET MOVEMENTS ON GUT FEELINGS IS VERY BAD THING. PEOPLE USE THEIR GUT AS AN EXCUSE TO BUY OR SELL THEIR STOCKS AND THAT MOST TURNS OUT TO BE WRONG BECAUSE TAKING STOCK OR FINANCIAL DECISIONS WITH EMOTIONS NEVER WORKS. WE SHOULD WORK HARDER TO MAKE ROOM FOR KNOWLEDGE IN OUR FINANCIAL DECISION TO GET GOOD STEADY RETURNS.

 

28 FEBRUARY, 2020

SLOW AND STEADY RETURNS ON CAPITAL IS BORING IN SHORT TERM. BUT ITS LONG TERM IS EXCITING. 

 

27 FEBRUARY, 2020

WHILE WE ARE THINKING WE SHOULD MAKE SURE WE CONSIDER THE BIGGER PICTURE OF THE CONTEXT OF OUR BEHAVIOUR. A SINGLE ACTION MAY HAVE BROADER FINANCIAL CONSEQUENCES THAT AREN’T IMMEDIATELY OBVIOUS. WE ARE NOT TOTALLY IN CONTROL EVEN WHEN WE ARE MAKING WISE DECISIONS. SO WE SHOULD ALWAYS FOCUS ON OUR BEHAVIOUR WHILE TAKING ANY FINANCIAL DECISIONS. WE ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR OUR OWN BEHAVIOUR, BUT WE CAN’T CONTROL THE RESULT.

 

26 FEBRUARY, 2020

WE ALL HAVE ALWAYS OWNED A STOCK, SO IT FEELS RIGHT TO CONTINUE OWNING IT, EVEN THOUGH WE CAN’T REMEMBER WHY WE BOUGHT THE STOCK. WE KNOW THAT IF WE SELL THE STOCK IT MIGHT GO UP, AND THEN WE WILL FEEL DUMB. NO ONE WANTS TO RISK FEELING DUMB. TROUBLE IS, DOING NOTHING CAN BE PRETTY DUMB ITSELF. WE NEED TO TAKE A CLOSE LOOK AT OUR PORTFOLIO EVERY ONCE IN A WHILE, AND MAKE SURE THAT STILL IT MATCHES TO REASON WHY WE BOUGHT THE STOCK IN THE FIRST PLACE.

 

25 FEBRUARY, 2020

IF WE BASE OUR PLAN ON EARNING THE LONG TERM AVERAGE RETURN ON STOCK MARKET AND NEVER MAKE COURSE CORRECTIONS, THEN WE ARE AT GREAT RISK OF ENDING UP SOMEPLACE OTHER THAN WHERE WE PLANNED. AND IF WE SET A COURSE AND THEN MAKE SLIGHT COURSE CORRECTIONS WHEN WE FIND WE HAVE VEERED OFF, WE CAN REACH TO OUR GOAL OF FINANCIAL FUTURE.

 

24 FEBRUARY, 2020

PLANNING FOR OUR FINANCIAL FUTURE IS PERSONAL. WE SHOULD PLAN OUR FINANCIAL FUTURE ACCORDING TO OUR SITUATION. A GOOD PLAN WILL BE UNIQUE TO OUR SITUATION, AND WHAT IS RIGHT FOR OUR SITUATION MAY BE DISASTER FOR OUR NEIGHBOR. SO WE SHOULD PLAN OUR FINANCIAL FUTURE ACCORDING TO OUR SITUATION AND NOT BY BLINDLY FOLLOWING EXPERTS ON ANY MEDIA. BECAUSE THEY DON’T KNOW OUR SITUATION.

 

23 FEBRUARY, 2020

WE SPEND A LOT OF TIME AND ENERGY TRYING TO FIND THE BEST STOCK OR OTHER INVESTMENTS. MAGAZINES DEVOTE COVERS TO THIS TOPIC AND AUTHORS WRITE BOOK ON IT. THE ENTIRE INDUSTRY IS BUILT AROUND CHASING BEST STOCK OR INVESTMENT. BUT IN REALITY THERE IS NO SUCH THING AS THE BEST STOCK OR INVESTMENT. NO SINGLE INVESTMENT IS RIGHT FOR EVERYONE. THE BEST INVESTMENTS AND RETURNS ON THEM DEPENDS ON THE HUMAN BEHAVIOUR AND THEIR GOALS.

 

22 FEBRUARY, 2020

ALL INVESTMENT MISTAKES ARE REALLY INVESTOR MISTAKE. INVESTMENTS DON’T MAKE MISTAKE. INVESTORS DO. WHEN WE INVEST, WE ARE MAKING A CHOICE. AND THIS WE ALWAYS FORGET. WE MAKE MISTAKE IN RECOGNIZING GOOD COMPANY TO INVEST. AND WITHOUT RECOGNIZING GOOD COMPANY OR HAVING PROPER INFORMATION ABOUT THE COMPANY WE STILL BUY OR SELL THE STOCK OF THAT PARTICULAR COMPANY. AND BUYING OR SELLING THE STOCK WITHOUT HAVING PROPER INFORMATION OF THE COMPANY IS LIKE GAMBLING. 

 

21 FEBRUARY, 2020

WE SHOULD THINK OF EACH INVESTMENT THAT WE OWN AS A THREAD IN A CLOTH. EACH COMPONENT OF A PORTFOLIO SHOULD BE THERE FOR A REASON AND NOT BECAUSE WE THINK IT IS A CANDIDATE FOR WORLD’S BEST INVESTMENT.

 

20 FEBRUARY, 2020

TRYING TO PICK A STOCK’S FUTURE GROWTH PATH ON PAST GROWTH IS LIKE TRYING TO GUESS IF A COIN WILL COME UP HEADS OR TAILS WHEN WE KNOW THAT THE LAST TOSS WAS A HEAD. THE PREVIOUS TOSS TELLS US NOTHING. SAME WAY THE PAST GROWTH OF ANY COMPANY CANNOT PREDICT THE FUTURE GROWTH PATH.

 

19 FEBRUARY, 2020

BUILDING A STRATEGY THAT LEAN TOWARD MANAGING FEAR IS FINE. BUILDING A STRATEGY THAT LEAN TOWARD MANAGING GREED IS ALSO FINE. EACH PATH HAS ITS BENEFITS AND ITS PENALTIES. WE SHOULD AIM FOR A BALANCE THAT REFLECTS OUR OWN EMOTIONAL STRENGTHS AND WEAKNESSES, SO THAT WE DO NOT FEEL COMPELLED TO JUMP IN AND OUT OF THE STOCK MARKET. TO GET COMPOUNDING RETURNS WE SHOULD NOT CONSTANTLY SHIFT BETWEEN A MORE AGGRESSIVE AND A MORE CONSERVATIVE STRATEGY OF INVESTMENT.

 

18 FEBRUARY, 2020

WE CANNOT CONTROL THE MARKETS OR THE ECONOMY, BUT WE CAN CONTROL OUR BEHAVIOUR. THE OUTCOME OF OUR DECISIONS MAY VARY. WE CAN MAKE A GOOD DECISION AND HAVE A BAD OUTCOME. BUT SENSIBLE, REALITY BASED CHOICES ARE OUR BEST SHOT AT REACHING OUR GOALS.

 

17 FEBRUARY, 2020

INVESTING IS ABOUT WHERE TO ALLOCATE OUR CAPITAL, LAYING OUT CASH TODAY TO GET MORE CASH LATER, HOW MUCH WE LAY OUT AND HOW MUCH WE GET BACK, WHEN WE GET IT BACK HOW SURE ARE WE AND HOW IT COMPARES TO OTHER ALTERNATIVES.

 

16 FEBRUARY, 2020

IN INVESTING BEST TIME TO GET RICH IS A CRISIS. WE JUST NEED INDEPENDENT THINKING, FINANCIAL PREPARATION, AND MENTAL PREPARATION. IF WE CAN DETACH OURSELVES TEMPERAMENTALLY FROM THE CROWD WE GET VERY RICH. AND WE DO NOT HAVE TO BE BRIGHT, IT DOES NOT TAKE BRAINS, IT TAKE TEMPERAMENT.

 

15 FEBRUARY, 2020

WE SHOULD ALWAYS INVEST IN LOW COST PRODUCER BUSINESS. WE SHOULD INVEST IN BUSINESS WHERE WE FIND COMBINATION OF THREE THINGS: 1) AN EXTREMELY LARGE BUSINESS, 2) MORE OR LESS HOMOGENOUS PRODUCT AND 3) A LARGE GAP IN OPERATING COSTS BETWEEN THE LOW LOW COST OPERATOR AND ALL OF THE OTHER COMPANIES IN THE INDUSTRY.

 

14 FEBRUARY, 2020

BORROWED MONEY HAS NO PLACE IN PRINCIPLES OF INVESTMENT. ANYTHING CAN HAPPEN ANYTIME IN MARKETS. AND NO ADVISOR, ECONOMIST OR TV COMMENTATOR CAN PREDICT AND TELL US WHEN THE CHAOS WILL OCCUR IN MARKETS. MARKET FORECASTERS CAN FILL OUR EAR BUT THEY CAN NEVER FILL OUR WALLET.

 

13 FEBRUARY, 2020

INVESTORS BY THEIR OWN BEHAVIOUR MAKE STOCK OWNERSHIP RISKY. ACTIVE TRADING, ATTEMPTS TO TIME MARKET MOVEMENTS, INADEQUATE DIVERSIFICATION, THE PAYMENT OF HIGH AND UNNECESSARY FEES TO MANAGERS AND ADVISORS, AND THE USE OF BORROWED MONEY CAN DESTROY THE GOOD COMPOUNDING LONG TERMS RETURNS FOR INVESTORS. 

 

12 FEBRUARY, 2020

THE GOOD WORK OR HONESTY OF THE MANAGEMENT OF COMPANY CANNOT BE MEASURED BY MEETING THE MANAGEMENT OR BY HEARING THE SPEECH OF THE MANAGEMENT. WHILE MEETING THE MANAGEMENT OR WHILE HEARING THE SPEECH OF THE MANAGEMENT THEY ONLY TELL US WHAT WE WANT TO HEAR, MANAGEMENT NEVER SAYS NEGATIVE SIDES OF A COMPANY. BUT THE QUARTERLY OR THE ANNUAL RESULTS OF THE COMPANY ARE THE ONLY THINGS WHICH SHOWS THE QUALITY OF THE MANAGEMENT. 

 

11 FEBRUARY, 2020

IN INVESTING IT IS NOT WHETHER WE ARE RIGHT OR WRONG THAT IS IMPORTANT, BUT HOW MUCH MONEY WE MAKE WHEN WE ARE RIGHT AND HOW MUCH MONEY WE LOSE WHEN WE ARE WRONG IS IMPORTANT. 

 

10 FEBRUARY, 2020

THREE THINGS TO LOOK IN COMPANY TO MAKE PERFECT INVESTMENT DECISION ARE: 1) THE PRODUCTS OR SERVICES OF A COMPANY IS NEEDED OR DESIRED, 2) ITS CUSTOMERS THINK THERE IS NO SUBSTITUTE FOR THE PRODUCTS OR THE SERVICES OF THE COMPANY AND 3) COMPANY IS NOT SUBJECT TO PRICE REGULATION. COMPANY SHOULD HAVE THE POWER TO INCREASE THE PRICES OF ITS PRODUCTS AND SERVICES WITHOUT LOSING ITS BUSINESS TO COMPETITORS. IF COMPANY HAS ALL THIS THREE QUALITIES THEN IT CAN EARN HIGH RATES OF RETURNS ON CAPITAL. 

 

9 FEBRUARY, 2020

IN CAPITAL MARKETS MONEY IS NOT ONLY IMPORTANT THING. EXPERIENCE ALSO PLAYS AN IMPORTANT ROLE. PERSON WITH EXPERIENCE ENDS UP WITH MAKING MONEY AND PERSON WITH MONEY BUT NO EXPERIENCE ENDS UP WITH EXPERIENCE. THE EXPERIENCE OF LOSING MONEY HELPS TO MAKE MONEY IN CAPITAL MARKETS. 

 

8 FEBRUARY, 2020

IF WE INVEST IN LOUSY BUSINESS FOR A LONG TIME, WE WILL GET LOUSY RESULTS EVEN IF WE BUY CHEAP. IF WE INVEST IN A STRONG AND WONDERFUL BUSINESS FOR A LONG TIME, EVEN IF WE PAY A LITTLE BIT TOO MUCH, THEN TOO WE WILL GET WONDERFUL RESULTS, IF WE STAY IN A LONG TIME. 

 

7 FEBRUARY, 2020

IN INVESTING LOOKING ON NEGATIVE SIDES ALWAYS WORK WELL. WHILE ANALYZING COMPANY IF WE FIRST ELIMINATE WHAT DOES NOT WORK OR WON’T ACHIEVE WHAT WE WANT, THEN WE DON’T HAVE TO SPEND A LOT OF TIME AND ATTENTION ON ANALYZING THAT COMPANY. IF THERE IS NEGATIVE SIDE LIKE FACTORS THAT ARE NEEDED FOR SUCCESS ARE NOT THERE IN COMPANY OR FACTORS LIKE NO SUSTAINABLE ADVANTAGE, BAD AND UNTRUSTWORTHY MANAGEMENT OR SOMETHING ELSE THEN WE SHOULD NOT INVEST IN THAT COMPANY. 

 

6 FEBRUARY, 2020

WE SHOULD INVEST IN SUCH WAY THAT WE DO NOT LOSE SIGNIFICANT MONEY. WE MIGHT NOT MAKE THE MOST MONEY THIS WAY, BUT THIS WILL HELP US TO MINIMIZE THE RISK OF PERMANENT LOSS. IF THERE IS 1 IN 1,000 CHANCE THAT AN INVESTMENT DECISION IN PARTICULAR STOCK CAN THREATEN PERMANENT LOSS, THEN WE SHOULD NOT DO IT. 

 

5 FEBRUARY, 2020

WE SHOULD NOT INVEST IN COMPANY WITH A BELIEF THAT IT WILL CHANGE. WE NEVER KNOW WHAT IS GOING IN MIND OF PROMOTERS. INSTEAD WE SHOULD INVEST IN RIGHT COMPANIES WHICH REQUIRES NO CHANGE. 

 

4 FEBRUARY, 2020

IN INVESTING WHEN WE THINK WE HAVE ARRIVED AT A CORRECT DECISION, WE SHOULD CONSIDER THAT THE OPPOSITE OF WHAT WE WANT TO HAPPEN, COULD HAPPEN. AND THEN WE SHOULD TRY TO THINK ABOUT WHAT FACTORS CAN CAUSE WHAT WE DON’T WANT TO HAPPEN TO HAPPEN. 

 

3 FEBRUARY, 2020

ONE SHOULD NOT ENTER THE STOCK MARKET JUST BY SEEING OTHER PEOPLE MAKING MONEY IN MARKET. MOST PEOPLE ENTER STOCK MARKET SEEING OTHER PEOPLE MAKING MONEY, BUT THEY DO NOT SEE THE PATIENCE OF THE PEOPLE IN BEAR MARKET. THEY DO NOT SEE WHAT PEOPLE FACES DURING DIFFERENT CYCLES OF MARKET. THEY DO NOT SEE PEOPLE EARN MONEY IN MARKET AFTER SEEING AT LEAST TWO BEAR CYCLES AND TWO BULL CYCLES OF MARKET. ONE CAN ONLY BE EXPERT OF MARKET AFTER EXPERIENCING TWO BEAR CYCLES AND TWO BULL CYCLES OF MARKET. 

 

2 FEBRUARY, 2020

FINANCIALLY RICH COMPANIES ALWAYS MAINTAIN THREE THINGS: 1) A LARGE AND RELIABLE STREAM OF EARNINGS, 2) MASSIVE LIQUID ASSETS AND 3) NO SIGNIFICANT NEAR TERM CASH REQUIREMENTS. IF WE SEE ALL THIS THREE THINGS TOGETHER IN ANY COMPANY, THEN THAT COMPANY INDICATES IT IS FINANCIALLY RICH COMPANY, AND IT IS CLEAR SIGN TO INVEST IN THAT COMPANY.

 

1 FEBRUARY, 2020

IN STOCK MARKET IT IS NOT THE AMOUNT OF INFORMATION ON COMPANIES OR MARKETS THAT COUNTS BUT ONLY RELEVANT INFORMATION COUNTS. MORE INFORMATION ISN’T NECESSARILY THAT IT IS BETTER INFORMATION BUT IT MAY FALSELY INCREASE OUR CONFIDENCE. MAIN PROBLEM IS MANY PEOPLE ABSORB TOO MUCH INFORMATION BUT THEY DON’T KNOW THAT, THAT TOO MUCH INFORMATION IS NOT TRUE. IN MARKET EVERYBODY GETS TOO MUCH INFORMATION ALL DAY LONG THAT BEHIND INFORMATION THEY LOSES THEIR COMMON SENSE AND MAKE MISTAKES WHICH LEADS TO LOSS OF CAPITAL.

 

31 JANUARY, 2020

WE SHOULD CONCENTRATE ON CONSERVATIVELY FINANCED BUSINESSES WHICH HAVE STRONG COMPETITIVE STRENGTHS AND WHICH IS RUN BY ABLE AND HONEST PEOPLE. WE SHOULD BUY STOCKS OF SUCH COMPANIES AT SENSIBLE PRICES SO THAT OUR LOSSES WILL BE RARE. 

 

30 JANUARY, 2020

IN STOCK MARKET WE WILL NOT BE RIGHT SIMPLY BECAUSE A LARGE NUMBER OF PEOPLE MOMENTARILY AGREES WITH US. WE WILL NOT BE RIGHT SIMPLY BECAUSE POPULAR INVESTORS OR INSTITUTIONAL INVESTORS AGREES WITH US. WE WILL BE RIGHT AFTER MANY TRANSACTIONS, IF OUR HYPOTHESES ARE CORRECT, OUR FACTS ARE CORRECT AND OUR REASON TO BUY AND SELL A PARTICULAR STOCK IS CORRECT. AND OUR FACTS SHOULD BE FACTS OF REALITY AND NOT JUST ASSUMPTIONS. 

 

29 JANUARY, 2020

IN INVESTING JUST HAVING KNOWLEDGE IS NOT EVERYTHING WHAT WE NEED. RIGHT USE OF KNOWLEDGE AND HOW TO USE THE KNOWLEDGE IS THE MOST IMPORTANT THING. IF AN INVESTOR KNOWS HOW TO USE THE KNOWLEDGE THEN HE CAN GET ULTIMATE WISDOM. 

 

28 JANUARY, 2020

WE SHOULD BE MOST CONCERNED ABOUT WHY MOST INVESTORS HAVE FAILED IN STOCK MARKET, RATHER CONCENTRATING MORE ON HOW TO BE SUCCESSFUL IN THE STOCK MARKET. BY KNOWING WHY INVESTORS FAIL IN STOCK MARKET HELP US TO LEARN FROM THEIR MISTAKES AND WE CAN PREVENT OURSELVES FROM MAKING MISTAKES. IF WE PREVENT OURSELVES FROM MAKING MISTAKES WE WILL SUCCEED IN STOCK MARKET. 

 

27 JANUARY, 2020

TO BE SUCCESSFUL IN STOCK MARKET WE SHOULD HAVE PATIENCE, DISCIPLINE AND AN ABILITY TO TAKE LOSSES AND ADVERSITY WITHOUT GOING CRAZY. WE SHOULD HAVE AN ABILITY TO NOT BE DRIVEN CRAZY BY EXTREME SUCCESS. WE SHOULDN’T BE JEALOUS WHEN OTHER INVESTORS DO WELL AND FREQUENTLY HOP FROM ONE STOCK TO OTHER JUST BY SEEING OTHER INVESTORS BEING SUCCESSFUL IN PARTICULAR STOCKS.

 

26 JANUARY, 2020

EXCITING INVESTMENT ARE USUALLY A BAD INVESTMENTS. SEEKING ENTERTAINMENT FROM OUR INVESTMENTS IS RESPONSIBLE FOR OUR CAPITAL LOSS.

 

25 JANUARY, 2020

CAPITAL MARKETS ARE FUNDAMENTALLY A MECHANISM THAT DISTRIBUTES WEALTH TO THOSE WHO HAVE STRATEGY, PRINCIPLES AND A PROPER PROCESS, AND CAN ADHERE TO IT FROM THOSE WHO DO NOT HAVE A STRATEGY, PRINCIPLES OR A PROPER PROCESS. TO BE SUCCESSFUL IN MARKETS WE SHOULD DEVELOP OUR OWN STRATEGY, PRINCIPLES, A PROCESS AND WE SHOULD STICK TO IT. 

 

24 JANUARY, 2020

IF WE WERE INVESTING IN THE SAME STOCKS WHICH ARE OWNED BY OUR NEIGHBOURS AND FRIENDS, IT IS LIKELY THAT WE WILL EXPERIENCE LOW RETURNS. OUR SOCIAL INSTINCTS WILL DESTROY OUR WEALTH BY PERSUADING US TO BUY WHAT EVERYONE ELSE IN THE MARKET OWNS. SUCCESSFUL INVESTING IS A SOLITARY ACTIVITY AND OWNING UNATTRACTIVE AND UNFAMOUS STOCKS. 

 

23 JANUARY, 2020

THE MOST COMMON REASON FOR THE FAILURE TO EXECUTE IN STOCK MARKET IS THE EMOTIONAL INABILITY OF INVESTORS TO GO AGAINST THE MARKET AND BUY THE STOCKS THAT ARE NOT DOING WELL. 

 

22 JANUARY, 2020

IT IS ALL RIGHT TO LOSE SIGNIFICANT AMOUNT OF MONEY IN STOCKS AS LONG AS IT IS DUE TO THE VICISSITUDES OF THE OVERALL STOCK MARKET. WE SHOULD NOT BE AFRAID TO DO SO AND WE SHOULD NOT FEEL BAD WHEN IT HAPPENS. THIS IS THE INEVITABLE PRICE WE PAY FOR THE LONG TERM SUPERIORITY OF STOCKS. FROM TIME TO TIME IT IS THE DUTY OF AN INVESTORS TO LOSE MONEY. WITHOUT LOSING MONEY NO ONE CAN LEARN HOW TO MAKE MONEY IN STOCK MARKET. 

 

21 JANUARY, 2020

YOUNG SAVERS SHOULD PRAY FOR A BEAR MARKET SO THAT THEY CAN ACCUMULATE SHARES CHEAPLY BEFORE THEY RETIRE. THE WORST THING THAT CAN HAPPEN TO SAVERS IS TO HAVE A PROLONGED PERIOD OF HIGH PRICES, WHICH MEANS THAT THEY WILL HAVE TO ACQUIRE EXPENSIVE SHARES THAT ARE LIKELY TO HAVE POOR RETURNS IN RETIREMENT. 

 

20 JANUARY, 2020

WE SHOULD NOT WORRY TOO MUCH ABOUT SHORT TERM LOSSES. INSTEAD WE SHOULD FOCUS ON AVOIDING POOR LONG TERM RETURNS BY STICKING TO GOOD QUALITY COMPANIES. 

 

19 JANUARY, 2020

WE SHOULD AVOID OVERCONFIDENCE. WE ARE MOST LIKELY TRADING WITH INVESTORS WHO ARE MORE KNOWLEDGEABLE, FASTER AND BETTER EQUIPPED THAN US. IT IS RIDICULOUS TO IMAGINE THAT WE CAN WIN THE STOCK MARKET GAME BY READING A NEWS PAPER OR USING A FEW SIMPLE SELECTION STRATEGIES AND TRADING RULES. 

 

18 JANUARY, 2020

IN OUR MODERN SOCIETY IT IS IMPOSSIBLE TO AVOID NEWS PAPER, MAGAZINES, THE INTERNET AND TELEVISION. WE SHOULD UNDERSTAND HOW THE FINANCIAL MEDIA WORKS AND PLAYS A CENTRAL ROLE IN THE SURVIVAL OF THE BROKERAGE AND FUND INDUSTRIES. BROKERS NEED TRADES TO EARN MONEY. THEREFORE THEY ALWAYS SAY BUY THIS PARTICULAR STOCK OR SELL THIS PARTICULAR STOCK. THEY NEVER SAY THIS PARTICULAR STOCK WILL GIVE GREAT RETURNS IN LONG TERM. IF THEY SAY THIS THEN THEY WILL NOT GET ANY TRADES AND WILL NOT BE ABLE TO MAKE MONEY. SO ONE SHOULD NOT BLINDLY FOLLOW ANY TIPS OF BROKERS BECAUSE THEY GIVE TIPS TO MAKE MONEY THEMSELVES NOT FOR THE INVESTORS. 

 

17 JANUARY, 2020

HUMAN BEINGS LOVES SHARING THEIR COMMON INTERESTS. SO WHEN EVERYONE SAYS THAT A PARTICULAR STOCK IS THE BEST INVESTMENT BET, BY THIS THEY ARE SAYING THAT THEY ALREADY OWNS THAT PARTICULAR STOCK. SINCE THAT PARTICULAR STOCK IS OWNED BY EVERYONE, PRICE OF THAT PARTICULAR STOCK IS HIGH AND FUTURE RETURNS ARE LOW. WE SHOULD AVOID SUCH STOCKS BECAUSE PEOPLE ALWAYS SAYS GOOD THINGS ABOUT THE STOCKS THEY OWNED BECAUSE MOST OF THEM ARE EMOTIONALLY ATTACHED TO THEIR STOCKS AND CANNOT SEE NEGATIVE SIDES OF IT. THIS CREATES BUBBLE. AND ONE WHO TRAPS IN IT, BURNS HIS HANDS. 

 

16 JANUARY, 2020

THERE ARE NO INTRINSICALLY GOOD OR BAD STOCKS. AT A HIGH ENOUGH PRICE, EVEN THE BEST COMPANIES ARE HIGHLY SPECULATIVE. AND AT A LOW ENOUGH PRICE, EVEN THE WORST COMPANIES ARE A SOUND INVESTMENTS. 

 

15 JANUARY, 2020

SINCE THE RISK IN OUR PORTFOLIO IS DIRECTLY RELATED TO THE PERCENTAGE OF STOCK HELD, IT IS BETTER THAT WE BEGIN OUR INVESTMENT CAREER WITH RELATIVELY SMALL PERCENTAGE OF STOCKS. THIS FILES DIRECTLY IN THE FACE OF ONE OF THE PRIME TENETS OF FINANCIAL PLANNING CONVENTIONAL WISDOM, THAT YOUNG INVESTOR SHOULD INVEST AGGRESSIVELY, SINCE THEY HAVE DECADES TO MAKE UP THEIR LOSSES. THE PROBLEM WITH AN EARLY AGGRESSIVE STRATEGY IS THAT WE CANNOT MAKE UP OUR LOSSES IF WE PERMANENTLY FLEE THE STOCK MARKET BECAUSE OF THEM.

 

14 JANUARY, 2020

THE KEY IN MARKET IS TO IGNORE THE YEAR TO YEAR RELATIVE PERFORMANCE OF THE INDIVIDUAL ASSET CLASSES, THEIR BEHAVIOUR USUALLY AVERAGES OUT OVER THE YEARS. IT IS THE LONG TERM BEHAVIOUR OF OUR WHOLE PORTFOLIO THAT MATTERS, NOT ITS DAY TO DAY VARIATION. SO WE SHOULD NOT WORRY ABOUT SHORT TERM VOLATILITY AND SHOULD FOCUS ON BUILDING LONG TERM COMPOUNDING PORTFOLIO. 

 

13 JANUARY, 2020

WHEN AN INVESTOR SAYS, ” I OWN LAST YEAR’S BEST PERFORMING FUND OR STOCKS”, WHAT HE USUALLY FORGETS TO ADD IS, “UNFORTUNATELY, I BOUGHT IT THIS YEAR.”

 

12 JANUARY, 2020

WHY STOCK PRICES BEHAVE RANDOMLY? BECAUSE ALL PUBLICLY AVAILABLE INFORMATION, AND MOST PRIVATELY AVAILABLE INFORMATION, IS ALREADY FACTORED INTO THEIR PRICES. 

 

11 JANUARY, 2020

THE FLOW OF CAPITAL TO NEW TECHNOLOGIES IS NOT SO MUCH DRIVEN BY DEMAND FROM INNOVATORS BUT BY SUPPLY FROM AN IMPRESSIONABLE INVESTING PUBLIC. THE CYCLE OF TECHNOLOGIES DEMONSTRATES THREE THINGS: 1) THE CAPITALIZATION OF THE NATION’S GREAT COMPANIES OCCURS LARGELY DURING BRIEF PERIODS OF PUBLIC ENTHUSIASM. 2) OUR SOCIETY OWES ITS SUCCESS AND PROSPERITY TO BOTH THE INVESTORS AND THE FINANCIAL BACKERS OF THE TECHNOLOGICAL PROCESS. AND 3) THE RETURNS TO TECHNOLOGY’S INVESTORS ARE LOW. 

 

10 JANUARY, 2020

SINCE SOME INVESTORS CANNOT SUCCESSFULLY TIME THE MARKET OR SELECT INDIVIDUAL STOCKS, ASSET ALLOCATION SHOULD BE MAJOR FOCUS FOR THEIR INVESTMENT STRATEGY, BECAUSE IT IS THE ONLY FACTOR AFFECTING THEIR INVESTMENT RISK AND RETURN THAT THEY CAN CONTROL. 

 

9 JANUARY, 2020

USUALLY IT IS SAID THAT THERE ARE ONLY TWO TYPES OF INVESTORS: THOSE WHO DON’T KNOW WHERE THE MARKET IS GOING AND THOSE WHO DON’T KNOW THAT THEY DON’T KNOW. BUT THERE IS RATHER THIRD KIND WHO ARE MARKET STRATEGIST. HIGHLY VISIBLE BROKERAGE HOUSE EXECUTIVES ARE ARTICULATE, HIGHLY PAID, USUALLY ATTRACTIVE, AND NICELY DRESSED. THEIR JOB IS TO CONVINCE THE INVESTING PEOPLE THAT THEIR FIRM CAN DIVINE THE MARKET’S MOVES THROUGH A CAREFUL ANALYSIS OF ECONOMIC, POLITICAL, AND INVESTMENT DATA. BUT AT THE END THEY KNOW ONLY TWO THINGS: FIRST LIKE EVERYBODY ELSE, THEY DON’T KNOW WHERE THE MARKET IS HEADED TOMORROW, AND SECOND, THAT THEIR LIVELIHOOD DEPENDS UPON APPEARING TO KNOW ABOUT MARKETS.

 

8 JANUARY, 2020

WHEN WE PURCHASE A RAPIDLY APPRECIATING ASSET WITH LITTLE INTRINSIC VALUE, WE ARE DEPENDENT ON SOMEONE MORE FOOLISH THAN WE TAKE IT OFF OUR HANDS AT A HIGHER PRICE. THIS IS KNOWN AS THE GREATER FOOL THEORY OF INVESTING. 

 

7 JANUARY, 2020

A POPULAR CONCEIT OF EVERY BULL MARKET IS THAT THE INVESTORS HAS BOUGHT INTO THE VALUE OF LONG TERM INVESTING AND THEY SAY WE WILL NEVER SELL THE STOCKS JUST BECAUSE OF MARKET FLUCTUATIONS. THEY THEMSELVES SAY WE ARE LONG TERM VALUE INVESTORS. THEY SAY THIS BECAUSE IN BULL MARKET EVEN PENNY STOCKS RISE WITHOUT ANY IMPROVEMENT IN THEIR BALANCE SHEET OR ANY FUNDAMENTAL CHANGE. BUT TIME AFTER TIME WHEN BUBBLE BURST, STOCKS PRICES DECLINES AND MANY INVESTORS LOSES HEART AND SELL THEIR STOCKS IN LOSS. AND THOSE WHO HAD EARLIER SAID IN BULL MARKET THAT WE ARE LONG TERM VALUE INVESTORS, DON’T EVEN RETURN TO MARKET AFTER THE LOSS. THEREFORE WE SHOULD BUY QUALITY STOCKS IN BEAR MARKET, SO THAT WE CAN ENJOY ITS FRUITS IN BULL MARKET. WE SHOULD NEVER ENTER THE MARKET AT THE TIME OF EUPHORIA.

 

6 JANUARY, 2020

WHEN A BROKER CALL SUGGESTS THAT THE PRICE OF A PARTICULAR STOCK WILL RISE, WHAT HE IS REALLY TELLING US IS THAT HE IS NOT OVERLY IMPRESSED WITH OUR INTELLIGENCE. OTHERWISE, WE WOULD HAVE REALIZE THAT IF HE ACTUALLY KNEW THAT PRICE WAS GOING TO INCREASE, HE WOULD NOT TELL IT TO US OR EVEN HIS MOTHER. INSTEAD, HE WOULD QUIT HIS JOB, BORROW THE MONEY AND WOULD PURCHASE AS MUCH OF THE STOCK AS HE COULD, AND THEN ENJOY HIS FURTHER LIFE. 

 

5 JANUARY, 2020

IN INVESTING SUCCESS ISN’T GOOD FOR MOST OF INVESTORS BECAUSE SUCCESS GOES TO THEIR HEAD. FOR THEM SUCCESS CHANGE THEM, AND USUALLY NOT FOR THE BETTER. SUCCESS MAKE INVESTORS THINK THEY ARE SMART. THAT IS FINE AS FAR AS IT GOES, BUT THERE CAN BE NEGATIVE CONSEQUENCES. SUCCESS ALSO TENDS TO MAKE INVESTORS RICHER, AND THAT CAN LEAD TO REDUCTION IN THEIR LEVEL OF MOTIVATIONS AND LEAST BOTHER ABOUT HARD WORK. THEREFORE WE SHOULD NOT LET SUCCESS GO TO OUR HEAD. 

 

4 JANUARY, 2020

WHEN OTHER INVESTORS FAIL TO WORRY ABOUT RISK AND FAIL TO APPLY CAUTION AT THAT TIME WE MUST TURN MORE CAUTIONS AND WHEN OTHER INVESTORS ARE PANICKED AND DEPRESSED AND THEY CAN’T IMAGINE CONDITIONS UNDER WHICH RISK WOULD BE WORTH TAKING, AT THAT TIME WE MUST TURN MORE AGGRESSIVE.

 

3 JANUARY, 2020

THERE ARE THREE STAGES OF A BULL MARKET: 1) WHEN ONLY FEW INVESTOR BELIEVE THINGS WILL GET BETTER. 2) WHEN MOST INVESTORS REALIZE THAT IMPROVEMENT IS ACTUALLY TAKING PLACE AND 3) WHEN EVERYONE CONCLUDES THINGS WILL GET BETTER FOREVER. THIRD STAGE ACTUALLY CREATES EUPHORIA. ITS THE SIGN TO EXIT. IF WE ENTER THE MARKET IN THE THIRD STAGE OF BULL MARKET THEN WE WILL DEFINITELY BURN OUR HANDS. 

 

2 JANUARY, 2020

IN INVESTING THERE IS A COMPLEX RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN HUMILITY AND CONFIDENCE. SINCE THE GREATEST BARGAINS ARE USUALLY FOUND AMONG THE STOCKS THAT ARE UNDISCOVERED OR DISRESPECTED, WE SHOULD HAVE ENOUGH CONFIDENCE IN OUR JUDGEMENT TO BE A SUCCESSFUL INVESTOR. WE JUST CAN’T LEAVE GOOD STOCKS WHICH ARE DISRESPECTED BY PEOPLE BUT WHICH CAN BE MULTIBAGGER IN FUTURE JUST BECAUSE WE HAVE NO CONFIDENCE IN OUR JUDGEMENT. 

 

1 JANUARY, 2020

A MARKET WILL DO WHAT IT WILL DO. SOME OF THE OUTCOME WILL BE BASED ON ECONOMIC EVENTS AND CORPORATE PROFITABILITY, SOME WILL BE DETERMINED BY PSYCHOLOGY AND BEHAVIOUR OF INVESTORS, AND SOME WILL BE DETERMINED BY RANDOMNESS OR LUCK OF INVESTORS. SO INSTEAD OF THINKING OF SENSEX OR PRICE OF A PARTICULAR STOCK ONE SHOULD TRY TO SEARCH GOOD COMPANIES AND SHOULD INVEST IN THEM. 

 

31 DECEMBER, 2019

OUR AIM SHOULD NOT BE TO BE A POPULAR STOCK PICKER OR ALWAYS A RIGHT FORECASTER. THE RESULT OF THIS IS GOOD ONLY FOR A SHORT TERM. TO BE SUCCESSFUL IN MARKET, OUR AIM SHOULD BE TO SURVIVE IN MARKET. 

 

30 DECEMBER, 2019

SKILL AND LUCK ARE IMPORTANT ELEMENTS THAT DETERMINE THE SUCCESS IN MARKET. WITHOUT SKILL THE DECISIONS OF INVESTOR CANNOT PRODUCE SUCCESS. LUCK IS A WILD CARD. IT CAN MAKE GOOD DECISIONS FAIL AND BAD ONES SUCCEED, BUT ITS ONLY IN SHORT TERM. IN LONG TERM, USUALLY SKILL WINS. 

 

29 DECEMBER, 2019

IN INVESTING WHEN SOMEONE SAYS PRICE DOESN’T MATTER , THAT IS THE INDICATION OF BUBBLE. IN BUBBLE ENVIRONMENT, INVESTORS OFTEN GET CARRIED AWAY AND CONCLUDE THAT WE CAN MAKE MORE MONEY BY BORROWING MONEY TO BUY INTO EUPHORIA. AND WHENEVER THE BUBBLE BURST THE INVESTORS COME UNDER DEBT BURDEN AND DUE TO DEBT, SOME INVESTORS ARE FORCED TO LEAVE THE MARKETS. NO PRICE IS TOO HIGH IS THE ULTIMATE INGREDIENT IN A BUBBLE, AND THUS FULL PROOF SIGN OF A MARKET GONE TOO FAR. THERE IS NO SAFE WAY TO PARTICIPATE IN BUBBLE, THERE IS ALWAYS DANGER TO PARTICIPATE IN BUBBLE. 

 

28 DECEMBER, 2019

EXITING THE MARKET AFTER THE DECLINE AND THUS FAILING TO PARTICIPATE IN MARKET WHEN MARKET REBOUND IS TRULY THE CARDINAL SIN IN INVESTING. 

 

27 DECEMBER, 2019

THE RISK IN INVESTING DOES NOT COME MAINLY FROM THE ECONOMY, THE COMPANIES, THE SECURITIES, THE STOCK CERTIFICATES OR THE EXCHANGE BUILDINGS. IT COMES FROM THE BEHAVIOUR OF THE MARKET PARTICIPANTS. 

 

26 DECEMBER, 2019

BOTTOM FISHING IS THE MOST TRIED INVESTING STYLE, BUT IT IS THE FISHERMAN WHO GETS HOOKED. TRYING TO CATCH THE BOTTOM ON A FALLING STOCK IS LIKE TRYING TO CATCH A FALLING KNIFE. IT IS NORMALLY A GOOD IDEA TO WAIT UNTIL THE KNIFE HITS THE GROUND AND STICKS, THEN VIBRATES FOR A WHILE AND SETTLES DOWN BEFORE WE TRY TO GRAB IT. GRABBING A RAPIDLY FALLING STOCK RESULTS IN PAINFUL SURPRISES, BECAUSE INEVITABLY WE GRAB IT IN THE WRONG PLACE. 

 

25 DECEMBER, 2019

IN REAL ESTATE, THE PERIOD BETWEEN THE START OF PLANNING AND THE OPENING OF A BUILDING IS OFTEN LONG ENOUGH FOR THE ECONOMY TO TRANSITION FROM BOOM TO BUST. PROJECTS STARTED IN GOOD TIMES OFTEN OPEN IN BAD TIMES, MEANING THEIR SPACE ADDS TO VACANCIES, PUTTING DOWNWARD PRESSURE ON RENTS AND SALES PRICES. UNFILLED SPACE HANGS OVER THE MARKET. 

 

24 DECEMBER, 2019

PROSPERITY BRINGS EXPANDED LENDING, WHICH LEADS TO UNWISE LENDING, WHICH PRODUCES LARGE LOSSES, WHICH MAKES LENDERS STOP LENDING, WHICH ENDS PROSPERITY, AND ON AND ON. THEREFORE WE SHOULD AVOID SOME BANK STOCKS WHICH ARE BADLY TRAPPED IN LENDING TO BAD COMPANIES. 

 

23 DECEMBER, 2019

SOME INVESTORS BECOME MORE OPTIMISTIC AND RISK TOLERANT WHEN THINGS ARE GOING WELL, AND BECOME MORE WORRIED AND RISK AVERSE WHEN THINGS TURN DOWNWARD. THIS MEANS INVESTORS ARE MOST WILLING TO BUY WHEN THEY SHOULD BE MOST CAUTIOUS, AND MOST RELUCTANT TO BUY WHEN THEY SHOULD BE MOST AGGRESSIVE. THEREFORE TO BE SUCCESSFUL INVESTOR WE SHOULD RECOGNIZE THIS AND STRIVE TO BEHAVE AS CONTRARIAN INVESTOR. 

 

22 DECEMBER, 2019

WHENEVER A DOCTOR, TAXI DRIVER OR ANY OTHER PERSON WHO ARE FROM OUTSIDE THE FIELD OF MARKETS GIVES THE SUGGESTION OR A NAME OF A PARTICULAR STOCK TO INVEST, THIS INDICATES THAT GREAT BUBBLE IS CREATED FOR THAT PARTICULAR STOCK WHICH CAN BURST ANYTIME.

 

21 DECEMBER, 2019

WE BUY A STOCK FOR A PARTICULAR REASON OR FOR A PARTICULAR FUNDAMENTAL STORY OF THAT COMPANY WHICH IS GOING TO BE HAPPEN IN FUTURE. BUT IT IS IMPORTANT TO RECHECK THAT, WHETHER THAT FUTURE FUNDAMENTAL STORY OF A PARTICULAR COMPANY IS REALLY HAPPENING OR NOT. IF WE DON’T RECHECK, THEN WE DON’T UNDERSTAND WHAT IS HAPPENING IN THE COMPANY AND IF SOMETHING OPPOSITE TO THAT FUTURE FUNDAMENTAL STORY HAPPENS IN COMPANY, THEN WE LOSE OUR CAPITAL. 

 

20 DECEMBER, 2019

IF WE FIND A GOOD STOCK WITH LITTLE OR NO INSTITUTIONAL OWNERSHIP, WE HAVE FOUND A POTENTIAL WINNER. WE SHOULD FIND THE GOOD COMPANY THAT NO ANALYST WOULD ADMIT TO KNOWING ABOUT, THEN WE HAVE FOUND A DOUBLE WINNER. THE REASON FOR THIS IS, SINCE SUCH STOCKS ARE NOT TRACKED OR OWNED BY INSTITUTIONS THE CHANCES OF STOCK MANIPULATION OR ANY OTHER GAME IS VERY LESS. 

 

19 DECEMBER, 2019

CYCLICAL DEVELOPMENTS IN ONE AREA INFLUENCES CYCLES IN OTHERS. THE ECONOMIC CYCLE INFLUENCES THE PROFIT CYCLE. CORPORATE ANNOUNCEMENTS DETERMINED BY THE PROFIT CYCLE INFLUENCE INVESTORS ATTITUDE. INVESTOR ATTITUDE INFLUENCE MARKETS. AND DEVELOPMENT IN MARKETS INFLUENCE THE CYCLE IN THE AVAILABILITY OF CREDIT WHICH INFLUENCES ECONOMIES, COMPANIES AND MARKETS. 

 

18 DECEMBER, 2019

IN INVESTING SIMPLY BEING RIGHT ABOUT A COMING EVENT ISN’T ENOUGH TO ENSURE SUPERIOR PERFORMANCE IF EVERYONE HOLDS THE SAME VIEW AND AS A RESULT EVERYONE IS EQUALLY RIGHT. THUS IN INVESTING SUCCESS DOES NOT LIE IN BEING RIGHT, BUT RATHER IN BEING MORE RIGHT THAN OTHERS. INVESTOR DOES NOT HAVE TO BE RIGHT IN ORDER TO BE SUCCESSFUL, BUT JUST LESS WRONG THAN OTHER INVESTORS. 

 

17 DECEMBER, 2019

MARKET CYCLES DO NOT HAVE BEGINNING OR AN END. CYCLES ARE CREATED BY EMOTIONS, PSYCHOLOGY AND BEHAVIOUR OF INVESTORS. 

 

16 DECEMBER, 2019

WHILE INVESTING WE SHOULD SPEND OUR TIME ON 1) TRYING TO KNOW MORE THAN OTHERS ON THE FUNDAMENTALS OF INDUSTRIES AND COMPANIES, 2) WE SHOULD BE DISCIPLINED AS TO THE APPROPRIATE PRICE TO PAY FOR BUYING IN THOSE FUNDAMENTALS AND 3) WE SHOULD UNDERSTAND THE INVESTMENT ENVIRONMENT WE ARE IN AND SHOULD DECIDE HOW TO BUILD OUR PORTFOLIO IN THIS INVESTMENT ENVIRONMENT. 

 

15 DECEMBER, 2019

THE DESIRE TO EARN MULTIBAGGER RETURNS, FEAR OF MISSING OUT ANY STOCK, INFLUENCE OF HERD, COMPARING OURSELF WITH OTHERS, ALL THESE THINGS ARE NATURAL. BUT ALL THESE THINGS MAKE INVESTOR TO LOOSE HIS FOCUS AND DO MISTAKES LIKE SELLING QUALITY STOCKS AND BUYING PENNY STOCKS TO HAVE SHORT TERM GAINS. INVESTORS SHOULD NOT ALLOW INFLUENCE OF ALL THESE THINGS AND SHOULD FOCUS ON LONG TERM COMPOUNDING RETURNS. 

 

14 DECEMBER, 2019

WE CAN CONSISTENTLY OUTPERFORM OTHER INVESTORS BECAUSE OF THE EXISTENCE OF 1) SIGNIFICANT MISVALUATIONS AND 2) DIFFERENCES AMONG INVESTORS IN TERMS OF SKILL, INSIGHT AND INFORMATION ACCESS. WE CAN REGULARLY EARN PROFITS IF WE IDENTIFY MISVALUATIONS PROPERLY. 

 

13 DECEMBER, 2019

THE MOOD SWINGS OF MARKET IS LIKE THE MOVEMENT OF A PENDULUM. LIKE PENDULUM SPENDS VERY LITTLE TIME AT THE MIDPOINT, IN SAME WAY MARKET SPENDS VERY TIME ON STAYING FLAT. WHENEVER THE PENDULUM IS NEAR EITHER EXTREME, IT IS INEVITABLE THAT IT WILL MOVE BACK TOWARDS THE MIDPOINT SOONER OR LATTER. THE MOVEMENT TOWARDS THE EXTREME ITSELF SUPPLIES THE ENERGY FOR THE SWING BACK. SAME GOES WITH MARKET, WHENEVER THE MARKET IS TOO LOW THEN SOONER OR LATER IT WILL MAKE NEW HIGH AND VICE VERSA. 

 

12 DECEMBER, 2019

PEOPLE USUALLY SAYS RISKIER INVESTMENTS PROVIDES HIGHER RETURNS. PEOPLE SAY IF WE WANT TO MAKE MORE MONEY WE SHOULD TAKE MORE RISK. BUT IN REALITY RISKIER INVESTMENTS CANNOT BE COUNTED ON TO PROVIDE HIGHER RETURNS BECAUSE IF RISKIER INVESTMENTS PRODUCES HIGHER RETURNS, THEY WOULDN’T BE RISKIER. 

 

11 DECEMBER, 2019

WE DON’T NEED MBA OR ANY OTHER DEGREE TO BE AN EXPERT IN INVESTING. ALL WE NEED TO DO IS SPEND SOME TIME IN READING. AFTER ALL, ITS OUR MONEY AND IF WE ARE NOT WILLING TO DO AT LEAST A LITTLE WORK ON OUR INVESTMENT DECISIONS, THEN PROBABLY IT WON’T BE OUR MONEY FOR VERY LONG. 

 

10 DECEMBER, 2019

FOR LARGER COMPANIES, COSTLY START UP OF NEW PLANT WILL HAVE A MUCH SMALLER IMPACT ON TOTAL EARNINGS AS COMPARED TO SMALLER COMPANIES BECAUSE USUALLY OTHER PLANTS OF LARGER COMPANIES OPERATES AT GOOD PROFITABILITY AT THE SAME TIME. 

 

9 DECEMBER, 2019

IF WE HAVE IDENTIFIED THE COMPANIES THAT HAVE EXCELLENT MANAGEMENT OR A GREAT CONSUMER MONOPOLY OR BOTH, IT IS POSSIBLE TO PREDICT THAT THEY WILL MOST CERTAINLY SURVIVE A RECESSION AND MORE THAN LIKELY COME OUT OF IT IN BETTER POSITION THAN BEFORE. RECESSIONS ARE HARD ON THE WEAK, BUT THEY CLEAN THE FIELD FOR THE STRONG TO TAKE AN EVEN LARGER SHARE WHEN THINGS IMPROVE. 

 

8 DECEMBER, 2019

INVESTMENT IS MOST INTELLIGENT WHEN IT IS MOST BUSINESS LIKE. ONE SHOULD STOP THINKING OF THE STOCK MARKET AS AN END UNTO ITSELF AND BEGIN THINKING ABOUT THE ECONOMICS OF OWNERSHIP OF THOSE BUSINESSES THAT THE STOCK REPRESENT.

 

7 DECEMBER, 2019

WHEN WE ARE LOOKING FOR AN EXCELLENT BUSINESS TO INVEST, WE SHOULD LOOK FOR COMPANIES THAT POSSESS A CONSUMER MONOPOLY AND ARE CONSERVATIVELY FINANCED. IF THE COMPANY WITH CONSUMER MONOPOLY IS USING LARGE AMOUNTS OF LONG TERM DEBT, IT SHOULD BE ONLY TO ACQUIRE ANOTHER COMPANY WITH A CONSUMER MONOPOLY BECAUSE TWO CONSUMER MONOPOLY COMPANIES WILL MAKE LOTS OF EXCESS PROFITS AND THIS EXCESS PROFITS WILL HELP COMPANY TO BE DEBT FREE WHICH IT TOOK TO ACQUIRE ANOTHER COMPANY. 

 

6 DECEMBER, 2019

IF AN INVESTOR STUDY’S AND BUY STOCK THAT MEANS HE HAS CONFIDENCE ON HIS STUDY. IF THE STOCK GOES UP INVESTOR FEELS HAPPY AND AS SOON AS STOCK GOES DOWN JUST BECAUSE MARKET GOES DOWN WITHOUT ANY CHANGE IN FUNDAMENTALS OF THE COMPANY INVESTOR LOOSES HIS CONFIDENCE OF STUDY AND LOOSES HIS TRUST ON COMPANY, AND HE SELLS THE STOCK IN PANIC AT LOWER LEVELS INSTEAD OF FEELING LUCKY TO GET AN OPPORTUNITY TO BUY FUNDAMENTALLY GOOD COMPANY AT LOWER PRICE. 

 

5 DECEMBER, 2019

TO BUY STOCK WE SHOULD REMEMBER ONE THING, HIGHER VALUATION OF GOOD COMPANIES ARE BETTER THAN LOWER VALUATIONS OF BAD COMPANIES. THEREFORE CHEAP IS COSTLY AND COSTLY IS CHEAP. 

 

4 DECEMBER, 2019

IF WE DON’T STUDY ANY COMPANIES, WE HAVE THE SAME SUCCESS BUYING STOCKS AS WE DO IN POKER GAME IF WE BET WITHOUT LOOKING AT OUR CARDS. 

 

3 DECEMBER, 2019

IT IS THE HEART OF SUCCESSFUL INVESTING TO STAY WITH AN UNUSUAL STOCK FOR MANY YEARS, IF NOT A LIFE TIME. MORE MONEY HAS BEEN LOST BY STOCKHOLDERS SELLING AN OUTSTANDING STOCK ON SMALL PROFITS INSTEAD OF HOLDING IT FOR LONG PERIOD AND OBTAINING GOOD COMPOUNDING RETURNS, THAN FROM ALL OTHER FOOLISH INVESTMENT ACTIONS COMBINED. 

 

2 DECEMBER, 2019

IF WE STUDY TEN COMPANIES, WE WILL FIND ONE FOR WHICH THE STORY IS BETTER THAN EXPECTED. IF WE STUDY FIFTY WE WILL FIND FIVE. THERE ARE ALWAYS PLEASANT SURPRISES TO BE FOUND IN THE STOCK MARKET, COMPANIES WHOSE ACHIEVEMENTS ARE BEING OVERLOOKED ON DALAL STREET. 

 

1 DECEMBER, 2019

POPULATION PLAYS AN IMPORTANT ROLE IN INVESTING. IF WE CAN MAKE OUT THE FUTURE NEEDS AND DESIRE OF UPCOMING GENERATION, THAT SECTOR WILL BE THE BEST TO INVEST IN AT PRESENT SO THAT WE CAN ENJOY ITS FRUITS WHEN THE GENERATIONS GROWS UP AND SPENDS ON ITS NEEDS AND DESIRE.

 

30 NOVEMBER, 2019

NOBODY CAN PREDICT THE FUTURE DIRECTION OF THE ECONOMY, OR THE STOCK MARKET. WE SHOULD DISMISS ALL SUCH FORECASTS AND CONCENTRATE ON WHAT IS ACTUALLY HAPPENING TO THE COMPANIES IN WHICH WE HAVE INVESTED.

 

29 NOVEMBER, 2019

A LOW PRICE EARNINGS, UNACCOMPANIED BY A CORPORATE MANAGEMENT CAPABLE OF BRINGING ABOUT A HIGH PRICE EARNINGS RATIO, IS USUALLY AN INVESTMENT TRAP, NOT AN INVESTMENT BONANZA. 

 

28 NOVEMBER, 2019

BEHIND EVERY STOCK THERE IS A COMPANY. WE SHOULD FIND OUT WHAT IT IS DOING INSTEAD OF JUST LOOKING AT THE PRICE OF THE STOCK.

 

27 NOVEMBER, 2019

PSYCHOLOGICAL FACTOR IS NOTHING MORE THAN A SHORT TERM CHARACTERISTICS. A MAJORITY OF FINANCIAL COMMUNITY MAY GET CARRIED AWAY BY OVER APPRECIATION OF THE ATTRACTIVENESS OF A CERTAIN STOCK OR AN ENTIRE INDUSTRY. FOR A YEAR OR SEVERAL YEARS THEY MAY, AS A RESULT, CONTINUE TO PAY A PREMIUM FOR THAT PARTICULAR STOCK WELL BEYOND WHAT THAT STOCK IS INTRINSICALLY WORTH. SOONER OR LATER, WHEN THE STOCK OR THE INDUSTRY FAILS TO MEASURE UP TO THE GLOWING ANTICIPATIONS, A PERIOD OF DISILLUSIONMENT SETS IN. THE PRICE EARNINGS RATIO OF THE SHARES WILL THEN DECLINE BY ENOUGH TO BRING THE STOCK CLOSER TO INTRINSIC VALUE.

 

26 NOVEMBER, 2019

WE SHOULD AVOID HOT STOCKS IN HOT INDUSTRIES. GREAT COMPANIES IN COLD, NON GROWTH INDUSTRIES ARE CONSISTENT BIG WINNERS. 

 

25 NOVEMBER, 2019

THERE IS NO CORRELATION BETWEEN THE SUCCESS OF A COMPANY’S OPERATIONS AND THE SUCCESS OF ITS STOCK OVER A FEW MONTHS OR EVEN A FEW YEARS. IN THE LONG TERM, THERE IS 100% CORRELATION BETWEEN THE SUCCESS OF THE COMPANY AND THE SUCCESS OF ITS STOCK. THIS DISPARITY IS THE KEY TO MAKING MONEY, IT PAYS TO BE PATIENT, AND TO OWN SUCCESSFUL COMPANIES. 

 

24 NOVEMBER, 2019

OUR INVESTORS’S EDGE IS NOT SOMETHING WE GET FROM STOCK MARKET EXPERTS. IT’S SOMETHING WE ALREADY HAVE. WE CAN OUTPERFORM THE EXPERTS IF WE USE OUR EDGE BY INVESTING IN COMPANIES OR INDUSTRIES WE ALREADY UNDERSTAND. 

 

23 NOVEMBER, 2019

OWNING STOCKS IS LIKE HAVING CHILDREN. WE SHOULD NOT GET INVOLVED WITH MORE THAN WE CAN HANDLE. THE PART TIME STOCK PICKER PROBABLY HAS TIME TO FOLLOW 8-12 STOCKS, AND TO BUY AND SELL SHARES AS CONDITIONS WARRANT. THERE SHOULD NOT BE MORE THAN 5 COMPANIES IN THE PORTFOLIO AT ANY ONE TIME.

 

22 NOVEMBER, 2019

EVERYONE HAS THE BRAINPOWER TO MAKE MONEY IN STOCKS. NOT EVERYONE HAS THE STOMACH. IF WE ARE PRONE TO SELLING EVERYTHING IN PANIC, THEN WE SHOULD AVOID STOCKS. 

 

21 NOVEMBER, 2019

WE CAN GET GOOD COMPOUNDING RETURNS IF WE ARE PATIENT. THE AVERAGE PERSON SHOULD CONCENTRATE ON A FEW GOOD COMPANIES, WHILE THE FUND MANAGER IS FORCED TO DIVERSIFY. BY OWNING TOO MANY STOCKS, WE LOSE THE ADVANTAGE OF CONCENTRATION. IT ONLY TAKES A HANDFUL OF BIG WINNERS TO MAKE A LIFETIME OF INVESTING WORTHWHILE.

 

20 NOVEMBER, 2019

WE CAN BE WORLD’S GREATEST EXPERT ON BALANCE SHEETS OR P/E RATIOS, BUT WITHOUT FAITH, WE WILL TEND TO BELIEVE THE NEGATIVE HEADLINES. WE CAN PUT OUR MONEY IN GOOD STOCK, BUT WITHOUT FAITH WE WILL SELL WHEN WE FEAR THE WORST, WHICH UNDOUBTEDLY WILL BE WHEN THE PRICES ARE AT THEIR LOWEST.

 

19 NOVEMBER, 2019

THERE IS NO SHAME IN LOSING MONEY ON A STOCK. EVERYBODY DOES IT. WHAT IS SHAMEFUL IS TO HOLD ON TO A STOCK, OR WORSE, TO BUY MORE OF IT, WHEN THE FUNDAMENTALS ARE DETERIORATING.

 

18 NOVEMBER, 2019

THE MOST SUCCESSFUL STOCK INVESTING CONSISTS OF THREE THINGS:

i) CHOOSING ONE OR MORE STOCKS TO BUY THAT IN FUTURE WILL RISE FAR MORE THAN THE MARKET AS A WHOLE. ii) KNOWING APPROXIMATELY WHEN DO DO SUCH BUYING AND, iii) KNOWING WHEN, IF EVER, TO SELL.

 

16 NOVEMBER, 2019

IN INVESTING, WE WANT EVERY STOCK WE OWN TO BE UP. WHEN WE OPEN UP OUR ACCOUNT ONLINE, WE WANT AN ENTIRE COLUMN OF GREEN ARROWS AND UNREALISED GAINS, NO RED, NO LOSSES. THIS LEADS US TO IGNORE THE WHOLE, OVER FOCUS ON THE PARTS, AND DO SOME DUMB THINGS TO KEEP OUR STOCKS PRISTINE AND GREEN. LIKE SELLING SOMETHING JUST BECAUSE IT’S DOWN, CONTINUALLY CHASING OUR TAIL IN FRUITLESS ATTEMPT TO PICK ONLY WINNERS. SHUNNING DIVERSIFICATION AND OVER CONCENTRATING IN WHAT’S HOT. THESE AND OTHER SIMILAR PITFALLS INCREASE RISK AND, VERY OFTEN, DETRACT FROM RETURNS.

 

15 NOVEMBER, 2019

OVERCONFIDENCE MAKES US FORGET WE CAN BE WRONG OR REDUCES OUR SENSE OF THE LIKELIHOOD OF WRONGNESS. WE FORGET TO MANAGE RISK. THIS CAN LEAD TO DOWNRIGHT TERRIBLE DECISIONS, LIKE GOING HOG-WILD FOR HOTSHOT IPO’S, SPECULATING ON PENNY STOCKS OR PLAYING SUPER VOLATILE, NARROW CATEGORIES FOR THE CHANCE OF SKY HIGH RETURNS. OVERCONFIDENT INVESTORS FORGET THE STOCK MARKET ISN’T A GET RICH SCHEME.

 

14 NOVEMBER, 2019

BULL MARKETS ARE BORN ON PESSIMISM, GROW ON SKEPTICISM, MATURE ON OPTIMISM, AND DIE ON EUPHORIA.

 

13 NOVEMBER, 2019

INVESTING IS FULL OF CHALLENGES. OVERCOMING EMOTION. BATTLING OUR URGES TO CHASE HEAT AND FLEET IN FEAR. AND MOST IMPORTANT, DEFENDING OUR BRAIN AND SOUL FROM THE OVERWHELMING 24/7 NOISE MACHINE THAT IS MODERN MEDIA.

 

12 NOVEMBER, 2019

WE SHOULD USE BEHAVIORAL FINANCE TO DISCOVER AND CONTROL THE EMOTIONAL IMPULSES AND BIASES THAT RENDER BAD INVESTMENT DECISIONS. OUR BIGGEST ENEMY IS WE OURSELVES, AND BEHAVIORAL FINANCE IS OUR DEFENSE.

 

11 NOVEMBER, 2019

IN FIELDS LIKE MEDICINE, ENGINEERING AND LAW, EDUCATION IS IMPORTANT. BUT INVESTING IS A DIFFERENT GAME. SOME OF THE GREATEST INVESTORS HAD LITTLE OR NO FORMAL TRAINING. AND SOME OF THE GREATEST THINKERS AND THEORISTS WERE ABSOLUTELY TERRIBLE INVESTORS.

 

9 NOVEMBER, 2019

IN INVESTING BORING IS GOOD. BORING WORKS. BORING CREATES EXCITING WEALTH. IF WE WANT EXCITEMENT THAN WE SHOULD GO AND WASTE OUR MONEY AND TIME ON THE LOTTERY.

 

8 NOVEMBER, 2019

NOT EVERY FUNDAMENTALLY NEGATIVE NEW LAW MANGLES MARKETS. STOCKS HATE QUICK, RADICAL CHANGE, HAVING TO ADAPT AND DISCOVER WINNERS AND LOSERS REAL TIME. THE NEGATIVE SURPRISE POTENTIAL IS HUGE. THE MORE TIME MARKETS HAVE TO DISCOVER AND DIGEST POTENTIAL NEGATIVES (OR POSITIVES), THE MORE MUTED AND IMPACT TENDS TO BE, STOCKS VET OUT POTENTIAL SURPRISES EARLY, SAPPING THEIR POWER. THEY CAN STILL HURT OR HELP, BUT LESS.

 

7 NOVEMBER, 2019

UNDERSTANDING HOW MARKETS DISCOUNT KNOWN INFORMATION HELPS US TO NARROW THE RANGE OF POSSIBILITIES. IT DOESN’T TELLS US WHAT WILL HAPPEN, THAT’S WHERE CURMUDGEONS GET MESSED UP, IT JUST TELLS US WHAT PROBABLY WON’T HAPPEN AND FREES US TO CONTEMPLATE WHAT MIGHT HAPPEN AND IMPROVE OUR ODDS.

 

6 NOVEMBER, 2019

INVESTORS SHOULD KNOW WHEN NOT TO MOVE AND WHERE NOT TO GO. WE MUST KNOW MARKETS ARE MOSTLY EFFICIENT. NOT FULLY, PERFECTLY EFFICIENT AT EVERY TIME, OTHERWISE THERE WOULD BE NO OPPORTUNITIES. WE SHOULD REALIZE MARKETS CAN BE QUITE IRRATIONAL IN THE SHORT TERM. BUT OVER TIME AND ON AVERAGE, PRICES TYPICALLY REFLECTS ALL WIDELY KNOWN INFORMATION.

 

5 NOVEMBER, 2019

LAST QUARTER’S OUTPUT DOESN’T TELL US WHERE THE ECONOMY WILL GO. MOST MEDIA DOES THE SAME WITH EVERY OTHER DATA RELEASE, BIG OR SMALL. THE REPORTS ARE ALL THE SAME, RANDOM NUMBERS THAT VARY HUGELY FROM MONTH TO MONTH. THEY COME OUT EVERY MONTH OR QUARTER, TELLING US WHAT HAPPENED IN A NARROW PAST SPACE OVER SHORT PERIOD THAT HAS ALREADY BEEN PRICED BY MARKETS. INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTION, RETAIL SALES, CONSUMER SPENDING, MANUFACTURING OUTPUT, EXPORTS, IMPORTS, ALL SNAPSHOTS OF PAST ACTIVITY. NONE ARE LEADING INDICATORS, NONE CARRY MAGICAL OR HIDDEN INSIGHT. RECESSIONS DON’T START BECAUSE AUTO SALES ARE DOWN. SINCE WE ARE BOMBARDED WITH STORIES CLAIMING THESE THINGS ARE SIGNIFICANT, MANY INVESTORS CAN’T STOP OVERTHINKING THEM. THE NOISE NEVER STOPS. EVERYONE SEARCHES FOR MEANING IN THESE SILLY STATS, AND THE MEDIA PROVIDES PLENTY OF FUEL.

 

4 NOVEMBER, 2019

DIFFERENT, NOT OPPOSITE. THAT’S THE KEY TO USING PROFESSIONAL FORECASTS, AND THE KEY TO BEING A CONTRARIAN. THINKING DIFFERENTLY CAN BE AS SIMPLE AS ASKING, “WHY ARE WE THINKING ABOUT THAT?”.

 

3 NOVEMBER, 2019

JUST AS CROWD IS SOMETIMES RIGHT, TRUE CONTRARIANS ARE SOMETIMES WRONG. EVERYONE IS WRONG SOMETIMES. THE GOAL SHOULD BE SIMPLY BEING RIGHT MORE OFTEN THAN BEING WRONG , AS OPPOSED TO LOOKING RIGHT AT FIRST BUT ULTIMATELY BEING WRONG MORE OFTEN THAN NOT.

 

2 NOVEMBER, 2019

PROS DON’T FLIP LIKE RETAIL INVESTORS DO. THEIR STATUS BREEDS SELF CONFIDENCE, THEY ARE DARNED SURE THEY KNOW WHERE THE MARKETS ARE GOING AND ARE WILLING TO BE PATIENT. THEY DON’T GIVE UP THE GHOST, THOUGH THEY DO MEAN REVERT. IF THEIR FORECASTS FOR A YEAR ARE TOO DOUR, CLEARLY BEHIND THE MARK HALFWAY THROUGH, THEY WILL REVISE THEM UP, JUST A BIT, AND LARGELY SO THEY DON’T LOOK RIDICULOUS IF THE MARKET FINISHES UP STRONG.

 

1 NOVEMBER, 2019

WE SHOULD TRAIN OUR BRAIN TO BATTLE THE MEDIA, THE CROWD, OUR FRIENDS, NEIGHBOUR AND COCKTAIL BANKERS AND THINK DIFFERENTLY. IT DOESN’T TAKE VAST MARKET KNOWLEDGE, A FINANCIAL DEGREE, AN ECONOMICS PhD OR ENDLESS RIGOROUS STUDY. ARMED WITH FEW BASIC PRINCIPLES, INTERNAL ALARM BELLS AND AN INSTINCT FOR INDEPENDENT THOUGHT, WE CAN BE A TRUE CROWD BEATING CONTRARIAN INVESTOR.

 

31 OCTOBER, 2019

WE SHOULD KNOW THE BUSINESS WELL. SPEND LESS TIME READING ECONOMIC FORECASTERS AND STOCK MARKET PROGNOSTICATORS, AND SPEND MORE TIME ON UNDERSTANDING WHAT WE OWN. IF WE ARE NOT WILLING TO DO IT, THEN WE ARE NOT GOING TO GET A MULTIBAGGER RETURNS OR ANYTHING CLOSE TO IT.

 

30 OCTOBER, 2019

CYCLES THEN DRIVE MARKETS: THREE STEPS FORWARD, TWO STEPS BACK. WITHOUT ALTERNATING RHYTHMS OF EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION, RISING PRICES AND FALLING PRICES, THERE WOULD BE NO MOVEMENT. A BOOM IS JUST CAPITALISM’S WAY OF SETTING UP THE NEXT BUST AND VICE-VERSA.

 

28 OCTOBER, 2019

HAPPY NEW YEAR TO EVERYONE.

THOSE STOCKS THAT ARE MORE ATTRACTIVE ON NET PRESENT VALUE BASIS ARE THE ONES THAT CAN GROW AT A HIGH RATE. AND TO GROW AT AN ABOVE AVERAGE RATE, THEY HAVE TO HAVE SOME KIND OF SUSTAINABLE COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGE. SUCH STOCKS GENERATE HIGH ROE’S.

 

27 OCTOBER, 2019

HAPPY DIWALI TO EVERYONE .

 

26 OCTOBER, 2019

CHEAPER PROCESSES, BETTER LOCATIONS, AND UNIQUE RESOURCES CAN ALL CREATE COST ADVANTAGES, BUT WE SHOULD KEEP A CLOSE EYE ON PROCESS BASED ADVANTAGES. WHAT ONE COMPANY CAN INVENT, ANOTHER CAN COPY.

 

25 OCTOBER, 2019

BUYING STOCKS WITH LOW VALUATIONS HELPS INSULATE US FROM THE MARKET’S WHIMS, BECAUSE IT TIES OUR FUTURE INVESTMENT RETURNS MORE TIGHTLY TO THE FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE OF THE COMPANY.

 

24 OCTOBER, 2019

ONE OF THE BEST THING ABOUT BEING AN INTELLIGENT INVESTOR IS THAT WORLD IS OUR OYSTER. WE ARE NOT FORCED TO INVEST IN INDUSTRY A OR INDUSTRY B, SO WE ARE FREE TO CAST A DISCERNING EYE OVER THE ENTIRE INVESTMENT UNIVERSE, IGNORING WHAT WE DON’T LIKE AND BUYING WHAT WE DO. THIS FREEDOM IS ESPECIALLY IMPORTANT IF WE ARE LOOKING TO BUILD A PORTFOLIO WHICH MAY HELP US TO COMPOUND OUR RETURNS.

 

23 OCTOBER, 2019

THE FOUR SOURCES OF STRUCTURAL COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGE ARE INTANGIBLE ASSETS, CUSTOMER SWITCHING COST, THE NETWORK EFFECT, AND COST ADVANTAGES. IF WE CAN FIND A COMPANY WITH SOLID RETURNS ON CAPITAL AND ONE OF THESE CHARACTERISTICS, WE HAVE LIKELY FOUND A COMPANY WITH A MOAT.

 

22 OCTOBER, 2019

ONE OF THE BIGGEST MISTAKES INVESTORS MAKE IS LETTING THEIR EMOTIONS GET IN THE WAY OF MAKING INTELLIGENT INVESTMENT DECISION. RESEARCH SHOWS INDIVIDUALS SELL WINNING STOCKS AND HOLD ON TO LOSING STOCKS. THEY CHASE PAST PERFORMANCE AND MAKE DECISIONS WITH THE HERD, BUYING MORE STOCKS AFTER A HUGE RUN UP IN PRICE AND SELLING AFTER A MARKET CRASH. THESE ERRORS COST INVESTORS A LOT OF MONEY WHEN COMPOUNDED OVER VERY LONG TIME HORIZONS.

 

21 OCTOBER, 2019

GROWTH IN EARNINGS AND A HIGHER MULTIPLE ON THOSE EARNINGS ARE THE TWIN ENGINES OF 100 BAGGERS.

 

20 OCTOBER, 2019

INDUSTRIAL STABILITY IS ANOTHER FACTOR IN DETERMINING THE DURABILITY OF A MOAT. STABLE INDUSTRIES ARE MORE CONDUCIVE TO SUSTAINABLE VALUE CREATION. UNSTABLE INDUSTRIES PRESENT SUBSTANTIAL COMPETITIVE CHALLENGES AND OPPORTUNITIES.

 

19 OCTOBER, 2019

PERSONAL EGO IS AN EXTREMELY EXPENSIVE HABIT TO MAINTAIN IN MARKETS, A HABIT WHICH HAD LEAD TO DOWNFALL OF MANY CZARS IN THE PAST. THE MOVEMENT WE BREAK EITHER OF THE TWO GOLDEN RULES ONE, MARKET ALWAYS KNOWS MORE THAN US, AND TWO IT IS BIGGER THAN US, WE SIGNED OUR OWN DEATH WARRANT.

 

18 OCTOBER, 2019

INVESTING ISN’T ABOUT UNDERSTANDING MARKET HISTORY, PORTFOLIO CONSTRUCTION AND MUTUAL FUNDS. NONE OF THAT MATTERS IF WE DON’T UNDERSTAND HOW OUR OWN NATURAL HUMAN INCLINATIONS AND COGNITIVE BIASES CAN WREAK HAVOC ON OUR DECISION MAKING PROCESS. WE HAVE TO UNDERSTAND THE PSYCHOLOGY OF OTHERS, BECAUSE EVEN IF WE BEHAVE, WE MUST UNDERSTAND THAT THE MARKET CAN GO CRAZY FROM TIME TO TIME, WHETHER WE PARTICIPATE IN THE MADNESS OF THE CROWD OR NOT. FEAR, GREED, EUPHORIA, PANIC, SPECULATION, ENVY ALL THESE ARE THE KILLERS OF OUR PORTFOLIO.

 

17 OCTOBER, 2019

ONCE WE START TO TAKE MARKET MOVEMENTS PERSONALLY WE HAVE ALREADY LOST. THE MARKET IS NEVER OUT TO GET US. THE GOVERNMENT DOES NOT HAVE OUR PORTFOLIO IN MIND WHEN SETTING MONETARY POLICY. THE MARKET DOES NOT HAVE A VENDETTA AGAINST US EVERY TIME WE LOSE MONEY OR MISS OUT AN OPPORTUNITY FOR PROFIT. WHEN WE PERSONALIZE THE MARKET’S MOVE, WE FALL INTO TRAP OF TRYING TO BE RIGHT RATHER THAN TRYING TO MAKE MONEY. WHEN WE TAKE THINGS PERSONALLY, OUR FIRST INSTINCT WILL BE TO BLAME OTHERS FOR LOSSES INSTEAD OF OWNING UP TO OUR OWN MISTAKES OR THE SIMPLE FACT THAT NOT EVERY INVESTMENT STRATEGY IS GOING TO BE WINNER AT ALL TIMES.

 

16 OCTOBER, 2019

THE WORST PART ABOUT SUCCESSFUL INVESTING IS THAT IT IS RELATIVELY BORING. MANY PEOPLE ARE THRILL SEEKER AND WOULD RATHER FIND THEIR PROVERBIAL LOTTERY TICKET THAN HAVE TO PUT IN THE WORK TO GET RICH SLOWLY. THERE IS NO EASY ROUTE TO BUILDING WEALTH. IT TAKES TIME, PATIENCE, DISCIPLINE, AND HARD WORK. IT CAN BE SIMPLE, BUT IT’S DEFINITELY NEVER GOING TO BE EASY. WE SHOULD BE VERY SKEPTICAL OF ANYONE TRYING TO SELL US THE DREAM OF AN EASY ROAD TO RICHES.

 

15 OCTOBER, 2019

“THE STOCK MARKET IS RIGGED. IT’S LIKE ROLLING THE DICE AT CASINO. I MIGHT AS WELL JUST BUY A LOTTERY TICKET”. THIS IS HOW MANY PEOPLE FELT ABOUT INVESTING IN STOCKS. IN REALITY, IT’S OUR EMOTIONS THAT ARE RIGGED AGAINST US NOT THE MARKETS. THE ONE THING WE SHOULD NEVER BE AS AN INVESTOR IS SURPRISED BY HOW FAR THE MARKET TRAVEL IN EITHER DIRECTION. THE REASON WILL ALWAYS BE DIFFERENT FOR THE RISE AND FALL, BUT THE MAGNITUDE OF GAINS AND LOSSES SHOULD NEVER CATCH US OFF GUARD.

 

14 OCTOBER, 2019

TO MAKE MONEY IN STOCKS WE MUST HAVE THE VISION TO SEE THEM, THE COURAGE TO BUY THEM, AND THE PATIENCE TO HOLD THEM. PATIENCE IS THE RAREST OF THE THREE.

 

13 OCTOBER, 2019

THE BEST INDUSTRIES INCLUDE COMPANIES THAT DESTROY VALUE AND THE WORST INDUSTRIES HAVE COMPANIES THAT CREATE VALUE. THE SOME COMPANIES BUCK THE ECONOMICS OF THEIR INDUSTRY PROVIDES INSIGHT INTO THE POTENTIAL SOURCES OF ECONOMIC PERFORMANCE. INDUSTRY IS NOT DESTINY.

 

12 OCTOBER,2019

EVEN THOUGH BAD THINGS HAPPEN TO COMPANIES, INDUSTRIES, EVEN THE ECONOMY AS A WHOLE FOR A TIME, SOME HOW COUNTRY AS A WHOLE STILL MOVES FORWARD. PROBLEMS USUALLY GETS SOLVE. RECESSIONS END. SOMEHOW THE COUNTRY STUMBLES ON AND COMPANY CONTINUE TO MAKE PROFIT. IF WE DON’T NEED TO PUT OUR HANDS ON OUR MONEY FOR A FEW YEARS, THEN STOCKS ARE STILL THE BEST PLACE TO KEEP IT.

 

11 OCTOBER, 2019

IF WE HAVE SOLDIERS ADVANCING AGAINST THE ENEMY, CHANCES ARE HIGH THAT MOST OF OUR SOLDIERS WILL MAKE IT ACROSS THE MINEFIELD AND WIN THE BATTLE. BUT WE KNOW WE ARE GOING TO LOSE SOME MEN. WE JUST DON’T KNOW WHICH ONE. IN OUR INVESTMENT BATTLES, WE KNOW SOME INVESTMENT IDEAS WILL GET BLOWN UP AND OVERALL PERFORMANCE WON’T BE AS GOOD AS WE HAD HOPED. SO INSTEAD TO WASTING TIME ON PAST LOSSES DUE TO BLOWN UP IDEAS ONE SHOULD ALWAYS COME UP WITH NEW INVESTMENT IDEAS.

 

10 OCTOBER, 2019

MAINTAIN INDEPENDENCE OF THOUGHT AND A HEALTHY DEGREE OF SKEPTICISM, SO WE WON’T BE DRAWN INTO THE HERD. WE SHOULD NOT OVERPAY, NO MATTER HOW MUCH WE LIKE A COMPANY. INVEST IN THEMES THAT WILL GIVE A COMPANY A LONG TERM FRANCHISE. INVEST DOWNSTREAM FROM TECHNOLOGY. WE SHOULD FIND STOCKS TO OWN, NOT TO TRADE. IT IS NOT AT ALL COMPLICATED. COMMON SENSE AND PATIENCE MAKE A SUCCESSFUL INVESTOR.

 

9 OCTOBER, 2019

AS A BULL MARKET GATHERS STEAM, INVESTORS PAY LESS AND LESS ATTENTION TO THE PROBLEMS AND MORE ATTENTION TO THE OPPORTUNITIES. AND VICE VERSA IN BEAR EPISODES. IT IS IMPORTANT TO REMEMBER AT THE BLEAK TIMES THAT FALLING STOCK PRICES ARE NOT PART OF THE PROBLEM, BUT PART OF THE SOLUTION. WE ALL WANT TO BUY STOCKS WHEN THE RISK PREMIUM IS HIGH AND SELL WHEN THE RISK PREMIUM IS LOW.

 

8 OCTOBER, 2019

UNLESS AN INVESTOR BELIEVES THAT “THE END OF THE WORLD” IS COMING SOON, ONE SHOULD BE EAGER TO OWN STOCKS AT CURRENT LOW PRICES. BEAR MARKETS ARE GREAT TIMES TO LOAD UP ON STOCKS. WE SHOULD NOT BELIEVE IN TIMING. WE SHOULD BELIEVE IN BUYING WHAT IS CHEAP.

 

7 OCTOBER, 2019

WE SHOULD HAVE A REASON FOR BUYING EVERY STOCKS WE OWN. AS SOON AS THAT REASON COMES INTO DOUBT, WE SHOULD ASK OURSELF IF IT ISN’T TIME FOR A CHANGE.

 

6 OCTOBER, 2019

MARKET LEVELS SIMPLY HAVE LITTLE TO DO WITH WHETHER THE ECONOMY IS UP 3% OR DOWN 2%. THEY HAVE A GREAT DEAL TO DO WITH CASH FLOW INTO AND OUT OF MARKETS. THE ECONOMY CONSTANTLY KEEPS ON FLUCTUATING, WE SIMPLY HAVE TO BUY STOCKS WE BELIEVE IN BECAUSE WE THINK WE HAVE FOUND MANAGEMENT WHO HAVE AN IMPORTANT REASON TO BE IN BUSINESS, AND THEN WE HAVE TO STICK WITH THEM AS LONG AS OUR FAITH IN THEM REMAINS.

 

5 OCTOBER, 2019

IF WE JUDGE MANAGEMENT SOLELY BY A COMPANY’S NUMBERS AND THEN PAY MORE FOR THE STOCK BECAUSE OF “GOOD MANAGEMENT”, WE ARE GUILTY OF WHAT BRIDGE PLAYERS CALL THE DOUBLE COUNTING OF FACE CARDS.

 

4 OCTOBER, 2019

GOING DOWNSTREAM, INVESTING IN THE BUSINESS THAT WILL BENEFIT FROM NEW TECHNOLOGY RATHER THAN IN THE TECHNOLOGY COMPANIES THEMSELVES IS OFTEN THE SMARTER STRATEGY.

 

3 OCTOBER, 2019

THE GROWTH OF A MIDDLE CLASS IN DEVELOPING COUNTRIES IS A VERY SIMPLE BUT POWERFUL WAY TO THINK ABOUT THE FUTURE. FIRST THE NEWLY WELL OFF WANT BICYCLES, THEN MOTORCYCLES, AND FIVE YEARS FROM NOW AUTOMOBILES. THIS CYCLE OR PROCESS IS NEVER GOING TO STOP, THAN WHY TO WORRY FROM SLOWDOWN IF THE INCOME AND STANDARD OF LIVING OF MIDDLE CLASS WILL ALWAYS GOING TO BE INCREASE IN DEVELOPING COUNTRIES.

 

2 OCTOBER, 2019

WE SHOULD FIND OUT WHAT WE KNOW AND WHAT WE DON’T KNOW. THE FURTHER WE STRAY FROM STOCKS WE REALLY UNDERSTAND, THE MORE LIKELY IT IS THAT WE ARE GAMBLING RATHER THAN INVESTING.

 

1 OCTOBER, 2019

GROWTH INVESTORS BUYS ON GOOD NEWS, SUCH AS APPROVAL OF A NEW DRUG, COMPLETION OF AN R&D PROJECT, OR THE RECEIPT OF A BIG CONTRACT. AND HE SELLS ON BAD NEWS SUCH AS EXIT OF KEY MANAGER, LOSS OF MARKET SHARE, OR A NEGATIVE EARNINGS SURPRISE. IT IS PRECISELY SUCH EVENTS THAT MAY WHET THE VALUE BUYER’S APPETITE, FOR THE MARKET TENDS TO OVERREACT TO BAD NEWS, CREATING A VALUE GAP.

 

30 SEPTEMBER, 2019

VALUE LAND IS PROBABLY A BETTER PLACE TO LIVE IN OVER THE LONG TERM. AND JUST AS SOME GROWTH STOCKS STUMBLE AND TURN INTO FALLEN ANGEL VALUE STOCKS, SOME VALUE STOCKS BLOSSOM INTO GROWTH STOCKS. THE GREATEST INVESTMENT SATISFACTION OF ALL IS TO SEE AN UGLY DUCKLING RECOGNIZED AS A SWAN.

 

29 SEPTEMBER, 2019

WE CAN’T MAKE FIVE OR TEN OR TWENTY TIMES OUR MONEY IF WE DON’T HOLD ON TO STOCKS. MOST PEOPLE ARE DELIGHTED WHEN A STOCK DOUBLES, AND QUICKLY SELL TO LOCK IN THEIR GAIN. IF A COMPANY IS STILL PERFORMING GOOD, LET ITS STOCK, TOO, CONTINUE TO PERFORM.

 

28 SEPTEMBER, 2019

WE KNOW THERE ARE LOT OF PEOPLE USE SO CALLED STOP LOSSES. STOP LOSSES ARE POPULAR BECAUSE THEY TAKE A DIFFICULT DECISION, PERHAPS THE MOST DIFFICULT IN ALL OF INVESTING AND MAKE IT MECHANICAL. WE DON’T HAVE TO THINK ABOUT IT. ONCE THE STOCK HIT OUR STOP LOSS WE ARE OUT OF A GOOD FUNDAMENTALLY STRONG COMPANY WHICH COMES DOWN FOR PARTICULAR SHORT PERIOD OF TIME JUST BECAUSE OF SOME SMALL SETBACKS.

 

27 SEPTEMBER, 2019

WHEN WE LOOK AT 300 LARGEST CORPORATIONS THAT ARE FOLLOWED BY PLATOONS OF SECURITY ANALYSTS, WE ARE UNLIKELY TO LEARN ANYTHING THAT OTHER PEOPLE DON’T KNOW. WE MIGHT AS WELL THROW THE PROVERBIAL DARTS AT THE PROVERBIAL LIST OF BLUE CHIPS AND CROSS OUR FINGERS. BUT SMALL COMPANIES AREN’T BLANKETED BY RESEARCH COVERAGE. THERE AREN’T ENOUGH ANALYSTS TO FOLLOW ALL OF THEM. WE CAN ACTUALLY DISCOVER THINGS THAT OTHERS DON’T KNOW.

 

26 SEPTEMBER, 2019

A GROUP OF STOCKS IS DESPISED BY AN IMPORTANT CLASS OF INVESTOR LIKE THE LARGEST BANK OR MUTUAL FUNDS, BUT WE KNOW THERE ARE BASIC VALUE IN THE GROUP, WE CAN BE PRETTY SURE THAT AT SOME POINT THOSE PEOPLE WHO HATE THE STOCKS WILL COME AROUND ADORING THEM. SO WE SHOULD LOOK FOR STOCKS THAT HAVE BASIC VALUES BUT ARE OUT OF FASHION.

 

25 SEPTEMBER, 2019

WE SHOULD NOT EXPECT TO DOUBLE OUR MONEY IN SHORT PERIOD OF TIME. OUR GOAL SHOULD BE STEADY ACCUMULATION OF WEALTH. LOTTERIES ARE A FOOL’S GAME. HISTORY SUGGESTS MOST OF TODAY’S HOT NEW STOCKS ISSUES WILL BE COLD STORAGE IN FIVE YEARS.

 

24 SEPTEMBER, 2019

USUALLY THE MARKET PAYS WHAT WE MIGHT CALL AN ENTERTAINMENT TAX, A PREMIUM, FOR STOCKS WITH AN EXCITING STORY. SO BORING STOCKS SELL AT A DISCOUNT. BUY ENOUGH OF SUCH BORING STOCKS AND WE CAN MAKE HUGE RETURNS ON IT. TRADING IS LIKE T20 CRICKET AND INVESTING IS BORING LIKE TEST CRICKET. IF ONE GETS BORE IN INVESTING IT MEANS HE/SHE IS DOING A RIGHT THING.

 

23 SEPTEMBER, 2019

DIVIDENDS ARE AN EXPENSIVE LUXURY FOR AN INVESTORS SEEKING MAXIMUM GROWTH. IF WE MUST HAVE INCOME, DON’T EXPECT OUR FINANCIAL DOCTOR TO MATCH THE CAPITAL GAINS THAT MIGHT HAVE BEEN OBTAINABLE WITHOUT DIVIDENDS. WHEN WE BUY A COW TO MILK, WE SHOULD NOT PLAN TO RACE HER AGAINST OUR NEIGHBOR’S HORSE.

 

22 SEPTEMBER, 2019

MOST INVESTORS HAVE A HARD TIME LOOKING OUT EVEN JUST A YEAR OR TWO. THEY FOCUS ON NOW. AND SO, THE IDEA GOES, ALL WE HAVE TO DO IS THINK OUT A YEAR AND WE CAN PICK UP STOCKS THAT ARE CHEAP TODAY BECAUSE OTHERS CAN’T LOOK BEYOND THE CURRENT QUARTER OR TWO OR THREE.

 

21 SEPTEMBER, 2019

THE PRICE OF THE STOCK VARIES INVERSELY WITH THE THICKNESS OF ITS RESEARCH FILE. THE FATTEST FILES ARE FOUND IN STOCKS THAT ARE THE MOST TROUBLESOME AND WILL DECLINE THE FURTHEST. THE THINNEST FILES ARE RESERVED FOR THOSE THAT APPRECIATE THE MOST. THE BEST IDEAS ARE OFTEN THE SIMPLEST.

 

20 SEPTEMBER, 2019

OVER THE COURSE OF AN INVESTING LIFE, BOTH GOOD AND BAD STUFF IS GOING TO HAPPEN THAT NO ONE SAW COMING. INSTEAD OF PLAYING THE GUESSING GAME, WE SHOULD FOCUS ON OPPORTUNITIES IN FRONT OF US.

 

19 SEPTEMBER, 2019

ENVY IS PERHAPS THE WORST EMOTION THAT WE CAN FELL AS AN INVESTOR. IT CAN ONLY LEAD TO PROBLEMS. THERE’S NO LOGICAL REASON TO COMPARE OURSELF TO OTHER INVESTORS. WE SHOULD FOCUS ON OUR OWN SITUATION.

 

18 SEPTEMBER, 2019

THE MOST SUCCESSFUL INVESTORS UTILIZE DIFFERENT STRATEGIES WITHIN THEIR PORTFOLIO BUT THEY ALL SHARE THE ABILITY TO CONTROL THEIR EMOTIONS WHEN EVERYONE ELSE AROUND THEM IS LOSING THEIR COOL. EMOTIONAL CONTROL IS FAR MORE IMPORTANT THAN ANYTHING ELSE.

 

17 SEPTEMBER, 2019

DON’T SELL JUST BECAUSE THE PRICE MOVED UP OR DOWN, OR BECAUSE WE NEED TO REALIZE A CAPITAL GAIN TO OFFSET A LOSS. WE SHOULD SELL RARELY, AND ONLY WHEN IT IS CLEAR WE MADE AN ERROR.

 

16 SEPTEMBER, 2019

“GOOD STOCKS ARE SELDOM WITHOUT FRIENDS”. HENCE, THEY ARE RARELY CHEAP IN THE USUAL SENSE. WE SHOULD NOT LET SEEMINGLY HIGH INITIAL MULTIPLE SCARE US AWAY FROM A GREAT STOCK.

 

15 SEPTEMBER, 2019

IT IS BAD ENOUGH THAT INVESTORS GET DINGED IN THEIR POCKET BOOKS WHEN THEY TAKE LOSSES. DON’T COMPOUND THE ISSUE BY LETTING OUR EGO MAKE THINGS FAR WORSE. THERE ARE NO STYLE POINTS WHEN INVESTING, SO THERE’S NO REASON TO FEED OUR EGO.

 

14 SEPTEMBER, 2019

THERE ARE MANY LESSONS WE CAN LEARN FROM SOME OF THE  GREATEST INVESTORS OF ALL TIME – PATIENCE, SIMPLICITY, DISCIPLINE BUT THAT DOESN’T MEAN WE CAN EXPECT TO INVEST JUST LIKE OUR FAVOURITE BILLIONAIRE. WE SHOULD UNDERSTAND OUR LIMITATIONS AND NEVER TRY TO COMPLICATE THE INVESTMENT PROCESS.

 

13 SEPTEMBER, 2019

DON’T TRY TO BEAT THE PROFESSIONALS AT THEIR OWN GAME. WE ARE AT A COMPETITIVE DISADVANTAGE. THE GREATEST EQUALIZER IN THE MARKETS WILL ALWAYS BE PATIENCE. WE CAN’T ARBITRAGE GOOD, LONG TERM BEHAVIOUR.

 

12 SEPTEMBER, 2019

SINCE SUCCESSFUL INVESTING IS COUNTER INTUITIVE, THIS LEADS PEOPLE TO MAKE WRONG MOVES AT WRONG TIMES. A PLAN IS HOW WE PLACE CONSTRAINTS ON OUR LESSER SELF AND ENSURE HIGHER PROBABILITY DECISIONS. AN INVESTOR WITHOUT A PLAN IS NO INVESTOR AT ALL, THEY ARE A SPECULATOR.

 

11 SEPTEMBER, 2019

IF OUR PORTFOLIO IS ABLE TO MEET THE GOALS, WHO CARES IF WE BEAT THE MARKET OR NOT? WE DON’T HAVE TO JUDGE OURSELF ON ANY PARTICULAR TIME FRAME AGAINST A SET INDEX OR MARKET. INVESTING DOESN’T HAVE TO BE ABOUT BEATING OTHERS OR BEATING THE MARKET. IT’S ABOUT NOT BEATING OURSELF.

 

10 SEPTEMBER, 2019

LEARNING HOW TO LOSE MONEY IS ACTUALLY MUCH MORE IMPORTANT THAN LEARNING HOW TO MAKE MONEY IN THE MARKETS BECAUSE LOSING MONEY IS INEVITABLE. INVESTING IS NOT AS MUCH ABOUT OUR ACTIONS AS IT IS ABOUT OUR REACTIONS AND HOW THEY AFFECT OUR THOUGHT PROCESS.

 

09 SEPTEMBER ,2019

THERE IS A LONG LIST OF COMPLAINTS INVESTORS SAY OUT ON A DAILY BASIS- INFLATION, THE ACTIONS OF THE PRIME MINISTER, ECONOMY, TAX POLICY, THE LIST COULD GO FOREVER. THESE THINGS ARE COMPLETELY OUT OF OUR CONTROL. BUT THAN TOO INVESTORS THINK ABOUT IT AND LOOSE THEIR EMOTIONAL DISCIPLINE.

 

09 SEPTEMBER, 2019

PEOPLE BITE ON WHAT IS MOVING AND CAN’T SIT ON A STOCK THAT ISN’T GOING ANYWHERE. THEY ALSO LOSE PATIENCE WITH ONE THAT IS MOVING AGAINST THEM. THIS CAUSES THEM TO MAKE A LOT OF TRADES AND NEVER ENJOY TRULY MAMMOTH RETURNS.

 

08 SEPTEMBER, 2019

NO GOVERNMENT OR POLITICIAN CAN STOP THE GROWTH OF ANY COUNTRY. NEW TECHNOLOGIES WILL ALWAYS BE GENERATED. ONLY THING IS THE SPEED OF GROWTH MAY BE LITTLE SLOW ONLY FOR PARTICULAR PERIOD OF TIME. SO ONE SHOULD TAKE ADVANTAGE OF SUCH SLOWDOWN TO CREATE WEALTH.

 

07 SEPTEMBER, 2019

SUCCESS IN STOCK MARKET IS MORE OF EMOTIONAL DISCIPLINE RATHER THAN KNOWLEDGE.

 

07 SEPTEMBER, 2019

IN INVESTING LESS IS MORE AND DOING NOTHING CAN BE EXEMPLARY BEHAVIOR, ASSUMING ITS PART OF OUR PLAN. MAIN PROBLEM IS INVESTORS CAN FEEL LAZY IF THEY ARE NOT DOING SOMETHING, SO PEOPLE ARE CONSTANTLY TRYING TO KEEP THEMSELVES BUSY. IT IS THE MAIN REASON THEY RESHUFFLE.

 

06 SEPTEMBER, 2019

CYCLES ARE INEVITABLE, BUT TRYING TO PERFECTLY TIME THOSE CYCLES IS THE HARD PART BECAUSE THIS TIME IS NEVER DIFFERENT FROM THE STANDPOINT OF HUMAN NATURE, THIS TIME IS ALWAYS DIFFERENT IN TERMS OF MAKE UP OF MARKET.

 

05 SEPTEMBER, 2019

STOCKS CAN FALL FROM ALL TIME HIGHS, BUT HITTING AN ALL TIME HIGH IS NOT NECESSARY THE TRIGGER THAT CAUSES THEM TO FALL. A NEW HIGH IS NOT NECESSARILY A SELL SIGNAL JUST LIKE ITS NOT NECESSARY BUY SIGNAL. THEY ARE SIMPLE PART OF MARKET THAT GOES UP OVER TIME.